DVP-PLC Application Manual 【Programming】 Table of Contents

PLC
PLC
DVP-PLC Application Manual
【Programming】
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Basic Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
Foreword: Background and Functions of PLC .......................................................... 1-1
1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram ........................................................ 1-1
1.2 Differences Between Traditional Ladder Diagram and PLC Ladder Diagram ........ 1-2
1.3 Edition Explanation of Ladder Diagram ............................................................. 1-3
1.4 How to Edit Ladder Diagram ............................................................................. 1-8
1.5 The Conversion of PLC Command and Each Diagram Structure ......................... 1-12
1.6 Simplified Ladder Diagram ............................................................................... 1-15
1.7 Basic Program Designing Examples .................................................................. 1-17
Chapter 2 Functions of Devices in DVP-PLC

2.1 All Devices in DVP-PLC.................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Values, Constants [K] / [H] ............................................................................... 2-6
2.3 Numbering and Functions of External Input/Output Contacts [X] / [Y].................. 2-8
2.4 Numbering and Functions of Auxiliary Relays [M] .............................................. 2-11
2.5 Numbering and Functions of Step Relays [S] ..................................................... 2-11
2.6 Numbering and Functions of Timers [T] ............................................................. 2-12
2.7 Numbering and Functions of Counters [C] ......................................................... 2-14
2.8 Numbering and Functions of Registers [D], [E], [F] ............................................ 2-28
2.8.1 Data register [D] ........................................................................................ 2-28
2.8.2 Index Register [E], [F] ................................................................................ 2-29
2.8.3 Functions and Features of File Registers .................................................... 2-30
2.9 Pointer [N], Pointer [P], Interruption Pointer [I] .................................................. 2-30
2.10 Special Auxiliary Relays and Special Data Registers ........................................ 2-33
2.11 Functions of Special Auxiliary Relays and Special Registers............................. 2-69
2.12 Error Codes ................................................................................................... 2-125
Chapter 3 Basic Instructions

3.1 Basic Instructions and Step Ladder Instructions ................................................ 3-1
3.2 Explanations on Basic Instructions ................................................................... 3-3

Chapter 4 Step Ladder Instructions
4.1 Step Ladder Instructions [STL], [RET] ............................................................... 4-1
4.2 Sequential Function Chart (SFC) ...................................................................... 4-2
4.3 How does a Step Ladder Instruction Work? ....................................................... 4-3
4.4 Things to Note for Designing a Step Ladder Program ......................................... 4-7
4.5 Types of Sequences ......................................................................................... 4-9
4.6 IST Instruction ................................................................................................. 4-17
Chapter 5 Categories & Use of Application Instructions

5.1 List of Instructions ........................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Composition of Application Instruction .............................................................. 5-6
5.3 Handling of Numeric Values.............................................................................. 5-11
5.4 E, F Index Register Modification ....................................................................... 5-14
5.5 Instruction Index .............................................................................................. 5-16
Chapter 6 Application Instructions API 00-49

● （ API00～ 09） Loop Control .......................................................................... 6-1
● （ API10～ 19） Transmission Comparison ....................................................... 6-18
● （ API20～ 29） Four Arithmetic Operation ....................................................... 6-32
● （ API30～ 39） Rotation & Displacement......................................................... 6-46
● （ API40～ 49） Data Processing ..................................................................... 6-57

● （ API50～ 59） High Speed Processing ........................................................... 7-1
● （ API60～ 69） Handy Instructions.................................................................. 7-39
● （ API70～ 79） Display of External Settings .................................................... 7-59
● （ API80～ 88） Serial I/O ............................................................................... 7-80

● （ API100～ 109） Communication ................................................................... 8-1
● （ API110～ 119） Floating Point Operation ...................................................... 8-23
● （ API120～ 129） Floating Point Operation ..................................................... 8-31
● （ API130～ 139） Floating Point Operatio ....................................................... 8-43
● （ API140～ 149） Others ................................................................................ 8-55

● （ API150～ 154） Others ................................................................................ 9-1
● （ API155～ 159） Position Control .................................................................. 9-14

● （ API160～ 169） Real Time Calendar ............................................................ 9-39
● （ API170～ 171） Gray Code Conversion ........................................................ 9-49
● （ API172～ 175） Floating Point Operation ..................................................... 9-51
● （ API180～ 190） Matrix................................................................................. 9-59
● （ API191～ 199） Positioning Instruction ........................................................ 9-76

● （ API202～ 203） Others. ............................................................................... 10-1
● （ API215～ 223） Contact Type Logic Operation Instruction. ............................ 10-7
● （ API224～ 246） Contact Type Compare Instruction ....................................... 10-10

1 Basic Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
Foreword: Background and Functions of PLC

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) is an electronic device, previously called “sequence controller”. In 1978,
NEMA (National Electrical Manufacture Association) in the United States officially named it as “programmable logic
controller”. PLC reads the status of the external input devices, e.g. keypad, sensor, switch and pulses, and execute by
the microprocessor logic, sequential, timing, counting and arithmetic operations according the status of the input
signals as well as the pre-written program stored in the PLC. The generated output signals are sent to output devices
as the switch of a relay, electromagnetic valve, motor drive, control of a machine or operation of a procedure for the
purpose of machine automation or processing procedure. The peripheral devices (e.g. personal computer/handheld
programming panel) can easily edit or modify the program and monitor the device and conduct on-site program
maintenance and adjustment. The widely used language in designing a PLC program is the ladder diagram.
With the development of the electronic technology and wider applications of PLC in the industry, for example in
position control and the network function of PLC, the input/output signals of PLC include DI (digital input), AI (analog
input), PI (pulse input), NI (numeric input), DO (digital output), AO (analog output), and PO (pulse output). Therefore,
PLC will still stand important in the industrial automation field in the future.
1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram
The ladder diagram was a diagram language for automation developed in the WWII period, which is the oldest
and most widely adopted language in automation. In the initial stage, there were only A (normally open) contact, B
(normally closed) contact, output coil, timer and counter…the sort of basic devices on the ladder diagram (see the
power panel that is still used today). After the invention of PLC, the devices displayable on the ladder diagram are
added with differential contact, latched coil and the application commands which were not in a traditional power panel,
for example the addition, subtraction, multiplication and division operations.
The working principles of the traditional ladder diagram and PLC ladder diagram are basically the same. The
only difference is that the symbols on the traditional ladder diagram are more similar to its original form, and PLC
ladder diagram adopts the symbols that are easy to recognize and shown on computer or data sheets. In terms of the
logic of the ladder diagram, there are combination logic and sequential logic.
1. Combination Logic
Examples of traditional ladder diagram and PLC ladder diagram for combination logic:
Traditional Ladder Diagram PLC Ladder Diagram
X0 Y0
X0
Y0
X1 Y1 X1
Y1
X2 X4 Y2 X2 X4
Y2
X3
X3
Row 1: Using a normally open (NO) switch X0 (“A” switch or “A" contact). When X0 is not pressed, the contact
will be open loop (Off), so Y0 will be Off. When X0 is pressed, the contact will be On, so Y0 will be On.
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-1

Row 2: Using a normally closed (NC) switch X1 (“B” switch or “B” contact). When X1 is not pressed, the contact
will be On, so Y1 will be On. When X1 is pressed, the contact will be open loop (Off), so Y1 will be Off.
Row 3: The combination logic of more than one input devices. Output Y2 will be On when X2 is not pressed or
X3 and X4 are pressed.
2. Sequential Logic
Sequential logic is a circuit with "draw back” structure, i.e. the output result of the circuit will be drawn back as an
input criterion. Therefore, under the same input criteria, different previous status or action sequence will follow by
different output results.
Examples of traditional ladder diagram and PLC ladder diagram for sequential logic:
Traditional Ladder Diagram PLC Ladder Diagram
X5 X6 Y3 X5 X6
Y3
Y3 Y3
When the circuit is first connected to the power, though X6 is On, X5 is Off, so Y3 will be Off. After X5 is pressed,
Y3 will be On. Once Y3 is On, even X5 is released (Off), Y3 can still keep its action because of the draw back (i.e.
the self-retained circuit). The actions are illustrated in the table below.
Device status
X5 X6 Y3
Action sequence
1 No action No action Off
2 Action No action On
3 No action No action On
4 No action Action Off
5 No action No action Off
From the table above, we can see that in different sequence, the same input status can result in different output
results. For example, switch X5 and X6 of action sequence 1 and 3 do not act, but Y3 is Off in sequence 1 and
On in sequence 3. Y3 output status will then be drawn back as input (the so-called “draw back”), making the
circuit being able to perform sequential control, which is the main feature of the ladder diagram circuit. Here we
only explain contact A, contact B and the output coil. Other devices are applicable to the same method. See
Chapter 3 “Basic instructions” for more details.
1.2 Differences Between Traditional Ladder Diagram and PLC Ladder Diagram
Though the principles of traditional ladder diagram and PLC ladder diagram are the same, in fact, PLC adopts
microcomputer to simulate the motions of the traditional ladder diagram, i.e. scan-check status of all the input devices
and output coil and calculate to generate the same output results as those from the traditional ladder diagram based
on the logics of the ladder diagram. Due to that there is only one microcomputer, we can only check the program of
the ladder diagram one by one and calculate the output results according to the program and the I/O status before the
cyclic process of sending the results to the output interface Æ re-reading of the input status Æ calculation Æ output.
The time spent in the cyclic process is called the “scan time” and the time can be longer with the expansion of the
program. The scan time can cause delay from the input detection to output response of the PLC. The longer the delay,
1-2 DVP-PLC Application Manual

the bigger the error is to the control. The control may even be out of control. In this case, you have to choose a PLC
with faster scan speed. Therefore, the scan speed is an important specification requirement in a PLC. Owing to the
advancement in microcomputer and ASIC (IC for special purpose), there has been great improvement in the scan
speed of PLC nowadays. See the figure below for the scan of the PLC ladder diagram program.
Read input status from outside
X0 X1
Start Y0
The output result is calculated Y0
based on the ladder diagram.
(The result has not yet sent to the M100 X3 X10
Executing in cycles
external output point, but the Y1
:
internal device will perform an :
immediate output.) X100 M505
Y126
End
Send the result to the output point
Besides the difference in the scan time, PLC ladder and traditional ladder diagram also differ in “reverse current”.
For example, in the traditional ladder diagram illustrated below, when X0, X1, X4 and X6 are On and others are Off,
Y0 output on the circuit will be On as the dotted line goes. However, the PLC ladder diagram program is scanned from
up to down and left to right. Under the same input circumstances, the PLC ladder diagram editing tool WPLSoft will be
able to detect the errors occurring in the ladder diagram.
Reverse current of traditional ladder diagram Reverse current of PLC ladder diagram
X0 X1 X2 Y0 X0 X1 X2 Y0
Y0
X3 a X4 X5 X3 a X4 X5
b b
X6 X6
Error detected in the third row
1.3 How to Edit Ladder Diagram
Ladder diagram is a diagram language frequently applied in automation. The ladder diagram is composed of the
symbols of electric control circuit. The completion of the ladder diagram by the ladder diagram editor is the completion
of the PLC program design. The control flow illustrated by diagram makes the flow more straightforward and
acceptable for the technicians of who are familiar with the electric control circuit. Many basic symbols and actions in

the ladder diagram come from the frequently-seen electromechanical devices, e.g. buttons, switches, relay, timer and
counter, etc. in the traditional power panel for automation control.
Internal devices in the PLC: The types and quantity of the devices in the PLC vary in different brand names.
Though the internal devices in the PLC adopts the names, e.g. transistor, coil, contact and so on, in the traditional
electric control circuit, these physical devices do not actually exist inside the PLC. There are only the corresponding
basic units (1 bit) inside the memory of the PLC. When the bit is “1”, the coil will be On, and when the bit is “0”, the coil
will be Off. The normally open contact (NO or contact A) directly reads the value of the corresponding bit. The
normally close contact (NC or contact B) reads the opposite state of the value of the corresponding bit. Many relays
will occupy many bits. 8 bits equal a “byte”. 2 bytes construct a “word” and 2 words combined is “double word”. Byte,
word or double words are used when many relays are processed (e.g. addition/subtraction, displacement) at the
same time. The other two devices, timer and counter, in the PLC have coil, timer value and counter value and they
have to process some values in byte, word or double word.
All kinds of internal devices in the value storage area in the PLC occupy their fixed amount of storage units.
When you use these devices, you are actually read the contents stored in the form of bit, byte or word.
Introductions on the basic internal devices in the PLC (See Ch 2. Functions of Devices in DVP-PLC for more details.)
Device Functions
The input relay is an internal memory (storage) unit in the PLC corresponding to a external
input point and is used for connecting to the external input switches and receiving external
input signals. The input relay will be driven by the external input signals which make it “0” or
“1". Program designing cannot modify the status of the relay, i.e. it cannot re-write the basic
unit of a relay, nor can it force On/Off of the relay by HPP/WPLSoft. SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV
series MPU can simulate input relay X and force On/Off of the relay. But the status of the
Input relay external input points will be updated and disabled, i.e. the external input signals will not be read
into their corresponding memories inside PLC, but only the input points on the MPU. The input
points on the extension modules will still operate normally. There are no limitations on the times
of using contact A and contact B of the input relay. The input relays without corresponding input
signals can only be left unused and cannot be used for other purposes.
& Device indication: X0, X1,…X7, X10, X11,… are indicated as X and numbered in octal
form. The No. of input points are marked on MPU and extension modules.
The output relay is an internal memory (storage) unit in the PLC corresponding to a external
output point and is used for connecting to the external load. The output relay will be driven by
the contact of an input relay, contacts of other internal devices and the contacts on itself. A
normally open contact of the output relay is connected to the external load. Same as the input
Output relay contacts, there are no limitations on the times of using other contacts of the output relay. The
output relay without corresponding output signals can only be left unused and can be used as
input relay if necessary.
& Device indication: Y0, Y1,…Y7, Y10, Y11,…are indicated as Y and numbered in octal
form. The No. of output points are marked on MPU and extension modules.

The internal relay does not have connection with the external. It is an auxiliary relay inside the
PLC with the functions same as those of the auxiliary (middle) relay in the electric control
circuit. Every internal relay corresponds to a basic internal storage unit and can be driven by
Internal relay the contacts of the input relay, contacts of the output relay and the contacts of other internal
devices. There are no limitations on the times of using the contacts of the internal relay and
there will be no output from the internal relay, but from the output point.
& Device indication: M0, M1,…, M4095 are indicated as M and numbered in decimal form.
DVP series PLC offers a step-type control program input method. STL instruction controls the
transfer of step S, which makes it easy for the writing of the control program. If you do not use
Step any step program in the control program, step S can be used as a internal relay M as well as an
alarm point.
& Device indication: S0, S1,…S1023 are indicated as S and numbered in decimal form.
The timer is used for timing and has coil, contact and register in it. When the coil is On and the
estimated time is reached, its contact will be enabled (contact A closed, contact B open). Every
timer has its fixed timing period (unit: 1ms/10ms/100ms). Once the coil is Off, the contact iwlwl
Timer be disabled (contact A open, contact B closed) and the present value on the timer will become
“0”.
& Device indication: T0, T1,…,T255 are indicated as T and numbered in decimal form.
Different No. refers to different timing period.
The counter is used for counting. Before using the counter, you have to give the counter a set
value (i.e. the number of pulses for counting). There are coil, contact and registers in the
counter. When the coil goes from Off to On, the counter will regard it as an input of 1 pulse and
Counter
the present value on the counter will plus “1”. We offer 16-bit and 32-bit high-speed counters
for our users.
& Device indication: C0, C1,…,C255 are indicated as C and numbered in decimal form.
Data processing and value operations always occur when the PLC conducts all kinds of
sequential control, timing and counting. The data register is used for storing the values or all
Data register kinds of parameters. Every register is able to store a word (16-bit binary value). Double words
will occupy 2 adjacent data registers.
& Device indication: D0, D1,…,D9,999 are indicated as D and numbered in decimal form.

The file register is used for storing the data or all kinds of parameters when the data registers
required for processing the data and value operations are insufficient. Every file register is able
to store a 16-bit word. Double words will occupy 2 adjacent file registers. In SA/SX/SC series
MPU, there are 1,600 file registers. In EH/EH2/SV series MPU, there are 10,000 file registers.
File register
There is not an actual device No. for a file register. The reading and writing of file registers
should be executed by instructions API 148 MEMR, API 149 MEMW, or through the peripheral
device HPP02 and WPLSoft.
& Device indication: K0 ~ K9,999, numbered in decimal form.

E and F index registers are 16-bit data registers as other data registers. They can be read and
written and can be used in word devices, bit devices or as a constant for index indication.
Index register
& Device indication: E0 ~ E7, F0 ~ F7 are indicated as E and F and numbered in decimal
form.
The structure of a ladder diagram:
Structure Explanation Instruction Devices Used
Normally open, contact A LD X, Y, M, S, T, C
Normally closed, contact B LDI X, Y, M, S, T, C

Normally open in series
AND X, Y, M, S, T, C
connection
Normally closed in series
ANI X, Y, M, S, T, C
connection
Normally open in parallel
OR X, Y, M, S, T, C
connection
Normally closed in parallel

ORI X, Y, M, S, T, C
connection
Rising-edge trigger switch LDP X, Y, M, S, T, C
Falling-edge trigger switch LDF X, Y, M, S, T, C

Rising-edge trigger in series
ANDP X, Y, M, S, T, C
connection
Falling-edge trigger in series
ANDF X, Y, M, S, T, C
connection
Rising-edge trigger in parallel
ORP X, Y, M, S, T, C
connection
Falling-edge trigger in parallel

ORF X, Y, M, S, T, C
connection
Block in series connection ANB -
Block in parallel connection ORB -

Structure Explanation Instruction Devices Used
MPS
Multiple output MRD -
MPP
Coil driven output instruction OUT Y, M, S
S Step ladder STL S

See Ch.3 for basic instructions
Basic instruction Application
(RST/SET and CNT/TMR) and Ch.5 ~
Application instruction instructions
10 for application instructions
Inverse logic INV -
Block:
A block is a series or parallel operation composed of more than 2 devices. There are series block and parallel block.
Series block
Parallel block
Separation line and combination line:

The vertical line is used for separating the devices. For the devices on the left, the vertical line is a combination line,
indicating that there are at least 2 rows of circuits on the left connected with the vertical line. For the devices on the
right, the vertical line is a separation line, indicating that there are at least 2 rows of circuits interconnected on the right
side of the vertical line).
1 2
Combination line for block 1 Combination line for block 2

Separation line for block 2
Network:
A complete block network is composed of devices and all kinds of blocks. The blocks or devices connectable by a
vertical line or continuous line belong to the same network.

Network 1
An independent network
Network 2
An incomplete network
1.4 How to Edit a PLC Ladder Diagram
The editing of the program should start from the left power line and ends at the right power line, a row after
another. The drawing of the right power line will be omitted if edited from WPLSoft. A row can have maximum 11
contacts on it. If 11 is not enough, you can continuously connect more devices and the continuous number will be
generated automatically. The same input points can be used repeatedly. See the figure below:
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 C0 C1
00000
X11 X12 X13
00000 Y0
Continuous number
The operation of the ladder diagram program is scanning from top left to bottom right. The coil and the operation
frame of the application instruction belong to the output side in the program and are placed in the right if the ladder
diagram. Take the figure below for example, we will step by step explain the process of a ladder diagram. The
numbers in the black circles indicate the order.
X0 X1 Y1 X4
Y1
M0 T0 M3
TMR T0 K10
X3 M1
The order of the instructions:

1 LD X0
2 OR M0
3 AND X1
4 LD X3
AND M1

ORB
5 LD Y1
AND X4
6 LD T0
AND M3
ORB
7 ANB
8 OUT Y1
TMR T0 K10
Explanations on the basic structures in the ladder diagram:
1. LD (LDI) instruction: Given in the start of a block.
LD instruction LD instruction
AND block OR block
The structure of LDP and LDF instructions are the same as that of LD instruction, and the two only differ in their
actions. LDP and LDF instructions only act at the rising edge or falling edge when the contact is On, as shown in the
figure below.
Rising edge
Falling edge
X0 X0
Time Time
OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
2. AND (ANI) instruction: A single device connects to another single device or a block in series
AND instruction AND instruction
The structure of ANDP and ANDF instructions are the same. ANDP and ANDF instructions only act at the rising
edge or falling edge.
3. OR (ORI) instruction: A single device connects to another single device or a block
OR instruction OR instruction OR instruction
The structure of ORP and ORF instructions are the same. ORP and ORF instructions only act at the rising edge
or falling edge.

4. ANB instruction: A block connects to a device or another block in series
ANB instruction
5. ORB instruction: A block connects to a device or another block in parallel
ORB instruction
If the ANB and ORB operations are with several blocks, the operation should be performed from up to down or
left to right, combining into a block or network.
6. MPS, MRD, MPP instructions: Bifurcation point of multiple outputs, for generating many and diverse outputs.
MPS instruction is the start of the bifurcation point. The bifurcation point is the intersection of the horizontal line
and vertical line. We will have to determine whether to give a contact memory instruction by the contact status of the
same vertical line. Basically, every contact can be given a memory instruction, but considering the convenience of
operating the PLC and the limitation on its capacity, some parts in the ladder diagram will be omitted during the
conversion. We can determine the type of contact memory instruction by the structure of the ladder diagram. MPS is
recognized as “┬” and the instruction can be given continuously for 8 times.
MRD instruction is used for reading the memory of the bifurcation point. Due to that the same vertical line is of
the same logic status, in order to continue analyzing other ladder diagrams, we have to read the status of the original
contact again. MRD is recognized as “├”.
MPP instruction is used for reading the start status of the top bifurcation point and popping it out from the stack.
Since MPP is the last item on the vertical line, the vertical line ends at this point.
MPS
MPP is recognized as “└”. Using the method
given above for the analysis cannot be wrong.
However, sometimes the compiling program will ignore MPS
the same output status, as shown in the figure.
MRD
MPP
MPP

7. STL instruction: Used for designing the syntax of the sequential function chart (SFC).
STL instruction allows the program designer a clearer and readable picture of the sequence of the program as
when they draw a sequence chart. From the figure below, we can see clearly the sequence to be planned. When the
step S moves to the next step, the original S will be “Off". Such a sequence can then be converted into a PLC ladder
diagram and called “step ladder diagram”.
M1002 M1002
SET S0
S0
S SET S21
S21
S SET S22
S22
S S0
RET
8. RET instruction: Placed after the completed step ladder diagram.

RET also has be placed after STL instruction. See the example below.
S20 X1
S
RET
S20 X1
S
RET
See step ladder instructions [STL], [RET] in Ch. 4 for the structure of the ladder diagram.

1.5 The Conversion of PLC Command and Each Diagram Structure
Ladder Diagram LD X0 OR
OR X1 block
LD X2 OR
X0 X2 X1 OR M0 block
Y0 ORI M1
Series
X1 M0 C0 ANB connection blcok
SET S0
LD M2 AND
M1 block
AND Y0
Parallel
M2 Y0 ORB connection block
AN I X1 ANI
The output will continue
OUT Y0 following the status of
AND C0 Multiple
S0 X10 outputs
S Y10 SET S0
STL S0 Step ladder Start
SET S10 LD X10 Status S0 and X10 operation
OUT Y10 Status working item and
SET S10 step point transfer
S10 X11
S Y11 STL S10 Withdraw S10 status
LD X11 Withdraw X11 status
SET S11 OUT Y11
SET S11 Status working item and
SET S12
SET S13 SET S13
STL S11 Withdraw S11 status
LD X12 Withdraw X12 status
S11 X12
S Y12
OUT Y12 Status working item and
SET S20 STL S20
Bifurcation
STL S12 convergence
S20 S12 S13 X13 STL S13
S S S S0 End of step ladder
LD X13 Status working item
OUT S0 and step point transfer
RET
RET Return
X0 LD X0
CNT C0 K10 CNT C0 K10
LD C0 Read C0
C0 X1
M0
MPS
X1 AND X1
M1 OUT M0
M2 MRD
M2 Multiple
AN I X1 outputs
RST C0 OUT M1
MPP
END AN I M2
OUT M2
RST C0
END End of program
Fuzzy Syntax
The correct ladder diagram analysis and combination should be conducted from up to down and left to right.
However, without adopting this principle, some instructions can make the same ladder diagram.

Example Program 1
See the ladder diagram below. There are 2 ways to indicate the ladder by instruction programs with the same result.
X0 X2 X4 Ideal way Less ideal way

LD X0 LD X0
X1 X3 X5 OR X1 OR X1
LD X2 LD X2
OR X3 OR X3
ANB LD X4
LD X4 OR X5
OR X5 ANB
ANB ANB
The two instruction programs will be converted into the same ladder diagram. The difference between the ideal
one and less ideal one is the operation done by the MPU. For the ideal way, the combination is done block by block
whereas the less idea way combines all the blocks combine with one another in the last step. Though the length of
the program codes of the two ways are equal, the combination done in the last step (by ANB instruction, but ANB
cannot be used continuously for more than 8 times) will have to store up the previous calculation results in advance.
In our case, there are only two blocks combined and the MPU allows such kind of combination. However, once the
number of blocks exceed the range that the MPU allows, problems will occur. Therefore, the best way is to execute
the block combination instruction after a block is made, which will also make the logic sequence planned by the
programmer more in order.
Example Program 2
See the ladder diagram below. There are 2 ways to indicate the ladder by instruction programs with the same result.
Ideal way Less ideal way

X0
LD X0 LD X0
X1 OR X1 LD X1
OR X2 LD X2
X2
OR X3 LD X3
X3
ORB
ORB
ORB
In this example, the program codes and the operation memory in the MPU increase in the less ideal way.
Therefore, it is better that you edit the program following the defined sequence.
Incorrect Ladder Diagram
PLC processes the diagram program from up to down and left to right. Though we can use all kinds of ladder
symbols to combine into various ladder diagrams, when we draw a ladder diagram, we will have to start the diagram
from the left power line and end it at the right power line (In WPLSoft ladder diagram editing area, the right power line
is omitted), from left to right horizontally, one row after another from up to down. See bellows for the frequently seen
incorrect diagrams:

OR operation upward is not allowed.
“Reverse flow” exists in the signal circuit from the

beginning of input to output.
Re ver se fl ow
The up-right corner should output first.
Combining or editing should be done from the

up-left to the bottom-right. The dotted-lined area
should be moved up.
Parallel operation with empty device is not allowed.
Empty device cannot do operations with other

devices.
No device in the middle block.
Devices and blocks in series should be horizontally

aligned.
Label P0 should be in the first row of a complete

network.
Blocks connected in series should be aligned with

the upmost horizontal line.

1.6 Simplified Ladder Diagram
When a series block is connected to a parallel block in series, place the block in the front to omit ANB instruction.
Ladder diagram complied into instruction

X0 X1
LD X0
X2 LD X1
OR X2
Ø ANB
X1 X0
LD X1
X2 OR X2
AND X0
When a single device is connected to a block in parallel, place the block on top to omit ORB instruction.

T0
LD T0
X1 X2 LD X1
AND X2
Ø ORB
X1 X2 Ladder diagram complied into instruction
LD X1
T0
AND X2
OR T0
In diagram (a), the block on top is shorter than the block in the bottom, we can switch the position of the two
blocks to achieve the same logic. Due to that diagram (a) is illegal, there is a “reverse flow” in it.

X0
LD X0
X1 X2 OR X1
AND X2
X3 X4
LD X3
(a)
AND X4
Ø ORB
X3 X4 LD X3
X1 X2 AND X4
LD X1
X0
OR X0
(b) AND X2
ORB

MPS and MPP instruction can be omitted when the multiple outputs in the same horizontal line do not need to
operate with other input devices.

X0
Y1 MPS
AND X0
Y0 OUT Y1
Ø MPP
OUT Y0
Y0 OUT Y0
X0 AND X0
Y1
OUT Y1
Correct the circuit of reverse flow
In the following two examples, the diagram in the left hand side is the ladder diagram we desire. However, the illegal
“reverse flow” in it is incorrect according to our definition on the ladder diagram. We modify the diagram into the
diagram in the right hand side.
Example 1
X0 X1 X2
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5
X3 X4 X5 X10
Ö
X6 X7 X1 0 LO OP 1
X6 X7 X5
re ver se fl ow X10 LOOP1
Example 2
X0 X1 X2
X0 X1 X2
X3 X4 X5
X3 X4 X5
X6 X7 X1 0 LO OP 1
X6
re ver se fl ow
X3 X7 X10
Re ver se fl ow
Ö
X6
X0 X1 X2
LOOP1
X3 X4 X5 X0 X1 X4 X7 X10
X6 X7 X 10
LOOP 2
L OO P2

1.7 Basic Program Designing Examples
Start, Stop and Latched
In some application occasions, we need to use the transient close/open buttons for the start and stop of an equipment.
To maintain its continuous action, you have to design latched circuits.
Example 1: Stop first latched circuit
When the normally open contact X1 = On and the Y1 X2

Y1
normally closed contact X2 = Off, Y1 will be On. If you make
X1
X2 = On at this time, Y1 will be Off. It is the reason why this is
called “stop first”.
Example 2: Start first latched circuit
When the normally open contact X1 = On and the X1 X2

Y1
normally closed contact X2 = Off, Y1 will be On and latched. If
Y1
you make X2 = On at this time, Y1 will continue to be On
because of the latched contact. It is the reason why this is
called “start first”.
Example 3: Latched circuit for SET and RST instructions
See the diagram in the right hand side for the latched Stop first
circuit consist of RST and SET instructions. X1
SET Y1
In the stop first diagram, RST is placed after SET. PLC X2
RST Y1
executes the program from up to down, so the On/Off of Y1 will
be determined upon its status in the end of the program.
Therefore, when X1 and X2 are enabled at the same time, Y1 Start first
X2
will be Off. It is the reason why this is called “stop first”.
RST Y1
In the start first diagram, SET is placed after RST. When X1
SET Y1
X1 and X2 are enabled at the same time, Y1 will be On. It is
the reason why this is called “start first”.
Example 4: Power shutdown latched
The auxiliary relay M512 is latched (see instruction X1

SET M512
sheets for DVP series PLC MPU). The circuit can not only be X2
latched when the power is on, but also keep the continuity of RST M512
M512
the original control when the power is shut down and switched
Y1
on again.

Frequently Used Control Circuit
Example 5: Conditional control
X1 X3 X1
Y1
X3
Y1
X2
X2 X4 Y1
X4
Y2
Y2 Y1
Y2
X1 and X3 enables and disables Y1; X2 and X4 enables and disables Y2, and all are latched. Due to that the
normally open contact of Y1 is connected to the circuit of Y2 in series, Y1 becomes an AND condition for Y2.
Therefore, only when Y1 is enabled can Y2 be enabled.
Example 6: Interlock control
X1 X3 Y2
Y1 X1
Y1 X3
X2
X2 X4 Y1 X4
Y2
Y1
Y2
Y2
Which of the X1 and X2 is first enabled decides either the corresponding output Y1 or Y2 will be enabled first.
Either Y1 or Y2 will be enabled at a time, i.e. Y1 and Y2 will not be enabled at the same time (the interlock). Even X1
and X2 are enabled at the same time, Y1 and Y2 will not be enabled at the same time due to that the ladder diagram
program is scanned from up to down. In this ladder diagram, Y1 will be enabled first.
Example 7: Sequential control
X1 X3 Y2 If we serially connect the normally closed contact

Y1
of Y2 in example 5 to the circuit of Y1 as an AND
Y1
condition for Y1 (as the diagram in the left hand side),
X2 X4 Y1 the circuit can not only make Y1 as the condition for Y2,
Y2
but also allow the stop of Y1 after Y2 is enabled.
Y2
Therefore, we can make Y1 and Y2 execute exactly the
sequential control.

Example 8: Oscillating circuit
An oscillating circuit with cycle ΔT+ΔT
Y1 Y1
Y1
T T
The ladder diagram above is a very simple one. When the program starts to scan the normally closed contact
Y1, Y1 will be closed because coil Y1 is Off. When the program then scan to coil Y1 and make it On, the output will be
1. When the program scans to the normally closed contact Y1 again in the next scan cycle, because coil Y1 is On, Y1
will be open and make coil Y1 Off and output 0. The repeated scans will result in coil Y1 outputs oscillating pulses by
the cycle ΔT(On)+ΔT(Off).
An oscillating circuit with cycle nT+ΔT
X0 Y1 X0
TMR T0 Kn
T0
Y1
Y1
nT T
The ladder diagram program controls the On time of coil Y1 by timer T0 and disable timer T0 in the next scan
cycle, resulting in the oscillating pulses in the output of Y1. n refers to the decimal set value in the timer and T is the
cycle of the clock.
Example 9: Flashing circuit
X0 T2
TMR T1 Kn1 X0
n2 *T
T1
TMR T2 Kn2
Y1
X0 T1
Y1 n1 * T
The ladder diagram is an oscillating circuit which makes the indicator flash or enables the buzzer alarms. It
uses two timer to control the On/Off time of coil Y1. n1 and n2 refer to the set values in T1 and T2 and T is the cycle
of the clock.
Example 10: Trigger circuit
X0
M0 X0
M0 Y1 T
Y1 M0
M0 Y1
Y1

The rising-edge differential instruction of X0 makes coil M0 generate a single pulse of ΔT (one scan cycle).
Coil Y1 will be On during this scan period. In the next scan period, coil M0 will be Off and the normally closed contact
M0 and Y1 will all be closed, making coil Y1 continue to be On until another rising-edge arrives in input X0, making
coil M0 On for another scan period and Y1 Off. Such kind of circuit relies on an input to make two actions execute
interchangeably. Also from the timing diagram on the last page, we can see that input X0 are square pulse signals of
the cycle T and coil Y1 output are square pulse signals of the cycle 2T.
Example 11: Delay circuit
X0
TMR T10 K1000 X0
T10
Y1 Y1
100 seconds
Time base: T = 0.1 sec
When input X0 is On, due to that its corresponding normally closed contact is Off, time T10 will be Off and the
output coil Y1 will be On. T10 will be On and start to count until input X0 is Off. Output coil Y1 will be delayed for
100 seconds (K1,000 × 0.1 sec = 100 secs) and be Off. See the timing diagram above.
Example 12: Output delay circuit
The output delay circuit is the circuit composed of two timers. When input X0 is On and Off, output Y4 will be
delayed.
X0
TMR T5 K50
T5 T6 5 secs
Y4 T5
Y4
Y4 X0 T
TMR T6 K30
T6
3 secs
Example13: Timing extension circuit
X0 The total delay time from input X0 is closed to output

TMR T11 Kn1
T11
Y1 is On = (n1+n2)* T. T refers to the clock cycle.
TMR T12 Kn2
T12
X0
Y1 n1* T
T11
Timer = T11, T12 n2* T
Clock cycle: T T12
Y1
(n1+n2)* T

Example 14: How to enlarge the counting range
X13 The counting range of a 16-bit counter is 0 ~ 32,767. As

CNT C5 Kn1
the circuit in the left hand side, using two counters can
C5
CNT C6 Kn2 increase the counting range to n1*n2. When the counting
of counter C5 reaches n1, C6 will start to count for one
RST C5
X14 time and reset for counting the pulses from X13. When
RST C6 the counting of counter C6 reaches n2, the pulses from
C6
Y1 input X13 will be n1*n2.
Example 15: Traffic light control (by using step ladder instruction)
Traffic light control
Green
Vertical Yellow Green
Red light light
Light light light
flashes
Vertical
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y2
light
Horizontal
Horizontal Y10 Y11 Y12 Y12
light
Light
On time 35 secs 5 secs 25 secs 5 secs
Timing Diagram:
Vertical
Light
Red Y0
Yellow Y1
Green Y2 25 secs
5 secs 5 secs
Horizontal
Light
Red Y10
Yellow Y11
Green Y12 25 secs
5 secs 5 secs

SFC Figure: Ladder Diagram:

M1002
M1002
ZRST S0 S127
S0
SET S0
S20 Y0 S30 Y12 S0
S SET S20
TMR T0 K350 TMR T10 K250
T0 T10
SET S30
S21 Y2 S31 TMR T11 K50
S20
M1013 S Y0
TMR T1 K250 Y12
T1 T11
S22 TMR T2 K50 S32 Y11 TMR T0 K350
M1013 T0
Y2 TMR T12 K50 SET S21
T2 T12
S23 Y1 S33 Y10
S21
S Y2
TMR T13 K350
TMR T1 K250
T13 T1
SET S22
S0
S22
S TMR T2 K50
M1013
Y2
T2
SET S23
S23
S Y1
S30
S Y12
TMR T10 K250

T10
SET S31
S31
S TMR T11 K50
M1013
Y12
T11
SET S32
S32
S Y11
TMR T12 K50

T12
SET S33
S33
S Y10
TMR T13 K350

S23 S33 T13
S S S0
RET
END

Drawing by SFC Editor (WPLSoft )
Drawn by SFC Internal Ladder Diagram
LAD-0
M1002
ZRST S0 S127
SET S0
LAD-0
S0
Transferring Condition 1
0
T0
TRANS*
S20 S30
1 5 S22
S21 S31
TMR T2 K50
2 6
M1013
S22 S32 Y2
3 7
S23 S33 Transferring Condition 4
T13
TRANS*
4
S0
Transferring Condition 7
T12
TRANS*

MEMO

2 Functions of Devices in DVP-PLC
2.1 All Devices in DVP-PLC

ES/EX/SS series MPU:
Type Device Item Range Function
Corresponds to external
X External input relay X0 ~ X177, 128 points, octal
Total input points
256 points Corresponds to external
Y External output relay Y0 ~ Y177, 128 points, octal
output points
M0 ~ M511, M768 ~ M999, 744
General purpose
points
Auxiliary Total The contact can be
M Latched* M512 ~ M767, 256 points
relay 1,280 points On/Off in the program.
M1000 ~ M1279, 280 points
Special purpose
(some are latched)
100ms timer T0 ~ T63, 64 points
Timer indicated by TMR
instruction. If timing
T64 ~ T126, 63 points (M1028 Total
T Timer 10ms timer (M1028 = On) reaches its target, the T
Relay (bit)
= Off: 100ms) 128 points

contact of the same No.
will be On.
1ms timer T127, 1 points
16-bit counting up
C0 ~ C111, 112 points Total
(general purpose)
128 points
16-bit counting up (latched*) C112 ~ C127, 16 points Counter indicated by
32-bit C235 ~ C238, C241, C242, CNT (DCNT) instruction.
C Counter counting 1-phase 1 input If counting reaches its
C244, 7 points
up/down 1-phase 2 inputs C246, C247, C249, 3 points Total target, the C contact of
high-speed 13 points the same No. will be On.
counter 2-phase 2 inputs C251, C252, C254, 3 points
(latched*)
Initial step (latched*) S0 ~ S9, 10 points
S10 ~ S19, 10 points (used with Total
S Step Zero return (latched*) Used for SFC.
IST instruction) 128 points
Latched* S20 ~ S127, 108 points
When the timing
reaches the target, the
T Present value of timer T0 ~ T127, 128 points
contact of the timer will
Register (word data)
be On.
When the counting
C0 ~ C127, 16-bit counter, 128 points reaches the target, the
C Present value of counter
C235 ~ C254, 32-bit counter, 13 points contact of the counter
will be On.
General purpose D0 ~ D407, 408 points Total Memory area for data
Data Latched* D408 ~ D599, 192 points 600 points storage; E, F can be
D
register used for index
Special purpose D1000 ~ D1311, 312 points Total
indication.
Index indication E, F, 2 points 312 points
Control point for main
N For master control nested loop N0 ~ N7, 8 points
control loop
Position index for CJ
P For CJ, CALL instructions P0 ~ P63, 64 points
and CALL
Pointer
External interruption I001, I101, I201, I301, 4 points
I Interruption I6□□, 1 point (□□＝10 ~ 99, time base = Position index for
Timed interruption interruption subroutine.
1ms ) (for V5.7 and above)
Communication interruption I150, 1 point
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
K Decimal form
Constant
K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)

H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)
H Hexadecimal form
H00000000 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)
* The latched area is fixed and cannot be changed.

SA/SX/SC series MPU:

X External input relay X0 ~ X177, 128 points, octal Total
input points
256
Y External output relay Y0 ~ Y177, 128 points, octal points
output points
General purpose M0 ~ M511, 512 points (*1)
M512 ~ M999, 488 points (*3) Total
Auxiliary Latched* The contact can be
M M2000 ~ M4095, 2,096 points (*3) 4,096
Relay On/Off in the program.
M1000 ~ M1999, 1,000 points points
Special purpose
(some are latched)
T0 ~ T199, 200 points (*1)
T192 ~ T199 for subroutine
100ms
T250 ~ T255, 6 accumulative points Timer indicated by TMR
(*4) Total instruction. If timing
T Timer T200 ~ T239, 40 points (*1) 256 reaches its target, the T
10ms T240 ~ T245, 6 accumulative points points contact of the same No.
(*4) will be On.
T246 ~ T249, 4 accumulative points
1ms
(*4)
C0 ~ C95, 96 points (*1)
Relay (bit)
16-bit counting up Total

C96 ~ C199, 104 points (*3)
235
C200 ~ C215, 16 points (*1)
32-bit counting up/down points
C216 ~ C234, 19 points (*3)
C235 ~ C244, 1-phase 1 input, 9
points (*3)
Total Counter indicated by
For SA/SX, 32-bit C246 ~ C249, 1-phase 2 inputs, 3
16 CNT (DCNT) instruction.
high-speed counter points (*3)
C Counter points If counting reaches its
C251 ~ C254, 2-phase 2 inputs, 4
target, the C contact of
points (*3)
the same No. will be On.
C235 ~ C245, 1-phase 1 input, 11
points (*3)
Total
For SC, 32-bit high-speed C246 ~ C250, 1-phase 2 inputs, 4
19
counter points (*3)
points
C251 ~ C255, 2-phase 2 inputs, 4
points (*3)
Initial step S0 ~ S9, 10 points (*1)
S10 ~ S19, 10 points (used with IST
Zero return
instruction) (*1) Total
S Step point General purpose S20 ~ S511, 492 points (*1) 1,024 Used for SFC.
points
Latched* S512 ~ S895, 384 points (*3)
Alarm S896 ~ S1023, 128 points (*3)
When the timing
be On.
When the counting

C0 ~ C199, 16-bit counter, 200 points
C Present value of counter C200 ~ C254, 32-bit counter, 50 points (SC: 53
contact of the counter
points)
will be On.
General purpose D0 ~ D199, 200 points (*1)
Memory area for data
D200 ~ D999, 800 points (*3) Total
Data Latched* storage; E, F can be
D D2000 ~ D4999, 3,000 points (*3) 5,000
Special purpose D1000 ~ D1999, 1,000 points points
indication.
Index indication E0 ~ E3, F0 ~ F3, 8 points (*1)
Expanded register for
N/A File register K0 ~ K1,599 (1,600 points) (*4)
data storage.


N For Master control loop N0 ~ N7, 8 points
control loop
and CALL
External interruption I001, I101, I201, I301, I401, I501, total 6 points
Pointer
I6□□, I7□□, 2 points (□□ = 1 ~ 99, time

Timed interruption
base = 1ms)
Position index for
I Interruption Interruption inserted when
interruption subroutine.
high-speed counter I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, total 6 points
reaches target
Communication interruption I150, 1 point
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
Constant
K Decimal form
K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)
H Hexadecimal form
*1. Non-latched area cannot be modified.
*2. The preset non-latched area can be modified into latched area by setting up parameters.
*3. The preset latched area can be modified into non-latched area by setting up parameters.
*4. The fixed latched area cannot be modified
Latched settings for all devices in SA/SX/SC series MPU:

General purpose Latched Special auxiliary relay Latched
M0 ~ M511 M512 ~ M999 M1000 ~ M1999 M2000 ~ M4095
M
(Auxiliary relay) Default: latched Default: latched
Some are latched and
It is fixed to be non-latched Start: D1200 (K512) Start: D1202 (K2,000)
cannot be modified
End: D1201 (K999) End: D1203 (K4,095)
100 ms 10 ms 10 ms 1 ms 100 ms
T T0 ~ T199 T200 ~ T239 T240 ~ T245 T246 ~ T249 T250 ~ T255

(Timer)
Accumulative type
It is fixed to be non-latched It is fixed to be non-latched
It is fixed to be latched
32-bit high-speed counting
16-bit counting up 32-bit counting up/down
up/down
C0 ~ C95 C96 ~ C199 C200 ~ C215 C216 ~ C234 C235 ~ C255
C
(Counter) Default: latched Default: latched Default: latched
It is fixed to be It is fixed to be
non-latched Start: D1208 (K96) non-latched Start: D1210 (K216) Start: D1212 (K235)
End: D1209 (K199) End: D1211 (K234) End: D1213 (K255)
Initial Zero return General purpose Latched Alarm step
S0 ~ S9 S10 ~ S19 S20 ~ S511 S512 ~ S895 S896 ~ S1023
S
(Step relay) Default: latched
It is fixed to be non-latched Start: D1214 (K512) It is fixed to be latched
End: D1215 (K895)
General purpose Latched Special register Latched
D0 ~ D199 D200 ~ D999 D1000 ~ D1999 D2000 ~ D4999
D
Default: latched Default: latched
(Register) Some are latched and
It is fixed to be non-latched Start: D1216 (K200) Start: D1218 (K2,000)
cannot be modified.
End: D1217 (K999) End: D1219 (K4,999)
K0 ~ K1599
File Register
It is fixed to be latched.

EH/EH2/SV series MPU:
X External input relay X0 ~ X377, 256 points, octal Total
input points
512
Y External output relay Y0 ~ Y377, 256 points, octal points
output points
General purpose M0 ~ M499, 500 points (*2)
Total
Auxiliary M500 ~ M999, 500 points (*3) The contact can be
M Latched 4,096
relay M2000 ~ M4095, 2,096 points (*3) On/Off in the program.
points
Special purpose M1000 ~ M1999, 1,000 points (some are latched)
T0 ~ T199, 200 points (*2)
Timer indicated by TMR
100ms T192 ~ T199 is for subroutine
Total instruction. If timing
T250~T255, 6 accumulative points (*4)
T Timer 256 reaches its target, the T
T200 ~ T239, 40 points (*2) points contact of the same No.
10ms
Relay (bit)
T240 ~ T245, 6 accumulative points (*4) will be On.

1ms T246 ~ T249, 4 accumulative points (*4)
16-bit counting C0 ~ C99, 100 points (*2)
Counter indicated by
up C100 ~ C199, 100 points (*3)
CNT (DCNT)
32-bit counting C200 ~ C219, 20 points (*2) Total
instruction. If counting
C Counter up/down C220 ~ C234, 15 points (*3) 253
reaches its target, the C
C235 ~ C244, 1-phase 1 input, 10 points (*3) points
32-bit high-speed contact of the same No.
C246 ~ C249, 1-phase 2 inputs, 4 points(*3) will be On.
counter
C251 ~ C254, 2-phases 2 inputs, 4 points (*3)
Initial step point S0 ~ S9, 10 points (*2)
S10 ~ S19, 10 points (used with IST instruction)
Zero return
(*2) Total
S Step General purpose S20 ~ S499, 480 points (*2) 1,024 Used for SFC.
points
Latched S500 ~ S899, 400 points (*3)
Alarm S900 ~ S1023, 124 points (*3)
When the timing
be On.
When the counting
C0 ~ C199, 16-bit counter, 200 points reaches the target, the

C Present value of counter
C200 ~ C254, 32-bit counter, 53 points contact of the counter
will be On.
General purpose D0 ~ D199, 200 points, (*2)
Memory area for data
D200 ~ D999, 800 points (*3) Total
Data Latched storage; E, F can be
D D2000 ~ D9999, 8,000 points (*3) 10,000
points
Special purpose D1000 ~ D1999, 1,000 points indication.
Index indication E0 ~ E7, F0 ~ F7, 16 points (*1)
Expanded register for
N/A File register K0 ~ K9,999 (10,000 points) (*4)
data storage.
N For master control loop N0 ~ N7, 8 points
control loop
P For CJ, CALL instructions P0~P255, 256 points
and CALL
I00□(X0), I10□(X1), I20□(X2), I30□(X3), I40□(X4),
I External interruption I50□(X5), 6 points (□ = 1, rising-edge trigger , □ =
0, falling-edge trigger )
Pointer
I6□□, I7□□, 2 points(□□ = 1~99ms) time base = 1ms

Interruption
Timed interruption
I8□□, 1 point (□□ = 1~99, time base = 0.1ms) Position index for
Interruption inserted interruption subroutine.
when high-speed I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points
counter reaches target
Pulse interruption I110, I120, I130, I140, 4 points
Communication
I150, I160, I170, 3 points
interrruption

Frequency
measurement card I180, 1 point
interruption
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
Constant
K Decimal form
K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)
H Hexadecimal form
*1. Non-latched area cannot be modified.
*2. The preset non-latched area can be modified into latched area by setting up parameters.
*3. The preset latched area can be modified into non-latched area by setting up parameters.
*4. The fixed latched area cannot be modified
Latched settings for all devices in EH/EH2/SV series MPU:

General purpose Latched Special auxiliary relay Latched
M M0 ~ M499 M500 ~ M999 M1000 ~ M1999 M2000 ~ M4095
(Auxiliary relay)
Start: D1200 (K500) Some are latched and Start: D1202 (K2,000)
End: D1201 (K999) cannot be modified. End: D1203 (K4,095)
100 ms 10 ms 10 ms 1 ms 100 ms
T0 ~ T199 T200 ~ T239 T240 ~ T245 T246 ~ T249 T250 ~ T255
T
(Timer) Default: non-latched Default: non-latched
Accumulative type
Start: D1204 (K-1)*1 Start: D1206 (K-1)*1 It is fixed to be latched.
End: D1205 (K-1)*1 End: D1207 (K-1)*1
16-bit counting up 32-bit counting up/down 32-bit high-speed counting up/down
C0 ~ C99 C100 ~ C199 C200 ~ C219 C220 ~ C234 C235 ~ C245 C246 ~ C255
C Default: Default:
(Counter) Default: latched Default: latched Default: latched
non-latched non-latched
Start: D1208 (K100) Start: D1210 (K220) Start: D1212 (K235)
End: D1209 (K199) End: D1211 (K234) End: D1213 (K255)
General
Initial Zero return Latched Step alarm
purpose
S S0 ~ S9 S10 ~ S19 S20 ~ S499 S500 ~ S899 S900 ~ S1023
(Step relay) Non-latched (default) Latched (default)
Start: D1214 (K500) It is fixed to be latched.
End: D1215 (K899)
General purpose Latched Special register Latched
D0 ~ D199 D200 ~ D999 D1000 ~ D1999 D2000 ~ D9999
D
(Register) Default: non-latched Default: latched Default: latched
Some is latched and
Start: D1216 (K200) cannot be modified. Start: D1218 (K2,000)
End: D1217 (K999) End: D1219 (K9,999)
K0 ~ K9,999
File register
It is fixed to be latched.
*1: K-1 refers to the default setting is non-latched.
Power On/Off or the MPU switches between RUN/STOP:

Memory of ES/EX/SS V5.5 (and above)
Power Clear all non-latched Clear all latched Default
Memory type STOP→RUN RUN→STOP
Off→On areas (M1031) areas (M1032) setting
Clear when M1033 = Off
Non-latched Clear Clear Unchanged 0
Remain unchanged when M1033 = On
Latched Unchanged Unchanged Clear Unchanged

Special M,
Special D, Initial Unchanged Unchanged Initial setting
index register
Memory of SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV series MPU:

Power Clear all non-latched Clear all latched Default

Memory type STOP→RUN RUN→STOP
Off→On area (M1031) area (M1032) setting
Clear when M1033 = Off
Non-latched Clear Unchanged Remain unchanged when Clear Unchanged 0
M1033 = On
Latched Unchanged Unchanged Clear 0
Special M,
Initial
Special D, Initial Unchanged Unchanged
setting
index register
File Register Unchanged 0
2.2 Values, Constants [K] / [H]
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)

K Decimal form
K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)
Constant
H Hexadecimal form
For different control purposes, there are five types of values inside DVP-PLC for executing the operations. See
the explanations bellows for the functions and works of every type of value.
1. Binary value (BIN)

All the operations and storage of values in PLC are conducted in BIN. Belows are the terms for BIN values.
Bit: The basic unit for a BIN value, either 1 or 0.
Nibble: Composed of 4 continuous bits (e.g. b3 ~ b0). Presented as the decimal value 0 ~ 9 of a digit
or 0 ~ F in hex.
Byte: Composed of 2 continuous nibble (i.e. 8 bits, b7 ~ b0). Presented as 00 ~ FF in hex.
Word: Composed of 2 continuous bytes (i.e. 16 bits, b15 ~ b0). Presented as 4-digit 0000 ~ FFFF in
hex.
Double word: Composed of 2 continuous words (i.e. 32 bits, b31 ~ b0). Presented as 8 digit 00000000 ~
FFFFFFFF.
Bit, nibble, byte, word, and double word in a binary system:
DW Double Word
W1 W0 Word
BY3 BY2 BY1 BY0 Byte
NB7 NB6 NB5 NB4 NB3 NB2 NB1 NB0 Nibble
Bit
2. Octal value (OCT)
The No. of external input and output terminals in DVP-PLC is numbered in octal system.
For example:
External input: X0 ~ X7, X10 ~ X17…(device No.)
External output: Y0 ~ Y7, Y10 ~ Y17…(device No.)
3. Decimal value (DEC)
Occassions of using decimal values in DVP-PLC:

Set value in timer T and counter C, e.g. TMR C0 K50 (constant K)
No. of device S, M, T, C, D, E, F, P, I, e.g. M10, T30. (device No.)
Operands in application instructions, e.g. MOV K123 D0 (constant K)
4. Binary code decimal (BCD)
A decimal datum is presented by a nibble or 4 bits. Therefore, a continuous 16 bits can be presented as a 4-digit
decimal value. BCD is mainly used on reading the input value from the DIP switch or the data output to a 7-section
display.
5. Hexadecimal value (HEX)

Occassion of using hexadecimal values:
Operands in application instructions, e.g. MOV H1A2B D0 (constant H)
Constant K:
“K” is normally placed before a decimal value in the PLC. For example, K100 refers to a decimal value, 100.
Exception:
K and bit devices X, Y, M and S can combine into data in bit, byte, word or double word, e.g. K2Y10, K4M100.
Here K1 refers to a 4-bit data and K2 ~ K4 refer to 8-bit, 12-bit and 16-bit data.
Constant H:
“H” is normally placed before a hexadecimal value in the PLC. For example, H100 refers to a hexadecimal value,
100.
Reference table:
Binary Octal Decimal Binary Code Decimal Hexadecimal

(BIN) (OCT) (DEC) (BCD) (HEX)
Constant K,
No. of device For DIP switch and 7-section
For PLC internal operation No. of device M, S, T, C, Constant H
X, Y display
D, E, F, P, I
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 6 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 7 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 10 8 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 11 9 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 12 10 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 A
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 13 11 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 B
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 14 12 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 C
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 15 13 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 D
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 16 14 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 E
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 17 15 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 F
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 20 16 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 10

Binary Octal Decimal Binary Code Decimal Hexadecimal

(BIN) (OCT) (DEC) (BCD) (HEX)
Constant K,
No. of device For DIP switch and 7-section
For PLC internal operation No. of device M, S, T, C, Constant H
X, Y display
D, E, F, P, I
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 21 17 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 11
: : : : :
: : : : :
: : : : :
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 143 99 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 63
2.3 Numbering and Functions of External Input/Output Contacts [X] / [Y]
No. of input/output contacts (in octal):
The No. of input and output contacts on the PLC MPU starts from X0 and Y0. The range of the No. varies upon
the number of points on the MPU. For I/O extension units, the No. of input and output contacts is calculated according
to its connection sequence with the MPU.
Model DVP-14ES DVP-14SS DVP-20EX DVP-24ES DVP-32ES DVP-40ES DVP-60ES I/O Extension Unit
X0 ~ X7 X0 ~ X7 X0 ~ X7 X0 ~ X17 X0 ~ X17 X0 ~ X27 X0 ~ X43 X20/30/50 ~ X177

Input X
(8 points) (8 points) (8 points) (16 points) (16 points) (24 points) (36 points) (Note)
Y0 ~ Y5 Y0 ~ Y5 Y0 ~ Y5 Y0 ~ Y7 Y0 ~ Y17 Y0 ~ Y17 Y0 ~ Y27 Y20/30 ~ Y177
Output Y
(6 points) (6 points) (6 points) (8 points) (16 points) (16 points) (24 points) (Note)
Note: The input points on I/O extension units start from X20 and output points from Y20, except input points on
DVP-40ES start from X30 and output from Y20; input points on DVP-60ES start from X50 and output from Y30. The No. of
input/output points on the I/O extension units increases by 8’s multiple. If the number of points is less than 8, it will be
counted as 8.
SA/SX/SC serues MPU:
Model DVP-10SX (Note1) DVP-12SA DVP-12SC I/O Extension Unit (Note 2)
Input X X0 ~ X3 (4 points) X0 ~ X7 (8 points) X0 ~ X5, X10 ~ X11 (8 points) X20 ~ X177
Output Y Y0 ~ Y1 (2 points) Y0 ~ Y3 (4 points) Y0 ~ Y1, Y10 ~ Y11 (4 points) Y20 ~ Y177

Note 1: Besides 4DI and 2DO, SX series MPU has also 2AI (12-bit) and 2AO (12-bit) of analog input/output.
Note 2: SX/SA/SC series MPU share the extension units with SS series MPU. The input points on I/O extension units start
from X20 and output points start from Y20. The calculation on the No. of I/O points is the same as that in SS series.
EH series MPU:
I/O
DVP-20EH DVP-32EH
Model DVP-16EH DVP-40EH DVP-48EH DVP-64EH DVP-80EH Extension
(Note 1) (Note1, 2)
Unit (Note 3)
X0 ~ X7 X0 ~ X13 X0 ~ X17 X0 ~ X27 X0 ~ X27 X0 ~ X37 X0 ~ X47

Input X X※~X377
(8 points) (12 points) (16 points) (24 points) (24 points) (32 points) (40 points)
Y0 ~ Y7 Y0 ~ Y7 Y0 ~ Y17 Y0 ~ Y17 Y0 ~ Y27 Y0 ~ Y37 Y0 ~ Y47

Output Y Y※~Y377
Note 1: The output type of 20EH00T and 32EH00T is transistor, among which Y0 and Y2 are high-speed transistor output
(200KHz) and other outputs are normal transistor output (10KHz). The output type of other MPUs with 16/48/64/80 points is
transistor and all outputs are normal transistor output (10KHz).
Note 2: The terminal layouts of 32EH00T, 32EH00R and 32EH00M are different. See the instruction sheets of EH series
MPU. In 32EH00M, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3) are high-speed differential output.
Note 3: The start No. of the input and output points on the I/O extension unit resumes from the last No. in the MPU. The start
No. of input points on the I/O extension unit of DVP-16EH and DVP-20EH start from X20 and output points start from Y20.
The No. on the I/O extension unit are in sequence, with max. input point No. X377 and max. output point No. Y377.

EH2 series MPU:

DVP-20EH2 DVP-32EH2 DVP-40EH2 I/O Extension
Model DVP-16EH2 DVP-48EH2 DVP-64EH2 DVP-80EH2
(Note 1) (Note1) (Note 2) Unit (Note 3)
X0 ~ X7 X0 ~ X13 X0 ~ X17 X0 ~ X27 X0 ~ X27 X0 ~ X37 X0 ~ X47

Input X X※~X377
Y0 ~ Y7 Y0 ~ Y7 Y0 ~ Y17 Y0 ~ Y17 Y0 ~ Y27 Y0 ~ Y37 Y0 ~ Y47

Output Y Y※~Y377
Note 1: The output type of 20EH00T2 and 32EH00T2 is transistor, among which Y0 and Y2 are high-speed transistor output
(200KHz) and other outputs are normal transistor output (10KHz). The output type of other MPUs with 16/48/64/80 points is
transistor and all outputs are normal transistor output (10KHz).
Note 2: The output type of 40EH00T2 is transistor, among which CH0 (Y0, Y1), CH1 (Y2, Y3), CH2 (Y4) and CH3 (Y6) are
high-speed transistor output (200KHz). The output type of other output points is normal transistor output (10KHz).
Note 3: The numbering of the I/O points on EH2 series MPU is the same as that of EH series MPU.
SV series MPU:
Model DVP-28SV (Note 1) I/O Extension Unit (Note 2)
Input X X0 ~ X17 (16 points) X20 ~ X377
Output Y Y0 ~ Y13 (12 points) Y20 ~ Y377

Note 1: The output type of 28SV11T is transistor output, among which CH0 (Y0, Y1), CH1 (Y2, Y3), CH2 (Y4) and CH3 (Y6)
are high-speed transistor output (200KHz); others are normal transistor output (10KHz).
Note 2: The input points on I/O extension units start from X20 and output points start from Y20. The calculation on the No. of
I/O points is the same as that in SS series.
Input Relay X0 ~ X377
The numbering of input relays (or input terminals) is in octal form. EH series MPU can have up to 256
points and the range is: X0 ~ X7, X10 ~ X17, …, X370 ~ X377.
Output Relay Y0 ~ Y377
The numbering of output relays (or output terminals) is also in octal form. EH series MPU can have up to
256 points and the range is: Y0 ~ Y7, Y10 ~ Y17, …, Y370 ~ Y377.
Functions of input contact X
The input contact X is connected to the input device and reads the input signals into the PLC. There is no
limitation on the times of using contact A or B of input contact X in the program. On/Off of the input contact X
only changes with On/Off of the input device. You cannot use the peripheral devices (HPP or WPLSoft) to force
On/Off of the input contact X.
The special relay M1304 in SA/SX/SC/EH series MPU allows the peripheral devices HPP or WPLSoft to
force On/Off of the input contact X, but the PLC will not be able to receive external input signals at this time.
Functions of output contact Y
Output contact Y sends out On/Off signals to drive the load connected to output contact Y. There are two
types of output contacts, relay and transistor. Thereis no limitation on the times of using contact A or B of output
contact Y in the program, but the No. of output coil Y can only be used once in the program; otherwise
according to the scan principle of the PLC program, the output status will be determined by the circuit of the last
output Y in the program.

X0
1
The output of Y0 will be determined by circuit 2, i.e. On/Off of X10 will
Y0
determine the output status of Y0.
Y0 is repeated
X10
Y0 2
The Handling Process of PLC Program (Batch I/O)

Regenerate input signal X input Regenerate input signal
1. Before the execution of the program, PLC reads the
Input terminal On/Off status of the external input signals into the
Read into memory input signal memory at a time.
Input signal memory 2. The On/Off status of the input signal during the
Program processing Read X0 status from memory execution of the program will not change the signal
X0 Write in Y0 status status in the input signal memory. The new On/Off
Device Memory
Y0
status will be read in in the next scan.
Read Y0 status from memory 3. There will be approximately a 10ms delay from the
Y0
M0 On→Off or Off→On changes to the status being
Write in M0 status
recognized by the contact in the program. The delay
Regenerate output Output time may be affected by the scan time in the
Output latched memory program.
Program processing
Output terminal After the PLC reads the On/Off status of every input
signal in the input signal memory, it will start to execute
Y output every instruction in the program in order starting from
address 0. The execution result (On/Off of every output
coil) will be stored in order into the device memory.
Regenerate output
1. When the program executes to END instruction, it
will send the On/Off status of Y in the device memory
to the output latched memory. The output latched
memory is the coil of the output relay.
2. There will be a 10ms delay from OnÆOff or OffÆOn
of the relay coil to the On/Off status of the contact.
3. There will be a 10 ~ 20us delay from OnÆOff or
OffÆOn of the transistor module to the On/Off status
of the contact.

2.4 Numbering and Functions of Auxiliary Relays [M]
No. of auxiliary relays (in decimal)

General purpose M0 ~ M511, M768 ~ M999, 744 points. Fixed to be non-latched.
Total 1,280
Auxiliary relay M Latched M512 ~ M767, 256 points. Fixed to be latched.
points
Special purpose M1000 ~ M1279, 280 points. Some are latched.

General purpose M0 ~ M511, 512 points. Fixed to be non-latched.
M512 ~ M999, M2000 ~ M4095, 2,584 points. Can be modified to be Total 4,096
Auxiliary relay M Latched
non-latched by setting up parameters. points
Special purpose M1000 ~ M1999, 1000 points. Some are latched.
M0 ~ M499, 500 points. Can be modified to be latched by setting up

General purpose
parameters.
Total 4,096
Auxiliary relay M M500 ~ M999, M2000 ~ M4095, 2,596 points. Can be modified to be
Latched points
non-latched by setting up parameters.
Special purpose M1000 ~ M1999, 1,000 points. Some are latched.
Functions of auxiliary relays:

Both auxiliary relay M and output relay Y have output coils and contact A, B, and there is no limitation on the
times of using the contact. You can use auxiliary relay M to assemble a control loop, but it cannot directly drive the
external load. There are three types of auxiliary relays:
1. General purpose auxiliary relay: If the relay encouters power cut during the operation of the PLC, its status will
be reset to Off and stay Off when the power is on again.
2. Latched auxiliary relay: If the relay encounters power cut during the operation of the PLC, its status will be
retained and stay at the status before the power cut when the power is on again.
3. Special purpose auxiliary relay: Every relay of this kind has its specific function. Do not use undefined special
purpose auxiliary relay. See 2.10 for special puspose auxiliary relay of all series MPU and 2.11 for its functions.
2.5 Numbering and Functions of Step Relays [S]

No. of step relays (in decimal)

Initial latched S0 ~ S9, 10 points. Fixed to be latched.
Zero return Total 128
Step relay S S10 ~ S19, 10 points, used with IST instruction. Fixed to be latched.
latched points
Latched S20 ~ S127, 108 points. Fixed to be latched.

Initial S0 ~ S9, 10 points. Fixed to be non-latched.
Zero return S10 ~ S19, 10 points, used with IST instruction. Fixed to be non-latched.
General purpose S20 ~ S511, 492 points. Fixed to be non-latched. Total
Step relay S
S512 ~ S895, 384 points. Can be modified to be non-latched by setting 1,024 points
Latched
up parameters.
Alarm S896 ~ S1023, 128 points. Fixed to be latched.


S0 ~ S9, 10 points. Can be modified to be latched by setting up
Initial
parameters.
S10 ~ S19, 10 points, used with IST instruction. Can be modified to be

Zero return
latched by setting up parameters.
Total
Step relay S S20 ~ S499, 480 points. Can be modified to be latched by setting up
General purpose 1,024 points
parameters.
S500 ~ S899, 400 points. Can be modified to be non-latched by setting
Latched
up parameters.
S900 ~ S1023, 124 points. Can be modified to be latched by setting up
Alarm
parameters.
Functions of step relays:

The step relay S can easily set up the procedure in the industrial automation, which is the most basic device in
the the sequential function chart (SFC) and has to be used with STL, RET instructions.
The device No. of S is S0 ~ S1023 (total 1,024 points) and both step relay S and output relay Y have output coils
and contact A, B, and there is no limitation on the times of using the contact. S cannot directly drive the external load.
When the step relay is not used in SFC, it can be used as a normal auxiliary relay. There are four types of step relays:
1. Initial step relay: S0 ~ S9, total 10 points, used for initial steps.
2. Zero return step relay: S10 ~ S19, total 10 points. S10 ~ S19 are planned for zero return when used with API 60
IST instruction in the program. If they are not used with IST, they will become normal step relays.
3. General purpose step relay: S20 ~ S511, total 492 points (for SA/SX/SC series MPU); S20 ~ S499, total 480
points (for EH/EH2/SV series MPU). Used for general purposes in SFC and their status will all be cleared when
the operation of the PLC encounters power cut.
4. Latched step relay: S512 ~ S895, total 384 points (for SA/SX/SC series MPU); S20 ~ S127, total 108 points (for
ES/EX/SS series MPU); S500 ~ S899, total 400 points (for EH/EH2/SV series MPU). Used for latched function in
SFC and their status will all be retained when the operation of the PLC encounters power cut. They will remain at
the status before the power cut when the PLC is powered again.
5. Alarm step relay: S896 ~ S1023, total 128 points (for SA/SX/SC series MPU); S900 ~ S1023, total 124 points
(for EH/EH2/SV series MPU). Used with alarm driving instruction API 46 ANS as an alarm contact for recording
the alarm messages or eliminating external malfunctions.
2.6 Numbering and Functions of Timers [T]
No. of timers (in decimal)

100ms general purpose T0 ~ T63, 64 points
10ms general purpose T64 ~ T126, 63 points (M1028 = On:10ms; M1028 = Off:100ms) Total
Timer T
128 points
1ms general purpose T127, 1 point


T0 ~ T199, 200 points. T192 ~ T199 are the timers for subroutine. Fixed to
100ms general purpose
be non-latched
100ms accumulative T250 ~ T255, 6 points. Fixed to be latched. Total
Time T
10ms general purpose T200 ~ T239, 40 points. Fixed to be non-latched 256 points
10ms accumulative T240 ~ T245, 6 points. Fixed to be latched.
T0 ~ T199, 200 points. Can be latched by setting up parameters.
100ms general purpose
T192 ~ T199 are the timers for subroutine.
100ms accumulative T250 ~ T255, 6 points. Fixed to be latched. Total
Timer T
10ms general purpose T200 ~ T239, 40 points. Can be latched by setting up parameters. 256 points
Functions of timers:
The units of the timer are 1ms, 10ms and 100ms and the counting method is counting up. When the present
value in the timer equals the set value, the output coil will be On. The set value should be a K value in decimal and the
data register D can also be a set value.
The actual set time in the timer = timing unit × set value
There are three types of timers:

1. General purpose timer:
For ES/SA series MPU: The timer executes once when the program reaches END instruction. When TMR
instruction is executed, the output coil will be On when the timing reaches its target.
For EH/EH2/SV series MPU: The timer executes once when the program reaches TMR instruction. When TMR
X0 When X0 = On, The PV in timer T0 will count up by
TMR T0 K100
100ms. When the PV = SV K100, the output coil T0
T0
will be On.
Y0
When X0 = Off or the power is off, the PV in timer T0
10 secs
will be cleared as 0, and the output coil T0 will be
Off.
X0
SV K100
T0 PV
Y0
2. Accumulative type timer:
For ES/SA series MPU: The timer executes once when the program reaches END instruction. When TMR
For EH/EH2/SV series MPU: The timer executes once when the program reaches TMR instruction. When TMR

X0
When X0 = On, The PV in timer T250 will count up
T MR T 250 K100
by 100ms. When the PV = SV K100, the output coil
T 250
Y0 T0 will be On.
When X0 = Off or the power is off, timer T250 will
T1 T2 T 1+ T2=10sec
temporarily stop the timing and the PV remain
X0 unchanged. When X0 is On again, the timing will
SV K100 resume and the PV will count up and when the PV =
T 250 PV
SV K100, the output coil T0 will be On.
Y0
3. Subrountine timer:
Timer T192 ~ T199 are used in subrountines or interruption subroutines.
For SA series MPU: The timer executes once when the program reaches END instruction. When END instruction
is executed, the output coil will be On when the timing reaches its target.
For EH/EH2/SV series MPU: The timer executes once when the program reaches TMR or END instruction. When
TMR or END instruction is executed, the output coil will be On when the PV equals SV.
If the general purpose timer is used in a subroutine or interruption subroutine but the subroutine is not being
executed, the timer will not be able to time correctly.
How to designate SV: The actual set time in the timer = timing unit × set value
a) Designating constant K: SV is a constant K

b) Indirectly designating D: SV is data register D
2.7 Numbering and Functions of Counters [C]
No. of counters (in decimal)

16-bit counting up, for
C0 ~ C111, 112 points. Fixed to be non-latched.
general purpose
Counter C
C112 ~ C127, 16 points. Fixed to be latched.
latched Total
C235 ~ C238, C241, C242, C244, 7 points. Fixed to be 141 points
1-phase 1 input
32-bit counting up/down latched.
high-speed counter C 1-phase 2 inputs C246, C247, C249, 3 points. Fixed to be latched.
2-phase 2 inputs C251, C252, C254, 3 points. Fixed to be latched.

C0 ~ C95, 96 points. Fixed to be non-latched.
general purpose
16-bit counting up, for C96 ~ C199, 104 points. Can be modified to be non-latched
latched by setting up parameters.
Total
Counter C 32-bit counting
235 points
up/down, for general C200 ~ C215, 16 points. Fixed to be non-latched.
purpose
32-bit counting C216 ~ C234, 19 points. Can be modified to be non-latched
up/down, for latched by setting up parameters.

1-phase 1 input, for

C235 ~ C242, C244, 9 points
latched
(SA/SX) 32-bit counting
1-phase 2 inputs, for Total 16
up/down high-speed C246, C247, C249, 3 points
latched points
counter C
2-phase 2 inputs, for
C251 ~ C254, 4 points Can be modified to be
latched
non-latched by setting up
1-phase 1 input, for
C235 ~ C245, 11 points parameters.
latched
(SC) 32-bit counting
1-phase 2 inputs, for Total 19
up/down high-speed C246 ~ C250, 4 points
latched points
counter C
2-phase 2 inputs, for
C251 ~ C255, 4 points
latched

16-bit counting up, for C0 ~ C99, 100 points. Can be modified to be latched by
general purpose setting up parameters.
16-bit counting up, for C100 ~ C199, 100 points. Can be modified to be non-latched
latched area by setting up parameters.
Counter C 32-bit counting
C200 ~ C219, 20 points. Can be modified to be latched by
up/down, for general
setting up parameters.
purpose
32-bit counting C220 ~ C234, 15 points. Can be modified to be non-latched
Total
up/down, for latched by setting up parameters.
253 points
Software 1-phase 1
C235 ~ C240, 6 points
input
Hardware 1-phase 1
C241 ~ C244, 4 points Can be modified to be
32-bit counting up/down input
non-latched by setting up
high-speed counter C Hardware 1-phase 2
C246 ~ C249, 4 points parameters.
inputs
Hardware 2-phase 2
C251 ~ C254, 4 points
inputs
Features of counter:
16 bits counters 32 bits counters

Type General purpose General purpose High speed
Counting direction Counting up Counting up, counting down
Set value 0 ~ 32,767 -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647
SV designation Constant K or data register D Constant K or data register D (designating 2 values)
Counting will stop when the SV is
Present value Counter will continue when the SV is reached.
reached.
On and being retained when the On and keeps being On when counting up reaches SV.
Output contact
counting reaches SV. Reset to Off when counting down reaches SV.
Reset PV will be return to 0 when RST instruction is executed and the contact will be reset to Off.
Acts immediately when the
Acts when the scanning is counting reaches its target,
Contact action Acts when the scanning is completed.
completed. has nothing to do with the scan
period.
Functions of counters:
When the pulse input signals of the counter go from Off to On and the present value in the counter equals the
set value, the output coil will be On. The set value should be a K value in decimal and the data register D can also be
a set value.
16-bit counters C0 ~ C199:
1. The setup range of 16-bit counter: K0 ~ K32,767. K0 is the same as K1. The output contact will be On
immediately when the first counting starts.
2. PV in the general purpose counter will be cleared when the power of the PLC is switched off. If the counter is a
latched type, the counter will retain the PV and contact status before the power is off and resume the counting

after the power is on again.

3. If you use MOV instruction, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value bigger than the SV to the present value register of
C0, next time when X1 goes from Off to On, the contact of counter C0 will be On and its PV will equal SV.
4. The SV in the counter can be constant K (set up directly) or the values in register D (set up indirectly, excluding
special data registers D1000~ D1999).
5. If you set up a constant K as the SV, it should be a positive value. Data register D as SV can be positive or
negative. When the PV reaches up to 32,767, the next PV will turn to -32,768.
Example:
LD X0
RST C0 X0
RST C0
LD X1 X1
CNT C0 K5 CNT C0 K5
C0
LD C0
Y0
OUT Y0
a) When X0 = On, RST instruction will be

executed, PV in C0 will be “0” and the X0
output contact will be reset to Off.

X1
b) When X1 goes from Off to On, the PV in
the counter will count up (plus 1). 5
4
SV
c) When the counting of C0 reaches SV K5, 3
2
the contact of C0 will be On and PV of C0 PV in C0 1
= SV = K5. The X1 trigger signal comes 0 0
afterwards will not be accepted by C0 and Contacts Y0, C0

the PV of C0 will stay at K5.
32-bit general purpose addition/subtraction counters C200 ~ C234:
1. The setup range of 32-bit counter: K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (not available for ES/EX/SS series MPU).
2. Addition or subtraction of the counters is designated by On/Off status of special auxiliary relays M1200 ~ M1234.
For example, when M1200 = Off, C200 will be an addition counter; when M1200 = On, C200 will be a subtraction
counter.
3. The SV can be constant K or data register D (excluding special data registers D1000 ~ D1999). Data register D as
SV can be a positive or negative value and an SV will occupy two consecutive data registers.
4. PV in the general purpose counter will be cleared when the power of the PLC is switched off. If the counter is a
latched type, the counter will retain the PV and contact status before the power is off and resume the counting
after the power is on again.
5. When the PV reaches up to 2,147,483,647, the next PV will turn to -2,147,483,648. When the PV reaches down to
-2,147,483,648, the next PV will turn to 2,147,483,647.

Example:
LD X10
X10
OUT M1200 M1200
LD X11 X11
RST C200 RST C200
X12
LD X12
DCNT C200 K-5
CNT C200 K-5
C200
LD C200 Y0
OUT Y0
a) X10 drives M1200 to determine
whether C200 is an addition or
subtraction counter.
b) When X11 goes from Off to On, RST
instsruction will be executed and the
Accumulatively Accumulatively
PV in C200 will be cleared to “0” and X10 increasing Progressively increasing
decreasing
the contact will be Off. X11
c) When X12 goes from Off to On, the PV
X12
in the counter will count up (plus 1) or
5
4 4
count down (minus 1). 3 3
2 2
d) When the PV in C200 changes from PV in 1 1
C200 0 0 0
K-6 to K-5, the contact of C200 will go -1
-2
from Off to On. When the PV in C200 -3 -3
-4 -4
changes from K-5 to K-6, the contact of -5 -5
When the output contact -6 -6
C200 will go from On to Off. was On. -7 -7
Contacts -8
e) If you use MOV instruction, WPLSoft Y0, C0
or HPP to send a value bigger than the

SV to the present value register of C0,
next time when X1 goes from Off to
On, the contact of counter C0 will be
On and its PV will equal SV.
32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counters C235 ~ C255:
1. The setup range of 32-bit counter: K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647
2. Addition or subtraction of C235 ~ C244 is designated by On/Off status of special auxiliary relays M1235 ~ M1244.
counter.
3. Addition or subtraction of C246 ~ C255 is designated by On/Off status of special auxiliary relays M1246 ~ M1255.
counter.
4. The SV can be constant K or data register D (excluding special data registers D1000 ~ D1999). Data register D

as SV can be a positive or negative value and an SV will occupy two consecutive data registers.
5. If using DMOV instruction, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value which is large than the setting to any high-speed
counter, next time when the input point X of the counter goes from Off to On, this contact will remain unchanged
and it will perform addition and subtraction with the present value.
6. When the PV reaches up to 2,147,483,647, the next PV will turn to -2,147,483,648. When the PV reaches down
to -2,147,483,648, the next PV will turn to 2,147,483,647.
High-speed counters for ES/EX/SS series MPU, total bandwidth: 20KHz

Type 1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase 2 inputs
Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254
X0 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A A
X1 U/D R R D D D B B B
X2 U/D U/D R R R R
X3 U/D R S S S
U: Progressively increasing input A: A phase input S: Input started
D: Progressively decreasing input B: B phase input R: Input cleared
1. Input points X0 and X1 can be planned as counters of higher speed with 1-phase 1 input reaching 20KHz. But the
two counting frequencies added together has to be smaller or equal 20KHz. If the input is a 2-phase 2 input signal,
the counting frequency will be approximately 4KHz. The 1-phase input of high-speed counters X2 and X3 and
reach 10KHz.
2. The use of DHSCS instruction together with DHSCR instruction in ES series MPU cannot exceed 4 times.
High-speed counters for SA/SX series MPU, total bandwidth: 40KHz

Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254
X0 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A B A
X1 U/D R R D D D B B A B
X2 U/D U/D R R R R
X3 U/D R S S S
X4 U/D
X5 U/D
1. The frequency of input points X0 and X1 of 1-phase input can reach up to 20KHz, X2 ~ X5 can reach 10KHz. The
frequency of C251, C252 and C254 of 2-phase input (X0, X1) can reach up to 4KHz. The maximum frequency of
C253 is 25KHz (only supports 4 times frequency counting).
2. Input point X5 has two functions:
a) When M1260 = Off, C240 will be normal U/D high-speed counter.
b) When M1260 = On and DCNT instruction enables C240, X5 will be the shared reset signal for C235 ~ C239.
Counter C240 will continue to receive the input signals from X5.

High-speed counters for SC series MPU, total bandwidth: 130KHz

Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C245 C246 C247 C249 C250 C251 C252 C254 C255
X2 U/D U/D R R R R
X3 U/D R S S S
X4 U/D
X5 U/D
X10 U/D U A
X11 U/D D B
1. The functions of high-speed counters of input points X0 ~ X5 are the same of those in SA/SX series MPU.
2. The maximum frequency of the input points X10 (C243), X11 (C245) and (X10, X11)(C250) of 1-phase input is
100KHz. The total bandwidth of X10 ~ X11 high-speed counting is 130KHz. The maximum input frequency of
C255 (2-phase input X10, X11) is 50KHz.
3. The use of DHSCS instruction together with DHSCR instruction in SA/SX/SC series MPU cannot exceed 6 times.
The use of DHSZ instruction cannot exceed 6 times as well. When DHSCS instruction designates I interruption,
the designated high-speed counter cannot be used in DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ instruction.
4. Functions of high-speed counters X10 ~ X11 in SC series MPU:
a) When X10 and X11 are set to be 1-phase 1 input or 1-phase 2 outputs, the maximum frequency can reach
100KHz. When set to be 2-phase 2 inputs, the maximum frequency can reach 50KHz.
b) X10 and X11 can be set to be rising-edge or falling-edge counting. X10 is set by D1166 and X11 by D1167. K0:
rising-edge counting; K1: falling-edge counting; K2: rising-/falling-edge counting (only available in X10).
c) Counting up or down of C243 is determined by On/Off status of M1243 anc that of C245 is determined by
On/Off of M1245. Rising-edge and falling-edge countings cannot be performed at the same time. Rising edge
or falling edge of C250 is determined by the content (K0 or K1) in D1166. C255 can only be used in 4 times
frequency counting and rising-edge and falling-edge triggers are not available for C255.
d) When you use C243 or C245, you will not be able to use C250 or C255, and vice versa.
e) High-speed counter and high-speed comparator:
Output reached
X10 comparison value
C243
X11 S V 10
C245
S V 11
C250
C255
f) Explanations on high-speed counter and high-speed comparator:

(i) When DHSCS and DHSCR instructions use new added high-speed counters, they can only use two
groups of SVs in high speed comparison instruction. Assume you have used the comparison instruction
DHSCS D0 C243 Y10, you can only set another group of instruction DHSCR D2 C243 Y10 or DHSCS D4
C245 Y10.

(ii) When DHSZ instruction uses new added high-speed counters, it can only use one group of SV in the
comparator.
(iii) The number of SVs in high speed comparison instructions offered by SA/SX series MPU will not decrease
owing to the increasing of high-speed counters.
(iv) If the output device of the high-speed comparison instruction DHSCS requires high-speed output, it is
recommended you use Y10 or Y11 for the output. If you use other general devices, the output will delay
for 1 scan period for its setup or clearing. For example, if I0x0 interruption is set, C243 will correspond to
I020, C245 to I040, and C250 and C255 to I060.
(v) The high speed comparison instruction DHSCR is able to clear the counter, but only the counters used in
the same instruction, e.g. DHSCR K10 C243 C243. This function only applies to 4 special high-speed
counters C243, C245, C250 and C255.
5. Counting modes:
a) The 2-phase 2 inputs counting mode of the high speed counters in ES/EX/SS (V5.5 and above) and
SA/SX/SC series MPU is set by special D1022 with normal frequency, double frequency and 4 times
frequency modes. The contents in D1022 will be loaded in in the first scan when PLC is switched from STOP
to RUN.
Device No. Function

D1022 Setting up the multiplied frequency of the counter
D1022 = K1 Normal frequency mode selected
D1022 = K2 or 0 Double frequency mode selected (default)
D1022 = K4 4 times frequency mode selected
b) Multiplied frequency mode (qr indicates the occurrence of counting)
Counting mode Counting wave pattern
A-phase
frequency)
(Normal
B-phase
1
Counting up Counting down
A-phase
2-phase 2 inputs
frequency)
(Double
B-phase
2
A-phase
frequency)
(4 times
B-phase
4
EH/EH2/SV series MPU supports high speed counters. C235 ~ C240 are program-interruption 1-phase high

speed counter with a total bandwidth of 20KHz, can be used alone with a counting frequency of up to 10KHz. C241 ~
C254 are hardware high speed counter (HHSC). There are four HHSC in EH/EH2/SV series MPU, HHSC0 ~ 3. The
pulse input frequency of HHSC0 and HHSC1 can reach 200KHz and that of HHSC2 and HHSC3 can reach 20KHz (1
phase or A-B phase). The pulse input frequency of HHSC0 ~ 3 of 40EH2 series MPU can reach 200KHz, among
which:
C241, C246 and C251 share HHSC0
1. Every HHSC can only be designated to one counter by DCNT instruction.
2. There are three counting modes in every HHSC (see the table below):
a) 1-phase 1 input refers to “pulse/direction” mode.
b) 1-phase 2 inputs refers to “clockwise/counterclockwise (CW/CCW)” mode.
c) 2-phase 2 inputs refers to “A-B phase” mode.
Program-interruption
Counter type Hardware high speed counter
high speed counter
Type
1-phase 1 input 1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase 2 inputs
C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C246 C247 C248 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254
Input
X0 U/D U/D U A
X1 U/D D B
X2 U/D R R R
X3 U/D S S S
X4 U/D U/D U A
X5 U/D D B
X6 R R R
X7 S S S
X10 U/D U A
X11 D B
X12 R R R
X13 S S S
X14 U/D U A
X15 D B
X16 R R R
X17 S S S

B: Progressively decreasing input B: B phase input R: Input cleared
3. System structure of the hardware high speed counters:

a) HHSC0 ~ 3 have reset signals and start signals from external inputs. Settings in M1272, M1274, M1276 and
M1278 are reset signals of HHSC0, HHSC1, HHSC2 and HHSC3. Settings in M1273, M1275, M1277 and
M1279 are start signals of HHSC0, HHSC1, HHSC2 and HHSC3.
b) If the external control signal inputs of R and S are not in use, you can set M1264/M1266/M1268/M1270 and
M1265/M1267/M1269/M1271 as True and disable the input signals. The corresponding external inputs can
be used again as general input points (see the figure below).
c) When special M is used as a high speed counter, the inputs controlled by START and RESET will be affected
by the scan time.
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 U/D Present value in counter Counting reaches set value
Counting pulses U HHSC0
X0 X4 X10 X14
A
HHSC1
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 Comparator 8 set values
HHSC2
X5 Counting pulses D
X1 X11 X15
B HHSC3
DHSCS occupies 1 group of set values

HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 Output reaches DHSCR occupies 1 group of set values
Counting up/down comparative value DHSCZ occupies 2 groups of set values
D1225 D1226 D1227 D1228 Select counting m odes monitoring flag for outputs
Set values 1 ~ 4 indicate
Mode 1 ~ 4 (1 ~ 4 times frequency)
High-speed Output reaches

HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 U/D mode setup flag HHSC0 M1246 M1251 comparative
instruction comparative value
C241 C242 C243 C244 HHSC1 M1247 M1252
M1241 M1242 M1243 M1244 DHSCS SE T/RESET
HHSC2 M1248 M1253 DHSCR I 010 ~ I 060 clear
the present value
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 HHSC3 M1249 M1254 DHSCZ
X2 X6 X12 X16
AND Reset signal R Interruption forbidden flag
M1264 M1266 M1268 M1270 OR
I 010 M1289
I 020 M1290
I 030 M1291
M1272 M1274 M1276 M1278
I 040 M1292
I 050 M1293
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 I 060 M1294
X3 X7 X13 X17
AND Start signal S
M1265 M1267 M1269 M1271 OR
M1273 M1275 M1277 M1279
4. Counting modes:
The counting modes of the hardware high-speed counters in EH/EH2/SV series MPU can be set in D1225 ~
D1228.
Counting modes Wave pattern
Set value in
Type Counting up(+1) Counting down(-1)
special D
1 U/D
(Normal
frequency) U/D FLAG
1-phase
1 input 2 U/D
(Double
frequency) U/D FLAG
1 U
(Normal
frequency) D
1-phase
2 inputs 2 U
(Double
frequency) D

1 A
(Normal
frequency) B
2 A
(Double
2-phase frequency) B
2 inputs 3 A
(Triple
frequency) B
4 A
(4 times
frequency) B
5. Special registers for relevant flags and settings of high speed counters:
Flag Function
M1150 DHSZ instruction in multiple set values comparison mode
M1151 The execution of DHSZ multiple set values comparison mode is completed.
M1152 Set DHSZ instruction as frequency control mode
M1153 DHSZ frequency control mode has been executed.
Designating the counting direction of high speed counters C235 ~ C245
M1235 ~ M1244 When M12□□ = Off, C2□□ will perform a counting up.
When M12□□ = On, C2□□ will perform a counting down.
M1245~ M1255 When M12□□ = Off, C2□□ will perform a counting up.
M1160 X5 as the reset input signal of all high speed counters
M1261 High-speed comparison flag for DHSCR instruction
M1264 Disable the external control signal input point of HHSC0 reset signal point (R)
M1265 Disable the external control signal input point of HHSC0 start signal point (S)
M1272 Internal control signal input point of HHSC0 reset signal point (R)
M1273 Internal control signal input point of HHSC0 start signal point (S)
M1289 High speed counter I010 interruption forbidden

Flag Function
M1312 C235 Start input point control
M1320 C235 Reset input point control
M1328 Enable Start/Reset of C235
Multiplied frequency of A-B phase counters for ES/EX/SS and SA/SX/SC
D1022
series MPU
D1150 Table counting register for DHSZ multiple set values comparison mode
D1151 Register for DHSZ instruction frequency control mode (counting by table)
D1152 (low word) In frequency control mode, DHSZ reads the upper and lower limits in the table
D1153 (high word) counting register D1153 and D1152.
Switching between rising/falling edge counting modes of X10 (for SC_V1.4
D1166
series MPU only)
Switching between rising/falling edge counting modes of X11 (for SC_V1.4
D1167
series MPU only)
D1225 The counting mode of the 1st group counters (C241, C246, C251)
D1226 The counting mode of the 2nd group counters (C242, C247, C252)
D1227 The counting mode of the 3rd group counters (C243, C248, C253)
D1228 The counting mode of the 4th group counters (C244, C249, C254)

Flag Function
Counting modes of HHSC0 ~ HHSC3 in EH/EH2/SV series MPU (default = 2)
1: Normal frequency counting mode
D1225 ~ D1228 2: Double frequency counting mode
3: Triple frequency counting mode
4: 4 times frequency counting mode
1-phase 1 input high-speed counter

Example:
LD X10 X10
RST C241 RST C241
LD X11 X11
OUT M1241 M1241
X12
LD X12
DCNT C241 K5
DCNT C241 K5 C241
LD C241 Y0
OUT Y0
1. X11 drives M1241 to determine whether C241 is an addition or subtraction counter.
2. When X10 is On, RST instsruction will be executed and the PV in C241 will be cleared to “0” and the contact will
be Off.
3. In C241, when X12 is On and C241 receives the signals from X0, the PV in the counter will count up (plus 1) or
count down (minus 1).
4. When the counting of C241 reaches SV K5, the contact of C241 will be On. If there are still input signals from X0,
the counting will continue.
5. C241 in ES/EX/SS and SA/SX/SC series MPU has external input signals to reset X1.
6. C241 in EH/EH2/SV series MPU has external input signals to reset X2 and start X3.
7. The external input contact of reset signal of C241 (HHSC0) in EH/EH2/SV series MPU is disabled by M1264. The
external input contact of start signal is disabled by M1265.
8. The internal input contact of reset signal of C241 (HHSC0) in EH/EH2/SV series MPU is disabled by M1272. The
internal input contact of start signal is disabled by M1273.
9. The counting modes (normal frequency or double frequency) of C246 (HHSC0) in EH/EH2/SV series MPU can be
set up by D1225. The default setting is double frequency mode.

Counting down
Contact X11, M1241 Counting up
X10
X12
X0
PV in C241
7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 0
1
0
Contact Y0, C241
1-phase 2 inputs high-speed counter

Example:
LD X10 X10
RST C246 RST C246
LD X11 X11
DCNT C246 K5
DCNT C246 K5
C246
LD C246 Y0
OUT Y0
1. When X10 is On, RST instsruction will be

X10
executed. The PV in C246 will be cleared to
X11
“0” and the output contact will be reset to be
X0
Off. Counting up
X1
2. In C246, when X11 is On and C246 receives Counting down
the signals from X0, the PV in the counter will
7
count up (plus 1) or count down (minus 1). PV in 6 6
C246 5 5
3. When the counting of C246 reaches SV K5, 4 4
3 3
the contact of C246 will be On. If there are 2 0
1
still input signals from X0, the counting will 0
continue. Contact Y0, C246
4. C246 in EH/EH2/SV series MPU has external

input signals to reset X2 and start X3.
5. The counting modes (normal frequency or double frequency) of C246 (HHSC0) in EH/EH2/SV series MPU
can be set up by D1225. The default setting is double frequency mode.
6. The external input contact of reset signal of C246 (HHSC0) in EH/EH2/SV series MPU is disabled by M1264.
The external input contact of start signal is disabled by M1265.
7. The internal input contact of reset signal of C246 (HHSC0) in EH/EH2/SV series MPU is disabled by M1272.
The internal input contact of start signal is disabled by M1273.

2-phase AB input high-speed counter

Example:
LD X10
X10
RST C251 RST C251
LD X11 X11
DCNT C251 K5
DCNT C251 K5
C251
LD C251 Y0
OUT Y0
1. When X10 is On, RST instsruction will be executed. The PV in C251 will be cleared to “0” and the output contact
will be reset to be Off.
2. In C251, when X11 is On and C251 receives the A-phase signals from X0 and B-phase signals from X1, the PV
in the counter will count up (plus 1) or count down (minus 1). You can select different counting modes if you use
EH/EH2/SV series MPU.
3. When the counting of C251 reaches SV K5, the contact of C251 will be On. If there are still input signals coming
in, the counting will continue.
4. The counting modes (normal frequency, double frequency or 4 times frequency) of C251 (HHSC0) in ES/SA
series MPU can be set up by D1022. The default setting is double frequency mode.
5. C251 in EH/EH2/SV series MPU has external input signals to reset X2 and start X3.
6. The counting modes (normal frequency, double frequency, triple frequency or 4 times frequency) of C251
(HHSC0) in EH/EH2/SV series MPU can be set up by D1225. The default setting is double frequency mode.
7. The external input contact of reset signal of C246 (HHSC0) in EH/EH2/SV series MPU is disabled by M1264.
The external input contact of start signal is disabled by M1265.
8. The internal input contact of reset signal of C246 (HHSC0) in EH/EH2/SV series MPU is disabled by M1272.
The internal input contact of start signal is disabled by M1273.
ES/EX/SS and SA/SX/SC series MPU (double frequency)

X10
X11
A-phase X0
B-phase X1
6
PV in C251 5 5
4 4
3 3 3
2 2
1 Counting up Counting down 1
0 0
Contact Y0, C251
EH/EH2/SV series MPU (double frequency)

X10
X11
A-phase X0
B-phase X1
6
5 5
PV in C251 4 4
3 3
2 2 2
1 Counting up Counting down 1
0 0
Contact Y0, C251
2.8 Numbering and Functions of Registers [D], [E], [F]
2.8.1 Data register [D]
A data register is for storing a 16-bit datum of values between -32,768 to +32,767. The highest bit is “+” or “-"
sign. Two 16-bit registers can be combined into a 32-bit register (D + 1; D of smaller No. is for lower 16 bits). The
highest b it is “+” or “-” sign and it can store a 32-bit datum of values between -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647.

General purpose D0 ~ D407, 408 points
Latched D408 ~ D599, 192 points. Fixed to be latched. Total
Data register D
Special purpose D1000 ~ D1143, 144 points. Some are latched. 744 points
Index register E, F E, F, 2 points

General purpose D0 ~ D199, 200 points. Fixed to be non-latched.
D200 ~ D999, D2000 ~ D4999, 3,800 points. Total
Latched 5,000
Data register D Can be modified to be non-latched by setting up parameter.
Special purpose D1000 ~ D1999, 1,000 points. Some are latched. points
Index register E, F E0 ~ E3, F0 ~ F3, 8 points
1,600
File register K0 ~ K1,599, MPU 1,600 points. Fixed to be latched.
points

D0 ~ D199, 200 points. Can be modified to be latched by setting up
General purpose
parameters.
D200 ~ D999, D2000 ~ D9999, 8,800 points. Can be modified to be Total

Data register D Latched 10,000
non-latched by setting up parameters.
points
Special purpose D1000 ~ D1999, 1,000 pints. Some are latched.
Index register E, F E0 ~ E7, F0 ~ F7, 16 points.
10,000
File register K0 ~ K9,999, MPU 10,000 points. Fixed to be latched.
points
There are five types of registers:

1. General purpose register: When PLC goes from RUN to STOP or the power of the PLC is switched off, the data
in the register will be cleared to “0”. When M1033 = On and PLC goes from RUN to STOP, the data will not be
cleared, but will still be cleared to “0” when the power is off.

2. Latched register: When the power of PLC is switched off, the data in the register will not be cleared but will retain
at the value before the power is off. You can use RST or ZRST instruction to clear the data in the latched register.
3. Special purpose register: Every register of this kind has its special definition and purpose, mainly for storing the
system status, error messages and monitored status. See 2.10 and 2.11 for more details.
4. Index register E, F: The index register is a 16-bit register. There are 2 points of E, F in ES/EX/SS series MPU; 8
points (E0 ~ E3, F0 ~ F3) in SA/SX/SC series MPU; 16 points (E0 ~ E7, F0 ~ F7) in EH/EH2/SV series MPU. If the
index register is to be used as a 32-bit register, please designate E. When E is already designated in a 32-bit
instruction, using also F will not be allowed.
5. File register: There are 1,600 file registers (K0 ~ K1,599) in SA/SX/SC series MPU and 10,000 file registers (K0
~ K9,999) in EH/EH2/SV series MPU. The file register does not have an exact device No.; therefore the read/write
function of file registers has to be executed by instruction API 148 MEMR, API 149 MEMW or through peripheral
devices HPP and WPLSoft.
2.8.2 Index Register [E], [F]
Index registers E, F are 16-bit data registers and can be written and
read.
16 bits 16 bits
If you need to use a 32-bit register, you have to designate E. In this
F0 E0
case, F will be covered by E and cannot be used anymore; otherwise,
32 bits the content in E (32-bit) will be incorrect. We suggest you use DMOVP
K0 E instruction, the content in E (including F) will be cleared to “0”
F0 E0
when the power of PLC is switched on.
Higher 16 bits Lower 16 bits
The combination of E, F when you use a 32-bit index register:
(F0, E0), (F1, E1), (F2, E2), …(F7, E7)
X0
MOV K8 E0 When X0 = On, E0 = 8, F0 = 14, D5E0 = D (5 + 8) = D13, D10F0 = D
(10 + 14) = D24. At this moment, the content in D13 will be moved to
MOV K14 F0
D24.
MOV D5E0 D10F0
The index register is the same as normal operands, can be used for moving or comparison on word devicies (KnX,
KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D) and bit devices (X, Y, M, S). ES/SA series MPU does not support constant (K, H) index
register, but EH/EH2/SV series MPU supports constant (K, H) index register.
ES/EX/SS series MPU has 2 points of index registers E0, F0
SA/SX/SC series MPU has 8 points of index registers E0 ~ E3, F0 ~ F3
EH/EH2/SV series MPU has 16 points of index registers E0 ~ E7, F0 ~ F7
Some instructions do not support index registers. For how to use index register E, F to modify the operands, see
Chapter 5.4 for more details.
When you use the instruction mode in WPLSoft to generate constant (K, H) index register function, please use
symbol “@”. For example, “MOV K10@E0 D0F0”

When you use index register E, F to modify the operands, the modification range CANNOT exceed the range of
special purpose registers D1000 ~ D1999 and special auxiliary registers M1000 ~ M1999 in case errors may occur.
2.8.3 Functions and Features of File Registers
When the power of PLC is switched on, SA/SX/SC and EH/EH2/SV series MPU will check the following devices:
1. M1101 (whether the file register is enabled)
2. D1101 (No. of file registers in SA/SX/SC series MPU: K0 ~ K1,599; No. of file registers in EH/EH2/SV series MPU:
K0 ~ K9,999)
3. D1102 (Number of file registers to be read in SA/SX/SC series MPU: K0 ~ K1,600; number of file registers to be
read in EH/EH2/SV series MPU: K0 ~ K8,000)
4. D1103 (devices for storing the data read from file registers; the No. of designated data register D starts from
K2,000 ~ K9,999; determining whether to automatically send the content in the file register to the designated data
register.)
Note:
1. When D1101 of SA/SX/SC series MPU is bigger than 1,600, D1101 of EH/EH2/SV series MPU is bigger than
8,000 and D1103 is smaller than 2,000 or bigger than 9,999, the data read from file registers will not be sent to
data register D.
2. When the program starts to send the data read from the file register to data register D and the address of the file
register or the data register D exceed their ranges, PLC will stop the reading.
3. There are 1,600 file registers in SA/SX/SC series MPU and 10,000 in EH/EH2/SV series MPU. The file register
does not have an exact device No.; therefore the read/write function of file registers has to be executed by
instruction API 148 MEMR, API 149 MEMW or through peripheral devices HPP and WPLSoft.
4. If you tend to read a file register with an address that is not within the range, the read value will be “0”.
2.9 Pointer [N], Pointer [P], Interruption Pointer [I]

Control point of master
N For master control loop N0 ~ N7, 8 points
control loop
Position pointer of CJ,
CALL
Pointer External interruption I001, I101, I201, I301, 4 points
I6□□, 1 point (□□＝10 ~ 99, time base = 1ms) Position pointer of
I Interruption Timed interruption
(for V5.7) interruption subroutine
Communication
I150, 1 point
interrupt

N Master control loop N0 ~ N7, 8 points
control loop
CALL
External interruption I001, I101, I201, I301, I401, I501, 6 points
Pointer
I6□□, I7□□, 2 points (□□ = 1 ~ 99, time
Timer interruption
base = 1ms) Position pointer of
I Interruption
High-speed counter interruption subroutine
I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points
interruption
Communication
I150, 1 point
interruption

Note: Among the 6 pairs of interruption No. (I001, I010), (I101, I020), (I201, I030), (I301, I040), (I401, I050), (I501, I060), only 1 No.
in the pair is allowed to be used in the program. If you use both No. in the pair and write them into the program, there may be
syntax errors occurring.

N Master control loop N0 ~ N7, 8 points
control loop
CALL
I00□(X0), I10□(X1), I20□(X2), I30□(X3), I40□
(X4), I50□(X5), 6 points
External interruption
(□ = 1, rising-edge trigger , □ = 0,
falling-edge trigger )
I6□□, I7□□, 2 points (□□ = 1 ~ 99, time
base = 1ms)
Pointer Timed interruption
I8□□, 1 point (□□ = 1 ~ 99, time base =
0.1ms) Position pointer of
I Interruption High-speed counter
I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points interruption subroutine
interruption
Pulse interruption I110, I120, I130, I140, 4 points
Communication
I150, I160, I170, 3 points
interruption
Frequency
measurement card I180, 1 point
triggered interruption
Note: Input point X as a high-speed counter cannot be used as an external interruption signal. For example, if C251 occupies X0,
X1, X2 and X3, the external input interruption No. I00□(X0), I10□(X1), I20□(X2), and I30□(X3) cannot be used.
Pointer N: Used with MC and MCR instructions. MC is the master control start instruction. When MC instruction is
executer, the instructions between MC and MCR will still be executed normally. See Chapter 3 explanations on MC
and MCR instructions for more details.
Pointer P: Used with API 00 CJ, API 01 CALL and API 02 SRET. See Chapter 6 explanations on CJ, CALL and SRET
instructions for more details.
CJ Conditional Jump:
When X0 = On, the program will jump from
P**
X0
address 0 to N (designated label P1) and keep
0 CJ P1
on the execution. The addresses in the middle
X1
will be ignored.
Y1
X2 When X0 = Off, the program will execute from
P1 N Y2 address 0 and keep on executing. At this time,
CJ instruction will not be executed.

CALL Call Subroutine, SRET Subroutine Return:
X0
P*** When X0 = On, CALL instruction will be
20 CALL P2 Call subroutine P*** executed and the program will jump to P2 and
X1
executed the designated subroutine. When
24 Y1
SRET instruction is executed, the program will
FEND return to address 24 and keep on the execution.
P2 Y0
Subroutine P2
Y0
SRET Subroutine return
END
Interruption Pointer I: Used with API 04 EI, API 05 DI, API 03 IRET. See Chapter 5.5 for more details. There are 6
types of interruption pointer. To insert an interruption, you have to combine the action with EI (enable interruption), DI
(disable interruption), IRET (interruption return) instructions.
1. External interruption: Due to the special hardware design inside the MPU, the input signals coming in at input
terminals X0 ~ X5 when rising-edge or falling-edge triggers will not be affected by the scan cycle. The currently
executed program will be interrupted immediately and the execution will jump to the designated interruption
subroutine pointer I00□(X0), I10□(X1), I20□(X2), I30□(X3), I40□(X4), I50□(X5). Till the execution reaches
IRET instruction, the program will return to the original position and keep on its execution.
In SA/SX series MPU, X0 (pulse input point) works with X4 (external interruption point), corresponding to C235,
C251 and C253 work with I401, which will be able to interrupt and intercept the present value in the high-speed
counter. D1181 is the device to store the 32-bit value. X1 (pulse input point) works with X5 (external interruption
point), corresponding to C236 works with I501, which will be able to interrupt and intercept the present value in
the high-speed counter. D1198 and D1199 are the devices to store the 32-bit value.
In SC series MPU, X10 (pulse input point) works with X4 (external interruption point), corresponding to C243 and
C255 work with I401, which will be able to interrupt and intercept the present value in the high-speed counter.
D1180 and D1181 are the devices to store the 32-bit value. X11 works with X5, corresponding to C245 works with
I501, which will be able to interrupt and intercept the present value in the high-speed counter. D1198 and D1199
are the devices to store the 32-bit value.
2. Timed interruption: PLC automatically interrupts the currently executed program every a fixed period of time and
jumps to the execution of a designated interruption subroutine.
3. Interruption when the counting reaches the target: The high-speed counter comparison instruction API 53
DHSCS can designates that when the comparison reaches the target, the currently executed program will be
interrupted and jump to the designated interruption subrountine executing the interruption pointers I010, I020,
I030, I040, I050 and I060.
4. Pulse interruption: The pulse output instruction API 57 PLSY can be set up that the interruption signal is sent out
synchronously when the first pulse is sent out by enabling flags M1342 and M1343. The corresponding

interruptions are I130 and I140. You can also set up that the interruption signal is sent out after the last pulse is
sent out by enabling flags M1340 and M1341. The corresponding interruptions are I110 and I120.
5. Communication interruption:
I150: When the communication instruction RS is being used, you can send out interruption request when the
program receives a specific word by interruption I150. The specific word is set up in the low byte of D1168. This
function can be adopted when the PLC receives data of different length during the connection with the
communication device. Set up the end word in D1168 and write the interruption subroutine I150 and when the
PLC receives this end word, the program will execute I150.
I160: RS instruction sends out interruption request when receiving a specific length of data. When the data
received equals the low byte of D1169, I160 will be triggered. When D1169 = 0, I160 will not be triggered.
I170: In Slave mode, interruption I170 will be generated when the data receiving is completed. Normally when the
communication terminal of the PLC is in Slave mode, PLC will not immediately process the communication data
entered but process it after the END is executed. Therefore, when the scan time is very long and you need the
communication data to be processed immediately, you can use interruption I170 for this matter.
6. Frequency measurement card triggered interruption:
I180: When the PLC sets up the frequency measurement card in mode 1 (pulse cycle measurement) and mode 3
(pulse number counting) by M1019 and D1034, I180 will be supported as well.
2.10 Special Auxiliary Relays and Special Data Registers
The types and functions of special auxiliary relays (special M) and special data registers (special D) are listed in the
table below. Please be noted that some devices of the same No. may bear different meanings in different series
MPUs. Special M and special D marked with “*” will be further illustrated in the 2.11. Columns marked with “R” regers
to “read only”, “R/W” refers to “read and write”, “-“ refers to the status remains unchanged and “#” refers to the system
will set it up according to the status of the PLC.
RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
Function EX SX EH2 Ø Ø Attribute Latched Default
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
M1000* Monitoring normally open contact (A) ○ ○ ○ Off On Off R NO Off
M1001* Monitoring normally closed contact (B) ○ ○ ○ On Off On R NO On
M1002* Enabling positive pulses (On when RUN) ○ ○ ○ Off On Off R NO Off
M1003* Enabling negative pulses (Off when RUN) ○ ○ ○ On Off On R NO On
M1004* On when syntax errors occur ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
Password of data backup memory card and

M1005* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
password of MPU do not match
M1006* Data backup memory card has not been initialized ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
Data do not exist in the program area of data backup

M1007* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
memory card
M1008* Scanning watchdog timer (WDT) On ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
Insufficient 24V DC supply, LV signal has been

M1009 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
occurred.
ES/SA: PLSY Y0 mode selection, continuous output

when On
M1010 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
EH/EH2/SV: Pulse output when reaching END
instruction
M1011* 10ms clock pulse, 5ms On/5ms Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1012* 100ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1013* 1s clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1014* 1min clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1015* Enabling high-speed counter ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1016* Displaying real time clock in A.D. ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1017* ±30 seconds correction on real time clock ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1018 Flag for radian/degree, On: for degree ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1019 Enabling frequency measurement card ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1020 Zero flag ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1021 Borrow flag ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1022 Carry flag ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
PLSY Y1 mode selection, continuous output when

M1023 ○ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
On
M1024 Requesting COM1 monitoring ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1025 There is incorrect request for communication. ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1026 Enabling RAMP module ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1027 Number of PR outputs ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
10ms time switching flag.

M1028 Off: time base of T64 ~ T126 = 100ms ○ ╳ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
On: time base of T64 ~ T126 = 10ms
ES/SA: Y0 pulse output of PLSY, PLSR instructions

is completed, or other relevant instructions complete
their executions.
M1029* ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EH/EH2/SV: the 1st group pulse output CH0 (Y0, Y1)
their executions.

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
ES/SA: Y1 pulse output of PLSY, PLSR instructions

their executions.
M1030* ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EH/EH2/SV: the 2nd group pulse output CH1 (Y2,
Y3) is completed, or other relevant instructions
complete their executions.
M1031* Clear all non-latched areas ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1032* Clear all latched areas ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1033* Memory latched when STOP ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1034* Disabling all Y outputs ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
Enabling input point X as the RUN/STOP switch,

corresponding to D1035
M1035* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES Off
(SA designates X7 only; SX designates X3 only; SC
designates X5 only)
EH2/SV: the 3rd group pulse output CH2 (Y4, Y5) is

╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
completed. (Not available in EH)
M1036
SPD instruction is able to use X0 ~ X5 to detect the
╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R/W NO Off
flag (only available in SC_V1.4 and above)
EH2/SV: the 4th group pulse output CH3 (Y6, Y7) is

M1037 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
completed. (Not available in EH)
M1039* Fixing time scan mode ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1040 Disabling step ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1041 Starting step ○ ○ ○ Off - Off R/W NO Off
M1042 Enabling pulses ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1043 Zero return completed ○ ○ ○ Off - Off R/W NO Off
M1044 Zero point condition ○ ○ ○ Off - Off R/W NO Off
M1045 Diabling all output reset ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1046 Setting STL status as On ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1047 Enabling STL monitoring ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1048 Alarm status ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1049 Setting up alarm monitoring ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1050 Inhibiting I001 ○ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1054 Inhibiting I401 ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1055 Inhibiting I501 ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
M1056 Inhibiting I6□□ ○ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1057 Inhibiting I7□□ ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1059 Inhibiting I010 ~ I060 ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1060 System error message 1 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1064 Incorrect use of operands ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1065 Syntax error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1066 Loop error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1067* Calculation error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1068* Calculation error locked (D1068) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
ES/SA: Y1 time base switching for PWM instruction

(On: 100us; Off: 1ms)
EH/EH2/SV: Y0 time base switching for PWM
M1070 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
instruction (On: 100us; Off: 1ms)
EH_V1.2 and above/EH2/SV: when On, D1371 will
decide the time base)
Y2 time base switching for PWM instruction (On:

100us; Off: 1ms)
M1071 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
EH_V1.2 and above/EH2/SV: when On, D1372 will
decide the time base)
M1072 Executing PLC RUN instruction ○ ○ ○ Off On Off R/W NO Off
M1075 Error occurring when writing FLASH card ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1076* Real time clock malfunction ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1077 Battery in low voltage, malfunction or no battery ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
Immediately stopping Y0 pulse output for PLSY

M1078 ○ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
instruction
Immediately stopping Y1 pulse output for PLSY

M1079 ○ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
instruction
M1080 Requesting COM2 monitoring ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1081 Changing direction for FLT instruction ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1082 Real time clock has been changed ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
Allowing interruption subroutine in FROM/TO

M1083 ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
instructions
Detecting bandwidth (only available in

M1084* ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
ES/EX/SS_V6.4, SA/SX_V1.6, SC_V1.4 and above)

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
M1085 Selecting DVP-PCC01 duplicating function ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
Setting up the switch for enabling password function

M1086 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
of DVP-PCC01
M1087* Enabling LV signal ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
Matrix comparison.
M1088 Comparing between equivalent values (M1088 = 1) ╳ ○ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
or different values (M1088 = 0).
Matrix search end flag. When the comparison

M1089 ╳ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
reaches the last bit, M1089 = 1.
Matrix search start flag. Comparing from bit 0

(M1090 = 1).
Matrix bit search flag. When the comparison is

M1091 completed, the comparison will stop immediately ╳ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
(M1091=1).
Matrix pointer error flag. When the pointer Pr

exceeds its range, M1092 = 1.
Matrix pointer increasing flag. Adding 1 to the

M1093 ╳ ○ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
current value of the Pr.
Matrix pointer clear flag. Clearing the current value

of the Pr to 0.
M1095 Matrix rotation/displacement/output carry flag ╳ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1096 Matrix displacement/input complement flag ╳ ○ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1097 Matrix rotation/displacement direction flag ╳ ○ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
Matrix counting the number of bits which are “1” or

“0”
M1099 On when the matrix counting result is “0” ╳ ○ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1100 SPD instruction sampling once ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1101* Whether to enable file registers ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes Off
M1102 Y10 pulse output ends (For SC) ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1103 Y11 pulse output ends (For SC) ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
Status of SW1 on digital switch card/AX0 input point

M1104* ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
on 4DI card (photpcoupler isolation)



M1108* Status of SW5 on digital switch card ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
M1112* AY0 output point on 2DO card (transistor) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - Off R/W NO Off
M1113* AY1 output point on 2DO card (transistor) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - Off R/W NO Off
Switch for enabling pulse accelerating/decelerating

output (not available in SC_V1.4 and above)
Pulse output is accelerating (not available in

SC_V1.4 and above)
Accelerating/decelerating pulse output reaches its

target (not available in SC_V1.4 and above)
Pulse output is decelerating (not available in

SC_V1.4 and above)
Accelerating/decelerating pulse output is completed

(not available in SC_V1.4 and above)
Retaining the communication setting of COM2

M1120* (RS-485), modifying D1120 will be invalid when ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1120 is set.
Waiting for the sending of RS-485 communication

M1121 ○ ○ ○ Off On - R NO Off
data
M1122 Sending request ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1123 Receiving is completed ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1124 Waiting for receiving ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1125 Communication reset ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1126 Selecting STX/ETX user defined or system defined ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
Sending/receiving data of communication instruction

M1127 ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
is completed (RS instruction not included)
M1128 Sending…/receiving... indication ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1129 Receiving time-out ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1130 Selectin STX/ETX user defined or system defined ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
On during MODRD/RDST/MODRW data are

M1131 ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
converted to hex data
On when there are no communication related

M1132 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO On
instructions in the program
Enabling special high-speed pulse output Y0

(50KHz)
M1133* ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
SC_V1.4 and above: 2-axis synchronous control,
enabling Y10 output

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
Special high-speed pulse output Y0 (50KHz)

M1134* On: continuous output ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R/W NO Off
(Not available in SC_V1.4 and above)
Special high-speed pulse output Y0 (50KHz)

reaches the target number of pulses.
SC_V1.4 and above: 2-axis synchronous control,
enabling Y11 output
M1136* Retaining the communication setting of COM3 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
Retaining the communication setting of COM1

M1138* (RS-232), modifying D1036 will be invalid when ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1138 is set.
Selecting ASCII or RTU mode of COM1 (RS-232)

M1139* when in Slave mode ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
Off: ASCII; On: RTU
M1140 MODRD/MODWR/MODRW data receiving error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1141 MODRD/MODWR/MODRW parameter error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1142 Data receiving of VFD-A commands error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
Selecting ASCII or RTU mode of COM2 (RS-485)

when in Slave mode
Off: ASCII; On: RTU
M1143* Selecting ASCII or RTU mode of COM2 (RS-485) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
when in Master mode (used together with MODRD/
MODWR/MODRW instructions)
Off: ASCII; On: RTU
Switch for enabling adjustable pulse

accelerating/decelerating output Y0
M1145* Adjustable pulse output Y0 is accelerating ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R/W NO Off
Adjustable pulse output Y0 reaches the target

M1146* ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R/W NO Off
frequency
M1147* Adjustable pulse output Y0 is decelerating ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R NO Off
M1148* Adjustable pulse output Y0 is completed ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
Adjustable pulse output Y0 temporarily stops

counting the number of pulses.
DHSZ instruction in multiple set values comparison

M1150 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
mode
The execution of DHSZ multiple set values

M1151 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
comparison mode is completed.
Setting up DHSZ instruction as frequency control

M1152 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
mode
M1153 DHSZ frequency control mode has been executed. ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
Enabling the deceleration function of adjustable

M1154* ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
pulse output Y0
8-bit mode
M1161 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
On: in 8-bit mode
Switching between decimal integer and binary

M1162 floating point for SCLP instruction ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
On: binary floating point; Off: decimal integer
When On, the program and password on flash will be

M1165 copied to the PLC when PLC is powered. (Not ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES Off
available in EH)
When On, the recipe on flash will be copied to the

M1166 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES Off
PLC when PLC is powered. (Not available in EH)
M1167 16-bit mode for HKY input ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1168 Designating work mode of SMOV ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1169 Selecting PWD modes ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1170* Enabling single step execution ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1171* Single step execution ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
Switch for 2-phase pulse output

On: switch on
M1173* On: continuous output ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1174* The number of output pulses reaches the target ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1175 Losing PLC parameter data (not available in EH) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES Off
M1176 Losing the data in PLC program (not available in EH) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES Off
M1178* Enabling VR0 rotary switch ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1179* Enabling VR1 rotary switch ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1184* Enabling modem function (not available in SV) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1185* Enabling initialization of modem (not available in SV) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1186* Initialization of modem fails (not available in SV) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
Initialization of modem is completed (not available in

M1187* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
SV)
Displaying whether modem is connecting currently

M1188* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
(not available in SV)
Setting up the content type in the display (for SX)

M1196 ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
On: hex; Off: decimal
M1197 Setting up the display of the 100ths digit (for SX) ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1198 Setting up the display of the 10ths digit (for SX) ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1200 Counting mode of C200 (On: counting down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
M1235 Counting mode of C235 (On: counting down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1245 Counting mode of C245 (On: counting down) ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1246 C246 counter monitoring (On: counting down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1248 C248 counter monitoring (On: counting down) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1250 C250 counter monitoring (On: counting down) ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R NO Off
M1253 C253 counter monitoring (On: counting down) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1255 C255 counter monitoring (On: counting down) ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R NO Off
M1258 Y0 pulse output signal reversing for PWM instruction ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1259 Y2 pulse output signal reversing for PWM instruction ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
X5 as the reset input signal for all high-speed

M1260 ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
counters
High-speed comparator comparison flag for DHSCR

M1261 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
instruction
M1264 Enabling reset function of HHSC0 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1265 Enabling start function of HHSC0 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
M1272 Reset control of HHSC0 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1273 Start control of HHSC0 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1280 Inhibiting I00□ ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1286 Inhibiting I6□□ ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1289 Inhibiting I010 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1299 Inhibiting I150 ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
M1303 High/low bits exchange for XCH instruction ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1304* Enabling force On/Off of input point X ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off

st
Reverse operation of the 1 group pulse CH0 (Y0,
M1305 Y1) for PLSV/DPLSV/DRVI/DDRVI/DRVA/DDRVA ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
instruction
nd
Reverse operation of the 2 group pulse CH1 (Y2,
M1306 Y3) for PLSV/DPLSV/DRVI/DDRVI/DRVA/DDRVA ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
instruction
Immediately disabling Y10 pulse output (for

SC_V1.4 and above)
M1311* Disabling Y11 pulse output (for SC_V1.4 and above) ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1312 Controlling start input point of C235 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1320 Controlling reset input point of C235 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1328 Enabling start/reset of C235 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
EH/EH2/SV: stopping the 1st group pulse output

CH0 (Y0, Y1)
M1334* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
SC_V1.4 and above: selecting Y10 pulse output
stop modes
EH/EH2/SV: stopping the 2nd group pulse output

CH1 (Y2, Y3)
M1335* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
SC_V1.4 and above: selecting Y11 pulse output
stop modes

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
M1336 Sending out the 1st group pulse output CH0 (Y0, Y1) ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
Sending out the 2nd group pulse output CH1 (Y2,

M1337 ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
Y3)
Enabling offset pulses of the 1st group pulse output

M1338 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
CH0 (Y0, Y1)
Enabling offset pulses of the 2nd group pulse output

M1339 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
CH1 (Y2, Y3)
Generating interruption I110 after the 1st group pulse

M1340 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
output CH0 (Y0, Y1) is sent out
Generating interruption I120 after the 2nd group

M1341 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
pulse output CH1 (Y2, Y3) is sent out
Generating interruption I130 when the 1st group

M1342 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
Generating interruption I140 when the 2nd group

M1343 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
Enabling the offset of the 1st group pulse output CH0

M1344 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
(Y0, Y1)
Enabling the offset of the 2nd group pulse output

M1345 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
CH1 (Y2, Y3)
M1346 Enabling ZRN CLEAR output signal ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
Reset after the 1st group pulse output CH0 (Y0, Y1)
M1347 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
is completed for PLSY instruction
Reset after the 2nd group pulse output CH1 (Y2, Y3)
M1348 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
is completed for PLSY instruction
M1350* Enabling EASY PLC LINK ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1351* Enabling auto mode on EASY PLC LINK ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1352* Enabling manual mode on EASY PLC LINK ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
Enable 32 slave unit linkage and up to 100 data

M1353* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
length of data exchange on EASY PLC LINK
Enable simultaneous data read/write in a polling of

M1354* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
EASY PLC LINK
M1360* Slave ID#1 status on EASY PLC LINK network ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
Indicating Slave ID#1 data transaction status on

M1376* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1377* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1378* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1379* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1380* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1381* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1382* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1383* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1384* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1385* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1386* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1387* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1388* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1389* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1390* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P

M1391* ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK
M1392* Slave ID#1 linking error ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1408* Indicating reading from Salve ID#1 is completed ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
M1424* Indicating writing to Salve ID#1 is completed ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1440* Slave ID#17 status on EASY PLC LINK network ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1452 Slave ID#29 status on EASY PLC LINK network ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off

M1456* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P

M1457* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1458* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1459* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1460* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1461* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1462* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1463* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1464* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1465* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1466* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1467* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1468* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1469* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1470* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK

M1471* ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
EASY PLC LINK
M1472* Slave ID#17 linking error ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P
M1488* Indicating reading from Salve ID#17 is completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1504* Indicating writing to Salve ID#17 is completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P

rd
EH2/SV: stopping the 3 group pulse output CH2
M1520 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
(Y4, Y5) (Not available in EH)
EH2/SV: stopping the 4th group pulse output CH3

M1521 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
EH2/SV: sending out the 3rd group pulse output CH2

M1522 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - Off R NO Off
EH2/SV: sending out the 4th group pulse output CH3

M1523 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - Off R NO Off
rd
EH2/SV: reset after the 3 group pulse output CH2
M1524 (Y4, Y5) is completed for PLSY instruction (Not ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
available in EH)
th
EH2/SV: reset after the 4 group pulse output CH3
M1525 (Y6, Y7) is completed for PLSY instruction (Not ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
available in EH)
EH2/SV: reversing Y4 pulse output signal for PWM

M1526 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
instruction (Not available in EH)
EH2/SV: reversing Y6 pulse output signal for PWM

M1527 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
instruction (Not available in EH)
EH2/SV: switching time base unit of Y4 output for

M1530 PWM instruction ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
On: 100us; Off: 1ms (Not available in EH)
EH2/SV: switching time base unit of Y6 output for

M1531 PWM instruction ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
On: 100us; Off: 1ms (Not available in EH)
rd
EH2/SV: reverse operation of the 3 group pulse
M1532 CH2 (Y4, Y5) for PLSV/DPLSV/DRVI/DDRVI/DRVA ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
/DDRVA instruction (Not available in EH)
th
EH2/SV: reverse operation of the 4 group pulse
M1533 CH3 (Y6, Y7) for PLSV/DPLSV/DRVI/DDRVI/DRVA ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
/DDRVA instruction
EH2/SV: CH0 being able to designate deceleration Off

M1534 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO
time. Has to be used with D1348.

M1535 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO

RUN
ES SA EH Off STOP
Special Ø
M STO
SS SC SV On RUN
P

M1536 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO

M1537 ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO

ES SA EH Off STOP RUN

Special D Function EX SX EH2 Ø Ø Ø Attribute Latched Default
SS SC SV On RUN STOP
D1000* Scanning watchdog timer (WDT) (Unit: ms) ○ ○ ○ 200 - - R/W NO 200
Displaying the program version of EH # # #

D1001 ○ ○ ○ R NO #
DVP-PLC (initial factory setting) ES/SA - - -
Program capacity
D1002* ○ ○ ○ # - - R NO #
# -> EH:15,872; SA: 7,920; ES: 3,792
Sum of program memory

D1003 ○ ○ ○ - - - R YES #
# -> EH: -15,873; SA: -7,920; ES: -3,792
D1004* Syntax check error code ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
D1008* STSC address when WDT is On ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
ES/SA: recording number of occurrances of LV

D1009 signals ○ ○ ○ - - - R YES 0
EH2/SV: register for SRAM lost data error code
D1010* Current scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1011* Minimum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1012* Maximum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
0~32,767 (unit: 0.1ms) accumulative high-speed

D1015* ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
timer
D1018* πPI (low byte) ○ ○ ○ H’0FDB H’0FDB H’0FDB R/W NO H’0FDB
D1019* πPI (high byte) ○ ○ ○ H’4049 H’4049 H’4049 R/W NO H’4049
D1020* X0 ~ X7 input filter (Unit: ms) ○ ○ ○ 10 - - R/W NO 10
ES/EH/EH2/SV: X10 ~ X17 input filter (Unit: ms)

D1021* SC: X10 ~ X17 input filter (time base: scan cycle), ○ ○ ○ 10 - - R/W NO 10
range: 0 ~ 1,000 (Unit: times)
Multiplied frequency of A-B phase counters for

D1022 ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
ES/SA
Register for detected pulse width, Unit: 0.1ms

D1023* (Available in ES/EX/SS_V6.4, SA/SX_V1.6, ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
SC_V1.4 and above)
D1025* Code for communication request error ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1028 Index register E0 ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1029 Index register F0 ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1030* Number of Y0 output pulses (low word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1031* Number of Y0 output pulses (high word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1032 Number of Y1 output pulses (low word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1033 Number of Y0 output pulses (high word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1034 Work mode of frequency measurement card ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES 1
D1035* No. of input point X as RUN/STOP ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 0


D1036* COM1 communication protocol ○ ○ ○ H’86 - - R/W NO H’86
D1037 Repetition time of HKY key ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
Delay time of data response when PLC MPU as

slave in RS-485 communication, range: 0 ~ 10,000
(unit: 0.1ms)
D1038* ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
SA/EH: delay time for sending the next
communication data in EASY EASY PLC LINK (unit
for SA/SX/SC: 1 scan cycle; EH/EH2/SV: 0.1ms)
D1039* Fixed scan time (ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1040 On status of step No. 1 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1049 No. of alarm On ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1050 Process of data for Modbus communication

↓ instruction. PLC automatically converts the ASCII ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1055 data in D1070 ~ D1085 in to hex data.
Present value at analog input channel CH0 in SX/EX

D1056* ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
or at CH0 on AD card in EH/EH2
Present value at analog input channel CH1 in SX/EX

D1057* ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1058* Present value at analog input channel CH2 in EX ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1059* Present value at analog input channel CH3 in EX ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
System error message: number of errors recorded in

D1061 ○ ╳ ╳ - - - R YES 0
latched area
D1062 Average times of AD0, AD1 in SX (2 ~ 4 times) ╳ ○ ╳ 2 - - R/W NO 2
D1067* Error code for operational error ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
D1068* Locking the address of operational error ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
Process of data for Modbus communication

D1070 instruction. When the RS-485 communication
instruction built-in the PLC sent out is received, the
↓ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
response messages will be stored in D1070 ~
D1085 D1085. You can view the response messages by
checking these registers.


High word of the set password in DVP-PCC01

D1086 (displayed in hex corresponded by its ASCII ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
characters)
Low word of the set password in DVP-PCC01

D1087 (displayed in hex corresponded by its ASCII ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
characters)
Process of data for Modbus communication

D1089 instruction. When the RS-485 communication
instruction built-in the PLC is executed, the words of
↓ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
the instruction will be stored in D1089 ~ D1099. You
D1099 can check whether the instruction is correct by the
contents in these registers.
D1100 Corresponding status after LV signal is enabled ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1101* Start address of file registers ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
D1102* Number of data copied in file register ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 1,600
Start No. of file register D for storing data (has to be

D1103* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 2,000
bigger than 2,000)
Start No. of register D for Y0 acceleration/

D1104* deceleration pulse output (Not available in SC_V1.4 ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
and above)
D1109* COM3 communication protocol ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
Average value at analog input channel CH0 in SX/EX

D1110* ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
Average value at analog input channel CH1 in SX/EX

D1111* ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1112* Average value at analog input channel CH2 in EX ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1113* Average value at analog input channel CH3 in EX ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
CH0 of analog output in SX/EX

D1116* ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
CH0 of DA card in EH/EH2
CH1 of analog output in SX/EX

D1117* ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
CH1 of DA card in EH/EH2
Sampling time of analog/digital converstion in

D1118* ○ ○ ○ 5 - - R/W NO 5
SX/EX/EH/EH2 (ms)
D1120* COM2 (RS-485) communication protocol ○ ○ ○ H’86 - - R/W NO H’86
D1121 PLC communication address (latched) ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 1
D1122 Remaining number of words of sent data ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
D1123 Remaining number of words of received data ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
D1124 Definition of start word (STX) ○ ○ ○ H’3A - - R/W NO H’3A
D1125 Definition of the first end word ○ ○ ○ H’0D - - R/W NO H’0D
D1126 Defunition of the second end word ○ ○ ○ H’0A - - R/W NO H’0A


Interruption request for receiving specific word in RS

D1127 ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
instruction (I150)
D1129 Abnormal communication time-out (time: ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1130 Error code returning from Modbus ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
SA/SX: start No. of register D for Y0 special

high-speed pulse output (50KHz)
D1133* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
SC_V1.4 and above: start No. of register D for Y10
2-axis synchronous control output
Number of sections in Y10 output for 2-axis

D1134* synchronous control (available in SC_V1.4 and ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
above)
SC_V1.4 and above: start No. of register D for Y11

D1135* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
2-axis synchronous control output
Number of sections in Y11 output for 2-axis

D1136* synchronous control (available in SC_V1.4 and ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
above)
D1137* Address where incorrect use of operand occurs ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
Number of right-side special extension modules

D1140* ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
(max. 8)
D1142* Number of points X in digital extension unit ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1143* Number of points Y in digital extension unit ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
Start No. of register D for Y0 adjustable

D1144* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
acceleration/deceleration pulse output
Number of left-side special extension modules (max.

D1145* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
8) (only available in SV)
Type of memory card

b0 = 0: no card existing (H0000)
D1147 b0 = 1: with flash card ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
b8 = 0: flash card Off (H0001)
b8 = 1: flash card On (H0101)
Type of function extension card

0: no card
1: RS-232 card, DU-01
2: RS-422 card
3: COM3 card
D1149 4: analog rotary switch card ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
5: digital switch card
6: transistor output card
8: 2AD card
9: 2DA card
10: frequency measurement card


Table count register in multi-group setting

D1150 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
comparison mode of DHSZ commnad
Table counting register for DHSZ multiple set values

D1151 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
comparison mode
D1152 High word of changed D value for DHSZ instruciton ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1153 Low word of changed D value for DHSZ instruction ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
Suggested deceleration time interval (10 ~

D1154* 32,767ms) for adjustable acceleration/deceleration ╳ ○ ╳ 200 - - R/W NO 200
pulse output Y0
Suggested deceleration frequency (-1 ~ -32,700Hz)

D1155* for adjustable acceleration/deceleration pulse output ╳ ○ ╳ -1,000 - - R/W NO -1,000
Y0
D1156
↓ Designated special D for RTMU, RTMD instructions ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1165
Switching rising-/falling-edge counting mode of X10

D1166* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
(available in SC_V1.4 and above)
Switching rising-/falling-edge counting mode of X11

D1167* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
(available in SC_V1.4 and above)

D1168 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
instruction (I150)

D1169 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
instruction (I160)
D1170* PC value when executing single step ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1172* Frequency of 2-phase pulse output (12Hz ~ 20KHz) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1173* Modes of 2-phase pulse output (K1 and K2) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
Low 16 bits of target numbers of 2-phase output

D1174* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
pulses
High 16 bits of target numbers of 2-phase output

D1175* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
pulses
Low 16 bits of current numbers of 2-phase output

D1176* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
pulses
High 16 bits of current numbers of 2-phase output

D1177* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
pulses
D1178* VR0 value ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1179* VR1 value ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
Low 16 bytes of high-speed counter value extracted

D1180* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
by interruption I401
High 16 bytes of high-speed counter value extracted

D1181* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1182 Index register E1 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0


D1183 Index register F1 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1188 Index register E4 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1189 Index register F4 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1196 Content in the display (available in SX) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0

D1198* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1199* ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
Start latched address for auxiliary relays M0 ~ M999

D1200* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES #
# -> EH: 500; SA/SX/SC: 512
D1201* End latched address for auxiliary relays M0 ~ M999 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 999
Start latched address for auxiliary relays M2000 ~

D1202* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 2,000
M4095
End latched address for auxiliary relays M2000 ~

D1203* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 4,095
M4095
D1204* Start latched address for 100ms timers T0 ~ T199 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES H'FFFF
D1205* End latched address for 100ms timers T0 ~ T199 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES H’FFFF
D1206* Start latched address for 10ms timers T200 ~ T239 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES H’FFFF
D1207* End latched address for 10ms timers T200 ~ T239 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES H’FFFF
Start latched address for16-bit counters C0 ~ C199

D1208* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES #
# -> EH: 100; SA/SX/SC: 96
D1209* End latched address for 16-bit counters C0 ~ C199 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 199
Start latched address for 32-bit counters C200 ~

D1210* C234 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES #
# -> EH: 220; SA/SX/SC: 216
End latched address for 32-bit counters C200 ~

D1211* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 234
C234


Start latched address for 32-bit high-speed counters

D1212* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 235
C235 ~ C255
End latched address for 32-bit high-speed counters

D1213* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 255
C235 ~ C255
Start latched address for steps S0 ~ S899

D1214* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES #
# -> EH: 500; SA/SX/SC: 512
End latched address for steps S0 ~ S899

D1215* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES #
# -> EH: 899; SA/SX/SC: 895
D1216* Start latched address for registers D0 ~ D999 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 200
D1217* End latched address for registers D0 ~ D999 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 999
D1218* Start latched address for registers D2000 ~ D9999 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 2,000
D1219* End latched address for registers D2000 ~ D9999 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES #
st
D1220 Phase of the 1 group pulse output CH0 (Y0, Y1) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1221 Phase of the 2nd group pulse output CH1 (Y2, Y3) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
Time difference between direction signal and pulse

D1222 output for the 1st group pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1) in DRVI, ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
DDRVI, DRVA, DDRVA, PLSV, DPLSV
Time difference between direction signal and pulse

D1223 output for the 2nd group pulse CH1 (Y2, Y3) in DRVI, ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
DDRVI, DRVA, DDRVA, PLSV, DPLSV
D1225 Counting mode of the counter HHSC0 ╳ ╳ ○ 2 - - R/W NO 2

rd
Phase of the 3 group pulse output CH2 (Y4, Y5)
D1129 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
(available in EH2/SV)
Phase of the 4th group pulse output CH3 (Y6, Y7)

D1130 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
When the RS-485 communication instruction

D1256 MODRW built-in the PLC is executed, the words of
↓ sent out by the instruction will be stored in D1256 ~ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1295 D1259. You can check whether the instruction is
correct by the contents in these registers.
D1296 The RS-485 communication instruction MODRW

built in the PLC automatically converts the ASCII
↓ ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
data received in the designated register into hex and
D1311 store the hex data into D1296 ~ D1311.
Second in RTC: 00 ~ 59
D1313* ╳ ○ ○ # - - R/W NO 0
#: read RTC and write
Minute in RTC: 00 ~ 59
D1314* ╳ ○ ○ # - - R/W NO 0


Hour in RTC: 00 ~ 23
D1315* ╳ ○ ○ # - - R/W NO 0
Day in RTC: 01 ~ 31
D1316* ╳ ○ ○ # - - R/W NO 1
Month in RTC: 01 ~ 12
D1317* ╳ ○ ○ # - - R/W NO 1
Week in RTC: 1 ~ 7
D1318* ╳ ○ ○ # - - R/W NO 6
Year in RTC: 00 ~ 99 (A.D.)

D1319* ╳ ○ ○ # - - R/W NO 0
ID of the 1st right-side extension module

D1320* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
(available in EH/EH2)
ID of the 2nd right-side extension module

D1321* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
ID of the 3rd right-side extension module

D1322* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
ID of the 4th right-side extension module

D1323* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1324* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1325* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1326* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0

D1327* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
Low word of offset pulse the 1st group pulses CH0

D1328 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
(Y0, Y1)
High word of offset pulse the 1st group pulses CH0

D1329 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
(Y0, Y1)
Low word of offset pulse the 2nd group pulses CH1

D1330 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
(Y2, Y3)
High word of offset pulse the 2nd group pulses CH1

D1331 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
(Y2, Y3)
Low word of the remaining number of pulses of the

D1332 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
1st group pulses CH0 (Y0, Y1)
High word of the remaining number of pulses of the

D1333 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
1st group pulses CH0 (Y0, Y1)


Low word of the remaining number of pulses of the

D1334 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
2nd group pulses CH1 (Y2, Y3)
High word of the remaining number of pulses of the

D1335 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
2nd group pulses CH1 (Y2, Y3)
st
Low word of the present value of the 1 group
D1336 pulses CH0 (Y0, Y1) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES 0
(EH2/SV are latached above EH_V1.2)
st
High word of the present value of the 1 group
nd
Low word of the present value of the 2 group
nd
High word of the present value of the 2 group
(EH_V1.2 and above are latached)
EH/EH2/SV: start/end frequency of the 1st group

- YES
D1340 pulse output CH0 (Y0, Y1) ╳ ○ ○ - - R/W 200
SC: start/end frequency of Y10 output 200 NO
D1341 Low word of max. output frequency ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES H’04D0

Fixed as
200KHz ○
D1342 High word of max. output frequency ╳ ╳ - - - R YES 3
EH: acceleration/deceleration time for the 1st group

- YES 100
D1343* pulse output CH0 (Y0, Y1) ╳ ○ ○ - - R/W
SC: acceleration/deceleration time of Y10 output 200 NO 200
Low word of the number of compensation pulses of

D1344 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
the 1st group pulses CH0 (Y0, Y1)
High word of the number of compensation pulses of

D1345 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
the 1st group pulses CH0 (Y0, Y1)
Low word of the number of compensation pulses of

D1346 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
the 2nd group pulses CH1 (Y2, Y3)
High word of the number of compensation pulses of

D1347 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
the 2nd group pulses CH1 (Y2, Y3)
SC: low word of present value of Y10 pulse output ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1348
EH2/SV: CH0 pulse output. When M1534 = On, it
╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 100
refers to the deceleration time
SC: high word of present value of Y10 pulse output ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1349
╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 100


SC: low word of present value of Y11 pulse output ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1350
╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 100
SC: high word of present value of Y11 pulse output ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0

D1351
╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 100
EH/EH2/SV: start/end frequency of the 2nd group

- YES
D1352 pulse output CH1 (Y2, Y3) ╳ ○ ○ - - R/W 200
SC: start/end frequency of Y11 output 200 NO
EH/EH2/SV: acceleration/deceleration time of the

- YES 100
D1353* 2nd group pulse output CH1 (Y2, Y3) ╳ ○ ○ - - R/W
SC: acceleration/deceleration time of Y11 output 200 NO 200
Starting reference for Master to read from Salve

D1355* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#1

D1356* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#2

D1357* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#3

D1358* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#4

D1359* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#5

D1360* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#6

D1361* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#7

D1362* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#8

D1363* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#9

D1364* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#10

D1365* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#11

D1366* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#12

D1367* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#13

D1368* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#14



D1369* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#15

D1370* ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’1064
ID#16
D1371 Time unit of PWM Y0 pulse output when M1070=On ╳ ╳ ○ 1 - - R/W NO 1
D1372 Time unit of PWM Y2 pulse output when M1071=On ╳ ╳ ○ 1 - - R/W NO 1
Time unit of PWM Y4 pulse output when M1530=On

D1373 ╳ ╳ ○ 1 - - R/W NO 1
Time unit of PWM Y6 pulse output when M1531=On

D1374 ╳ ╳ ○ 1 - - R/W NO 1
Low word of the present value of the 3rd group

D1375 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
pulses CH2 (Y4, Y5) (available in EH2/SV)
High word of the present value of the 3rd group

D1376 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
Low word of the present value of the 4th group

D1377 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
High word of the present value of the 4th group

D1378 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
st
Start frequency of the 1 section and end frequency
D1379 of the last section for the 3rd group pulse output CH2 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 200
(Y4, Y5) (available in EH2/SV)
st
Start frequency of the 1 section and end frequency
D1380 of the last section for the 4th group pulse output CH3 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 200
(Y6, Y7) (available in EH2/SV)
Acceleration/deceleration time for the 3rd pulse

D1381 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 100
output CH2 (Y4, Y5) (available in EH2/SV)
Acceleration/deceleration time for the 4th pulse

D1382 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 100
output CH3 (Y6, Y7) (available in EH2/SV)
ID of the 1st left-side extension module

D1386* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
(available in SV)
ID of the 2nd left-side extension module

D1387* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
(available in SV)
ID of the 3rd left-side extension module

D1388* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
(available in SV)
ID of the 4th left-side extension module

D1389* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
(available in SV)

D1390* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
(available in SV)

D1391* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
(available in SV)



D1392* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
(available in SV)

D1393* ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
(available in SV)
D1399* Starting Salve ID designated by EASY PLC LINK ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 1
D1415* Starting reference for Master to write in Salve ID#1 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES H’10C8
D1431* Times of EASY PLC LINK polling cycle ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1432* Current times of EASY PLC LINK polling cycle ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1433* Number of salve units linked to EASY PLC LINK ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1434* Data length to be read on Salve ID#1 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16


D1450* Data length to be written on Slave ID#1 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 16
Number of pulses required per revolution of motor at

D1466 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES 2,000
CH0 (low word)

D1467 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES 0
CH0 (high word)

D1468 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES 2,000
CH1 (low word)

D1469 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES 0
CH1 (high word)
Distance created for 1 revolution of motor at CH0

D1470 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES 1,000
(low word)

D1471 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES 0
(high word)

D1472 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES 1,000
(low word)



D1473 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES 0
(high word)
D1474 Machine unit of CH0 movement (low word) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES 0
D1475 Machine unit of CH0 movement (high word) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES 0
D1476 Machine unit of CH1 movement (low word) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES 0
D1477 Machine unit of CH1 movement (high word) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R YES 0
Data buffer to store the data read from Slave ID#1

D1480* when M1353 = Off.
↓ When M1353 = On, the starting D register No. to ╳ ○ ○ - - - R YES 0
D1495* store data read from ID#1~16 by Master (available in
EH/EH2/SV).
Data buffer to store the data written on Slave ID#1

D1496* when M1353 = Off.
↓ When M1353 = On, the starting D register No. to ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
D1511* store data written on ID#1~16 by Master (available
in EH/EH2/SV).

D1512* when M1353 = Off.
↓ When M1353 = On, the starting D register No. to ╳ ○ ○ - - - R YES 0
D1527* store data read from ID#17~32 by Master (available
in EH/EH2/SV).
Data buffer to store the data written on Slave ID#2

D1528* when M1353 = Off.
↓ When M1353 = On, the starting D register No. to ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
D1543* store data written on ID#17~32 by Master (available
in EH/EH2/SV).
D1544* Data buffer to store the data read from Slave ID#3
when M1353 = Off.
↓ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R YES 0
When M1353 = On, the length of data read from
D1559* ID#17~32 by Master (available in EH/EH2/SV).
D1560* Data buffer to store the data written on Slave ID#2

when M1353 = Off.
↓ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
When M1353 = On, the length of data written on
D1575* ID#17~32 by Master (available in EH/EH2/SV).

D1576* when M1353 = Off.
↓ When M1353=On, the starting D register No. to ╳ ○ ○ - - - R YES 0
D1591* store data read from ID#17~32 by EH Master
(available in EH/EH2/SV).
Data buffer to store the data to be written on Slave

D1592* ID#4 when M1353 = Off.
↓ When M1353=On, the starting D register No. to ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
D1607* store data to be written on ID#17~32 by EH Master
(available in EH/EH2/SV).


D1608*
↓ Data buffer to store the data read from Slave ID#5 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R YES 0
D1623*
D1624*
↓ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
ID#5
D1639*
D1640*
D1655*
D1656*
↓ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
ID#6
D1671*
D1672*
D1687*
D1688*
↓ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
ID#7
D1703*
D1704*
D1719*
D1720*
↓ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
ID#8
D1735*
D1736*
D1751*
D1752*
↓ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
ID#9
D1767*
D1768*
D1783*
D1784*
↓ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
ID#10
D1799*
D1800*
D1815*


D1816*
↓ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
ID#11
D1831*
D1832*
D1847*
D1848*
↓ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
ID#12
D1863*
D1864*
D1879*
D1880*
↓ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
ID#13
D1895*
D1896*
D1911*
D1912*
↓ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
ID#14
D1927*
D1928*
D1943*
D1944*
↓ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
ID#15
D1959*
D1960*
D1975*
D1976*
↓ ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES 0
ID#16
D1991*

2.11 Functions of Special Auxiliary Relays and Special Registers
Function Group PLC Operation Flag

Number M1000 ~ M1003
M1000:
M1000 (A contact) is constantly “On” during operation and detection. When PLC is in RUN status, M1000 remains
“On”.
M1000
Y0 PLC is running
Normally On contact
in PLC RUN Keeps being On
M1001:
M1001 (B contact) is constantly “On” during operation and detection. When PLC is in RUN status, M1001 remains
“On”.
M1002:
M1002 is “On” during the first scan when PLC starts to RUN and remains “Off” afterward. The pulse width = 1 scan
time. Use this contact for all kinds of initial settings.
M1003:
M1003 is “Off” during the first scan when PLC starts to RUN and remains “On” afterward. M1003 enables
negative-direction (“Off” immediately when RUN) pulses.
PLC RUN
M1000
M1001
M1002
M1003
scan time
Function Group Monitor Timer

Number D1000
Contents:
1. Monitor timer is used for moitoring PLC scan time. When the scan time exceeds the set time in the moitor timer,
the red ERROR LED indicator remains beaconing and all outputs will be “Off”.
2. The initial set value of the time in the monitor timer is 200ms. If the program is long or the operation is too
complicated, MOV instruction can be used for changing the set value. See the example below for SV = 300ms.

M1002
0 MOV K300 D1000
Initial pulse
3. The maximum set value in the monitor timer is 32,767ms. Please be noted that if the SV is too big, the timing of
detecting operational errors will be delayed. Therefore, it is suggested that you remain the scan time of shorter
than 200ms.
4. Complicated instruction operations or too many extension modules being connected to the MPU will result in the
scan time being too long. Check D1010 ~ D1012 to see if the scan time exceeds the SV in D1000. In this case,
besides modifying the SV in D1000, you can also add WDT instruction (API 07) into the PLC program. When the
CPU execution progresses to WDT instruction, the internal monitor timer will be cleared as “0” and the scan time
will not exceed the set value in the monitor timer.
Function Group Program Capacity

Number D1002
Contents:
The program capacity differs in different series of MPUs.
1. ES/EX/SS series MPU: 3,792 Steps
2. SA/SX/SC series MPU: 7,920 Steps
3. EH/EH2/SV series MPU: 15,872 Steps
Function Group Syntax Check

Number M1004, D1004, D1137
Contents:
1. When errors occur in syntax check, ERROR LED indicator will flash and special relay M1004 = On.
2. Timings for PLC syntax check:

a) When the power goes from “Off” to “On”.
b) When the program is written into PLC.
c) When on-line editing is being conducted.
3. The syntax check may start due to illegal use of instruction operands (devices) or incorrect program syntax loop.
The error can be detected by the error code in D1004 and error table. The address where the error exists will be
stored in D1137. (The address value in D1137 will be invalid if the error is a general loop error.)
4. See Chapter 2.12 for error codes for syntax check.
Function Group Data Backup Memory

Number M1005~M1007
Contents:

When the data backup memory card is installed in EH/EH2 MPU, MPU will operate according to the On/Off of switch
on the card. If the switch is “On”, the following comparisons will be conducted and the card will be copied to MPU. If
the switch is “Off”, MPU will not perform any action.
1. M1005 = On: An error occurs in the comparison between the ciphers of MPU and the data backup memory card
and MPU does not perform any action.
2. M1006 = On: The data backup memory card has not been initialized.
3. M1007 = On: Data in the program area of the data backup memory card do not exist, it means data doesn’t exist
in the program area of data backup memory card.
Function Group Scan Time-out Timer

Number M1008, D1008
Contents:
1. M1008 = On: Scan time-out occurs during the execution of the program, and PLC ERROR LED indicator
remains beaconing.
2. Users can use WPLSoft or HPP to monitor the content (STEP address when WDT timer is “On”).
Function Group Checking Lost PLC SRAM Data

Number D1009, M1175, M1176
Contents:
1. bit0 ~ bit7 record the types of data lost. bit = 1 refers to losing data; bit = 0 refers to correct data.
2. What are lost
bit8 ~ 15 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
PLC File
Reserved D register T register C register M relay S step password
program register
3. After the PLC is powered, the data in SRAM will be verified. If the SRAM data are lost, the PLC will record the
error in D1009 and set on M1175 or M1176 according to the content of the data.
Function Group Scan Time Monitor

Number D1010 ~ D1012
Contents:
The present value, minimum value and maximum value of scan time are stored in D1010 ~ D1012.
1. D1010: Present scan time value
2. D1011: Minimum scan time value
3. D1012: Maximum scan time value
Function Group Internal Clock Pulse

Contents:

1. All PLC MPUs provide four different clock pulses. When PLC is powered, the four clock pulses will start
automatically.
10 ms
M1011 (10 ms) 100 Hz
100 ms
M1012 (100 ms) 10 Hz

1 sec
M1013 (1 sec) 1 Hz
1 min
M1014 (60 sec)
2. The clock pulses also start when PLC is in STOP status. The activation timing of clock pulses and that of RUN
will not happen synchronously.
Function Group High-Speed Timer

Number M1015, D1015
Contents:
1. The steps for using special M and special D directly:

a) High-speed counter is valid only when PLC is in RUN status for EH/EH2/SV, but is valid when PLC is in
RUN or STOP stauts for SA/SX/SC.
b) M1015 = On: High-speed counter D1015 is enabled only whtn PLC scans to END instruction. (Min. timing
unit of D1015: 100us)
c) Timing range of D1015: 0~32,767. When the timing reaches 32,767, the next timing restarts from 0.
d) M1015 = Off: D1015 stops timing immediately.
2. EH/EH2/SV series MPU offers high-speed timer instruction HST. See API 196 HST for more details.
3. Example:
a) When X10 = On, M1015 will be On. The high-speed timer will start to time and record the present value in
D1015.
b) When X10 = Off, M1015 will be Off. The high-speed timer will be disabled.
X10
M1015
Function Group Real Time Clock

Number M1016, M1017, M1076, D1313 ~ D1319
Contents:
1. Special M and special D relevant to RTC

No. Name Function
Off: display the last 2 digits of year in A.D.
M1016 Year (in A.D.) in RTC
On: display the last 2 digits of year in A.D. plus 2,000

From “Off” to “On”, the correction is enabled.

±30 seconds
M1017 0 ~ 29 second: minute intact; second reset to 0
correction
30~ 59 second: mimute + 1; second reset to 0
M1076 RTC malfunction Set value exceeds the range; dead battery
M1082 Flag change on RTC On: Modification on RTC
D1313 Second 0 ~ 59
D1314 Minute 0 ~ 59
D1315 Hour 0 ~ 23
D1316 Day 1 ~ 31
D1317 Month 1 ~ 12
D1318 Week 1~7
D1319 Year 0 ~ 99 (last 2 digits of Year in A.D.)
2. If the set value in RTC is incorrect, the time will be recovered as “Saturday, 00:00 Jan. 1, 2000” when PLC is
powered and restarted.
3. D1313 ~ D1319 will immediately update the RTC only when in TRD instruction or WPLSoft monitoring mode.
4. How to make corrections on RTC:

a) Use TWR instruction fir SA/SX/SX/EH/EH2/SV series MPU. See API 167 TWR for more details.
b) Use WPLSoft or digital display panel DU-01.
Function Group π(PI)

Number D1018, D1019
Contents:
1. D1018 and D1019 are combined as 32-bit data register for storing the floating point value ofπ(PI)
2. loating point value = H 40490FDB
Function Group Adjustment on Input Terminal Response Time

Number D1020, D1021
Contents:
1. D1020 can be used for setting up the response time of receiving pulses at X0 ~X7 for SS/ES/EX/SA/SX/SC
series MPU. (Setup range: 0 ~ 20; Unit: ms)
2. D1021 can be used for setting up the response time of receiving pulses at X10 ~X17 for ES series MPU. (Setup
range: 0 ~ 20; Unit: ms)
3. D1021 can be used for setting up the response time of receiving pulses at X10 ~X11 for SC series MPU. (Setup
range: 0 ~ 1,000; Unit: time)
4. D1020 can be used for setting up the response time of receiving pulses at X0 ~X7 for EH/EH2/SV series MPU.
(Setup range: 0 ~ 60; Unit: ms)

5. D1021 can be used for setting up the response time of receiving pulses at X10 ~X17 for EH/EH2/SV series
MPU. (Setup range: 0 ~ 60; Unit: ms)
6. When the power of PLC goes from “Off” to “On”, the content of D1020 and D1021 turn to 10 automatically.
Terminal response time

0
X0 0ms
1
1ms
Set by D1020 (default: 10)

10 Regenerating input
X17 10ms
15
15ms Status
memory
7. If the following programs are executed during the program, the response time of X0 ~ X7 will be set to 0ms. The
fastest response time of input terminals is 50μs due to that all terminals are connected with RC filter loop.
M1000
MOV K0 D1020
normally ON contact
8. There is no need to make adjustment on response time when using high-speed counters and interruptions
during the program.
9. Using API 51 REFF instruction has the same effect as modifying D1020 and D1021.
Function Group Execution Completed Flag

Number M1029, M1030, M1036, M1037, M1102, M1103
Contents:
Using execution completed flag:
1. API 52 MTR, API 71 HKY, API 72 DSW, API 74 SEGL, API 77 PR: M1029 = On whenever the instruction
completes one scan period.
2. API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR:

a) M1029 will be “On” after Y0 pulse output of SA/SX/SC/ES/EX/SS is completed. M1030 will be “On” after Y1
pulse output is compeleted. When PLSY and PLSR instruction is “Off”, M1029 and M1030 turn “Off”. You
have to reset M1029 and M1030 after the action is completed.
b) M1029 will be “On” after Y0 and Y1 pulse output of EH/EH2/SV is completed. M1030 will be “On” after Y2
and Y3 pulse output is compeleted. M1036 will be “On” after Y4 and Y5 pulse output of EH2/SV is
completed. M1037 will be “On” after Y6 and Y7 pulse output is completed.When PLSY and PLSR
instruction is “Off”, M1029, M1030, M1036 and M1037 turn “Off”. When the instruction is re-executed for the
next time, M1029, M1030, M1036 and M1037 will turn “Off” and “On” again when the execution is
completed.
3. API 63 INCD: M1029 will be “On” for a scan period when the assigned group number of data are compared.
4. API 67 RAMP, API 69 SORT:

a) When the execution of the instruction is completed, M1029= On. You have to reset M1029.
b) M1029 turns “Off” when the instruction is “Off”.
5. API 155 DABSR, API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA for EH/EH2/SV series MPU:
a) M1029 = On when the 1st output group Y0 and Y1 is completed. M1030 = On when the 2nd output group Y2
and Y3 is completed.
b) M1036 = On when the 3rd output group Y4 and Y5 of EH2/SV is completed. M1037 = On when the 4th output
group Y6 and Y7 is completed.
c) When the instruction is re-executed for the next time, M1029 or M1030 will turn “Off” and “On” again when
the execution is completed.
6. In API 57 PLSY, API 156 DZRN, API 158 DDRVI and API 159 DDRVA for SC series MPU: M1102 will be set On
when Y10 pulse output is completed. M1103 will be set On when Y11 pulse output is completed. After PLSY
instruction is disabled,M1102 and M1103 will be set Off. In DDRVA, DDRVI and DZRN, M1102 and M1103 will
be set Off when next time these instructions are enabled.
Function Group Communication Error Code
Number M1025, D1025
Contents:
When HPP, PC or HMI is connected to the PLC and the PLC receives illegal communication request during the
transmission of data, M1025 will be On and the error code will be written in D1025. See the error codes below.
01: Illegal instruction code
02: Illegal device address
03: Requested data exceed the range
07: Checksum error
Function Group Clear Instruction

Number M1031, M1032
Contents:
M1031 (clearing non-latched area) , M1032 (clearing latched area)
Device No. Cleared Device

Contact status of Y, general-purpose M and general-purpose S
General-purpose contact and timing coil of T
General-purpose contact, counting coil reset coil of C
M1031
General-purpose present value register of D
General-purpose present value register of T
General-purpose present value register of C

Device No. Cleared Device

Contact status of M and S for latched
Contact and timing coil of accumulative timer T
Contac and timing coil of high-speed counter C for latched
M1032
Present value register of D for latched
Present value register of accumulative timer T
Present value register of high-speed counter C for latched
Function Group Output Latched During STOP

Number M1033
Contents:
When M1033 = On and PLC goes from “RUN” to “STOP”, the On/Off status of output will be ratained.
Assume the output contact load of the PLC is a heater, when PLC switches from RUN to STOP, the status of the
heater will be retained. After the PLC program is modified, the PLC will RUN again.
Function Group All Output Y Inhibited

Number M1034
Contents:
When M1034 = On, all Y outputs will turn “Off”.
M1034 all outputs inhibited
Function Group RUN/STOP Switch

Number M1035, D1035
Contents:
1. When M1035 = On, EH/EH2/SV series MPU will determine the content (K0 ~ K15) in D1035 to enable input
points X0 ~ X17 as the RUN/STOP switch.
2. When M1035 = On, SA/SX/SC series MPU will enable the input point X7 (in SA), X3 (in SX) and X5 (in SC) as
the RUN/STOP switch.
Function Group Detecting Speed of X0 ~ X5

Number M1036
Contents:
1. For SC_V1.4 and above, SPD can detect the speed of X0 ~ X5 at the same time. The total bandwidth is 40KHz.
2. Program example:

X7
SET M1036
SPD X1 K1000 D0
3. Parameter D0 when X7 = On
Start No. of D0
Functions
+ index value
+0 Low 16 bits of the 32-bit speed detected at input point X0.
+1 High 16 bits of the 32-bit speed detected at input point X0.
+12 Remaining time for speed detection (unit: ms)
Function Group X0 Detecting Pulse Width

Number M1084, D1023
Contents:
When M1084 = On, X0 of ES/EX/SS_V6.4/SA/SX_V1.6/SC_V1.4 can detect pulse width. Whenever X0 turns from
“On” to “Off”, the value is updated once and stored in D1023 (unit: 0.1ms). The minimum detectable width is 0.1ms
and maximum 10,000ms.
Function Group Communication Port Function

Number M1120, M1136, M1138, M1139, M1143, D1036, D1109, D1120
Contents:
1. Supports ES/EX/SS_V6.0/SA/SX_V1.2/SC_V1.0/EH_V1.1/SV_V1.0 and versions above.
2. COM ports (COM1: RS-232; COM2: RS-485) in SA/SX/SC series MPU and COM ports (COM1: RS-232; COM2:
RS-232/RS-485/RS-422) in EH/EH2 series MPU support Modbus ASCII/RTU communication format with speed
of up to 115,200bps. COM1 and COM2 can be used at the same time. COM3: RS-232/RS-485 in EH/EH2 series
MPU supports Modbus ASCII communication format with speed of up to 38,400bps.
COM1: For slave stations only. Supports ASCII/RTU communication format, adjustable baud rate with
speed of up to 115,200bps, and modification on data length (data bits, parity bits, stop bits).

COM2: For master or slave stations. Supports ASCII/RTU communication format, adjustable baud rate
with speed of up to 115,200bps, and modification on data length (data bits, parity bits, stop bits).
COM3: For slave stations only. Supports ASCII communication format (data bits, parity bits, stop bits) 7, E,
1, adjustable baud rate with speed of up to 38,400bps. COM2 or COM3 cannot be used for slave
stations at the same time.
Communication Format Settings:
COM1: 1. Communication format is set in D1036. b8 ~ b15 do not support the communication protocol of
COM1 (RS-232) Slave
2. Communication setting in M1138 remains
3. M1139 is set in ASCII/RTU mode
COM2: 1. Communication format is set in D1120. Communication protocol of COM2
(RS-232/RS-485/RS-422) Master or Slave
3. M1143 is set in ASCII/RTU mode
COM3: 1. Communication format is set in D1109. b0 ~ b3 and b8 ~ b15 do not support the
communication protocol of COM3 (RS-232/RS-485) Slave
Communication protocols and how to set:
Content 0 1
b0 Data length b0 = 0:7 b0 = 1:8
b2, b1 = 00 : None
b1
parity bit b2, b1 = 01 : Odd
b2
b2, b1 = 11 : Even
b3 stop bits b3 = 0:1 bit b3 = 1:2 bit
b7 ~ b4 = 0001 (H1) : 110 bps
b7 ~ b4 = 0010 (H2) : 150 bps
b7 ~ b4 = 0011 (H3) : 300 bps
b7 ~ b4 = 0100 (H4) : 600 bps
b7 ~ b4 = 0101 (H5) : 1,200 bps
b7 ~ b4 = 0110 (H6) : 2,400 bps
b7 ~ b4
b7 ~ b4 = 0111 (H7) : 4,800 bps
b7 ~ b4 = 1000 (H8) : 9,600 bps
b7 ~ b4 = 1001 (H9) : 19,200 bps
b7 ~ b4 = 1010 (HA) : 38,400 bps
b7 ~ b4 = 1011 (HB) : 57,600 bps
b7 ~ b4 = 1100 (HC) : 115,200 bps
b8 Select start bit b8 = 0:None b8 = 1:D1124
st
b9 Select the 1 end bit b9 = 0:None b9 = 1:D1125
nd
b10 Select the 2 end bit b10 = 0:None b10 = 1:D1126
b15 ~ b11 Not defined

Example 1: Modifying communication format of COM2
1. Add the program code below on top of the program to modify the communication format of COM2. When PLC
switches from STOP to TUN, the program will detect whether M1120 is On in the first scan time. If M1120 is On,
the program will modify the relevant settings of COM2 according to the value set in D1120.
2. Modify the communication format of COM2 into ASCII mode, 57,600bps, 7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
(57,600, 7, E, 1)
M1002
MOV H86 D1120
SET M1120
Notes:
1. If COM2 is to be used as a Slave terminal, make sure there is no communication instruction existing in the
program.
2. After the communication format is modified, the format will stay intact when PLC switches from RUN to
STOP.
3. If you shut down the power of the PLC and repower it again, the modified communication format will return
to default setting.
Example 2: Modifying the communication format of COM1
1. Add the program code below on top of the program to modify the communication format of COM1. When PLC
switches from STOP to TUN, the program will detect whether M1138 is On in the first scan time. If M1138 is On,
the program will modify the relevant settings of COM1 according to the value set in D1036.
2. Modify the communication format of COM1 into ASCII mode, 115,200bps, 7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
(115,200, 7, E, 1)
M1002
MOV H86 D1036
SET M1138
Notes:
STOP.
to default setting.
Example 3: Modifying the communication format of COM3
1. The communication format of COM3 is fixed as 7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit. Add the program code below
on top of the program to modify the baud rate of COM3 into 38,400bps. When PLC switches from STOP to TUN,

the program will detect whether M1136 is On in the first scan time. If M1136 is On, the program will modify the
relevant settings of COM3 according to the value set in D1109.
2. Modify the baud rate of COM3 into 38,400bps
M1002
MOV HA0 D1109
SET M1136
Notes:
STOP.
to default setting.
Example 4: Setting up RTU mode of COM1 and COM2
1. COM1 and COM2 support ASCII/RTU mode. COM1 is set by M1139 and COM2 is set by M1143. When the flags
are On, they are in RTU mode; when the flags are Off, they are in ASCII mode.
2. How to set up RTU mode
COM1: (9,600, 8, E, 1, RTU)
M1002
MOV H86 D1036
SET M1138
SET M1139
COM2: (9,600, 8, E, 1, RTU)
M1002
MOV H86 D1120
SET M1120
SET M1143
3. COM2 of EH/EH2/SV series MPU supports the generation of interruption I170 when the data receiving is
completed in Slave mode.
4. Normally when the communication terminal of the PLC is in Slave mode, PLC will not immediately process the
communication data entered but process it after the END is executed. Therefore, when the scan time is very long
and you need the communication data to be processed immediately, you can use interruption I170 for this matter.
5. Example of interruption I170 (after the data receiving is completed in Slave mode)

EI
M1002
MOV H86 D1120
SET M1120
SET M1143
FEND
I170 IRET
END
With I170 in the program, when COM2 is in Slave mode and there are communication data coming in, PLC will
process the data and respond immediately.
Notes:
1. DO NOT updat program on-line when using I170.
2. The scan time of PLC will be slightly longer.
Function Group Communication Response Delay

Number D1038
Contents:
1. When PLC is used as slave station, in RS-485 communication interface, users can set up communication
response delay time ranging from 0 to 10,000 (0 ~ 1 second). If the time is without the range, D1038 = O (time
unit: 0.1ms). The set value of time must be less than that in D1000(scan time-out timer WDT).
2. In EASY PLC LINK, you can set up delayed transmission of the next communication data (unit: 1 scan period for
SA/SX/SC; 0.1ms for EH/EH2/SV).
Function Group Fixed Scan Time

Number M1039, D1039
Contents:
1. When M1039 = On, the scan time of program is determined by the content in D1039. When the execution of the
program is completed, the next scan will take place when the fixed scan time is reached. If the content in D1039
is less than the actual scan time of the program, the scan time will follow the actual scan time of the program.
M1000
M1039 Fixed scan time
Normally On
contact MOV P K20 D1039
Scan time is fixed to 20ms

2. Instructions related to scan time, RAMP (API 67), HKY (API 71), SEGL (API 74), ARWS (API 75) and PR (API
77) should be used together with “fixed scan time” or “constant interruption”.

3. Particularly for HKY instruction, when the 16-digit button input is operated by 4x4 matrix, the scan time has to be
fixed to longer than 20ms.
4. The scan time in D1010 ~ D1012 also includes fixed scan time.
Function Group Analog Function

Number D1056 ~ D1059, D1062, D1110 ~ D1113, D1116 ~ D1118
Contents:
1. Resolution of analog input channel: 10 bits for EX, corresponding to 0 ~ ±10 V (-512 ~ +511) or 0 ~ ±20 mA
(-512 ~ +511); 12 bits for SX, corresponding to 0 ~ ±10 V (-2,000 ~ +2,000) or 0 ~ ± 20 mA (-1,000 ~ +1,000).
2. Resolution of analog output channel: 8 bits for EX, corresponding to 0 ~ 10 V (0 ~ 255) or 0 ~ 20 mA (0 ~ 255);
12 bits for SX, corresponding to 0 ~ ±10 V (-2,000 ~ +2,000) or 0 ~ ±20 mA (-2,000 ~ +2,000).
3. Sampling time of analog/digital conversion. Default setting = 5; unit: ms. If D1118 ≤ 5, it will be regarded as 5ms.
4. Resolution of EH/EH2 analog input AD card (DVP-F2AD): 12 bits 0 ~ 10 V (0 ~ +4,000) or 11 bits 0 ~ 20 mA

(0~+2,000)
5. Resolution of EH/EH2 analog input DA card (DVP-F2DA): 12 bits 0 ~ 10 V (0 ~ +4,000) or 0 ~ 20 mA (0 ~

+4,000)
Device No. Function
D1056 Present value of EX/SX analog input channel CH0 and EH/EH2 AD card channel CH0
D1057 Present value of EX/SX analog input channel CH1 and EH/EH2 AD card channel CH1
D1058 Present value of EX analog input channel CH 2
D1059 Present value of EX analog input channel CH 3
D1062 Average times (2 ~ 4) of SX AD0 and AD1
D1110 Average value of EX/SX analog input channel CH0 and EH/EH2 AD card channel CH0
D1111 Average value of EX/SX analog input channel CH1 and EH/EH2 AD card channel CH1
D1112 Average value of EX analog input channel CH2
D1113 Average value of EX analog input channel CH3
D1116 EX/SX analog output channel CH0 and EH/EH2 DA card channel CH0
D1117 EX/SX analog output channel CH1 and EH/EH2 DA card channel CH1
D1118 Sampling time (ms) of EX/SX/EH/EH2 analog/digital conversion
Function Group Operational Error Flag

Number M1067 ~ M1068, D1067 ~ D1068
Contents:
1. Operational error flag:
Device Description Latched STOP → RUN RUN → STOP
M1067 Operational error flag None Cleared Latched

M1068 Operational error locked flag None Latched Latched

Device Description Latched STOP → RUN RUN → STOP
D1067 Operational error code None Cleared Latched

D1068 STEP value when operational error occurs None Latched Latched
2. Error code explanation:
D1067 error code Cause
H’ 0E18 BCD conversion error

H’ 0E19 Divisor is 0
H’ 0E1A Use of device exceeds the range (including E, F index register modification)
H’ 0E1B Square root value is negative
H’ 0E1C FROM/TO instruction communication error
Function Group Low Voltage

Number M1087, D1100
Contents:
1. When PLC detects LV (Low Voltage) signal, it will check if M1087 is “On” or not. If M1087 is “On”, the content in
D1100 will be stored in Y0 ~ Y17.
2. bit0 (LSB) of D1100 corresponds to Y0, bit1 corresponds to Y1, bit8 corresponds to Y10 and so on.
Function Group File Register

Number M1101, D1101 ~ D1103
Contents:
1. When the power of PLC turns from “Off” to “On”, PLC determines whether to automatically send the content in
the file register to the assigned data register by checking M1101, D1101 ~ D1103 (for SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV).
M1101: Whether to automatically downland data from file register

Start No. of file register K0 ~ K1,599 (for SA/SX/SC)
D1101:
Start No. of file register K0 ~ K9,999 (for EH/EH2/SV)
Number of data read from file register K0 ~ K1,600 (for SA/SX/SC)
D1102:
Number of data read from file register K0 ~ K8,000 (for EH/EH2/SV)
Location for storing data read from file register
D1103: Start No. of assigned data register D K2,000 ~ K4,999 (for SA/SX/SC)
Start No. of assigned data register D K2,000 ~ K9,999 (for EH/EH2/SV)
2. See API 148 MEMR and API 149 MEMW for more details.
Function Group DIP Switch Function Card

Contents:
1. When PLC is in RUN status with digital switch function card inserted, the 8 DIP switches amd their status
orrespond respectively to M1104 ~ M1111.

2. See API 109 SWRD for more details.
3. When PLC is in RUN status with 4DI card inserted into the input AX0 (photocoupler isolation), the status of AX0
~ AX3 correspond respectively to M1104 ~ M1107.
Function Group Transistor Output Function Card

Number M1112, M1113
Contents:
When PLC is in RUN status with 2DO function card inserted, M1112 and M1113 will correspond respectively to 2
transistors output points, AY0 and AY1.
Function Group Pulse Output With Speed Acceleration/Deceleration

Number M1115 ~ M1119, D1104
Contents:
1. Special D and special M for acceleration/ deceleration of speed pulse output for SA/SX/SC (not applicable to
SC_V1.4 and versions above):
Device No. Function
M1115 Activation switch

M1116 “Accelerating” flag
M1117 “Target frequency reached” flag
M1118 “Decelerating” flag
M1119 “Function completed” flag
D1104 Start No. of control register (D)
2. Parameters for D1104 (frequency range: 25Hz ~ 10KHz)
Index Function
+0 Start frequency (SF)

+1 Gap frequency (GF)
+2 Target frequency (TF)
+3 The lower 16 bits of the 32 bits for the total number of output pulses
(TP)
+4 The higher 16 bits of the 32 bits for the total number of output pulses
The lower 16 bits of the 32 bits for the total number of output pulses in
+5
accelerating/decelerating section
(AP)
The higher 16 bits of the 32 bits for the total number of output pulses in
+6
accelerating/decelerating section
3. No instruction is needed, users need only to fill out the parameter table and enable M1115 (in RUN mode). This
functio only supports Y0 output and the timing chart is as below.

Number of accel/decel sections = (TF-SF)/GF

GF
Number of output pulses in every section:
Frequency GP = AP/Number of accel/decel sections
GP
TF
SF
Number of pulses
AP AP
AP = number of accel/decel pulses
4. Note: this function is applicable only when “all” the conditions below are met.
a) Start frequency < target frequency.
b) Gap frequency ≤ (target frequency – start frequency)
c) Total number of pulses > (accel/decel number of pulses × 2)
d) For start frequency and target frequency: Min. 25Hz; Max. 10KHz
e) Number of accel/decel pulses > number of accel/decel sections
When M1115 turns from “On” to “Off”, M1119 will be reset and M1116, M1117 and M1118 remain unchanged. When
PLC goes from “STOP” to “RUN”, M1115 ~ M1119 will be reset as “Off”. D1104 will only be cleared as “0” when it
turns from “Off” to “On”.
Either accel/decel pulse output function or PLSY Y0 output can be executed at a time when PLC is operating.
5. How to calculate the action time of each section
Assume the start frequency is set as 1KHz, gap frequency as 1KHz, target frequency as 5KHz, total number of
pulses as 100 and number of acceleration pulses as 40, the timing diagram of the acceleration sections is as the
figure below.
Frequency (Hz)
5,000
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
Time (sec)
t1 t2 t3 t 4
From the conditions above, we can obtain the number of acceleration/deceleration sections is (5K – 1K)/1K = 4
and the number of output pulses in each section is 40/4 = 10. Therefore, in the diagram, t1 = (1/1K) × 10 = 10ms,
t2 = (1/2K) × 10 = 5ms, t3 = (1/3K) × 10 = 3.33ms, t4 = (1/4K) × 10 = 2.5ms.
6. Program example: Forward/reverse acceleration/deceleration step motor control

M1002
MOV K500 D1104 D500 ~ D506 as parameter addresses
MOV K1000 D500 Start frequency: 1KHz
MOV K100 D501 Interval frequency: 100Hz
MOV K10000 D502 Target frequency: 10KHz
DMOV K80000 D503 Number of output pulses: 80,000
DMOV K10000 D505 Number of pulses in accel/decel section: 10,000
SET M1115
a) When PLC is in RUN status, store all parameter settings into the registers designated in D1104.
b) When M1115 = On, the acceleration/deceleration pulse output will start.
c) M1116 = On in the acceleration process. When the speed reaches its target, M1117 will be On. M1118 = On
in the deceleration process. When the speed reaches its target, M1119 will be On.
d) M1115 will not be reset automatically. You have to check the conditions during the process and reset it.
e) Pulse output curves:
Frequency (Hz)
10K
1K Number
of pulses
10,000 70,000 80,000
Frequency (Hz)
10K
1K
Time (ms)
2,606 8,606 11,213
Function Group Special High-Speed Pulse Output

Number M1133 ~ M1135, D1133
Contents:
1. Special D and special M for special high-speed pulse Y0 (50KHz)for SA/SX/SC (not applicable to SC_V1.4 and
versions above):

No. Function
M1133 Output switch for special high-speed pulse Y0 (50KHz) (On = enabled)
M1134 On = Continuous output switch for special high-speed pulse Y0 (50KHz)
M1135 “Number of pulses reached” flag for special high-speed pulse Y0 (50KHz)
D1133 Start No. of control register (D) for special high-speed pulse Y0 (50KHz)
2. Parameters for D1133:
Index Function
+0 The lower 16 bits of the 32 bits for output frequency of special high-speed pulse Y0
+1 The higher 16 bits of the 32 bits for output frequency of special high-speed pulse Y0
+2 The lower 16 bits of the 32 bits for number of output pulses of special high-speed pulse Y0
+3 The higher 16 bits of the 32 bits for number of output pulses of special high-speed pulse Y0
+4 The lower 16 bits of the 32 bits of the present number of special high-speed pulses Y0
+5 The higher 16 bits of the 32 bits of the present number of special high-speed pulses Y0
3. The function:
All output frequency and number of pulses stated in the table above can be modified when M1133 = On and
M1135 = On. The modification will not affect the present output pulses. The present number of output pulses is
updated in every scan time. When M1133 turns from “Off” to “on”, the number will be cleared as “0”. When 1133
turns from “On” to “Off”, the last numner of output pulses will be shown.
Note:
The special high-speed pulse output function can only be used on specific Y0 output point when PLC is in RUN status.
It can coexist with PLSY (Y0) in the program and PLSY (Y1) will not be affected. If PLSY (Y0) instruction is executed
prior to this function, the function cannot be used and vice versa. When the function is executed, the general function,
general Y0 output will be invalid but Y1 ~ Y7 can be used.
The output frequency of this function is higher (max. 50KHz) than that of PLSY instruction.
Function Group 2-axis Synchronous Control (PH)

Number M1133, M1135, D1133 ~ D1136
Contents:
1. Special D and special M for 2-axis synchronous drawing oblique and arc for SC_V1.4 and versions above:
Device No. Function
M1133 Start flag for Y10 output for two-axis synchronous control
M1135 Start flag for Y11 output for two-axis synchronous control
D1133 Start No. of control register (D) for Y10 output for two-axis synchronous control
D1134 Number of sections for Y10 output for two-axis synchronous control
D1135 Start No. of control register (D) for Y11 output for two-axis synchronous control
D1136 Number of sections for Y11 output for two-axis synchronous control
2. Parameters for D1133, D1135:

Index Function
+0 Y10, Y11 2-axis synchronous control; output frequency of 1st section = low 16 bits of 32 bits
+1 Y10, Y11 2-axis synchronous control; output frequency of 1st section = high 16 bits of 32 bits
+2 Y10, Y11 2-axis synchronous control; output pulse number of 1st section = low 16 bits of 32 bits
Y10, Y11 2-axis synchronous control; output pulse number of 1st section = high 16 bits of 32
+3
bits
3. The functions:
a) Definition of the 2 axes:
X axis: Y0 (direction output) and Y10 (pulse output)
Y axis: Y1 (direction output) and Y11 (pulse output)
b) Define the format of output table:
Assume D1133 = K100 and D1134 = K3 and the output table has to be set as:
Output Number of
Section No. Device D Device D Description
frequency Output pulses
1 D101,D100 K10,000 D103,D102 K1,000 Section 1 outputs 1,000 pulses in 10KHz
Note: The frequency and number of output pulses are all in 32-bit. Thus, the 3 sections will continuously
occupy 12 D devices (3 × 2 × 2 = 12).
4. Note:
a) Make sure that the output frequency and the number of pulses have been set before using this function.
The output frequency and the number of pulses cannot be modified during the execution of the function.
b) When PLC program scans to END instruction, it will auto-check whether this function needs to be enabled.
c) When M1133 and M1135 are set in the same scan period, the two axes will output pulses synchronously.
d) When the output frequency < 100Hz, the output will be executed in 100Hz. When the output frequency >
100KHz, the output will be executed by 100KHz.
e) Only device D (D0 ~ D999 and D2000 ~ D4999) can be used for this function. DO NOT use other devices
or exceed the range of device D.
f) The maximum number of segments for this function is 50. When the number of segments < 1 or > 50, this
function will be disabled.
g) After this function is enabled, M1102 = “On” indicates Y10 output is completed and M1103 = “On” indicates
Y11 output is completed.
5. Examples:
a) Draw oblique lines in 2 axes
Destination: Draw 2 oblique lines (as figure 1)
Program explanation: Y0 and Y10 belong to X axis, and Y1 and Y11 belong to Y axis (as figure 2)
Output frequency and number of pulses: see table 1

(5,000, 4,000)
Section 2
(1,000, 3,000)
X
(0,0)
Section 1 Section 2 (Figure 1)
M1002
MOV K200 D1133
MOV K2 D1134
MOV K300 D1135
MOV K2 D1136
M0
Y0
M1133
Y1
M1135
(Figure 2)
Axis Section Device D Output frequency Device D Number of output pulses

1 D201, D200 K1,000 D203, D202 K1,000
X
2 D205, D204 K4,000 D207, D206 K4,000
1 D301, D300 K3,000 D303, D302 K3,000
Y
2 D305, D304 K1,000 D307, D306 K1,000
(Table 1)
b) Draw an arc in 2 axes
Destination: Draw a 90° arc (see figure 3)
Program explanation: Same as the the example of draw oblique lines, except that D1134 and D1136 are
modified as K10 (output 10 sections)

Y
(50,000, 50,000)
X
(0,0)
10 sections (Figure 3)
Axis Section Device D Output frequency Device D Number of output pulses

1 D201, D200 K1,230 D203, D202 K615
2 D205, D204 K3,664 D207, D206 K1,832
3 D209, D208 K6,004 D211, D210 K3,002
4 D213, D212 K8,200 D215, D214 K4,100
5 D217, D216 K10,190 D219, D218 K5,095
X
6 D221, D220 K11,932 D223, D222 K5,966
7 D225, D224 K13,380 D227, D226 K6,690
8 D229, D228 K14,498 D231, D230 K7,249
9 D233, D232 K15,258 D235, D234 K7,629
10 D237, D236 K15,644 D239, D238 K7,822
1 D301, D300 K15,644 D303, D302 K7,822
2 D305, D304 K15,258 D307, D306 K7,629
3 D309, D308 K14,498 D311, D310 K7,249
4 D313, D312 K13,380 D315, D314 K6,690
5 D317, D316 K11,932 D319, D318 K5,966
Y
6 D321, D320 K10,190 D323, D322 K5,095
7 D325, D324 K8,200 D327, D326 K4,100
8 D329, D328 K6,004 D331, D330 K3,002
9 D333, D332 K3,664 D335, D334 K1,832
10 D337,D336 K1,230 D339, D338 K615
(Table 2)
c) Draw arcs in the four quadrants
Destination: Draw four 90° arcs (see figure 4)
Program explanation: When the direction signal is On, the direction will be a positive one; when the
direction signal is Off, the direction will be a negative one (see figure 5)

Y
(-50,000, 50,000) (50,000, 50,000)
Y0=Off Y0=On
Y1=On Y1=On
Quadrant II Quadrant I
X
(0,0) Quadrant IV
Quadrant III
Y0=Off Y0=On
Y1=Off Y1=Off
(-50,000, -50,000) (50 000, -50,000) (Figure 4)
M1002
MOV K200 D1133
MOV K10 D1134
MOV K300 D1135
MOV K10 D1136

M1
SET Y0
SET Y1
M2
RST Y0
SET Y1
M3
RST Y0
RST Y1
M4
SET Y0
RST Y1
M0
M1133
M1135
(Figure 5)
M0, M1 = On refers to drawing a 90° arc in Quadrant I; M0, M2 = On refers to drawing a 90° arc in Quadrant II;
M0, M3 = On refers to drawing a 90° arc in Quadrant III; M0, M4 = On refers to drawing a 90° arc in Quadrant
IV.
The four 90° arcs are drawn when acceleration in X and deceleration in Y. To draw the arcs when
deceleration in X and acceleration in X, modify the program into figure 6, i.e. D1333 = K300 and D1335 =
K200.

M1002
MOV K300 D1133
MOV K10 D1134
MOV K200 D1135
MOV K10 D1136

M1
SET Y0
SET Y1
M2
RST Y0
SET Y1
M3
RST Y0
RST Y1
M4
SET Y0
RST Y1
M0
M1133
M1135
(Figure 6)
M0, M1 = On refers to drawing a 90° arc in Quadrant I; M0, M2 = On refers to drawing a 90° arc in Quadrant II;
M0, M3 = On refers to drawing a 90° arc in Quadrant III; M0, M4 = On refers to drawing a 90° arc in Quadrant
IV. (See figure 7)
Y
(-50,000, 50,000) (50,000, 50,000)
Quadrant II Quadrant I
Y0=Off Y0=On
Y1=On Y1=On
X
(0,0)
Y0=Off Y0=On
Y1=Off Quadrant IV Quadrant III Y1=Off
(-50,000, -50,000) (50,000, -50,000) (Figure 7)
d) Draw a circle
Destination: Extract four 90° arcs from figure 4 and figure 7 and combine them into a circle (see figure 8).

Program explanation: When the direction control pin is On, the direction will be a positive one; otherwier, it
will be a negative one (see figure 9). When X0 = On, D0 will accumulate once and the 2 axes will draw a
90° arc.
Output frequency and number of pulses: see table 2.
Y
(50,000, 50,000)
D0=K1 D0=K2
X
(0,0) (10,000, 0)
D0=K3
D0=K4
(50,000, -50,000) (Figure 8)
M1002
MOV K10 D1134
MOV K10 D1136
MOV K0 D0
X0
INC D0
= D0 K1 SET Y0
SET Y1
MOV K200 D1133
MOV K300 D1135
= D0 K2 SET Y0
RST Y1
MOV K300 D1133
MOV K200 D1135

= D0 K3 RST Y0
RST Y1
MOV K200 D1133
MOV K300 D1135
= D0 K4 RST Y0
SET Y1
MOV K300 D1133
MOV K200 D1135

X0
M1133
M1135
(Figure 9)
e) Calculate the frequency and number of output pulses in each section

Destination: Draw 10 sections of arcs clockwise until they reach (50,000, 50,000) (see figure 10)
Rx = target value in X; Ry = target value in Y; N = number of sections; π = 3.1416
(0,Ry) (x9,y9) (x10,y10)

(x7,y7)
(x8,y8)
(x6,y6)
(x5,y5)
(x4,y4)
(x3,y3)
(x2,y2)
(x1,y1)
X
(0,0) (Rx,0)
(Figure 10)
Step 1: Calculate the position for each section

x1 = Rx – Rx × sin [(N-1) × π ÷ (2 × N)]
x2 = Rx – Rx × sin [(N-2) × π ÷ (2 × N)] …. See table 3
y1 = Ry × sin [1 × π ÷ (2 × N)]
y2 = Ry × sin [2 × π ÷ (2 × N)]…. See table 4
Position x1 x2 x3 x4 x5
With decimal
615.55 2,447.12 5,449.61 9,549.08 14,464.59
point
Without
615 2,447 5,449 9,549 14,464
decimal point

Position x6 x7 x8 x9 x10 (RX)

With decimal
20,610.67 27,300.42 34,549.11 42,178.25 50,000
point
Without
20,610 27,300 34,549 42,178 50,000
decimal point
(Table 3)
Position y1 y2 y3 y4 y5
With decimal
7,821.74 15,450.88 22,699.57 29,389.32 35,355.40
point
Without
7,821 15,450 22,699 29,389 35,355
decimal point
Position y6 y7 y8 y9 y10 (Ry)
With decimal
40,450.91 44,550.38 47,552.87 49,384.44 50,000
point
Without
40,450 44,550 47,552 49,384 50,000
decimal point
(Table 4)
Step 2: Calculate the distance (number of pulses) between every section
In X axis: x1 = x1 – 0, x2 = x2 – x1, ... x10 = x10 – x9 (see table 5)
In Y axis: y1 = y1 – 0, y2 = y2 – y1, … y10 = y10 – y9 (see table 5)
Position x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 x10
Number of pulses 615 1,832 3,002 4,100 5,095 5,966 6,690 7,249 7,629 7,822
Position y1 y2 y3 y4 y5 y6 y7 y8 y9 y10
Number of pulses 7,821 7,629 7,249 6,690 5,966 5,095 4,100 3,002 1,832 616
(Table 5)
Step 3: Decide the execution time of every section and obtain the frequency of every section by table 5
Assume every section executes for 500ms, the equation for frequency (Hz) of each section is: fx1 = 1÷0.5 ×
x1、fx2 =1÷0.5 × x2…(see table 6)
Position fx1 fx2 fx3 fx4 fx5 fx6 fx7 fx8 fx9 fx10
Frequency 1,230 3,664 6,004 8,200 10,190 11,932 13,380 14,498 15,258 15,644
Position fy1 fy2 fy3 fy4 fy5 fy6 fy7 fy8 fy9 fy10
Frequency 15,642 15,258 14,498 13,380 11,932 10,190 8,200 6,004 3,644 1,232
(Table 6)
Step 4: Fill Device D into table 2 and complete all steps.
Reminder 1: When Rx=Ry, you can calculate X axis, and copy X axis to Y axis (as fy1 = fx10, fy2 =
fx9, …fy10 = fx1,and y1 = x10, y2 = x9,…y10 = x1 )
Reminder 2: When drawing a counterclockwise arc, switch the index value of X axis with that of Y axis.
Function Group Detecting Extension

Number D1140, D1142, D1143, D1145
Contents:
1. D1140: Number of special right-side extension modules (AD, DA, XA, PT, TC…); Max. 8
2. D1142: Number of X input points on digital extension device
3. D1143: Number of Y output points on digital extension device

4. D1145: Number of special left-side extension modules (AD, DA, XA, PT, TC…); Max. 8 (available in SV only)
Function Group Adjustable Pulse Speed Acceleration/Deceleration

Number M1144 ~ M1149, M1154, D1030, D1031, D1144, D1154, D1155
Contents:
1. Special D and special M of Y0 adjustable pulse speed acceleration/deceleration for SA/SX/SC:
Device No. Function
M1144 Activation switch for Y0 adjustable pulse speed acceleration/deceleration
M1145 Accerlerating flag for Y0 adjustable pulse speed acceleration/deceleration
M1146 “Target frequency reached” flag for Y0 adjustable pulse speed acceleration/deceleration
M1147 “Decerlerating” flag for Y0 adjustable pulse speed acceleration/deceleration
M1148 “Function completed” flag for Y0 adjustable pulse speed acceleration/deceleration
M1149 “Counting temporarily stops” flag for Y0 adjustable pulse speed acceleration/deceleration
M1154 “Enabling deceleration” flag for Y0 adjustable pulse speed acceleration/deceleration
D1030 The lower 16 bits in the 32-bit data register for accumulative Y0 output pulses
D1031 The higher 16 bits in the 32-bit data register for accumulative Y0 output pulses
D1144 Starting No. of the register (D) for Y0 adjustable pulse speed acceleration/deceleration
D1154 Recommended value for indicated gap time of deceleration(10 ~ 32,767 ms)
D1155 Recommended value for indicated gap frequency of deceleration (-1 ~ -32,700 Hz)
2. Parameters for D1144:
Index Function
+0 Total number of sections (n) (max. 10)
+1 Currently executed section (read only)
+2 Start frequency of the 1st section (SF1)
+3 Gap time of the 1st section (GT1)
+4 Gap frequency of the 1st section (GF1)
+5 Target frequency of the 1st section (TF1)
+6 The lower 16 bits of the 32 bits for the target number of output pulses in the 1st section (SE1)
+7 The higher 16 bits of the 32 bits for the target number of output pulses in the 1st section (SE1)
+8 Start frequency of the 2nd section (SF2); Cannot be the same as TF1
+9 Gap time of the 2nd section (GT2)
+ 10 Gap frequency of the 2nd section (GF2)
+ 11 Target frequency of the 2nd section (TF2)
+ 12 The lower 16 bits of the 32 bits for the target number of output pulses in the 2nd section (SE2)
+ 13 The higher 16 bits of the 32 bits for the target number of output pulses in the 2nd section (SE2)
: :
Start frequency of the nth section (SFn); Cannot be the same as the start frequency of the n-1th
+ n*6 + 2
section (TFn-1)
+ n*6 + 3 Gap time of the nth section (GTn)

+ n*6 + 4 Gap frequency of the nth section (GFn)

+ n*6 + 5 Target frequency of the nth section (TFn)
+ n*6 + 6 The lower 16 bits of the 32 bits for the target number of output pulses in the nth section (SEn)
+ n*6 + 7 The higher 16 bits of the 32 bits for the target number of output pulses in the nth section (SEn)
3. The functions:
This function can only be used on Y0 output point and the timing chart is as follows. After filling out the
parameter table, setup M1144 to start the function (should be applied in RUN mode).
GF
GF
Frequency(Hz)
GT
TF2
GT
SF3
SF2 TF3
TF1 SF4
TF4
SF1
Time(ms)
1st section 2nd section 3rd section 4th section

number of number of number of number of
pulses pulses pulses pulses
(SE1) (SE2) (SE3) (SE4)
4. How to use and the restrictions:

a) The start frequency and target frequency have to be ≥ 200Hz; otherwise, the function will not be executed or
complete execution.
b) The start frequency and target frequency have to be < 32,700Hz. Frequency > 32,700Hz will be executed in
32,700Hz.
c) Range of gap time: 1 ~ 32,767ms (Min. unit: ms)
d) The range of gap frequency within acceleration section: 1Hz ~ 32,700Hz; within deceleration section: -1 ~
-32,700Hz. If the gap frequency is set as 0Hz, it will fail to reach target frequency in the executed section but
in the next section when the target number of pulses is reached.
e) The target number of pulses in a section has to be > (GF × GT/1,000) × [(TF - SF)/GF]; otherwise the target
may not be reached. To correct it, the user may extend gap time or increase the target number of pulses.
f) When PLC is in RUN status and there is a high-speed instruction assigning Y0 input, the instruction will be
executed prior to other instructions.
g) After M1144 = On, if M1148 has not be reached and M1144 is “Off”, deceleration will be enabled. And if
M1154 = Off at the moment, the deceleration rule will be “decelerating 200Hz every 200ms” and M1147 will
be set. The pulse output will stop when the frequency falls under 200Hz. If M1154 = On at the moment, the
output will be executed following the gap time and frequency as set by the user. The time shall not be ≤ 0 (if ≤
0, it will follow the initial setting 200ms) and the frequency shall not be ≥ 0 (if = 0, it will follow the initial setting
-1KHz; if > 0, negative sign comes before the value).

h) When M1148 = On but M1144 = Off, deceleration will not be enabled and M1148 will be reset. Whenever
M1144 = Off, M1149 will be reset.
i) The number of sections being executed is determined upon the total number of sections. (Max. number of
sections = 10)
j) Acceleration or deceleration is determined upon the start frequency of the next section. That is, if the target
frequency of the current section < the start frequency of the next section, acceleration will take place in the
next section and the target frequency of the next section must > its start frequency. If the target frequency of
the current section > the start frequency of the next section, deceleration will take place in the next section
and the target frequency of the next section must < its start frequency. Correct pulse output cannot be
guaranteed if the user does not follow the rules.
k) When PLC goes from STOP to RUN, M1144 ~ M1149 will be reset to “Off”. When PLC goes from RUN to
STOP, only M1144 will be reset, not M1145 ~ M1149.
l) SA/SX/SC uses parameter table D0 ~ D999 and D2000 ~ D4999. If the used parameter table (including all
the used section parameters) falls off the range, the instruction will not be executed and M1144 will be “Off”.
5. Example 1: Calculate the number of output pulses in every acceleration/deceleration section
Assume you set the start frequency of a section as 200Hz, gap time as 100ms, gap frequency as 100Hz, target
frequency as 500Hz, and target number of pulses as 1,000:
The number of output pulses at start frequency = 200 × 100 / 1,000 = 20
The number of output pulses in the first acceleration gap = 300 × 100 / 1,000 = 30
The number of output pulses in the second acceleration gap = 400 × 100 / 1,000 = 40
The number of output pulses at target frequency = 1,000 – (40 + 30 + 20) = 910
(Please be noted that we suggest this number be bigger than 10.)
Output time for target frequency = 1 / 500 × 910 = 1,820 ms
Total time spent for this section = 1,820 + 3 × 100 = 2,120 ms

6. Example 2: Pulse output program for 1 acceleration section and 1 deceleration section
M1002
MOV K200
MOV K2 D200
MOV K250 D202
MOV K500 D203
MOV K250 D204
MOV D205
D206
MOV K750 D208
MOV K500 D209
MOV K-250 D210
MOV K250 D211
K200 D212
M0
END
7. Example 3: Acceleration and deceleration in 1 section and the pulse output program with direction switch
Y7=OFF
TF1
SF2
TF2
SF1
X0=ON
Position
Zero point SF1

TF2
SF2 TF1
Y7=On
Explanation:
a) See example 2 for the settings for acceleration and deceleration. The acceleration/deceleration frequency is
stored in the latched area; therefore, you do not have to write it in in the program.
b) The figure above is the example of the motion. When X0 = On, it will start the motion back and forth; when X0
= Off, the motion will stop. Y7 is a direction switch.
c) The program:

M1002
RST M0
RST M1
X0
SET M0
X0 M0
ALT M1
M1
Y7
M1
SET
M1
M1148
RST
M0
X0
RST
END
8. Example 4: Program of zero return for 1 acceleration section and 1 deceleration section
The timing diagram of relevant flags:
Accelerating to Decelerating to
zero point zero point
Zero return stops

X0
M1144
M1148
Pulse output stops

M1149
Frequency and the positions:
Frequency (Hz)
Zero point
Position
Accelerating to Decelerating to
zero point zero point
Settings of acceleration/deceleration time, frequency and number of pulses:

Started No. D
Setting
+ index value
+0 2
+2 250 (Hz)
+3 100 (ms)
+4 500 (Hz)
+5 10,000 (Hz)
+6, +7 10 (pulses)
+8 9,750 (Hz)
+9 50 (ms)
+10 -500 (Hz)
+11 250 (Hz)
+12, +13 30,000 (pulses)
The program: (Assume X7 is the switch for triggering zero return)

X7
SET
SET
X0
RST
X0
SET
RST
END
Program explanations:
a) When X7 is triggered, M1144 will enable an acceleration. Set M1149 (counting temporarily stops) and 10
pulses will be sent out before the deceleration switch X0 is triggered and the program will enter the
deceleration section.
b) When X0 is disabled (i.e. zero return is completed), set M1148 to disable this function.
Note: The example offered here is one of the applications. Please adjust the settings of the parameters according to
the features of and restrictions on your machines.
Function Group Single Step Execution

Number M1170, M1171, D1170
Contents:
1. Special D and special M for single step execution for EH/EH2/SV:

Device No. Function
M1170 Start flag

M1171 Action flag
D1170 STEP No. of the currently executed instruction
2. The function:
a) Execution timing: The flag is valid only when PLC is in RUN status.
b) Action steps:
i) When M1170 is enabled, PLC enters the single step execution mode. PLC stays at a specific instruction,
stores the location of STEP in D1170 and executes the instsruction once.
ii) When M1171 is forced “On”, PLC executes the next instruction and stops. At the same time, PLC
auto-force “O ff” M1171 and stops at the next instruction. D1170 stores the present STEP value.
iii) When Y output is in single step execution mode, Y outputs immediately without having to wait until END
instruction is being executed.
3. Note:
a) Instruction that will be affected by scan time will be executed incorrectly due to the single step execution. For
example, when HKY instruction is executed, it takes 8 scan times to obtain a valid input value from a key.
Therefore, the single step execution will result in incorrect actions.
b) High-speed pulse input/output and high-speed counter comparison instructions are executed by hardware;
therefore, they will not be affected by the single step execution.
Function Group 2-phase Pulse Output

Number M1172 ~ M1174, D1172 ~ D1177
Contents:
1. Special D and special M for two-phase pulse output for SA/SX/SC:
Device No. Function
M1172 Switch for two-phase pulse output (On = enabled)

M1173 On = Continuous output switch
M1174 “Number of pulses reached” flag
D1172 Output frequency (12Hz ~ 20KHz)
D1173 Output mode (K1 and K2)
D1174 The lower 16 bits of the 32 bits for the target number of pulses
D1175 The higher 16 bits of the 32 bits for the target number of pulses
D1176 The lower 16 bits of the 32 bits for the present number of pulses
D1177 The higher 16 bits of the 32 bits for the present number of pulses
2. The function:
Output frequency = 1/1 pulse cycle period (i.e. 1/T; as the figure below)

There are two output modes. K1 refers to “A-phase ahead of B-phase” and K2 refers to “B-phase ahead of
A-phase”. The number of pulses accumulates once whenever a phase gap occurs. For example, the number of
pulses in the figure below = 8, and when the number is reached, M1174 turns “On”. To clear the number, simply
turn “Off” M1172.
T
Y0(A)
Y1(B)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The output frequency, target number of pulses and selection of modes can be modified when M1172 = On and
M1174 = Off. Modification on output frequency and target number of pulses will not affect the present number of
pulses, but when the mode is modified, the present number of pulses will be cleared as “0”. The present number
of output pulses is updated in every scan time. When M1133 turns from “Off” to “on”, the number will be cleared
as “0”. When M1172 is cleared as “0” when PLC goes from STOP to RUN. When PLC goes from RUN to STOP,
the last number of pulses will be shown.
3. Note:
This function can only be used when PLC is in RUN status and can coexist with PLSY instruction in the program.
If PLSY instruction is executed prior to this function, the function cannot be used and vice versa.
Function Group VR Volume

Number M1178 ~ M1179, D1178 ~ D1179
Contents:
1. Special D and special M for built-in 2-point VR volume for EH/EH2/SV/SA/SC:
Device No. Function
M1178 Enable VR0 volume

M1179 Enable VR1 volume
D1178 VR0 value
D1179 VR1 value
2. The function:
This function should be used when PLC is in RUN status. When M1178 = On, VR0 value will be converted into a
value of 0 ~ 255 and stored in D1178. When M1179 = On, VR1 value will be converted into a value of 0 ~ 255 and
stored in D1179.
3. See API 85 VRRD for more details.
Function Group Interruption Instruction for Reading the Number of Pulses

Number D1180 ~ D1181，D1198 ~ D1199

Contents:
1. SA/SX/SC can use external interruption to store the present value in the middle-high-speed counter into D1180 ~
D1181, D1198 ~ D1199
2. The function:
a) For SA/SX, X0 (pulse input point) has to work with X4 (external interruption point), C235/C251/C253 (high-speed
counter) and I401 (interruption No.). D1180 and D1181 are the registers to store the 32-bit values. X1 (pulse input
point) has to work with X5 (external interruption point), C236 and I501. D1198 and D1199 are the registers to
store the 32-bit values.
b) For SC, X10 (pulse input point) has to work with X4 (external interruption point), C243/C255 (high-speed counter)
and I401 (interruption No.). D1180 and D1181 are the registers to store the 32-bit values. X11 (pulse input point)
has to work with X5 (external interruption point), C245 and I501. D1198 and D1199 are the registers to store the
32-bit values.
Function Group MODEM Connection Function

Contents:
1. The system connection
PC
DVP-EH/EH2 series MPU
Telecommunication
network
MODEM MODEM
WPLSoft is executing.
DVP-F232 interface
2. Special M for MODEM connection for EH/EH2:
Device No. Function Note
M1184 Enable MODEM On: The following actions are valid

M1185 Initialize MODEM Off: Initialization is completed
M1186 Fail to initialize MODEM Off: M1185 = On
M1187 MODEM initialization is completed Off: M1185 = On
M1188 Shows if MODEM is connected On: Connecting
Note: The special Ms are both applicable when PLC is in RUN or STOP status.
3. How to conntect (Please follow the steps below):

a) Set “On” M1184 (Enable PLC MODEM connection).
b) Set “On” M1185 (Enable initialization of MODEM from PLC).
c) Check if the initialization of MODEM is successful from M1186, M1187.
d) Wait for the connection.
4. Note:
a) When PLC is to be connected with MODEM, a RS-232 extension card is required. If there is no RS-232
extension card, all special M above will be invalid.

b) After enabling MODEM (M1184 = On), PLC has to initialize MODEM first (M1185 = On). If PLC fails to
initialize MODEM, the auto-answering function of the MODEM will not be enabled.
c) After MODEM is initialized, it will enter auto-answering mode automatically.
d) If the remote PC is disconnected, MODEM will enter stand-by mode automatically and if the user turns off
MODEM now, MODEM will have to be initialized again when it is turned on again.
e) The connection speed is set by PLC as 9,600bps fixed and modification on the speed is not allowed.
MODEM has to be able to support the speed of 9,600bps and above.
f) The initialization format from PLC to MODEM are ATZ and ATS0 = 1.
g) If PLC fails to initialize MODEM, use the super terminal in PC to initialize it by the format ATZ and ATS0 = 1.
Function Group Latched Area

Contents:
1. The latched area for EH/EH2/SV/SA/SX/SC is from the start address No. to the end address No.
2. See the tables in Chapter 2.1 for more details.
Function Group Force On/Off of Input Point X

Number M1304
Contents:
1. For SA/SX/SC, when M1304 = On, peripheral devices, e.g. WPLSoft or HPP, can force On/Off of X0 ~ X17, but
the hardware LED will not respond to it.
2. For EH/EH2/SV, when M1304 = On, peripheral devices, e.g. WPLSoft or HPP, can force On/Off of input point X,
and the hardware LED will respond to it.
Function Group High-speed Output Pulse Stop Mode

Number M1310 ~ M1311, M1334 ~ M1335, D1166 ~ D1167, D1343 ~ D1353
Contents:
1. Special D and special M for high-speed pulse output stop mode: (SC_V1.4 and versions above are with an
additional mode 3)
Device No. Function
M1334 Select stop mode for Y10 pulse
M1335 Select stop mode for Y11 pulse
M1310 Immediately stop Y10 pulse output
M1311 Immediately stop Y11 pulse output
D1166 X10 rising-edge/falling-edge counting mode switch
D1167 X11 rising-edge/falling-edge counting mode switch
D1343 Acceleration/deceleration time for Y10 pulse output
D1353 Acceleration/deceleration time for Y11 pulse output
2. How do Y10 pulse output stop modes work:

a) Using Y10 pulse output

Mode 1 – Planned deceleration
Applicable to: DDRVI and DDRVA instructions
Criteria for executing planned deceleration: Shut down the criteria contact for pulse output instruction and
The time from executing planned deceleration to the end of pulse output: The time set in D1343 (for
acceleration/deceleration)
The solid lines in the figure below are the originally planned routes and the dotted lines refer to the routes
after planned deceleration is executed.
Frequency
Instruction shut down and M1334 = Off
Target frequency
Start frequency
D1340
Time
Acceleration/deceleration time
D1343
Mode 2 – Output shutdown
Applicable to: DDRVI, DDRVA, PLSY instructions
Criteria for executing output shutdown: Shut down the criteria contact for pulse output instruction and turn
“On” M1334.(Because PLSY does not have acceleration/deceleration setting, M1334 does not need to
be set in PLSY)
The time from executing output shutdown to the end of pulse output: Max. 1 scan cycle.
The solid lines in the figure below are the originally planned routes and the dotted lines refer to the routes
after output shutdown is executed.
Frequency
Instruction shut down and M1334 = On
Target frequency
Start frequency
D1340
Time
Mode 3 – Immediate output shutdown

Criteria for executing immediate output shutdown: M1310 = On (set before executing the instruction) and
the criteria triggers set in X10 (D1166 = K0 refers to rising-edge; D1166 = K1 refers to falling-edge)
The time from executing immediate output shutdown to the end of pulse output: Max. 1 pulse time.
The solid lines in the figure below are the originally planned routes and the dotted lines refer to the
routes after X10 is triggered.

Frequency
X10 triggered
Target frequency
Start frequency
D1340
Time
Max. Stop time = 1 pulse time

b) Using Y11 pulse output
Mode 1 – Planned deceleration
Applicable to: DDRVI and DDRVA instructions
Criteria for executing planned deceleration: Shut down the criteria contact for pulse output instruction and
The time from executing planned deceleration to the end of pulse output: The time set in D1353 (for
acceleration/deceleration)
Mode 2 – Output shutdown
Criteria for executing output shutdown: Shut down the criteria contact for pulse output instruction and turn
“On” M1335. (Because PLSY does not have acceleration/deceleration setting, M1335 does not need to be
set in PLSY)
The time from executing output shutdown to the end of pulse output: Max. 1 scan cycle.
Mode 3 – Immediate output shutdown
Criteria for executing immediate output shutdown: M1311 = On (set before executing the instruction) and
the criteria triggers set in X11 (D1167 = K0 refers to rising-edge; D1167 = K1 refers to falling-edge)
The time from executing immediate output shutdown to the end of pulse output: Max. 1 pulse time.
3. Note:
a) The execution criteria M1334 and M1335 for mode 1 and 2 have to be set before executing pulse output
shutdown instruction. The execution criteria M1310, M1311 and trigger criteria D1166, D1167 for mode 3
have to be set before the pulse output instruction is executed.
b) In mode 3 (immediate output shutdown), Y10 can only be used with X10 and Y11 with X11.
c) When using X10 or X11 in mode 3, DO NOT use X10 or X11 as the input high-speed counter.
Function Group Right-Side Special Extension Module ID

Contents:
1. The ID of special extension module, if any, connected to EH/EH2/SV are stored in D1320 ~ D1327 in sequence.
2. Special extension module ID for EH:

Module ID Module ID
Module Name Module Name
(hex) (hex)
DVP04AD-H H’0400 DVP01PU-H H’0110

DVP04DA-H H’0401 DVP01HC-H H’0120

DVP04PT-H H’0402 DVP02HC-H H’0220
DVP04TC-H H’0403 DVP01DT-H H’0130
DVP06XA-H H’0604 DVP02DT-H H’0230
3. Special extension module ID for EH2:

Module ID Module ID
(hex) (hex)
DVP04AD-H2 H’6400 DVP01PU-H2 H’6110
DVP04DA-H2 H’6401 DVP01HC-H2 H’6120
DVP04PT-H2 H’6402 DVP02HC-H2 H’6220
DVP04TC-H2 H’6403 DVP01DT-H2 H’6130
DVP06XA-H2 H’6604 DVP02DT-H2 H’6230
4. Special extension module ID for SV:

Module ID Module ID
(hex) (hex)
DVP04AD-S H’0088 DVP04PT-S H’008A
DVP06AD-S H’00C8 DVP04TC-S H’008B
DVP02DA-S H’0049 DVP06XA-S H’00CC
DVP04DA-S H’0089 DVP01PU-S H'0110
Function Group Left-Side High-Speed Special Extension Module ID

Contents:
1. The ID of left-side special extension module, if any, connected to SV are stored in D1386 ~ D1393 in sequence.
2. Left-side special extension module ID for SV:

Module ID Module ID
(hex) (hex)
DVP04AD-SL H’4400 DVP01HC-SL H’4120
DVP04DA-SL H’4401 DVP02HC-SL H’4220
DVP04PT-SL H’4402 DVPDNET-SL H’4130
DVP04TC-SL H’4403 DVPEN01-SL H'4050
DVP06XA-SL H’6404 DVPMDM-SL H’4040
DVP01PU-SL H’4110

Function Group EASY EASY PLC LINK

Number M1350 ~ M1354, M1360 ~ M1519, D1399, D1355 ~ D1370, D1415 ~ D1465, D1480 ~ D1991
Contents:
1. Special D and special M for ID1 ~ ID8 of the 16 stations in EASY EASY PLC LINK (M1353 = Off) for
SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV:
MASTER PLC
SLAVE ID 1 SLAVE ID 2 SLAVE ID 3 SLAVE ID 4 SLAVE ID 5 SLAVE ID 6 SLAVE ID 7 SLAVE ID 8
Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write Read Write
out in out in out in out in out in out in out in out in
M1353 = Off: Disable 32 stations in the Link and the function of reading/writing more than 16 data (RST M1353); the
No. of special D for storing the 16 read/written data.
D1480 D1496 D1512 D1528 D1544 D1560 D1576 D1592 D1608 D1624 D1640 D1656 D1672 D1688 D1704 D1720
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data of data
Start Communication Address

LINK in SLAVE PLC?
M1360 M1361 M1362 M1363 M1364 M1365 M1366 M1367
Action flag for SLAVE PLC from MASTER PLC
M1376 M1377 M1378 M1379 M1380 M1381 M1382 M1383
“Read/write error” flag
M1392 M1393 M1394 M1395 M1396 M1397 M1398 M1399
“Reading completed” flag (turns “Off” whenever read/write a station is completed)
M1408 M1409 M1410 M1411 M1412 M1413 M1414 M1415
“Writing completed” flag (turns “Off” whenever read/write a station is completed)
M1424 M1425 M1426 M1427 M1428 M1429 M1430 M1431
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓

│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
Default start communication address D1355 ~ D1362 to be read = H1064 (D100)
Default start communication address D1415 ~ D1422 to be written = H10C8 (D200)

2. Special D and special M for ID9 ~ ID16 of the 16 stations in EASY EASY PLC LINK (M1353 = Off) for
SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV:
MASTER PLC
M1353 = Off: Disable 32 stations in the Link and the function of reading/writing more than 16 data (RST M1353); the
No. of special D for storing the 16 read/written data.
│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │
D144 D145
D1443 D1459 D1444 D1460 D1445 D1461 D1446 D1462 D1447 D1463 D1448 D1464 D1449 D1465
2 8
LINK in SLAVE PLC?
M1368 M1369 M1370 M1371 M1372 M1373 M1374 M1375
M1384 M1385 M1386 M1387 M1388 M1389 M1390 M1391
M1400 M1401 M1402 M1403 M1404 M1405 M1406 M1407
M1416 M1417 M1418 M1419 M1420 M1421 M1422 M1423
M1432 M1433 M1434 M1435 M1436 M1437 M1438 M1439
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓

│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │

3. Special D and special M for ID1 ~ ID8 of the 32 stations in EASY EASY PLC LINK (M1353 = On) for
EH/EH2/SV:
MASTER PLC
M1353 = On: Enable 32 stations in the Link and the function of reading/writing more than 16 data (SET M1353); the
No. of D registers for storing the read/written data.

LINK in SLAVE PLC?
M1360 M1361 M1362 M1363 M1364 M1365 M1366 M1367
M1376 M1377 M1378 M1379 M1380 M1381 M1382 M1383
M1392 M1393 M1394 M1395 M1396 M1397 M1398 M1399
M1408 M1409 M1410 M1411 M1412 M1413 M1414 M1415
M1424 M1425 M1426 M1427 M1428 M1429 M1430 M1431

│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │

EH/EH2/SV:
MASTER PLC
out in out in out in out in out in Out in out in out in

LINK in SLAVE PLC?
M1368 M1369 M1370 M1371 M1372 M1373 M1374 M1375
M1384 M1385 M1386 M1387 M1388 M1389 M1390 M1391
M1400 M1401 M1402 M1403 M1404 M1405 M1406 M1407
M1416 M1417 M1418 M1419 M1420 M1421 M1422 M1423
M1432 M1433 M1434 M1435 M1436 M1437 M1438 M1439

│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │

EH/EH2/SV:
MASTER PLC
start Communication Address

LINK in SLAVE PLC?
M1440 M1441 M1442 M1443 M1444 M1445 M1446 M1447
M1456 M1457 M1458 M1459 M1460 M1461 M1462 M1463
M1472 M1473 M1474 M1475 M1476 M1477 M1478 M1479
M1488 M1489 M1490 M1491 M1492 M1493 M1494 M1495
M1504 M1505 M1506 M1507 M1508 M1509 M1510 M1511

│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │

EH/EH2/SV:
MASTER PLC

LINK in SLAVE PLC?
M1448 M1449 M1450 M1451 M1452 M1453 M1454 M1455
M1464 M1465 M1466 M1467 M1468 M1469 M1470 M1471
“Read/write” error flag
M1480 M1481 M1482 M1483 M1484 M1485 M1486 M1487
M1496 M1497 M1498 M1499 M1500 M1501 M1502 M1503
M1512 M1513 M1514 M1515 M1516 M1517 M1518 M1519

│ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │ │

7. Note:
a) EASY EASY PLC LINK is based on MODBUS communication protocol.
b) EH/EH2/SV supports 32 stations in the LINK and reading/writing of more than 16 data (SET1353) (M1353 =
On). SA/SX/SC supports 16 devices in the LINK and reading/writing of 16 data.
c) EH/EH2/SV: When a MASTER PLC and a Slave PLC is connected, they are able to read/write maximum
100 WORD data (M1353 = On). SA/SX/SC: Does not support M1353. When a Master PLC and a Slave PLC
is connected, they are able to read/write maximum 16 WORD data.
d) When the Master PLC is connected through COM2 (RS-485), baud rates and communication formats of all
Slave PLCs must be the same (set in D1120). When SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV serves as Master, it supports
ASCII and RTU format.
e) When the Slave PLC is connected through COM2 (RS-232/RS-485/RS-422), baud rates and
communication formats of all connected Slave PLCs must be the same as those in the Master PLC (set in
D1120). When SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV serves as Slave, it supports ASCII and RTU format.
f) When the Slave PLC is connected through COM1 (RS-232), baud rates and communication formats of all
connected Slave PLCs must be the same as those in the Master PLC (set in D1036). When
SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV serves as Slave, it supports ASCII and RTU format.
g) When the Slave PLC is connected through COM3 (RS-232/RS-485), baud rates and communication
formats of all connected Slave PLCs must be the same as those in the Master PLC (set in D1109). When
SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV serves as Slave, it only supports ASCII format (Max. baud rate = 38,400bps).
h) The start station No. (K1 ~ K214) of Slave ID1 is assigned by D1399 of Master PLC. Station No. of every
Slave and Master PLC can not be the same (set in D1121).
i) For one-to-one LINK: Connected through RS-232, RS-485, RS-422. PLC COM1, COM2, COM3 support
many communication formats.
j) For one-to-many LINK: Connected through RS-485. PLC COM1, COM2, COM3 support many
communication formats.
8. How to operate EASY EASY PLC LINK:

a) Set up the baud rates and communication formats of Master PLC and all connected Slave PLCs and make
them the same. COM1_RS-232: D1136; COM2_RS-232/RS-485/RS-422: D1120; COM3_RS-232/RS-485:
D1109.
b) Set up the station No. of Master PLC (in D1121) and assign the start station No. of Slave PLC from D1399
of Master PLC. Next, set up the station No. of Slave PLC. Station No. of Master and Slave cannot be the
same.
c) Set up the number of connected Slave stations and the number of data to be read in/written to Slave
stations. For EH/EH2/SV (M1353 = On): Enable the function of the 32 conncected Slaves and
reading/writing of more than 16 data (Max. 100 data). Next, set up the No. of D registers for storing the read
data (D1480 ~ D1495, D1576 ~ D1591) and written data (D1496 ~ D1511, D1592 ~ D1607) (See the
explanations above on special D). SA/SX/SC only supports reading/writing of 16 data.
d) Set up the length of data to be read from/written into the Slave. (If the user does not set up set them up, PLC
will follow the initial setting or the setting set in the previous operation.) (See the explanations above on
special D.)

e) Set up the start communication address of the Slave to be read/written. (See the explanations above on
special D). The default start communication address of Slave to be read: H1064 = D100. The default start
communication address of Slave to be written: H10C8 = D200.
f) Operation procedure:
i) Enable the function of more than 32 stations connected to EASY EASY PLC LINK and reading/writing of
16 data (Max. 100 data) (M1353).
ii) Enable reading/writing of EASY EASY PLC LINK in the same polling (M1354).
iii) Set up EASY EASY PLC LINK as auto mode (M1351), or manual mode (M1352) and the times of polling
(D1431).
iv) Enable EASY EASY PLC LINK (M1350).
9. How does Master PLC work:

a) To detect station No. of Slave: Set up the LINK to be automatic mode (M1351 = On) or manual mode
(M1352 = On) (Note: M1351 and M1352 cannot be “On” at the same time) When M1350 = On, Master PLC
starts to detect the total number of Slave stations connected to the LINK and records the number in D1433.
The detection time may differ upon the number of Slave stations and the setting of communication timeout
in D1129.
b) When M1360 ~ M1375, M1440 ~ M1455 = On, Slave ID1 ~ ID32 exist.
c) If the detected number Slave stations is 0, M1350 will be “Off” and the LINK will be stopped.
d) M1353 and M1354 should be set before EASY EASY PLC LINK is enabled. When EASY EASY PLC LINK is
executed, the two special M will not afftec the action of EASY EASY PLC LINK.
e) When 1353 = On, D1480 ~ D1607 (read/write buffer of SLAVE ID1 ~ 4) will be used for storing the No. of
registers D for Slave ID1 ~ ID32, The No. of register D shall not be “> 9,900” or “< 0” ; otherwise, PLC will
auto-set it as 9,900. The data length shall not be “ > 100” or “<0”; otherwise, PLC will auto-set it as 100.
f) When M1354 = On, set up Modbus Function H17 (synchronous read/write) for EASY EASY PLC LINK
communication. If the number of written data is set to be “0”, the communication of EASY EASY PLC LINK
will be automatically converted into Modbus Function H03 (read multiple words). Similarly, if the number of
read data is set to be “0”, the communication of EASY EASY PLC LINK will be converted into Modbus
Function H06 (write 1 word) or Modbus Function H10 (write multiple words).
g) If the number of read/written data > 16, the time for timeout (D1129) shall be > 500ms in case
communication timeout may occur.
h) After M1350 = On, Master PLC detects the ID of Slave E PLC only right after the LINK is enabled and will
not detect the ID again afterward.
i) After the detection on Slave PLCs is completed, Master PLC starts to read and write data from/into every
Slave PLC. Please be noted that, Master PLC only reads/writes data from/into the detected Slave PLC.
Master PLC will not read/write from/into the new Slave PLC to the LINK, unless it re-detects the ID of Slave
PLCs.
j) Master PLC conducts reading before writing. The ranges of Slave PLCs to be read/written will follow the
setting.
k) Master PLC will move to the reading/writing of the next Slave PLC after finishing reading/writing the current
Slave PLC.

10. Auto mode and maual mode:

a) Auto mode (M1351 = On): Master PLC automatically reads/writes from/to Slave PLC and stops when
M1350/M1351 = Off to terminate EASY EASY PLC LINK.
b) Manual mode (M1352 = On): When M1352 = On, you also have to set up the times of polling in D1431. One
time of polling refers to the completion of reading and writing all Slaves. After the EASY PLC LINK is
enabled, D1432 will start to count how many LINKs have been done. When D1431 = D1432, EASY EASY
PLC LINK stops and M1352 is reset. To re-enable EASY EASY PLC LINK in the manual mode, simply turn
“On” M1352 and D1431 will starts to count the times of LINK again.
c) Note:
i) Automatic mode (M1351) and manual mode (M1352) cannot be “On” at the same time; otherwise EASY
EASY PLC LINK will stop and M1350 will be reset.
ii) For EH/EH2/SV: M1350 has to be reset before switching between automatic mode and manual mode. For
SA/SX/SC: No such restriction
iii) The communication timeout is adjustable (D1129, range: 200 ≤ D1129 ≤ 3,000). If D1129 falls out the range,
PLC will determine the time by 200 or 3,000. The timeout setting of EASY EASY PLC LINK is only valid if it is
set before the LINK is enabled. If the number of read/written data >16, the communication timeout shall be >
500ms in case a communication timeout may occur.
iv) EASY EASY PLC LINK is only workable when the baud rate is > 1,200bps. If the baud rate is < 9,600, the
communication timeout setting shall be > 1 second.
v) The communication is unworkable when the number of read/written data = 0.
vi) EASY EASY PLC LINK does not support the reading/writing from/to 32-bit counters (C200 ~ C255).
vii) The maximum set value for D1399 is 230. If the set value is bigger than 230, PLC will automatically correct it
as 230. The minimum set value for D1300 is 1. If the set value is smaller than 1, PLC will automatically
correct it as 1.
viii) Setting up of D1399 has to be done before EASY EASY PLC LINK is enabled. After EASY EASY PLC LINK
is enabled, setting up D1399 will not result in any changes.
ix) Advantages (when using a multi-layer network): Assume you are using a network with 3 layers and the first
and second layer and the second and third layer are using EASY EASY PLC LINK for communication, the
IDs in the second and third layer will definitely overlap due to the old version of EASY PLC LINK detects only
Slave ID#1 ~ 16. When the IDs of Slave and Master overlap, EASY PLC LINK will ignore the PLC of
overlapping ID, resulting in the situation that the third layer can have only 15 PLCs. Therefore, D1399 allows
more PLCs connected in a multi-layer network.

11. Operation Procedure of EASY EASY PLC LINK

Set up the Slave ID# to be read
Set up the number of data in Slave to be read
Set up the Slave ID# to be written
Set up the number of data in Slave to be written
(If there is no set value, use the previous set value or the default
value.)
Enable Enable 32 slaves Disable

linkage and up to
100 data for exchange
1. Enable 32 slaves linkage and up to Disable 32 slaves linkage and up to

100 data for exchange (set M1353). 100 data for exchange.
2. Set up the register D for storing the (Reset M1353)
read data.
3. Set up the register D for storing the
written data.
Enable Communicating Disable

by Modbus 0X17
Set M1354 Reset M1354
Enable auto mode Enable auto/maual Enable manual mode

mode of EASY PLC
LINK
Set M1351 Set M1352

Set times of communication
(D1431)
Set M1350
Start to execute EASY PLC LINK

a) Example 1: Enabling 32 slave units linkage and up to 100 data for exchange in EASY EASY PLC LINK by
M1353
M1002
SET M1353
MOV K17 D1121
MOV H86 D1120
SET M1120
MOV K2000 D1480
MOV K3000 D1496
MOV K300 D1129
MOV K48 D1434
MOV K48 D1450

X1
M1351
M1350
END
M1353 has to be set On before EASY EASY PLC LINK is enabled. When EASY EASY PLC LINK is
executed, On/Off of M1353 will not affect the execution.
Registers designated in D1480 ~ D1495, D1576~D1591 (starting register for data read from Slave ID#1 ~
16) and D1496 ~ D1511, D1592 ~ D1607 (starting register for data written into Slave ID#1 ~ 16) can only
be register D, and every special D will correspond to one Slave ID#, e.g. D1480 corresponds to ID1,
D1481 to ID2, and so on.
D1480 ~ D1495, D1576 ~ D1591, D1496 ~ D1511 and D1592 ~ D1607 have to be set before EASY EASY
PLC LINK is enabled. In the execution of EASY EASY PLC LINK, you can modify the contents in these
special Ds, but the modified results will take effect in the next EASY EASY PLC LINK polling.
If the ID# designated by D1480 ~ D1495, D1576 ~ D1591, D1496 ~ D1511 and D1592 ~ D1607 is smaller
than 0 or bigger than 9,900, PLC will automatically correct the ID# into 9,900.
If M1353 is not enabled during the execution of EASY PLC LINK, the range for D1434 ~ D1449, D1544 ~
D1559 (number of data read from Slave ID#) and D1450 ~ D1465, D1560 ~ D1575 (numbere of data
written into Slave ID#) will be 0 ~ 16. If the setting in the special D exceeds the range, PLC will correct it to
16. When M1353 is enabled, the range will be 0 ~ 100. If the setting in the special D exceeds the range,
PLC will correct it to 100.

You can modify the settings in D1434 ~ D1449, D1544 ~ D1559, D1450 ~ D1465 and D1560 ~ D1575
during the execution of EASY EASY PLC LINK, but the modified results will take effect in the next EASY
EASY PLC LINK polling.
b) Example 2: EASY EASY PLC LINK with M1353 and I170
M1002
SET M1353
MOV K17 D1121
MOV H86 D1120
SET M1120
MOV K2000 D1480
MOV K3000 D1496
MOV K300 D1129
MOV K48 D1434
MOV K48 D1450

X1
M1350
M1351
FEND
I170 IRET
END
With I170, the processing of data in EASY EASY PLC LINK will not be done at END, but at the enabling of
I170 immediately after the receiving of data is completed
If the reaction speed of the RS-485 IC direction control signal pin of the Slave is slow, it is suggested that
you do not enable I170.
You can set up D1399 (starting Slave ID designated by EASY PLC LINK), and the ID# of the next 15
Slaves have to be in sequence. For example, when D1399 is set as K20, the Master PLC will detect Slave
ID# 20 ~ 35.
c) Example 3: Connection of 1 Master and 2 Slaves by RS-485 and exchange of 16 data between Master and
Slaves through EASY PLC LINK (M1353 = Off, linkage of 16 stations, 16 data read/write mode)
Write the ladder diagram program into Master PLC (ID#17)

M1002
MOV K17 D1121 Master ID#
MOV H86 D1120 COM2 communication protocol
SET M1120 Retain communication protocol
MOV K16 D1434 Number of data read from Slave ID#1
MOV K16 D1450 Number of data written into Slave ID#1
MOV K16 D1435 Number of data read from Slave ID#2
MOV K16 D1451 Number of data written into Slave ID#2

X1
M1351 Auto mode
M1350 Enable EASY PLC LINK
END
When X1 = On, the data exchange between Master and the two Slaves will be automatically done in
EASY PLC LINK, i.e. the data in D100 ~ D115 in the two Slaves will be read into D1480 ~ D1495 and
D1512 ~ D1527 of the Master, and the data in D1496 ~ D1511 and D1528 ~ D1543 will be written into
D200 ~ D215 of the two Slaves.
Master PLC *1 Slave PLC*2

Read
D1480 ~ D1495 D100 ~ D115 of Slave ID#1
Write
D1496 ~ D1511 D200 ~ D215 of Slave ID#1
Read
D1512 ~ D1527 D100 ~ D115 of Slave ID#2
Write
D1528 ~ D1543 D200 ~ D215 of Slave ID#2
Assume the data in D for data exchange between Master and Slave before EASY PLC LINK is enabled
(M1350 = Off) are as the follow:
Master PLC Preset value Slave PLC Preset value
D1480 ~ D1495 K0 D100 ~ D115 of Slave ID#1 K5,000

D1496 ~ D1511 K1,000 D200 ~ D215 of Slave ID#1 K0
D1512 ~ D1527 K0 D100 ~ D115 of Slave ID#2 K6,000
D1528 ~ D1543 K2,000 D200 ~ D215 of Slave ID#2 K0
After EASY PLC LINK is enabled (M1350 = On), the data in D for data exchange will become:

Master PLC Preset value Slave PLC Preset value
D1480 ~ D1495 K5,000 D100 ~ D115 of Slave ID#1 K5,000

The Master PLC has to be SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV series MPU, and the Slave PLC can be any MPU of
DVP series.
There can be maximum 16 Slave PLCs in EASY PLC LINK. See the special Ds in the Master PLC
corresponding to D100 ~ D115 and D200 ~ D215 in every Slave PLC in the tables of special M and
special D.
d) Example 4: Connection between Delta PLC and Delta VFD-M AC motor drive through EASY PLC LINK for
STOP, forward/reverser revolution and writing/reading of frequency.
Write the ladder diagram program into Master PLC (ID#17)
M1002
MOV K17 D1121 Master ID#
MOV H86 D1120 COM2 communication protocol
MOV K6 D1434 Number of data read
MOV K2 D1450 Number of data written
MOV H2100 D1355 Starting reference for Master to read from Slave
MOV H2000 D1415 Starting reference for Master to write in Slave

X1
M1351 Auto mode
M1350 Enable PLC LINK
END
D1480 ~ D1485 correspond to parameters H2100 ~ H2105 in VFD-M. When X1 = On, EASY PLC LINK
will be enabled, and the data in H2100 ~ H2105 will be displayed in D1480 ~ D1485.
D1496 ~ D1497 correspond to parameters H2000 ~ H2001 in VFD-M. When X1 = On, EASY PLC LINK
will be enabled, and the data in H2000 ~ H2001 will be displayed in D1496 ~ D1497.
Modify D1496 to give command to VFD, e.g. D1496 = H12: enabling forward revolution of VFD-M; D1496
= H11: enabling reverse revolution of VFD.
Modify D1497 to change the frequency of VFD, e.g. D1497 = K5,000: changing the frequency to 50KHz.
The Master PLC has to be SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV series MPU, and the Slave AC motor drive can be any
VFD series models except VFD-A.

The Slave can also be Delta temperature controller DTA, DTB, Delta servo ASDA and so on which are
compatible to Modbus protocol. Maximum 16 devices are connectable to the LINK.
See the tables of special M and special D for the starting ID of Slave to be read/written and the number of
data to be read/written.
12. Communication addresses of devices in DVP series PLC:
Applicable to
Device Range Type Address
ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/EH2/SV
S 000 ~ 255 bit 0000 ~ 00FF 0 ~ 127
S 246 ~ 511 bit 0100 ~ 01FF
0 ~ 1,023 0 ~ 1,023
S 512 ~ 767 bit 0200 ~ 02FF -
S 768 ~ 1,023 bit 0300 ~ 03FF
X 000 ~ 377 (Octal) bit 0400 ~ 04FF 0 ~ 177 0 ~ 177 0 ~ 377
Y 000 ~ 377 (Octal) bit 0500 ~ 05FF 0 ~ 177 0 ~ 177 0 ~ 377
T 000 ~ 255 bit/word 0600 ~ 06FF 0 ~ 127 0 ~ 255 0 ~ 255
M 000 ~ 255 bit 0800 ~ 08FF
M 256 ~ 511 bit 0900 ~ 09FF
M 512 ~ 767 bit 0A00 ~ 0AFF 0 ~ 1,279
M 768 ~ 1,023 bit 0B00 ~ 0BFF
M 1,024 ~ 1,279 bit 0C00 ~ 0CFF
M 1,280 ~ 1,535 bit 0D00 ~ 0DFF
M 1,536 ~ 1,791 bit B000 ~ B0FF
M 1,792 ~ 2,047 bit B100 ~ B1FF
0 ~ 4,095 0 ~ 4,095
M 2,048 ~ 2,303 bit B200 ~ B2FF
M 2,304 ~ 2,559 bit B300 ~ B3FF
M 2,560 ~ 2,815 bit B400 ~ B4FF -
M 2,816 ~ 3,071 bit B500 ~ B5FF
M 3,072 ~ 3,327 bit B600 ~ B6FF
M 3,328 ~ 3,583 bit B700 ~ B7FF
M 3,584 ~ 3,839 bit B800 ~ B8FF
M 3,840 ~ 4,095 bit B900 ~ B9FF
0 ~ 199 16-bit bit/word 0E00 ~ 0EC7 0 ~ 127 0 ~ 199 0 ~ 199
C bit 0EC8 ~ 0EFF
200 ~ 255 32-bit 232 ~ 255 200 ~ 255 200 ~ 255
word 0700 ~ 076F
D 000 ~ 256 word 1000 ~ 10FF
D 256 ~ 511 word 1100 ~ 11FF
D 512 ~ 767 word 1200 ~ 12FF
0 ~ 1,311 0 ~ 4,999 0 ~ 9,999
D 768 ~ 1,023 word 1300 ~ 13FF
D 1,024 ~ 1,279 word 1400 ~ 14FF
D 1,280 ~ 1,535 word 1500 ~ 15FF

Applicable to
Device Range Type Address
ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/EH2/SV
D 1,536 ~ 1,791 word 1600 ~ 16FF
D 1,792 ~ 2,047 word 1700 ~ 17FF
D 2,048 ~ 2,303 word 1800 ~ 18FF
D 2,304 ~ 2,559 word 1900 ~ 19FF
D 2,560 ~ 2 815 word 1A00 ~ 1AFF
D 2,816 ~ 3,071 word 1B00 ~ 1BFF
D 3,072 ~ 3,327 word 1C00 ~ 1CFF
0 ~ 4,999
D 3,328 ~ 3,583 word 1D00 ~ 1DFF
D 3,584 ~ 3,839 word 1E00 ~ 1EFF
D 3,840 ~ 4,095 word 1F00 ~ 1FFF
D 4,096 ~ 4,351 word 9000 ~ 90FF
D 4,352 ~ 4,607 word 9100 ~ 91FF
D 4 608 ~ 4863 word 9200 ~ 92FF
D 4,864 ~ 5,119 word 9300 ~ 93FF
D 5,120 ~ 5,375 word 9400 ~ 94FF
D 5,376 ~ 5,631 word 9500 ~ 95FF
D 5,632 ~ 5,887 word 9600 ~ 96FF
- 0 ~ 9,999
D 5,888 ~ 6,143 word 9700 ~ 97FF
D 6,144 ~ 6,399 word 9800 ~ 98FF
D 6,400 ~ 6,655 word 9900 ~ 99FF
D 6,656 ~ 6,911 word 9A00 ~ 9AFF
D 6,912 ~ 7,167 word 9B00 ~ 9BFF
D 7,168 ~ 7,423 word 9C00 ~ 9CFF
D 7,424 ~ 7,679 word 9D00 ~ 9DFF
-
D 7,680 ~ 7,935 word 9E00 ~ 9EFF
D 7,936 ~ 8,191 word 9F00 ~ 9FFF
D 8,192 ~ 8,447 word A000 ~ A0FF
D 8,448 ~ 8,703 word A100 ~ A1FF
D 8,704 ~ 8,959 word A200 ~ A2FF
D 8,960 ~ 9,215 word A300 ~ A3FF
D 9,216 ~ 9,471 word A400 ~ A4FF
D 9,472 ~ 9,727 word A500 ~ A5FF
D 9,728 ~ 9,983 word A600 ~ A6FF
D 9,984 ~ 9,999 word A700 ~ A70F

2.12 Error Codes

After you write the program into the PLC, the illegal use of operands (devices) or incorrect syntax in the program
will result in flashing of ERROR indicator and M1004 = On. In this case, you can find out the cause of the error by
checking the error code (hex) in special register D1004. The address where the error occurs is stored in the data
register D1137. If the error is a general loop error, the address stored in D1137 will be invalid.
Error Error
Cause of error Cause of error
code code
Times of using TTMR, STMR instruction

0001 Use of device S exceeds the range 0F0A
exceed the range
Using P* repeatedly or use of P* exceeds the Times of using SORT instruction exceed the
0002 0F0B
range range
Times of using TKY instruction exceed the
0003 Use of KnSm exceeds the range 0F0C
range
Using I* repeatedly or use of I* exceeds the Times of using HKY instruction exceed the
0102 0F0D
range range
0202 Use of MC N* exceeds the range 1000 Improper use of operands of ZRST instruction
Incorrect use of E, F, or the modification
0302 Use of MCR N* exceeds the range 10EF
exceeds the range
0401 Use of device X exceeds the range Times of using TTMR, PR, HOUR instructions
exceed the range.
0403 Use of KnXm exceeds the range 2000
Improper use of operands of MRT, ARWS
0501 Use of device Y exceeds the range instructions
0503 Use of KnYm exceeds the range C400 Illegal instruction
0601 Use of device T exceeds the range C401 General loop error
Continuously using LD/LDI instructions for
0604 Use of register T exceeds the range C402
more than 9 times
0801 Use of device M exceeds the range C403 Continuously using MPS for more than 9 times
0803 Use of KnMm exceeds the range C404 More than 6 steps in FOR – NEXT
0B01 Incorrect use of KH
0D01 Improper use of operands of DECO instruction Using STL/RET between FOR – NEXT
Using SRET/IRET between FOR – NEXT
ES/EX/SS/EH: improper use of operands of C405
Using MC/MCR between FOR – NEXT
ENCO instruction Using END/FEND between FOR – NEXT
0D02
SA/SX/SC: illegal use of the first operand of
ANS instruction
Improper use of operands of DHSCS
0D03 C407 Continuously using STL for more than 9 times
instruction
Improper use of operands of DHSCR
0D04 C408 Using MC/MCR in STL, using I/P in STL
instruction
Improper use of operands of pulse output Using STL/RET in subroutine
0D05 C409
instruction Using STL/RET in interruption subroutine
0D06 Improper use of operands of PWM instruction Using MC/MCR in subroutine
C40A
Using MC/MCR in interruption subroutine
Improper use of operands of FROM/TO
0D07 MC/MCR does not start from N0, or is not
instruction C40B
continuous
0D08 Improper use of operands of PID instruction C40C Corresponding N of MC and MCR are different
0D09 Improper use of operands of SPD instruction C40D Improper use of I/P
IRET does not appear after the last FEND
0D0A Incorrect operands in DHSZ instruction C40E
SRET does not appear after the last FEND

Error Error
Cause of error Cause of error
code code
PLC program and data in parameters have not

0D0B Improper use of operands in IST instruction C40F
been initialized
Invalid RUN/STOP instruction to extension
0E01 Use of device C exceeds the range C41B
module
0E04 Use of register C exceeds the range C41C Points of extension module exceed the range
Improper use of operand CXXX of DCNT Number of extension modules exceeds the
0E05 C41D
instsruction range
0E18 BCD conversion error C41E Incorrect hardware setting for extension module
0E19 Division error (divisor = 0) C41F Failing to write data into memory
Use of device exceeds the range (including E,
0E1A C420 Read/write function card error
F index register modification)
0E1B The index of the radical is a negative value C430 Initializing parallel interface error
0E1C Communication error of FROM/TO instruction C440 Hardware error in high-speed counter
0F04 Use of register D exceeds the range C441 Hardware error in high-speed comparator
Improper use of operand DXXX of DCNT
0F05 C442 Hardware error in MCU pulse output
instruction
0F06 Improper use of operands of SFTR instruction C443 No response from extension unit
0F07 Improper use of operands of SFTL instruction C4EE No END instruction in the program
0F08 Improper use of operands of REF instruction C4FF Invalid instruction (no such instruction existing)
Improper use of operands of WSFR, WSFL
0F09
instructions

3 Basic Instructions
3.1 Basic Instructions and Step Ladder Instructions
Basic Instructions
Instruction Execution speed (us)

Function Operands STEP Page
Code ES SA EH
LD Loading in A contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 3.8 3.8 0.24 (0.56) 1~3 3-3
LDI Loading in B contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 3.88 3.88 0.24 (0.56) 1~3 3-3
AND Series connection- A contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 2.32 2.32 0.24 (0.56) 1~3 3-3
ANI Series connection- B contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 2.4 2.4 0.24 (0.56) 1~3 3-4
OR Parallel connection- A contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 2.32 2.32 0.24 (0.56) 1~3 3-4
ORI Parallel connection- B contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 2.4 2.4 0.24 (0.56) 1~3 3-5
ANB Series connection- loop blocks N/A 1.76 1.76 0.24 1~3 3-5
ORB Parallel connection- loop blocks N/A 1.76 1.76 0.24 1~3 3-6
Store the current result of the internal
MPS N/A 1.68 1.68 0.24 1~3 3-6
PLC operations
Reads the current result of the
MRD N/A 1.6 1.6 0.24 1 3-6
internal PLC operations
Pops (recalls and removes) the
MPP N/A 1.6 1.6 0.24 1 3-6
currently stored result
Output instructions

Code
ES SA EH
OUT Output coil Y, M, S 5.04 5.04 0.24 (0.56) 1~3 3-7
SET Latched（On） Y, M, S 3.8 3.8 0.24 (0.56) 1~3 3-7
RST Clear the contacts or the registers Y, M, S, T, C, D, E, F 7.8 7.8 0.24 (0.56) 3 3-8
Timers, Counters

API Function Operands STEP Page
Code ES SA EH
96 TMR 16-bit timer T-K or T-D 10.6 10.6 9.6 4 3-8
97 CNT 16-bit counter C-K or C-D (16 bits) 9.7 9.7 12.8 4 3-9
97 DCNT 32-bit counter C-K or C-D (32 bits) 10.3 10.3 14.3 6 3-9
Main control instructions

Code ES SA EH
MC Master control start N0 ~ N7 5.6 5.6 5.6 3 3-10
MCR Master control reset N0 ~ N7 5.7 5.7 5.7 3 3-10

Instructions for detecting the contacts of rising-/falling-edge

Code
ES SA EH
90 LDP Rising-edge detection operation X, Y, M, S, T, C 5.1 5.1 0.56 (0.88) 3 3-11
91 LDF Falling-edge detection operation X, Y, M, S, T, C 5.1 5.1 0.56 (0.88) 3 3-12
92 ANDP Rising-edge series connection X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.9 4.9 0.56 (0.88) 3 3-12
93 ANDF Falling-edge series connection X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.9 4.9 0.56 (0.88) 3 3-12
94 ORP Rising-edge parallel connection X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.9 4.9 0.56 (0.88) 3 3-13
95 ORF Falling-edge parallel connection X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.9 4.9 0.56 (0.88) 3 3-13
Rising-/falling-edge output instructions

Code
ES SA EH
89 PLS Rising-edge output Y, M 7.8 7.8 9.92 3 3-13
99 PLF Falling-edge output Y, M 7.8 7.8 10.16 3 3-14
End instruction

Code
ES SA EH
END Program ends N/A 5 5 0.24 1 3-14
Other instructions

Code ES SA EH
NOP No operation N/A 0.88 0.88 0.16 1 3-15
98 INV Inverting operation N/A 1.6 1.6 0.24 1 3-15
P Pointer P0 ~ P255 0.88 0.88 - 1 3-15
I Interruption program marker I□□□ 0.88 0.88 - 1 3-16
Step ladder instructions

Code
ES SA EH
STL Step transition ladder start instruction S 11.6 10.6 0.56 1 4-1
RET Step transition ladder return instruction N/A 7.04 6.04 0.24 1 4-1
Note 1: ES includes ES/EX/SS; SA includes SA/SX/SC; EH includes EH/EH2/SV.
Note 2: For EH series MPU, the execution speed in the brackets ( ) refers to the execution speed of designated
operand M1536 ~ M4095.

3.2 Explanations on Basic Instructions
Mnemonic Function Program steps

Controllers
LD Loading in A contact 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
9 9 9 9 9 9 -
Explanations:
The LD instruction is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or the A contact that is the start of a
contact circuit. The functions are to save the present contents and store the acquired contact status into the
accumulative register.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram: Instruction code: Operation:
X0 X1 LD X0 Loading in contact A of X0
Y1 AND X1 Connecting to contact A of X1 in series
OUT Y1 Driving Y1 coil

Controllers
LDI Loading in B contact 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
9 9 9 9 9 9 -
Explanations:
The LDI instruction is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or the B contact that is the start of a
contact circuit. The functions are to save the present contents and store the acquired contact status into the
accumulative register.
Program Example:
X0 X1 LDI X0 Loading in contact B of X0

Controllers
AND Series connection- A contact 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
9 9 9 9 9 9 -
Explanations:
The AND instruction is used in the series connection of A contact. The functions are to read out the status of present d

series connection contacts and perform the “AND” operation with the logical operation result obtained. The final result
will be store in the accumulative register.
Program Example:

Controllers
ANI Series connection- B contact 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
9 9 9 9 9 9 -
Explanations:
The ANI instruction is used in the series connection of B contact. The functions are to read out the status of present
designated series connection contacts and perform the “AND” operation with the logical operation result obtained.
The final result will be store in the accumulative register.
Program Example:
X1 X0 LD X1 Loading in contact A of X1
Y1 ANI X0 Connecting to contact B of X0 in series

Controllers
OR Parallel connection- A contact 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
9 9 9 9 9 9 -
Explanations:
The OR instruction is used in the parallel connection of A contact. The functions are to read out the status of present
designated parallel connection contacts and perform the “OR” operation with the logical operation result obtained.
Program Example:
X0 LD X0 Loading in contact A of X0
Y1 OR X1 Connecting to contact A of X1 in parallel
X1 OUT Y1 Driving Y1 coil


Controllers
ORI Parallel connection- B contact 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
9 9 9 9 9 9 -
Explanations:
The OR instruction is used in the parallel connection of B contact. The functions are to read out the status of present
designated parallel connection contacts and perform the “OR” operation with the logical operation result obtained.
Program Example:
Y1 ORI X1 Connecting to contact B of X1 in parallel

Controllers
ANB Series connection- loop blocks 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
Operand N/A
Explanations:
To perform the “AND” operation of the preserved logic results and content in the accumulative register.
Program Example:
X0 ANB X1 LD X0 Loading in contact A of X0
Y1
ORI X2 Connecting to contact B of X2 in parallel
OR X3 Connecting to contact A of X3 in parallel
Block A Block B
ANB Connecting circuit block in series


Controllers
ORB Parallel connection- loop blocks 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
Operand N/A
Explanations:
To perform the “OR” operation of the preserved logic results and content in the accumulative register.
Program Example:
X0 X1 Block A LD X0 Loading in contact A of X0
Y1 ANI X1 Connecting to contact B of X1 in series
ORB AND X3 Connecting to contact A of X3 in series
Block B
ORB Connecting circuit block in parallel

Controllers
Store the current result of the ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
MPS 1
Operand N/A
Explanations:
To save the content in the accumulative register into the operational result (the pointer of operational result will plus
1).

Controllers
Reads the current result of the ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
MRD 1
Operand N/A
Explanations:
To read the operational result and store it into the accumulative register (the pointer of operational result stays intact).

Controllers
Pops (recalls and removes) the ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
MPP 1
currently stored result
Operand N/A
Explanations:
To retrieve the previous preserved logical operation result and store it into the accumulative register (the pointer of
operational result will minus 1).

Program Example:
MPS LD X0 Loading in contact A of X0

X0 X1
MPS Saving into stack
Y1
X2 AND X1 Connecting to contact A of X1 in series
MRD M0 OUT Y1 Driving Y1 coil
Y2 MRD Reading from stack

MPP AND X2 Connecting to contact A of X2 in series
END
OUT M0 Driving M0 coil
MPP Reading from stack and pop pointer
END Program ends

Controllers
OUT Output coil 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
- 9 9 9 - - -
Explanations:
1. To output the logical operation result before OUT instruction into a designated device.
2. Actions of coil contact:
OUT instruction
Operational result Contact
Coil
A contact (normally open) B contact (normally closed)
FALSE Off Off On
TRUE On On Off
Program Example:
Mnemonic Function Program Steps

Controllers
SET Latched (On) 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
- 9 9 9 - - -
Explanations:

When the SET instruction is driven, its designated device will be “On” and keep being On both when SET instruction
is still being driven or not driven. Use RST instruction to set “Off” the device.
Program Example:
LD X0 Loading in contact A of X0
X0 Y0 ANI Y0 Connecting to contact B of Y0 in series
SET Y1
SET Y1 Y1 latched (On)

Controllers
RST Clear the contacts or the registers 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
E0 ~ E7
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999
Operand F0 ~ F7
- 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Explanations:
1. When the RST instruction is driven, the actions of the designated devices are:
Device Status
Y, M, S, Coil and contact will be set to “Off”
Present values of the timer or counter will be set to “0”, and the coil and contact will be set to
T, C
“Off”
D, E, F The content will be set to “0”.
2. If RST instruction is not being executed, the status of the designated device will stay intact.
Program Example:
RST Y5 RST Y5 Resetting contact Y5

Controllers
TMR 16-bit timer 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
T-K T0 ~ T255, K0 ~ K32,767

Operand
T-D T0 ~ T255, D0 ~ D9999
Explanations:
When TMR instruction is executed, the designated coil of the timer will be On and the timer will start to time. When the
set value in the timer is reached (present ≥ set value), the contact will be:
NO (Normally Open) contact Open collector
NC (Normally Closed) contact Close collector

Program Example:
X0 LD X0 Loading in contact A of X0 T5 timer
TMR T5 K1000 TMR T5 K1000 Set value in timer T5 as K1,000
Remarks:
See the specification of each model for the range of operand T.

Controllers
CNT 16-bit counter 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
C-K C0 ~ C199, K0~K32,767

Operand
C-D C0 ~ C199, D0 ~ D9999
Explanations:
1. When the CNT instruction goes from Off to On, the designated counter coil will be driven, and the present value
in the counter will plus 1. When the counting reaches the set value (present value = set value), the contact will
be:
NO (Normally Open) contact Open collector
NC (Normally Closed) contact Close collector
2. If there are other counting pulse input after the counting reaches its target, the contact and present value will
stay intact. Use RST instruction to restart or reset the counting.
Program Example:
CNT C20 K100 CNT C20 K100 Set value in counter C20 as K100

Controllers
DCNT 32-bit counter 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
C-K C200 ~ C255, K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647

Operand
C-D C200 ~ C255, D0 ~ D9999
Explanations:
1. DCNT is the instruction for enabling the 32-bit high-speed counters C200 ~ C255.
2. For general purpose addition/subtraction counters C200 ~ C234, when DCNT goes from Off to On, the present
value in the counter will pulse 1 (counting up) or minus 1 (counting down) according to the modes set in special
M1200 ~ M1235.
3. For high-speed addition/subtraction counters C235 ~ C255, when the high-speed counting pulse input goes
from Off to On, the counting will start its execution. For the input terminals (X0 ~ X17) and counting methods

(counting up/down) of the high-speed counter, see Chapter 2.7 Numbering and Function of Counter [C] for more
details.
4. When DCNT is Off, the counting will stop, but the existing present value in the counter will not be cleared. To
clear the present value and the contact, you have to use the instruction RST C2XX. Use externally designated
input points to clear the present values and contacts of high-speed addition/subtraction counters C235 ~ C255.
Program Example:
M0 LD M0 Loading in contact A of M0
DCNT C254 K1000 DCNT C254 K1000 Set value of counter C254 as K1,000

Controllers
MC / MCR Master control Start/Reset 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
Operand N0 ~ N7
Explanations:
1. MC is the main-control start instruction. When MC instruction is executed, the execution of instructions between
MC and MCR will not be interrupted. When MC instruction is Off, the actions of the instructions between MC and
MCR are:
Instruction type Explanation
Present value = 0
General purpose timer
Coil is Off, No action for the contact
Accumulative timer Coil is Off, present value and contact stay intact
Present value = 0
Subroutine timer
Coil is Off, No action for the contact
Counter Coil is Off, present value and contact stay intact
Coils driven by OUT
All Off
instruction
Devices driven by SET and
Stay intact
RST instructions
All disabled.
The FOR-NEXT nested loop will still execute back and forth for N times.
Application instructions
Instructions between FOR-NEXT will act as the instructions between MC
and MCR.
2. MCR is the main-control end instruction that is placed in the end of the main-control program. There should not
be any contact instructions prior to MCR instruction.
3. MC-MCR main-control program instructions support the nested program structure (max. 8 layers) and please
use the instruction in the order N0 ~ N7.

Program Example:
X0 LD X0 Loading in A contact of X0
MC N0 MC N0 Enabling N0 common series connection contact
Y0 OUT Y0 Driving Y0 coil
X2 :
MC N1 LD X2 Loading in A contact of X2
X3 MC N1 Enabling N1 common series connection contact
Y1 LD X3 Loading in A contact of X3
MCR N1 :
MCR N1 Disabling N1 common series connection contact
:
MCR N0
X10 :
MC N0
LD X10 Loading in A contact of X10
X11 MC N0 Enabling N0 common series connection contact
Y10 LD X11 Loading in A contact of X11
MCR N0 :

Controllers
Rising-edge detection ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
LDP 1
operation
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
9 9 9 9 9 9 -
Explanations:
The method of using LDP is the same as using LD, but the actions of the two instructions differ. LDP saves the current
content and store the detected status of rising-edge to the accumulative register.
Program Example:
X0 X1 LDP X0 Starting X0 rising-edge detection
Y1 AND X1 Series connecting A contact of X1
Remarks:
1. See the specification of each model for the range of operands.
2. If the status of a designated rising-edge is On before the PLC is powered, the contact of the rising-edge will be
TRUE after PLC is powered.


Controllers
LDF Falling-edge detection operation 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
9 9 9 9 9 9 -
Explanations:
The method of using LDF is the same as using LD, but the actions of the two instructions differ. LDF saves the current
content and store the detected status of falling-edge to the accumulative register.
Program Example:
X0 X1 LDF X0 Starting X0 falling-edge detection
Y1 AND X1 Series connecting A contact of X1

Controllers
ANDP Rising-edge series connection 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
9 9 9 9 9 9 -
Explanations:
ANDP instruction is used in the series connection of the contacts’ rising-edge detection.
Program Example:
X0 X1 LD X0 Loading in A contact of X0
Y1 ANDP X1 X1 rising-edge detection in series connection

Controllers
ANDF Falling-edge series connection 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
9 9 9 9 9 9 -
Explanations:
ANDF instruction is used in the series connection of the contacts’ falling-edge detection.
[Program Example:
X0 X1 LD X0 Loading in A contact of X0
Y1 ANDF X1 X1 falling-edge detection in series connection
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil


Controllers
ORP Rising-edge parallel connection 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
9 9 9 9 9 9 -
Explanations:
The ORP instructions are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s rising-edge detection.
Program Example:
Y1 ORP X1 X1 rising-edge detection in parallel connection

Controllers
ORF Falling-edge parallel connection 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
9 9 9 9 9 9 -
Explanations:
The ORP instructions are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s falling-edge detection.
Program Example:
Y1 ORF X1 X1 falling-edge detection in parallel connection

Controllers
PLS Rising-edge output 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
- 9 9 - - - -
Explanations:
When X0 goes from Off to On (rising-edge trigger), PLS instruction will be executed and S will send out pulses for
once of 1 scan time.

Program Example:
X0
PLS M0 PLS M0 M0 rising-edge output
SET Y0
Timing Diagram:
X0
M0 1 scan time
Y0

Controllers
PLF Falling-edge output 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
X0 ~ X377 Y0 ~ Y377 M0 ~ M4095 S0 ~ S1023 T0 ~ T255 C0 ~ C255 D0 ~ D9999

Operand
- 9 9 - - - -
Explanations:
When X0 goes from On to Off (falling-edge trigger), PLF instruction will be executed and S will send out pulses for
once of 1 scan time.
Program Example:
PLF M0 PLF M0 M0 falling-edge output
SET Y0
Timing Diagram:
X0
1 scan time
M0
Y0

Controllers
END Program End 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
Operand N/A
Explanations:

END instruction has to be placed in the end of a ladder diagram or instruction program. PLC will start to scan from
address 0 to END instruction and return to address 0 to restart the scan.

Controllers
NOP No operation 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
Operand N/A
Explanations:
NOP instruction does not conduct any operations in the program; therefore, after the execution of NOP, the existing
logical operation result will be kept. If you want to delete a certain instruction without altering the length of the program,
you can use NOP instruction.
Program Example:
NOP instruction will be LD X0 Loading in B contact of X0
omitted in the ladder diagram
NOP No operation
NOP Y1

Controllers
INV Inverting Operation 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
Operand N/A
Explanations:
The logical operation result before INV instruction will be inverted and stored in the accumulative register.
Program Example:
Y1 INV Inverting the operation result

Controllers
P Pointer 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
Operand P0 ~ P255
Explanations:
Pointer P is used in API 00 CJ and API 01 CALL instructions. The use of P does not need to start from No. 0, and the
No. of P cannot be repeated; otherwise, unexpected errors may occur.

Program Example:
CJ P10 CJ P10 From instruction CJ to P10
X1 :
P10 Y1 P10 Pointer P10

Controllers
I Interruption program marker (I) 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
I00□, I10□, I20□, I30□, I40□, I50□, I6□□, I7□□, I8□□

Operand
I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, I110, I120, I130, I140, I150, I160, I170, I180
Explanations:
A interruption program has to start with a interruption pointer (I□□□) and ends with API 03 IRET. I instruction has to
be used with API 03 IRET, API 04 EI, and API 05 DI. See Chapter 2.9 for pointers of all DVP series PLCs.
Program Example:
EI Enabling interruption
EI
Allowable range LD X1 Loading A contact of X1
X1 for interruption
Y1 OUT Y1 Driving Y1 coil
:
DI DI Disabling interruption
Pointer of
:
interruption
program FEND FEND Main program ends
X2 I001 Interruption pointer
I 001 Y2
Interruption LD X2 Loading in A contact of X2
subroutine OUT Y2 Driving Y2 coil
IRET
:
IRET Interruption return

4 Step Ladder Instructions
4.1 Step Ladder Instructions [STL], [RET]

Controllers
STL Step Transition Ladder Start 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
Operand S0 ~ S1023
Explanations:
STL Sn constructs a step. When STL instruction appears in the program, the program will enter a step ladder diagram
status controlled by steps. The initial status has to start from S0 ~ S9. RET instruction indicates the end of a step
ladder diagram starting from S0 ~ S9 and the bus returns to a normal ladder diagram instruction. SFC uses the step
ladder diagram composed of STL/RET to complete the action of a circuit. The No. of S cannot be repeated.

Controllers
RET Step Transition Ladder Return 1 ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
Operand N/A
Explanations:
RET indicates the end of a step. There has to be a RET instruction in the end of a series of steps. One PLC program
can be written in maximum 10 steps (S0 ~ S9) and every step should end with a RET.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram: SFC:
M1002
ZRST S0 S127 M1002
S0
SET S0
X0
S0 X0
S SET S20 S20 Y0
S20
S X1
Y0
X1 S30 Y1
SET S30
X2
S30
S Y1 S40 Y2
X2 X3
SET S40
S40
S Y2 S0
X3
S0
RET
END

4.2 Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
In automation, we always need electric control to work with mechanical control for an automation control. The
sequential control can be divided into several orderly steps (or stages). Each step has its actions that should be
completed and the transition from one step to another normally requires some criteria. The action of the last step
finishes when all criteria is true and the beginning of the next step will clear the actions of the last step. This is the
concept of designing a sequential function chart (SFC).
Features:
1. No sequential design is required for constant step actions, and PLC will
SFC:
automatically execute the interlocking and dual outputs among all status. An
easy sequential design is the only thing required to make the machine work
S0
normally.
X0
2. The actions in SFC are easy to understand, adjust for a trial operation, detect
S21
the errors and maintain.
3. SFC is a type of diagram editing. The structure of a SFC looks like a flow chart. X1 X2
Every No. of the step relay S inside the PLC represents a step, equal to every S22 S24
processing procedure in a flow chart. When the current procedure is X3
completed, the program will move to the next step according to the set
transition criteria. Therefore, you can repeat the cycle and obtain the result you X4
desire.
S24
4. See the SFC chart in the right hand side: The initial step S0 transfers to a
X5
general purpose step S21 by making the status transition condition X0
S25
condition true. S21 transfer to S22 or jumps to S24 by making X1 or X2 true. In
X6
step S25, X6 will be true and the chart will return to S0 to complete a cycle. The
S0
cycle and be repeated to reach a cyclic control.
5. Next are some basic icons for drawing SFC in WPLSoft SFC editor.
Ladder diagram mode. The icon indicates that the internal editing program is a general ladder
diagram, not a step ladder program.
Initial step in SFC. Applicable for S0 ~ S9.
General step. Applicable for S10 ~ S1023.
Step jumps. Used for a step to jump to another non-adjacent step.

(Jumping up/down to non-adjacent steps in the same sequence, returning to initial step, or
jumping among different sequences.)
Transition condition between steps.

Alternative divergence. The same step transfers to a corresponding step by different transition
condition.
Alternative convergence. More than 2 steps transfer to the same step by transition condition.
Simultaneous divergence. The same step transfers to more than 2 steps by the same transition
condition.
Simultaneous convergence. More than 2 steps transfer to the same step by a single transition
condition.

4.3 How does a Step Ladder Instruction Work?
STL instruction is used for designing the syntax of a sequential function chart (SFC), making the program
designing similar to drawing a flow chart and allowing a more explicit and readable program. From the figure in the left
hand side below, we can see very clearly the sequence to be designed, and we can convert the sequence into the
step ladder diagram in the right hand side.
RET instruction has to be written at the end of every step sequence, representing the end of a sequence. There
can be more than one step sequence in a program. Therefore, we have to write in RET at the end of every step
sequence. There is no limitation on the times of using RET which is used together with S0 ~ S9.
If there is no RET instruction at the end of a step sequence, errors will be detected by WPL editor.
M1002 M1002
initial pulse SET S0
S0 S0
S SET S21
S21
S21 S SET S22
S22
S SET S23
S22
S23
S S0
S23
RET
1. Actions of Step Ladder:

A step ladder is composed of many steps and every step controls an action in the sequence. The step ladder
has to:
a) Drive the output coil
b) Designate the transition condition
c) Designate which step will take over the control from the current step
Example:
S10 S10
S Y0 S Y0
SET Y1 SET Y1
X0 X0
When X0=On,
SET S20 SET S20
S20 = On,
S20 S10 = Off. S20
S Y10 S Y10
X1 X1
SET S30 SET S30
Explanation:
When S10 = On, Y0 and Y1 will be On. When X0 = On, S20 will be On and Y10 will be On. When S10 = Off, Y0
will be Off and Y1 will be On.
2. Timing Diagram of Step Ladder:

When the status contact Sn = On, the circuit will be activated. When Sn = Off, the circuit will be disactivated. The
actions will delay for 1 scan time.
S10
S Y10 Executing the timing diagram below. After the
X0 status of S10 and S12 are transferred (taking place
SET S12
simultaneously), and after a delay of 1 scan time,
S12
S Y11 Y10 will be Off and Y11 will be On. There will not be
X1
overlapping outputs.
SET S14
STL S10 Ren ew I nput/ Out put

Pro gram Pro gram Pro gram
execution execution execution
S10
Y10 Circuit no t activate d
X0
S12
Y11
X1
3. Repeated Use of Output Coil:

a) You can use output coils of the same No. in different steps.
b) See the diagram in the right. There can be the same
output device (Y0) among different statuses. Y0 will be On
when S10 or S20 is On. Such as right diagram, there is the S10
S Y0
same output device Y0 in the different state. No matter
SET Y1
S10 or S20 is On, Y0 will be On.
X0
c) Y0 will be Off when S10 is transferring to S20. After S20 is SET S20
On, Y0 will output again. Therefore in this case, Y0 will be S20
S Y0
On when S10 or S20 is On. X1
d) Normally in a ladder diagram, avoid repeated use of an SET S30
output coil. The No. of output coil used by a step should

also avoid being used when the step ladder diagram
returns to a general ladder diagram.

4. Repeated Use of Timer:

The timers in EH/EH2/SV series MPU are the same as general
output points and can be repeatedly used in different steps.
This is one of the features of the step ladder diagram.
S20 TMR T1 K10
However, in a general ladder diagram, it is better not be
X1
repeatedly use the output coil. Also avoid using the No. of the
S30 TMR T2 K20
output coil used by a step after the step ladder diagram returns X2
to a general ladder diagram. S40 TMR T1 K30
Note: See the figure in the right. The timers in ES/EX/SS/SA/
SX/SC series MPU can be used repeatedly in non-adjacent
steps.
5. Transfer of Step:
SET Sn and OUT Sn instructions are used to enable (or transfer to) another step. When the control power is
shifted to another step, the status of the previous step S and the action of the output point will be cleared. Due to
that there can be many step control sequences (i.e. the step ladder diagram starting with S0 ~ S9) co-existing in
the program. The transfer of a step can take place in the same step sequence, or be transferred to different step
sequence. Therefore, there are some slight differences regarding how to use SET Sn and OUT Sn. See the
explanations below.
SET Sn Used for driving the next S10
S Y10
step in the same X0
sequence. After the SET S12
When SET S12 instruction is executed,
S12 S10 will transfer to S12, and S10 and all
transition, all output from S Y11 its outputs (Y10) will be cleared.
X1
the previous status will be SET S14
cleared.
OUT Sn Used for returning to the initial step in the same step sequence. Also for jumping up/down to
non-adjacent steps in the same sequence, or separating steps in different sequences. After the
transition, all output from the previous status will be cleared.
c Returning to the SFC: Ladder diagram:

initial step in the OUT S0 Driving the jumping
S0 S of step
same sequence.
S21 Using OUT S24
d Jumping up/down S21 S
X2
S24
to non-adjacent X2
S23
steps in the same S
sequence. S24 S24
OUT S Return to initial step
S25 Using OUT S0
S25 S
X7
X7 S0
S25 returns to the initial
step S0 by using OUT. RET

e Separating steps SFC: Ladder diagram:

in different Driving the separating
OUT OUT S0
S0 S1 S of steps
sequences.
S21 Using OUT S42
S
S21 S41 X2 Step sequence
S42 initiated by S0
X2 S23
OUT S
S42
S1 RET
S
S23 S43 S42
S Step sequence
S43 initiated by S1
Two different step sequence: S0 and S1 S
S23 returns to initial step S0 by using OUT.
S43 returns to initial step S1 by using OUT. RET
6. Cautions for Driving Output Point:
See the figure below. After the step point and once LD or LDI instructions are written into the second line, the
bus will not be able to connect directly to the output coil, and errors will occur in the compilation of the ladder
diagram. You have to correct the diagram into the diagram in the right hand side for a correct compilation.
BUS
Sn Sn Sn
S Y0 S Y0 S Y0
M0 M0
Y1 Y2 or Y1
M0 M1000
Y2 Y1 Y2
Modifying the Normally open
position of M0. contact in RUN
mode
7. Restrictions on Using Some Instructions:
The program of every step is the same as a general ladder diagram, in which you can use all kinds of
series/parallel circuits or instructions. However, there are restrictions on some of the instructions.
Basic instructions applicable in a step
Instruction LD/LDI/LDP/LDF
AND/ANI/ANDP/ANDF ANB/ORB
MC/MCR
OR/ORI/ORP/ORF MPS/MRD/MPP
Step INV/OUT/SET/RST
Initial step/general step Yes Yes No

Divergence/ General output Yes Yes No
convergence step Step transfer Yes No No
DO NOT use MC/MCR instruction in the step.
DO NOT use STL instruction in a general subroutine or interruption subroutine.
You can still use CJ instruction in STL instruction, but this will make the actions more complicated. We do not
recommend you do so.

The position of MPS/MRD/MPP instruction:

Ladder diagram: Instruction code: Explanation:
STL Sn MPS/MRD/MPP instruction cannot
LD X0
LD X0
MPS be used directly on the new bus.
Sn X0 X1 MPS
S Y1 You have to execute LD or LDI
AND X1
X2 instruction first before applying
MRD M0 OUT Y1
BUS
X3 MRD MPS/MRD/MPP.
Y2 AND X2
MPP OUT M0
MPP
AND X3
OUT Y2
8. Other Points to Note:
The instruction used for transferring the step (SET S□ or OUT S□) can only be executed after all the relevant
outputs and actions in the current status are completed. See the figure below. The executed results by the PLC are
the same, but if there are many conditions or actions in S10, it is recommended that you modify the diagram in the
left hand side into the diagram in the right hand side. SET S20 is only executed after all relevant outputs and
actions are completed, which is a more explicit sequence.
S10 S10
S Y0 S Y0
SET S20 Y1
Y1 SET S20
S20 S20
S Y2 S Y2
S20 X1
S S0
RET
Make sure to add RET instruction after STL at the end of
S20 X1
the step ladder diagram.
S S0
RET
4.4 Things to Note for Designing a Step Ladder Program
1. The first step in the SFC is called the “initial step", S0 ~ S9. Use the initial step as the start of a sequence and end a
complete sequence with RET instruction.
2. If STL instruction is not in use, step S can be a general-purpose auxiliary relay.
3. When STL instruction is in use, the No. of step S cannot be repeated.
4. Types of sequences:

Single sequence: There is only one sequence without alternative divergence, alternative convergence, simultaneous
divergence and simultaneous convergence in a program.
Complicated single sequence: There is only one sequence with alternative divergence, alternative convergence,
simultaneous divergence and simultaneous convergence in a program.
Multiple sequences: There are more than one sequence in a program, maximum 10 sequences, S0 ~ S9.
5. Separation of sequence: Multiple sequences are allowed to be written into the step ladder diagram.
a) See the diagram in the right hand side. There are two
OUT OUT
S0 S1
sequences S0 and S1. The program writes in S0 ~ S30 first
and S1 ~ S43 next.
S21 S41
b) You can designate a step in the sequence to jump to any step
OUT
in another sequence. S42
c) When the condition below S21 is true, the sequence will jump
to step S42 in sequence S1, which is called “separating the S30 S43
step”.
6. Restrictions on diverging sequence: See 4.5 for example
a) You can use maximum 8 diverged steps in a divergence sequence.
b) You can use maximum 16 loops in multiple divergence sequences or in simultaneous sequences combined into
one sequence.
c) You can designate a step in the sequence to jump to any step in another sequence.
7. Reset of the step and the inhibiting output:
a) Use ZRST instruction to reset a step to be Off.
b) Make M1034 = On to inhibit output Y.
8. Latched step:
The On/Off status of the latched step will be memorized when the power of the PLC is switched off. When the
PLC is re-powered, the status before the power-off will be recovered and the execution will resume. Please be
aware of the area for the latched steps.
9. Special auxiliary relays and special registers: See 4.6refer to chapter 4.6 IST instruction for more details.
Device No. Function
M1040 Disabling step. Disabling all the shifting of steps when On.
M1041 Starting step. Flag for IST instruction.
M1042 Enabling pulses. Flag for IST instruction.
M1043 Zero return completed. Flag for IST instruction.
M1044 Zero point condition. Flag for IST instruction.
M1045 Disabling all output reset. Flag for IST instruction.

Device No. Function
M1046 Setting STL status as On. On when any of the steps is On.
M1047 Enabling STL monitoring
D1040 On status of step No. 1
4.5 Types of Sequences
Single Sequence: The basic type of sequences
The first step in a step ladder diagram is called the initial step, which can be S0 ~ S9. The steps following the
initial step are general steps, which can be S10 ~ S1023. If you are using IST instruction, S10 ~ S19 will become the
steps for zero return.
a) Single sequence without divergence and convergence
After a sequence is completed, the control power on the steps will be given to the initial step.
Step ladder diagram SFC:
M1002
ZRST S0 S127
M1002
SET S0 S0
S0 X0
S SET S20 X0
S20 S20 Y0
S Y0
X1 X1
SET S30
S30 S30 Y1
S Y1
X2
X2
SET S40 S40 Y2
S40
S Y2 X3
X3
SET S50 S50 Y3
S50 X4
S Y3
X4 S60 Y4
SET S60
S60
X5
S Y4
X5
S0 S0
RET
END

b) Jumping Sequence
1. The control power over the step is transferred to 2. The control power over the step is transferred to
a certain step on top. the step in another sequence.
OUT
S0
OUT OUT
S0 S1
OUT
S21
S21 S41
OUT
S42
S42
S41 S43
S43
c) Reset Sequence
See the diagram in the right hand side. When the condition at S50
is true, S50 will be reset and the sequence will be completed at S0
this time.
S21
RST
S50
Complicated Single Sequence:
Including simultaneous divergence, alternative divergence, simultaneous convergence and alternative

convergence.

a) Structure of simultaneous divergence
When the condition at the current step is true, the step can be transferred to many steps. See the diagrams
below. When X0 = On, S20 will be simultaneously transferred to S21, S22, S23 and S24.

S20 X0
S SET S21
S20
SET S22
SET S23
S21 S22 S23 S24
SET S24
b) Structure of alternative divergence
When the individual condition at the current status is true, the step will be transferred to another individual step.
See the diagrams below. When X0 = On, S20 will be transferred to S30; when X1 = On, S20 will be transferred to
S31; when X2 = On, S20 will be transferred to S32.
S20 X0 S20
S SET S30
X1 X0 X1 X2
SET S31
X2 S30 S31 S32
SET S32
c) Structure of the simultaneous convergence
See the ladder diagram below. A continuous STL instruction represents a simultaneous convergence. When the
condition is true after a continuous output, the step will be transferred to the next step. In the simultaneous
convergence, only when several conditions are true will the transfer be allowed.

S40 S41 S42 X2
S S S SET S50
S40 S41 S42
X2
S50
d) Structure of alternative convergence
See the diagrams below. Depending on the condition of the input signal of which of S30, S40 and S50 becomes
true first, the first one will be first transferred to S60.


S30 X0
S SET S60
S30 S40 S50
S40 X1
S X0 X1 X2
SET S60
S50 X2
S SET S60
S60
Examples of alternative divergence & alternative convergence:

M1002
ZRST S0 S127 M1002
SET S1 S1
S1 X0 X0
S SET S20
S20 Y0
S20
S Y0
X1 X1 X4 X7
SET S30 S30 Y1 S31 Y3 S32 Y5
X4
SET S31 X2 X5 X10
X7 S40 Y2 S41 Y4 S42 Y6
SET S32
X3 X6 X11
S30
S Y1
X2 S50 TMR T1 K10
SET S40 T1
S40
S Y2 S60 Y7
X3 X12
SET S50
S31 S1
S Y3
X5
SET S41
S41
S Y4
X6
SET S50
S32
S Y5
X10
SET S42
S42
S Y6
X11
SET S50
S50
S TMR T1 K10
T1
SET S60
S60
S Y7
X12
S1
RET
END

Examples of simultaneous divergence & simultaneous convergence:

M1002
M1002
ZRST S0 S127
S3
SET S3 X0
S3 X0
S S20 Y0
SET S20
S20 X1
S Y0
X1 S30 Y1 S31 Y3 S32 Y5
SET S30 X2 X3 X4
S40 Y2 S41 Y4 S42 Y6
SET S31
X5
SET S32
S30 S50 TMR T1 K10
S Y1 T1
X2
SET S40 S60 Y7
S40 X6
S Y2
S31 S3
S Y3
X3
SET S41
S41
S Y4
S32
S Y5
X4
SET S42
S42
S Y6
S40 S41 S42 X5
S S S SET S50
S50
S TMR T1 K10
T1
SET S60
S60
S Y7
X6
S3
RET
END

Example of the simultaneous divergence & alternative convergence:
M1002 M1002
ZRST S0 S127
S4
SET S4 X0
S4 X0 S20 Y0
S SET S20
X1
S20
S Y0
X1 S30 Y1 S31 Y3 S32 Y5
SET S30 X2 X4 X6
S40 Y2 S41 Y4 S42 Y6
SET S31
X3 X5 X7
SET S32
S30 S50 TMR T1 K10
S Y1 T1
X2
S60 Y7
SET S40
S40
S Y2
X3 S4
SET S50
S31
S Y3
X4
SET S41
S41
S Y4
X5
SET S50
S32
S Y5
X6
SET S42
S42
S Y6
X7
SET S50
S50
S TMR T1 K10
T1
SET S60
S60
S Y7
X6
S4
RET
END

Combination Example 1:
(Including alternative divergence/convergence and simultaneous divergence/convergence)
Ladder diagram:
M1002 S51
ZRST S0 S127 S Y10
X12
SET S0 SET S61
S0 S61
S Y0 S Y14
X0 S60 S61 X15
SET S20 S S SET S70
S20 S70
S Y1 S Y17
X1 X17
SET S30 S0
X2 S32
SET S31 S Y4
X3 X6
SET S32 SET S41
S30 S41
S Y2 S Y6
X4 X10
SET S40 SET S52
S31
S Y3 SET S53
X5 S52
S Y11
SET S40
X13
S40
S SET S62
Y5
X7 S62
S Y15
SET S50
S63
S Y12
SET S51
X14
S50
S SET S63
Y7
S63
X11
S Y16
SET S60
S62 S63 X16
S60 S S S0
S Y13
RET
END
SFC:
M1002
S0 Y0
X0
S20 Y1
X1 X2 X3
S30 Y2 S31 Y3 S32 Y4
X4 X5 X6
S40 Y5 S41 Y6
X7 X10
S50 Y7 S51 Y10 S52 Y11 S53 Y12

X11 X12 X13 X14
S60 Y13 S61 Y14 S62 Y15 S63 Y16
X15 X16
S70 Y17
S0
X17
S0

Combination Example 2:
(Including alternative divergence/convergence and simultaneous divergence/convergence)
M1002 M1002
ZRST S0 S127
S0
SET S0 X0
S0 X0 S30 Y0
S SET S30
S30 X1
X1
S Y0
X1 S31 Y1 S32 Y2
SET S31 X2 X3
X1
SET S32 S33 Y3
S31
S X4
Y1
X2
SET S33 S34 Y4 S36 Y6
S32 X5 X6
S Y2
X3 S35 Y5 S37 Y7
SET S33
S33 X7
S Y3
X4 S0
SET S34
SET S36
S34
S Y4
X5
SET S35
S35
S Y5
S36
S Y6
X6
SET S37
S37
S Y7
S35 S37 X7
S S S0
RET
END

Restrictions on Divergence Sequence:

1. You can use maximum 8 divergence steps in a divergence sequence. As the diagram below, there are maximum
8 diverged steps S30 ~ S37 after step S20.
2. You can use maximum 16 loops in multiple divergence sequences or in simultaneous sequences combined into
one sequence. As the diagram below, there are 4 steps diverged after S40, 7 steps diverged after S41, and 5
steps diverged after S42. There are maximum 16 loops in this sequence.
3. You can designate a step in the sequence to jump to any step in another sequence.
M1002
S0
X0
S20 Y0
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10
S30 Y1 S31 Y2 S32 Y3 S32 Y4 S34 Y5 S35 Y6 S36 Y7 S37 Y10
X11 X12 X14 X15 X15 X15 X16 X17

RST
X13 SET S42 Y13
S40 Y11 OUT S41 Y12 S36
S0
S20 X25
X20 X26 X27 X30 X31
X21 X22 X23 X24
OUT S58 S59 Y25 S60 Y26 S61 Y27 S62 Y30 S63 Y31
S50 Y14 S51 Y15 S52 Y16 OUT Y24
S53 Y17 S54 Y20 S55 Y21 S56 Y22 S57 Y23 S20 X40 X41 X42
S20 X37
X32 X33 X34 RST
X43
S70 Y32 S71 Y33 S72 Y34 X35 X36 S75 Y37
S58 S76 Y40
S73 Y35 S74 Y36 X47
SET X50
X44
X45 X46 S0 OUT
S80 Y41
S42
X51 S81 Y42
SET X52
S0 SET
S0
4.6 IST Instruction
API Mnemonic Operands Function

Controllers
60 IST Initial State ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
Type Bit Devices Word Devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F IST: 7 steps
S * * *
D1 *
D2 *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV
Operands:
S: Start device in the designated operation mode D1: The smallest No. of designated step in auto mode
D2: The biggest No. of designated step in auto mode
Explanations:
1. S will occupy 8 consecutive points.
2. Range of D1 and D2: for SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV S20 ~ S899; for ES/EX/SS S20 ~ S127; D2 > D1.
3. See the specifications of each model for their range of use.
4. IST instruction can only be used once in the program.
5. Flags: M1040 ~ M1047. See remarks for more details.
6. IST instruction is a handy instruction specifically for the initial status of step ladder control procedure to
accommodate special auxiliary relay.

Program Example 1:
1. Use of IST instruction
M1000
IST X10 S20 S60
S X10: Individual operation X14: Continuous operation

X11: Zero return X15: Zero return enabled switch
X12: Step operation X16: Start switch
X13: One cycle operation X17: Stop switch
2. When IST instruction is being executed, the following special auxiliary relays will switch automatically.
M1040: Operation forbidden S0: Initiates manual operation
M1041: Operation starts S1: Initiates zero return
M1042: Pulse output enabled S2: Initiates auto operation
M1047: STL monitor enabled
3. S10 ~ S19 are for zero return and cannot be used as general steps. When S0 ~ S9 are in use, S0 ~ S2 represent
manual operation mode, zero return mode and auto operation mode. Therefore, in the program, you have to write
the circuit of the three steps in advance.
4. When switched to S1 (zero return) mode, any On in S10 ~ S19 will result in no zero return.
5. When switched to S2 (auto operation) mode, any On of the S in D1 ~ D2 or M1043 = On will result in no auto
operation.
Program Example 2:
1. Robot arm control (by IST instruction):
a) Motion request: Separate the big ball and small ball and move them to different boxes. Configure the control
panel for the control.
b) Motions of the robot arm: descending, clipping ball, ascending, right shifting, releasing ball, ascending, left
shifting.
c) I/O devices:
Left-limit X1 Right-limit X2 Right-limit X3
Y0 (big) (small)
Upper-limit X4 Y3 Y2
Y1
Lower-limit X5
Ball size Big Small
sensor X0
2. Operation modes:
Manual operation: Turn On/Off of the load by a single button.
Zero return: Press the zero return button to automatically zero-return the machine.
Auto operation:
a) Single step operation: Press “auto start” button for every one step forward.
b) One cycle operation: Press “auto start” button at the zero point. After a cycle of auto operation, the operation
will stops at the zero point. Press “auto stop” button in the middle of the operation to stop the operation and
press “auto start” to restart the operation. The operation will resume until it meets the zero point.
c) Continuous operation: Press “auto start” button at the zero point to resume the operation. Press “auto stop” to
operate until it meets the zero point.
3. The control panel:

Start Power Start Zero Return X15 Auto Start X16
Stop Power Auto Stop X17
Clip Right
Ball Ascend Shift Step X12
X20 X22 X24 Zero Return X11

One cycle
Operation X13
Release Left
Ball Descend Shift
Manual Continuous
X21 X23 X25 Operation X10 Operation X14
a) Ball size sensor X0.

b) Robot arm: left limit X1, big ball right limit X2, small ball right limit X3, upper limit X4, lower limit X5.
c) Robot arm: ascending Y0, descending Y1, right shifting Y2, left shifting Y3, clipping Y4.
Start Circuit
X0 X1 Y4
M1044
M1000
IST X10 S20 S80
Manual Operation Mode

S0 X20
S SET Y4 Clipping tightly
X21
RST Y4 Clipping released
X22 Y1
Y0 Ascending
X23 Y0 Interlocked
Y1 Descending
X24 X4 Y3
Y2 Right shifting
Interlocked
X25 X4 Y2 Robot arm ascends to upper limit (X4 On)
Y3 Left shifting
Zero Return Mode

SFC:
S1
X15
S10 RST Y4 Clipping released
RST Y1 Descending stops
Y0 Robot arm ascends to upper limit (X4 On)

X4
S11 RST Y2 Right shifting stops
Y3 Robot arm left shifting to left limit (X1 On)

X1
S12 SET M1043 Enable zero return completed flag
RST S12 Zero return operation completed

Ladder Diagram:
S1 X15
S SET S10 Enter zero return mode
S10
S RST Y4 Clipping released

X4
SET S11
S11
S RST Y2 Right shifting stops

X1
SET S12
S12
S SET M1043 Enable zero return completed flag
Auto Operation Modes

SFC:
S2
M1041
M1044
S20 Y1
X5 X5
X0 X0
S30 SET Y4 S40 SET Y4

T0 T1
X4 X4
S31 Y0 S41 Y0
X4 X4
X2 X3
S32 Y2 S42 Y2
X2 X3
X5
S50 Y1
X5
S60 RST Y4
TMR T2 K30
T2
X4
S70 Y0
X4
X1
S80 Y3
X1
S2

Ladder Diagram:
S2 M1041 M1044
S SET S20 Enter auto operation mode
S20
S Y1 Robot arm descending
X5 X0
SET S30
X5 X0
SET S40
S30
TMR T0 K30
T0
SET S31
S31 X4
S Y0 Robot arm ascending to upper limit (X4 On)
X4
SET S32
S32 X2
S Y2 Right shifting
X2
SET S50
S40
TMR T1 K30
T1
SET S41
S41 X4
X4
SET S42
S42 X3
S Y2 Right shifting
X3
SET S50
S50 X5
X5
SET S60
S60
TMR T2 K30
T2
SET S70
S70 X4
X4
SET S80
S80 X1
S Y3 Robot arm left shifting to left limit (X1 On)
X1
S2
RET
END

MEMO

5 Categories & Use of Application Instructions
5.1 List of Instructions
Mnemonic P Applicable to STEPS

API instruction
Function Page
Category 16-bit 32-bit ES SA EH 16-bit 32-bit
00 CJ - 3 Conditional Jump 3 3 3 3 - 6-1
01 CALL - 3 Call Subroutine 3 3 3 3 - 6-5
02 SRET - - Subroutine Return 3 3 3 1 - 6-5
- 3 3 3
Loop Control
03 IRET - Interrupt Return 1 - 6-8

04 EI - - Enable Interrupts 3 3 3 1 - 6-8
05 DI - - Disable Interrupts 3 3 3 1 - 6-8
The End of The Main Program
06 FEND - - 3 3 3 1 - 6-12
(First End)
07 WDT - 3 Watchdog Timer Refresh 3 3 3 1 - 6-14
08 FOR - - Start of a FOR-NEXT loop 3 3 3 3 - 6-15
09 NEXT - - End of a FOR-NEXT loop 3 3 3 1 - 6-15
10 CMP DCMP 3 Compare 3 3 3 7 13 6-18
11 ZCP DZCP 3 Zone Compare 3 3 3 9 17 6-19
12 MOV DMOV 3 Move 3 3 3 5 9 6-20
Transmission
Comparison
13 SMOV - 3 Shift Move – 3 3 11 - 6-21

14 CML DCML 3 Compliment 3 3 3 5 9 6-23
15 BMOV - 3 Block Move 3 3 3 7 – 6-24
16 FMOV DFMOV 3 Fill Move 3 3 3 7 13 6-26
17 XCH DXCH 3 Exchange 3 3 3 5 9 6-27
18 BCD DBCD 3 Binary Coded Decimal 3 3 3 5 9 6-29
19 BIN DBIN 3 Binary 3 3 3 5 9 6-30
20 ADD DADD 3 Addition 3 3 3 7 13 6-32
21 SUB DSUB 3 Subtraction 3 3 3 7 13 6-34
MUL DMUL 3 Multiplication 3 3 3 7 13 6-35
Four Arithmetic
22
DIV DDIV 3 Division 3 3 3 7 13 6-37
Operation
23
24 INC DINC 3 Increment 3 3 3 3 5 6-39
25 DEC DDEC 3 Decrement 3 3 3 3 5 6-40
26 WAND DAND 3 Logical Word AND 3 3 3 7 13 6-41
27 WOR DOR 3 Logical Word OR 3 3 3 7 13 6-42
28 WXOR DXOR 3 Logical Exclusive OR 3 3 3 7 13 6-43
29 NEG DNEG 3 2’s Complement (Negative) 3 3 3 3 5 6-44
30 ROR DROR 3 Rotation Right 3 3 3 5 9 6-46
31 ROL DROL 3 Rotation Left 3 3 3 5 9 6-47
32 RCR DRCR 3 Rotation Right with Carry 3 3 3 5 9 6-48
Displacement
RCL DRCL 3 Rotation Left with Carry 3 3 3 5 9 6-49

Rotation &
33
34 SFTR - 3 Bit Shift Right 3 3 3 9 - 6-50
35 SFTL - 3 Bit Shift Left 3 3 3 9 - 6-51
36 WSFR - 3 Word Shift Right - 3 3 9 - 6-52
37 WSFL - 3 Word Shift Left - 3 3 9 - 6-54
38 SFWR - 3 Shift Register Write - 3 3 7 - 6-55
39 SFRD - 3 Shift Register Read - 3 3 7 - 6-56
40 ZRST - 3 Zero Reset 3 3 3 5 - 6-57
41 DECO - 3 Decode 3 3 3 7 - 6-59
Data Processing
42 ENCO - 3 Encode 3 3 3 7 - 6-61

43 SUM DSUM 3 Sum of Active Bits 3 3 3 5 9 6-63
44 BON DBON 3 Check Specified Bit Status 3 3 3 7 13 6-64
45 MEAN DMEAN 3 Mean 3 3 3 7 13 6-65
46 ANS - - Timed Annunciator Set - 3 3 7 - 6-66
47 ANR - 3 Annunciator Reset - 3 3 1 - 6-66
48 SQR DSQR 3 Square Root 3 3 3 5 9 6-72
49 FLT DFLT 3 Floating Point 3 3 3 5 9 6-70
50 REF - 3 Refresh 3 3 3 5 - 7-1
High Speed
Processing
51 REFF - 3 Refresh and Filter Adjust - 3 3 3 - 7-2

52 MTR - - Input Matrix - 3 3 9 - 7-3
53 - DHSCS - High Speed Counter Set 3 3 3 - 13 7-5
54 - DHSCR - High Speed Counter Reset 3 3 3 – 13 7-15


API instruction
Function Page
55 - DHSZ - High Speed Zone Compare - 3 3 - 17 7-17
High Speed
Processing
56 SPD - - Speed Detection 3 3 3 7 - 7-24

57 PLSY DPLSY - Pulse Y Output 3 3 3 7 13 7-26
58 PWM - - Pulse Width Modulation 3 3 3 7 - 7-32
59 PLSR DPLSR - Pulse Ramp 3 3 3 9 17 7-35
60 IST - - Initial State 3 3 3 7 - 7-39
Handy Instructions
61 SER DSER 3 Search a Data Stack - 3 3 9 17 7-45

62 ABSD DABSD - Absolute Drum Sequencer - 3 3 9 17 7-46
63 INCD - - Incremental Drum Sequencer - 3 3 9 - 7-48
64 TTMR - - Teaching Timer - 3 3 5 - 7-50
65 STMR - - Special Timer - 3 3 7 - 7-52
66 ALT - 3 Alternate State 3 3 3 3 - 7-54
67 RAMP - - Ramp Variable Value - 3 3 9 - 7-55
69 SORT - - Sort Tabulated Data - 3 3 11 - 7-57
70 TKY DTKY - Ten Key Input - 3 3 7 13 7-59
Display of External
71 HKY DHKY - Hexadecimal Key Input - 3 3 9 17 7-61

72 DSW - - Digital Switch - 3 3 9 - 7-64
Settings
73 SEGD - 3 Seven Segment Decoder 3 3 3 5 - 7-66

74 SEGL - - Seven Segment with Latch 3 3 3 7 - 7-67
75 ARWS - - Arrow Switch - 3 3 9 - 7-70
76 ASC - - ASCII Code Conversion - 3 3 11 - 7-72
77 PR - - Print (ASCII Code Output) - 3 3 5 - 7-73
78 FROM DFROM 3 Read CR Data in Special Modules 3 3 3 9 17 7-75
Write CR Data into Special
79 TO DTO 3 3 3 3 9 17 7-76
Modules
80 RS - - Serial Communication Instruction 3 3 3 9 - 7-80
81 PRUN DPRUN 3 Parallel Run - 3 3 5 9 7-93
Serial I/O
82 ASCI - 3 Converts Hex to ASCII 3 3 3 7 - 7-94

83 HEX - 3 Converts ASCII to Hex 3 3 3 7 - 7-98
84 CCD - 3 Check Code - 3 3 7 - 7-101
85 VRRD - 3 Volume Read - 3 3 5 - 7-103
86 VRSC - 3 Volume Scale - 3 3 5 - 7-105
87 ABS DABS 3 Absolute Value 3 3 3 3 5 7-106
88 PID DPID - PID Control Loop 3 3 3 9 17 7-107
89 PLS - - Rising-edge Output 3 3 3 3 - 3-13
90 LDP - - Rising-edge Detection Operation 3 3 3 3 - 3-11
LDF - - Falling-edge Detection Operation 3 3 3 3 - 3-12
Basic Instructions
91
92 ANDP - - Rising-edge Series Connection 3 3 3 3 - 3-12
93 ANDF - - Falling-edge Series Connection 3 3 3 3 - 3-12
94 ORP - - Rising-edge Parallel Connection 3 3 3 3 - 3-13
95 ORF - - Falling-edge Parallel Connection 3 3 3 3 - 3-13
96 TMR - - 16-bit Timer 3 3 3 4 - 3-8
97 CNT DCNT - 16-bit / 32-bit Counter 3 3 3 4 6 3-9
98 INV - - Inverting Operation 3 3 3 1 - 3-15
99 PLF - - Falling-edge Output 3 3 3 3 - 3-14
100 MODRD - - Read Modbus Data 3 3 3 7 - 8-1
101 MODWR - - Write Modbus Data 3 3 3 7 - 8-6
Communication
102 FWD - - Forward Running of VFD-A 3 3 3 7 - 8-11

103 REV - - Reverse Running of VFD-A 3 3 3 7 - 8-11
104 STOP - - Stop VFD-A 3 3 3 7 - 8-11
105 RDST - - Read VFD-A Status 3 3 3 5 - 8-14
106 RSTEF - - Reset Abnormal VFD-A 3 3 3 5 - 8-16
107 LRC - 3 Checksum LRC Mode 3 3 3 7 - 8-17
108 CRC - 3 Checksum CRC Mode 3 3 3 7 - 8-19
109 SWRD - 3 Read Digital Switch - - 3 3 - 8-22


API instruction
Function Page
110 – DECMP 3 Floating Point Compare 3 3 3 - 13 8-23
111 – DEZCP 3 Floating Point Zone Compare 3 3 3 - 17 8-24
112 - DMOVR 3 Move Floating Point Data 3 3 3 - 9 8-25
116 - DRAD 3 Angle Æ Radian - 3 3 - 9 8-26
117 - DDEG 3 Radian Æ Angle - 3 3 - 9 8-27
118 - DEBCD 3 Float to Scientific Conversion 3 3 3 - 9 8-28
119 - DEBIN 3 Scientific to Float Conversion 3 3 3 - 9 8-29
120 - DEADD 3 Floating Point Addition 3 3 3 - 13 8-31
121 - DESUB 3 Floating Point Subtraction 3 3 3 - 13 8-32
Floating Point Operation
122 - DEMUL 3 Floating Point Multiplication 3 3 3 - 13 8-33

123 - DEDIV 3 Floating Point Division 3 3 3 - 13 8-34
124 - DEXP 3 Exponent of Binary Floating Point 3 3 3 - 9 8-35
Natural Logarithm of Binary
125 - DLN 3 3 3 3 - 9 8-36
Floating Point
126 - DLOG 3 Logarithm of Binary Floating Point 3 3 3 - 13 8-37
127 - DESQR 3 Floating Point Square Root 3 3 3 - 9 8-39
128 - DPOW 3 Floating Point Power Operation 3 3 3 - 13 8-40
129 INT DINT 3 Float to Integer 3 3 3 5 9 8-42
130 - DSIN 3 Sine 3 3 3 - 9 8-43
131 - DCOS 3 Cosine 3 3 3 - 9 8-45
132 - DTAN 3 Tangent 3 3 3 - 9 8-47
133 - DASIN 3 Arc Sine - 3 3 - 9 8-49
134 - DACOS 3 Arc Cosine - 3 3 - 9 8-50
135 - DATAN 3 Arc Tangent - 3 3 - 9 8-51
136 - DSINH 3 Hyperbolic Sine - - 3 - 9 8-52
137 - DCOSH 3 Hyperbolic Cosine - - 3 - 9 8-53
138 - DTANH 3 Hyperbolic Tangent - - 3 - 9 8-54
143 DELAY - 9 Delay Instruction - 9 9 3 - 8-55
144 GPWM - - General PWM Output - 9 9 7 - 8-57
145 FTC - - Fuzzy Temperature Control - 9 9 9 - 8-58
146 CVM - - Valve Control (*) - - 9 7 - 8-63
147 SWAP DSWAP 3 Byte Swap 3 3 3 3 5 8-66
MEMR DMEMR 3 Read File Register - 3 3 7 13 8-67
Others
148
149 MEMW DMEMW 3 Write File Register - 3 3 7 13 8-68
150 MODRW - - Read/Write MODBUS Data 3 3 3 11 - 9-1
151 PWD - - Detection of Input Pulse Width - - 3 5 - 9-10
Start of the Measurement of
152 RTMU - - - - 3 5 - 9-11
Execution Time of I Interruption
End of the Measurement of the
153 RTMD - - - - 3 3 - 9-11
Execution Time of I Interruption
154 RAND - 3 Random Number - 3 3 7 - 9-13
Read the Absolute Position from a
155 - DABSR - - 3 3 7 13 9-14
Servo Motor
Position
Control
156 ZRN DZRN - Zero Return - - 3 9 17 9-19

157 PLSV DPLSV - Adjustable Speed Pulse Output - - 3 7 13 9-23
158 DRVI DDRVI - Drive to Increment - - 3 9 17 9-24
159 DRVA DDRVA - Drive to Absolute - - 3 9 17 9-30
160 TCMP - 3 Time Compare - 3 3 11 - 9-39
161 TZCP - 3 Time Zone Compare - 3 3 9 - 9-40
Real Time
Calendar
162 TADD - 3 Time Addition - 3 3 7 - 9-41

163 TSUB - 3 Time Subtraction - 3 3 7 - 9-42
166 TRD - 3 Time Read - 3 3 3 - 9-43
167 TWR - 3 Time Write - 3 3 3 - 9-45
169 HOUR DHOUR - Hour Meter - 3 3 7 13 9-47
170 GRY DGRY 3 BIN Æ Gray Code - 3 3 5 9 9-49
171 GBIN DGBIN 3 Gray Code Æ BIN - 3 3 5 9 9-50


API instruction
Function Page
172 - DADDR 3 Floating Point Addition 3 3 3 - 13 9-51
Operation
Floating
173 - DSUBR 3 Floating Point Subtraction 3 3 3 - 13 9-53

Point
174 - DMULR 3 Floating Point Multiplication 3 3 3 - 13 9-55

175 - DDIVR 3 Floating Point Division 3 3 3 - 13 9-57
180 MAND - 3 Matrix ‘AND’ Operation - 3 3 9 - 9-59
181 MOR - 3 Matrix ‘OR’ Operation - 3 3 9 - 9-61
182 MXOR - 3 Matrix ‘XOR’ Operation - 3 3 9 - 9-62
183 MXNR - 3 Matrix ‘XNR’ Operation - 3 3 9 - 9-63
184 MINV - 3 Matrix Inverse Operation - 3 3 7 - 9-64
Matrix
185 MCMP - 3 Matrix Compare - 3 3 9 - 9-65

186 MBRD - 3 Read Matrix Bit - 3 3 7 - 9-67
187 MBWR - 3 Write Matrix Bit - 3 3 7 - 9-69
188 MBS - 3 Matrix Bit Displacement - 3 3 7 - 9-71
189 MBR - 3 Matrix Bit Rotation - 3 3 7 - 9-73
190 MBC - 3 Matrix Bit Status Counting - 3 3 7 - 9-75
2-Axis Relative Point to Point
191 - DPPMR - - - 3 - 17 9-76
Motion (*)
Positioning Instruction
2-Axis Absolute Point to Point

192 - DPPMA - - - 3 - 17 9-79
Motion (*)
2-Axis Relative Position Arc
193 - DCIMR - - - 3 - 17 9-81
Interpolation (*)
2-Axis Absolute Position Arc
194 - DCIMA - - - – - 17 9-86
Interpolation (*)
Single-Axis Pulse Output by Table
195 - DPTPO - - - – - 13 9-91
(*)
196 HST - 3 High Speed Timer - - 3 3 – 9-93
197 - DCLLM - Close Loop Position Control (*) - - 3 - 17 9-95
202 SCAL - 3 Proportional Value Calculation 3 3 3 9 - 10-1
Parameter Proportional Value
203 SCLP - 3 3 3 3 9 - 10-3
Calculation
215 LD& DLD& - S1 & S2 - 3 3 5 9 10-7
Contact Type Logic
216 LD| DLD| - S1 | S2 - 3 3 5 9 10-7

217 LD^ DLD^ - S1 ^ S2 - 3 3 5 9 10-7
Operation
218 AND& DAND& - S1 & S2 - 3 3 5 9 10-8

219 AND| DAND| - S1 | S2 - 3 3 5 9 10-8
220 AND^ DAND^ - S1 ^ S2 - 3 3 5 9 10-8
221 OR& DOR& - S1 & S2 - 3 3 5 9 10-9
222 OR| DOR| - S1 | S2 - 3 3 5 9 10-9
223 OR^ DOR^ - S1 ^ S2 - 3 3 5 9 10-9
224 LD= DLD= - S1 = S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-10
225 LD> DLD> - S1 > S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-10
226 LD< DLD< - S1 < S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-10
Contact Type Comparison Instruction
228 LD<> DLD<> - S1 ≠ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-10

229 LD<= DLD<= - S1 ≦ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-10
230 LD>= DLD>= - S1 ≧ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-10
232 AND= DAND= - S1 = S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-11
233 AND> DAND> - S1 > S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-11
234 AND< DAND< - S1 < S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-11
236 AND<> DAND<> - S1 ≠ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-11
237 AND<= DAND<= - S1 ≦ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-11
238 AND>= DAND>= - S1 ≧ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-11
240 OR= DOR= - S1 = S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-12
241 OR> DOR> - S1 > S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-12
242 OR< DOR< - S1 < S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-12
244 OR<> DOR<> - S1 ≠ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-12
245 OR<= DOR<= - S1 ≦ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-12
246 OR>= DOR>= - S1 ≧ S2 3 3 3 5 9 10-12
Instructions marked with * are available in EH2/SV series MPU.

Note:
1. For applicable models, ES includes ES/EX/SS; SA includes SA/SX/SC; EH includes EH/EH2/SV.
2. ES/EX/SS series MPU does not support pulse execution type instructions (P instruction).

5.2 Composition of Application Instruction
An application instruction has two parts: the instruction and operands.

Instruction: The function of the instruction
Operands: Devices for processing the operations of the instruction
The instruction part of an application instruction usually occupies 1 step, and one operand occupies 2 or 4 steps
depending on the instruction is a 16-bit or 32-bit one.
Format of an application instruction:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
API Mn emo nic Operan ds F un cti on Co ntrol lers

41 DECO P S D n Decode ES /EX /SS SA /SX /SC EH /S V
13 Typ e Bi t Devic es Word De vices Prog ram Ste ps

12 OP X Y M S K H Kn X Kn Y Kn M Kn S T C D E F DECO, DECOP: 7 steps 8
S * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
10
n * *
11 PUL SE 16 -b it 32 -b it
ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV ES EX SS SA SX SC EH SV 9
API No.
Indication of if there is a 16-bit or 32-bit instruction. If there is a 32-bit instruction, the column will be marked
with “D”.
Mnemonic of the application instruction
Indication of if there is a pulse execution type instruction. If there is a pulse instruction, the column will be
marked with “P”.
Operands
Function of the application instruction
DVP-PLC applicable to the application instruction. ES includes ES/EX/SS, SA includes SA/SX/SC, EH
includes EH/EH2/SV.
Steps occupied by the 16-bit/32-bit/pulse execution instruction
DVP-PLC applicable to the pulse/16-bit/32-bit instruction
Column marked with * and in grey refers to E, F index register modification is applicable.
Column marked with * is the device applicable for the operand
Device name
Device type
Input of application instruction:
Some application instructions are only composed of the instruction part (mnemonic), e.g. EI, DI, WDT…. Most
application instructions are composed of the instruction part and many operands.

The application instructions for DVP-PLC are represented as API 00 ~ API 246. Every application instruction
has its own mnemonic. For example, the mnemonic of API 12 is MOV. If you are using the ladder diagram editing
software (WPLSoft) to input API 12 into the program, you only have to enter “MOV”. If you are using the handheld
programming panel (HPP) to input API 12 into the program, you will have to enter the API No. “12”.
Different application instructions designate different operands. Take MOV instruction for example:
X0
MOV K10 D10
Instruction Operands
mnemonic
MOV instruction is to move the operand designated in S to the operand designated in D.
S Source operand: If there are more than 1 source operands, they will be represented as S1, S2, ….
Destination operand: If there are more than 1 destination operands, they will be represented as
D
D1, D2, ….
If the operand can only be constant K/H or a register, it will be represented as m, m1, m2, n, n1, n2, ….
Length of operand (16-bit instruction or 32-bit instruction)
Depending on the contents in the operand, the length of an operand can be 16-bit or 32-bit. Therefore, a
16-bit instruction is for processing 16-bit operands, and 32-bit instruction is for processing 32-bit operands. The
32-bit instruction is indicated by adding a “D” before the 16-bit instruction.
16-bit MOV instruction

X0 When X0 = On, K10 will be sent to D10.
MOV K10 D10
32-bit DMOV instruction

When X1 = On, the content in (D11, D10) will be sent
X1
to (D21, D20).
DMOV D10 D20
Continuous execution instruction and pulse execution instruction
Continuous execution and pulse execution are the two types of execution for an application instruction. Due to
that the execution time required will be shorter when the instruction is not executer, the pulse execution
instructions are used more to shorten the scan period. Instructions marked with a “P" following the mnemonic are
pulse execution instruction. Some instructions are mostly used as pulse execution type, e.g. INC, DEC, the kind of
displacement instructions.

Pulse execution instruction When X0 goes from Off to On, MOVP instruction will be
X0
executed once and the instruction will not be executed
MOVP D10 D12
again in the scan period.
Continuous execution instruction

X1 In every scan period when X1 = On, MOV instruction will
MOV D10 D12 be executed once.
In the two figures, when X0, X1 = Off, the instruction will not be executed, and the content in operand D will
remain unchanged.
Designation of operands
1. Bit devices X, Y, M, and S can be combined into word device, storing values and data for operaions in the form
of KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS in an application instruction.
2. Data register D, timer T, counter C and index register E, F are designated by general operands.
3. A data register is usually in 16 bits, i.e. of the length of 1 register D. A designated 32-bit data register refers to
2 consecutive register Ds.
4. If an operand of a 32-bit instruction designates D0, the 32-bit data register composed of (D1, D0) will be
occupied. D1 is the higher 16 bits; D0 is the lower 16 bits. The same rule also apply to timer T, 16-bit timers
and C0 ~ C199.
5. When the 32-bit counters C200 ~ C255 are used as data registers, they can only be designataed by the
operands of 32-bit instructions.
Format of operand
1. X, Y, M, and S can only On/Off a single point and are defined as bit devices.
2. 16-bit (or 32-bit) devices T, C, D, and registers E, F are defined as word devices.
3. You can place Kn (n = 1 refers to 4 bits. For 16-bit instruction, n = K1 ~ K4; for 32-bit instruction, n = K1 ~ K8)
before bit devices X, Y, M and S to make it a word device for performing word-device operations. For example,
K1M0 refers to 8 bits, M0 ~ M7.
X0 When X0 = On, the contents in M0 ~ M7 will be moved to

MOV K2M0 D10 bit0 ~ 7 in D10 and bit8 ~ 15 will be set to “0”.

Data processing of word devices combined from bit devices
16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction
Designated value: K-32,768 ~ K32,767 Designated value: K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647
Values for designated K1 ~ K4 Values for designated K1 ~ K8
K1 (4 bits) 0 ~ 15 K1 (4 bits) 0 ~ 15
K2 (8 bits) 0 ~ 255 K2 (8 bits) 0 ~ 255
K3 (12 bits) 0 ~ 4,095 K3 (12 bits) 0 ~ 4,095
K4 (16 bits) -32,768 ~ +32,767 K4 (16 bits) 0 ~ 65,535
K5 (20 bits) 0 ~ 1,048,575
K6 (24 bits) 0 ~ 167,772,165
K7 (28 bits) 0 ~ 268,435,455
K8 (32 bits) -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647
Flags
1. General flags
a) The flags listed below are for indicating the operational result of the application instruction.
M1020: zero flag M1022: carry flag
M1021: borrow flag M1029: execution of instruction is completed
All flags will turn On or Off according to the operational result of an instruction. For example, the
execution result of operation instructions ADD/SUB/MUL/DVI will affect the status of M1020 ~ M1022. When
the instruction is not executed, the On/Off status of the flag will be held. The status of the four flags relates to
many instructions. See relevant instructions for more details.
b) Example of M1029
When the contact of DSW (Digital Switch) instruction is On, 4 output points will automatically act in cycle
at the frequency of 0.1 second in order to read the set value of the digital switch. If the contact goes Off
during the execution, the action will be disable. When it is On again, the disabled action will be re-executed. If
you do not wish the action to be disabled, you can take the circuit below as a reference.
X0
SET M0
When X0 = On, DSW will be enabled.
M0
DSW X10 Y10 D0 K0 When X0 = Off, M0 will be Off only when DSW
M1029 completes a cycle and M1029 = On.
RST M0
2. Error Operation Flags
Errors occur during the execution of the instruction when the combination of application instructions is
incorrect or the devices designated by the operand exceed their range. Other than errors, the flags listed in
the table below will be On, and error codes will also appear.

Device Explanation
M1067 When operational errors occur, M1067 will be On. D1067 displays the error code. D1069
D1067 displays the step where the error occurs. Other errors occurring will update the contents in
D1069 D1067 and D1069. M1067 will be Off when the error is eliminated.
When operational errors occur, M1068 will be On. D1068 displays the step where the error
M1068
occurs. Other errors occurring wil not update the content in D1068. You have to use RST
D1068
instruction to reset M1068 to Off; otherwise M1068 will keep being On.
3. Flags for expanding functions
Some application instructions can use some special flags to expand their functions or complete special
functions. For example, the communication instruction RS can use M1161 to switch between 8-bit and 16-bit
transmission mode.
Times of using instructions
There are limitation on the times of using some instructions in the program. However, you can use index register
modification in the operands to expand the functions of the instruction.
1. Can be used only once in the program:
API 58 PWM (ES series MPU) API 60 IST (ES/SA/EH series MPU)
API 74 SEGL (ES series MPU) API 155 DABSR (SC/EH series MPU)
2. Can be used only twice in the program:
API 57 PLSY (ES series MPU) API 59 PLSR (ES series MPU)
API 74 SEGL (EH series MPU) API 77 PR (SA/EH series MPU)
3. Can be used only 4 times in the program:
API 169 HOUR (SA series MPU)
4. Can be used only 8 times in the program:
API 64 TTMR (SA series MPU)
5. API 53 DHSCS and API 54 DHSCR together can be used only maximum 4 times in the program (ES series
MPU).
6. API 53 DHSCS, API 54 DHSCR, and API 55 DHSZ together can be used only maximum 6 times in the program
(SA series MPU).
There is no limitation on the times of using the instructions listed below, but there are limitations on the times of
executing the same instruction at the same time.
1. Instructions which can be executed only once: API 52 MTR (SA/EH), API 56 SPD (ES/SA/EH), API 69 SORT
(SA/EH), API 70 TKY (SA/EH), API 71 HKY (SA/EH), API 72 DSW (SA), API 74 SEGL (SA), API 75 ARWS, API
80 RS (ES/SA/EH), API 100 MODRD (ES/SA/EH), API 101 MODWR (ES/SA/EH), API 102 FWD (ES/SA/EH),

API 103 REV (ES/SA/EH), API 104 STOP (ES/SA/EH), API 105 RDST (ES/SA/EH), API 106 RSTEF
(ES/SA/EH), API 150 MODRW (ES/SA/EH), API 151 PWD (EH).
2. Instructions which can be executed only twice: API 57 PLSY (EH), API 58 PWM (SA/EH), API 59 PLSR (SA/EH),
API 72 DSW (EH).
3. Instructions which can be executed only 4 times: API 57 PLSY (EH2/SV), API 58 PWM (EH2/SV), API 169
HOUR (EH).
4. Instructions which can be executed only 8 times: API 64 TTMR (EH).
5. In SA series MPU, there is on limitation on the times of using the high-speed output instructions PLSY, PWM and
PLSR, bit only one high-speed output instruction will be enabled in every scan.
6. In EH series MPU, there is no limitation on the times of using hardware high-speed counter instructions DHSCS,
DHSCR and DHSZ, but when the three instructions are enabled at the same time, DHSCS will occupy 1 memory
unit, DHSCR 1 memory unit, and DHSZ 2 memory units. The total memeory units occupied by the three
instructions cannot be more than 8 units. If there are more than 8 memory units occupied, the PLC system will
execute the instruction that is first scanned and enabled and ignore the rest.
5.3 Handling of Numeric Values
Devices only with On/Off status are called bit devices, e.g. X, Y, M and S. Devices used exclusively for storing
numeric values are called word devices, e.g. T, C, D, E and F. Bit device plus a specific bit device (place a digit
before the bit device in Kn) can be used in the operand of an application instruction in the form of numeric value.
n = K1 ~ K4 for a 16-bit value; n = K1 ~ K8 for a 32-bit value. For example, K2M0 refers to a 8-bit value composed of
M0 ~ M7.
Valid data
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Low byte
Transmit to
Reset to 0
D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Equals
Low byte
D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
K1M0, K2M0, and K3M0 are transmitted to 16-bit registers and the vacant high bits will be filled in “0”. The same
rule applied to when K1M0, K2M0, K3M0, K4M0, K5M0, K6M0, and K7M0 are transmitted to 32-bit registers and
the vacant high bits will be filled in “0”.
In the 16-bit (or 32-bit) operation, if the contents of the operand are designated as bit devices K1 ~ K3 (or K4 ~ K7),
the vacant high bits will be regarded as “0”. Therefore, the operation is a positive-value one.

M0
The BCD value composed of X4 ~ X13 will be converted to BIN
BIN K2X4 D0
value and sent to D0.
You can choose any No. for bit devices, but please make the 1s digit of X and Y “0”, e.g. X0, X10, X20, …Y0, Y10…,
and the 1s digit of M and S “8’s multiple” (“0” is still the best choice), e.g. M0, M10, M20….
Designating continuous device No.
Take data register D for example, continuous D refers to D0, D1, D2, D3, D4….
For bit devices with specifically designated digit, continuous No. refers to:
K1X0 K1X4 K1X10 K1X14…

K2Y0 K2Y10 K2Y20 Y2X30…
K3M0 K3M12 K3M24 K3M36…
K4S0 K4S16 K4S32 K4S48…
Please follow the No. in the table and do not skip No. in case confusion may occur. In addition, if you use K4Y0 in
the 32-bit operation, the higher 16 bits will be regarded as “0”. For 32-bit data, please use K8Y0.
The operations in DVP-PLC are conducted in BIN integers. When the integer performs division, e.g. 40 ÷ 3 = 13
and the remainder is 1. When the integer performs square root operations, the decimal point will be left out. Use
decimal point operation instructions to obtain the decimal point.
Application instructions revelant to decimal point:
API 49 (FLT) API 110 (D ECMP) API 111 (D EZCP) API 112 (D MOVR)
API 116 (D RAD) API 117 (D DEG) API 118 (D EBCD) API 119 (D EBIN)
API 120 (D EADD) API 121 (D ESUB) API 122 (D EMUL) API 123 (D EDIV)
API 124 (D EXP) API 125 (D LN) API 126 (D LOG) API 127 (D ESQR)
API 128 (D POW) API 129 (INT) API 130 (D SIN) API 131 (D COS)
API 132 (D TAN) API 133 (D ASIN) API 134 (D ACOS) API 135 (D ATAN)
API 136 (D SINH) API 137 (D COSH) API 138 (D TANH) API 172 (D ADDR)
API 173 (D SUBR) API 174 (D MULR) API 175 (D DIVR)
Binary Floating Point
DVP-PLC represents floating points in 32 bits, following the IEEE754 standard:
8 bits 23 bits
S exponent mantissa
b 31 b0
Sign bit
0: positive
1: negative

(− 1)S × 2 E − B ×1.M , in which B = 127

Therefore, the range for the 32-bit floating point is ±2-126 ~ ±2+128, i.e. ±1.1755 × 10-38 ~ ±3.4028 × 10+38
Example 1: Representing "23" in 32-bit floating point
Step 1: Convert “23” into a binary value: 23.0 = 10111
Step 2: Normalize the binary value: 10111 = 1.0111 × 24, in which 0111 is mantissa and 4 is exponent
Step 3: Obtain the exponent: ∵ E – B = 4 Æ E – 127 = 4 ∴ E = 131 = 100000112
Step 4: Combine the sign bit, exponent and mantissa into a floating point
0 10000011 011100000000000000000002 = 41B8000016
Example 2: Representing “-23.0” in 32-bit floating point
The steps required are the same as those in Example 1. The only difference is you have to alter the sign bit into “1”.
DVP-PLC uses registers of 2 continuous No. to combine into a 32-bit floating point. For example, we use registers
(D1, D0) for storing a binary floating point as below:
D1(b15~b0) D0(b15~b0)
7 6 5 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -17 -18 -19 -20 -21 -22 -23
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
S E7 E6 E5 E1 E0 A22 A21 A20 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
b31 b30 b29 b28 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
8 bits of exponent 23 bits of mantissa
Hidden decimal point
Sign bit (0: positive 1: negative)

When b0~b31 is 0, the content is 0.
Decimal Floating Point
Since the binary floating point are not very user-friendly, we can convert it into a decimal floating point for use.
Please be noted that the decimal point operation in DVP-PLC is still in binary floating point.
The decimal floating point is represented by 2 continuous registers. The register of smaller No. is for the constant
while the register of bigger No. is for the exponent.
Example: Storing a decimal floating point in registers (D1, D0)

Decimal floating point = [constant D0] × 10 [exponent D1 ]
Constant D0 = ±1,000 ~ ±9,999
Exponent D1 = -41 ~ +35
The constant 100 does not exist in D0 due to 100 is represented as 1,000 × 10-1. The range of decimal floating point
is ±1175 × 10-41 ~ ±3402×10+35.

The decimal floating point can be used in the following instructions:
D EBCD: Converting binary floating point to decimal floating point

D EBIN: Converting decimal floating point to binary floating point
Zero flag (M1020), carry flag (M1021), carry flag (M1022) and the floating point operation instructions:
Zero flag: M1020 = On if the operational result is “0”.

Borrow flag: M1021 = On if the operational result exceeds the minimum unit.
Carry flag: M1022 = On if the absolute value of the operational result exceeds the range of use.
5.4 E, F Index Register Modification
The index registers are 16-it registers. There are 2 points of E, F in ES/EX/SS, 8 points E0 ~ E3 and F0 ~ F3 in
SA/SX/SC, and 16 points E0 ~ E7 and F0 ~ F7 in EH/EH2/SV series MPU.
E and F index registers are 16-bit data registers, can be read and
written.
If you need a 32-bit register, you have to designate E. In this case, F
16-bit 16-bit
will be covered up by E and cannot be used; otherwise, the contents
F0 E0
in E may become incorrect. (We recommend you use MOVP
32-bit
instruction to reset the contents in D to 0 when the PLC is switched
F0 E0
High byte Low byte on.)
Combination of E and F when you designate a 32-bit index register:
(E0, F0), (E1, F1), (E2, F2), ... (E7, F7)
See the diagram in the left hand side. E, F index register

modification refers to the content in the operand changes with
MOV K20E0 D10F0
the contents in E and F.
E0 = 8 F0 = 14
For example, E0 = 8 and K20E0 represents constant K28 (20
20 + 8 = 28 10 + 14 = 24
+ 8). When the condition is true, constant K28 will be
Transmission K28 D24
transmitted to register D24.
Devices modifiable in ES/EX/SS series MPU: P, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D.

Devices modifiable in SA/SX/SC series MPU: P, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D
Devices modifiable in EH/EH2/SV series MPU: P, I, X, Y, M, S, K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D
E and F can modify the devices listed above but cannot modify themselves and Kn. K4M0E0 is valid and
K0E0M0 is invalid. Grey columns in the table of operand at the beginning page of each application instruction indicate
the operands modifiable by E and F.

If you need to modify device P, I, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C and D by E, F, you have to select a
16-bit register, i.e. you can designate E or F. To modify constant K and H in a 32-bit instruction, you have to select a
32-bit register, i.e. you have to designate E.
When you use the instruction mode in WPLSoft to modify constant K and H, you have to use @, e.g.
"MOV K10@E0 D0F0”

5.5 Instruction Index
Sorted by alphabetic order & API No.

Mnemonic P Applicable to
Category API Instruction Function Page
16-bit 32-bit ES SA EH
20 ADD DADD 3 Addition 3 3 3 6-32
46 ANS - - Timed Annunciator Set - 3 3 6-66
47 ANR - 3 Annunciator Reset - 3 3 6-66
62 ABSD DABSD - Absolute Drum Sequencer - 3 3 7-46
66 ALT - 3 Alternate State 3 3 3 7-54
75 ARWS - - Arrow Switch - 3 3 7-70
76 ASC - - ASCII Code Conversion - 3 3 7-72
82 ASCI - 3 Converts Hex to ASCII 3 3 3 7-94
87 ABS DABS 3 Absolute Value 3 3 3 7-106
133 - DASIN 3 Arc Sine - 3 3 8-49
134 - DACOS 3 Arc Cosine - 3 3 8-50
A 135 - DATAN 3 Arc Tangent - 3 3 8-51
155 - DABSR - Read the Absolute Position from a Servo Motor - 3 3 9-14
172 - DADDR 3 Floating Point Addition 3 3 3 9-51
218 AND& DAND& - S1 & S2 - 3 3 10-8
219 AND| DAND| - S1 | S2 - 3 3 10-8
220 AND^ DAND^ - S1 ^ S2 - 3 3 10-8
232 AND= DAND= - S1 = S2 3 3 3 10-11
233 AND> DAND> - S1 > S2 3 3 3 10-11
234 AND< DAND< - S1 < S2 3 3 3 10-11
236 AND<> DAND<> - S1 ≠ S2 3 3 3 10-11
237 AND<= DAND<= - S1 ≦ S2 3 3 3 10-11
238 AND>= DAND>= - S1 ≧ S2 3 3 3 10-11
15 BMOV - 3 Block Move 3 3 3 6-24
18 BCD DBCD 3 Binary Coded Decimal 3 3 3 6-29
B
19 BIN DBIN 3 Binary 3 3 3 6-30
44 BON DBON 3 Check Specified Bit Status 3 3 3 6-64
00 CJ - 3 Conditional Jump 3 3 3 6-1
01 CALL - 3 Call Subroutine 3 3 3 6-5
10 CMP DCMP 3 Compare 3 3 3 6-18
14 CML DCML 3 Compliment 3 3 3 6-23
84 CCD - 3 Check Code - 3 3 7-101
C 108 CRC - 3 Checksum CRC Mode - 3 3 8-19
131 - DCOS 3 Cosine 3 3 3 8-45
137 - DCOSH 3 Hyperbolic Cosine - - 3 8-53
146 CVM - - Valve Control (*) - - 3 8-63
193 - DCIMR - 2-Axis Relative Position Arc Interpolation (*) - - 3 9-81
194 - DCIMA - 2-Axis Absolute Position Arc Interpolation (*) - - 3 9-86
197 - DCLLM - Close Loop Position Control (*) - - 3 9-95
05 DI - - Disable Interrupts 3 3 3 6-8
23 DIV DDIV 3 Division 3 3 3 6-37
25 DEC DDEC 3 Decrement 3 3 3 6-40
D 41 DECO - 3 Decode 3 3 3 6-59
72 DSW - - Digital Switch - 3 3 7-64
117 - DDEG 3 Radian Æ Angle - 3 3 8-27
143 DELAY - 9 Delay Instruction - 9 9 8-55

158 DRVI DDRVI - Drive to Increment - - 3 9-24
D 159 DRVA DDRVA - Drive to Absolute - - 3 9-30
175 - DDIVR 9 Floating Point Division 3 3 3 9-57
04 EI - - Enable Interrupts 3 3 3 6-8
42 ENCO - 3 Encode 3 3 3 6-61
110 - DECMP 3 Floating Point Compare 3 3 3 8-23
111 - DEZCP 3 Floating Point Zone Compare 3 3 3 8-24
118 - DEBCD 3 Float to Scientific Conversion 3 3 3 8-28
119 - DEBIN 3 Scientific to Float Conversion 3 3 3 8-29
E
120 - DEADD 3 Floating Point Addition 3 3 3 8-31
121 - DESUB 3 Floating Point Subtraction 3 3 3 8-32
122 - DEMUL 3 Floating Point Multiplication 3 3 3 8-33
123 - DEDIV 3 Floating Point Division 3 3 3 8-34
124 - DEXP 3 Exponent of Binary Floating Point 3 3 3 8-35
127 - DESQR 3 Floating Point Square Root 3 3 3 8-39
06 FEND - - The End of the Main Program (First End) 3 3 3 6-12
08 FOR - - Start of a FOR-NEXT Loop 3 3 3 6-15
16 FMOV DFMOV 3 Fill Move 3 3 3 6-26
F 49 FLT DFLT 3 Floating Point 3 3 3 6-70
78 FROM DFROM 3 Read CR Data in Special Modules 3 3 3 7-75
102 FWD - - Forward Running of VFD-A 3 3 3 8-11
145 FTC - - Fuzzy Temperature Control - 9 9 8-58
144 GPWM - - General PWM Output - 9 9 8-57
G 170 GRY DGRY 3 BIN Æ Gray Code - 9 9 9-49
171 GBIN DGBIN 3 Gray Code Æ BIN - 9 9 9-50
53 - DHSCS - High Speed Counter Set 3 3 3 7-5
54 - DHSCR - High Speed Counter Reset 3 3 3 7-15
55 - DHSZ - High Speed Zone Compare - 3 3 7-17
H 71 HKY DHKY - Hexadecimal Key Input - 9 9 7-61
83 HEX - 3 Converts ASCII to Hex 3 9 9 7-98
169 HOUR DHOUR - Hour Meter - 3 3 9-47
196 HST - 3 High Speed Timer - - 3 9-93
03 IRET - - Interrupt Return 3 3 3 6-8
24 INC DINC 3 Increment 3 3 3 6-39
I 60 IST - - Initial State 3 3 3 7-39
63 INCD - - Increment Drum Sequencer - 3 3 7-48
129 INT DINT 3 Float to Integer 3 3 3 8-42
107 LRC - 3 Checksum LRC Mode 3 3 3 8-17
125 - DLN 3 Natural Logarithm of Binary Floating Point 3 3 3 8-36
126 - DLOG 3 Logarithm of Binary Floating Point 3 3 3 8-37
215 LD& DLD& - S1 & S2 - 3 3 10-7
216 LD| DLD| - S1 | S2 - 3 3 10-7
L
217 LD^ DLD^ - S1 ^ S2 - 3 3 10-7
224 LD= DLD= - S1 = S2 3 3 3 10-10
225 LD> DLD> - S1 > S2 3 3 3 10-10
226 LD< DLD< - S1 < S2 3 3 3 10-10
228 LD<> DLD<> - S1 ≠ S2 3 3 3 10-10

229 LD<= DLD<= - S1 ≦ S2 3 3 3 10-10
L
230 LD>= DLD>= - S1 ≧ S2 3 3 3 10-10
12 MOV DMOV 3 Move 3 3 3 6-20
22 MUL DMUL 3 Multiplication 3 3 3 6-35
45 MEAN DMEAN 3 Mean 3 3 3 6-65
52 MTR - - Input Matrix - 3 3 7-3
100 MODRD - - Read Modbus Data 3 3 3 8-1
101 MODWR - - Write Modbus Data 3 3 3 8-6
112 - DMOVR 3 Move Floating Point Data 3 3 3 8-25
148 MEMR DMEMR 3 Read File Register - 3 3 8-67
149 MEMW DMEMW 3 Write File Register - 3 3 8-68
150 MODRW - - Read/Write MODBUS Data 3 3 3 9-1
174 - DMULR 3 Floating Point Multiplication 3 3 3 9-55
M
180 MAND - 3 Matrix ‘AND’ Operation - 3 3 9-59
181 MOR - 3 Matrix ‘OR’ Operation - 3 3 9-61
182 MXOR - 3 Matrix ‘XOR’ Operation - 3 3 9-62
183 MXNR - 3 Matrix ‘NOR’ Operation - 3 3 9-63
184 MINV - 3 Matrix Inverse Operation - 3 3 9-64
185 MCMP - 3 Matrix Compare - 3 3 9-65
186 MBRD - 3 Read Matrix Bit - 3 3 9-67
187 MBWR - 3 Write Matrix Bit - 3 3 9-69
188 MBS - 3 Matrix Bit Displacement - 3 3 9-71
189 MBR - 3 Matrix Bit Rotation - 3 3 9-73
190 MBC - 3 Matrix Bit Status Counting - 3 3 9-75
09 NEXT - - End of a FOR-NEXT Loop 3 3 3 6-15
N
29 NEG DNEG 3 2’s Complement (Negative) 3 3 3 6-44
221 OR& DOR& - S1 & S2 - 3 3 10-9
222 OR| DOR| - S1 | S2 - 3 3 10-9
223 OR^ DOR^ - S1 ^ S2 - 3 3 10-9
240 OR= DOR= - S1 = S2 3 3 3 10-12
O 241 OR> DOR> - S1 > S2 3 3 3 10-12
242 OR< DOR< - S1 < S2 3 3 3 10-12
244 OR<> DOR<> - S1 ≠ S2 3 3 3 10-12
245 OR<= DOR<= - S1 ≦ S2 3 3 3 10-12
246 OR>= DOR>= - S1 ≧ S2 3 3 3 10-12
57 PLSY DPLSY - Pulse Y Output 3 3 3 7-26
58 PWM - - Pulse Width Modulation 3 3 3 7-32
59 PLSR DPLSR - Pulse Ramp 3 3 3 7-35
77 PR - - Print (ASCII Code Output) - 3 3 7-73
81 PRUN DPRUN 3 Parallel Run - 3 3 7-93
88 PID DPID - PID Control Loop 3 3 3 7-107
P
128 - DPOW 3 Floating Point Power Operation 3 3 3 8-40
151 PWD - - Detection of Input Pulse Width - - 3 9-10
157 PLSV DPLSV - Adjustable Speed Pulse Output - - 3 9-23
191 - DPPMR - 2-Axis Relative Point to Point Motion (*) - - 3 9-76
192 - DPPMA - 2-Axis Absolute Point to Point Motion (*) - - 3 9-79
195 - DPTPO - Single-Axis Pulse Output by Table (*) - - 3 9-91
30 ROR DROR 3 Rotation Right 3 3 3 6-46
R
31 ROL DROL 3 Rotation Left 3 3 3 6-47

32 RCR DRCR 3 Rotation Right with Carry 3 3 3 6-48
33 RCL DRCL 3 Rotation Left with Carry 3 3 3 6-49
50 REF - 3 Refresh 3 3 3 7-1
51 REFF - 3 Refresh and Filter Adjust - 3 3 7-2
67 RAMP - - Ramp Variable Value - 3 3 7-55
80 RS - - Serial Communication Instruction 3 3 3 7-80
103 REV - - Reverse Running of VFD-A 3 3 3 8-11
R
105 RDST - - Read VFD-A Status 3 3 3 8-14
106 RSTEF - - Reset Abnormal VFD-A 3 3 3 8-16
116 - DRAD 3 Angle Æ Radian - 3 3 8-26
Start of the Measurement of Execution Time of
152 RTMU - - - - 3 9-11
I Interruption
End of the Measurement of the Execution
153 RTMD - - - - 3 9-11
Time of I Interruption
154 RAND 3 - Random Number - 3 3 9-13
02 SRET - - Subroutine Return 3 3 3 6-5
13 SMOV - 3 Shift Move - 3 3 6-21
21 SUB DSUB 3 Subtraction 3 3 3 6-34
34 SFTR - 3 Bit Shift Right 3 3 3 6-50
35 SFTL - 3 Bit Shift Left 3 3 3 6-51
38 SFWR - 3 Shift Register Write - 3 3 6-55
39 SFRD - 3 Shift Register Read - 3 3 6-56
43 SUM DSUM 3 Sum of Active Bits 3 3 3 6-63
48 SQR DSQR 3 Square Root 3 3 3 6-72
56 SPD - - Speed Detection 3 3 3 7-24
61 SER DSER 3 Search a Data Stack - 3 3 7-45
S 65 STMR - - Special Timer - 3 3 7-52
69 SORT - - Sort Tabulated Data - 3 3 7-57
73 SEGD - 3 Seven Segment Decoder 3 3 3 7-66
74 SEGL - - Seven Segment with Latch 3 3 3 7-67
104 STOP - - Stop VFD-A 3 3 3 8-11
109 SWRD - 3 Read Digital Switch - - 3 8-22
130 - DSIN 3 Sine 3 3 3 8-43
136 - DSINH 3 Hyperbolic Sine - - 3 8-52
147 SWAP DSWAP 3 Byte Swap 3 3 3 8-66
173 - DSUBR 3 Floating Point Subtraction 3 3 3 9-53
202 SCAL - 3 Proportional Value Calculation 3 3 3 10-1
203 SCLP - 3 Parameter Proportional Value Calculation 3 3 3 10-3
64 TTMR - - Teaching Timer - 3 3 7-50
70 TKY DTKY - Ten Key Input - 3 3 7-59
79 TO DTO 3 Write CR Data into Special Modules 3 3 3 7-76
132 - DTAN 3 Tangent 3 3 3 8-47
138 - DTANH 3 Hyperbolic Tangent - - 3 8-54
T
160 TCMP - 3 Time Compare - 3 3 9-39
161 TZCP - 3 Time Zone Compare - 3 3 9-40
162 TADD - 3 Time Addition - 3 3 9-41
163 TSUB - 3 Time Subtraction - 3 3 9-42
166 TRD - 3 Time Read - 3 3 9-43

T 167 TWR - 3 Time Write - 3 3 9-45
85 VRRD - 3 Volume Read - 3 3 7-103
V
86 VRSC - 3 Volume Scale - 3 3 7-105
07 WDT - 3 Watchdog Timer Refresh 3 3 3 6-14
26 WAND DAND 3 Logical Word AND 3 3 3 6-41
27 WOR DOR 3 Logical Word OR 3 3 3 6-42
W
28 WXOR DXOR 3 Logical Exclusive OR 3 3 3 6-43
36 WSFR - 3 Word Shift Right - 3 3 6-52
37 WSFL - 3 Word Shift Left - 3 3 6-54
X 17 XCH DXCH 3 Exchange 3 3 3 6-27
11 ZCP DZCP 3 Zone Compare 3 3 3 6-19
Z 40 ZRST - 3 Zero Reset 3 3 3 6-57
156 ZRN DZRN - Zero Return - - 3 9-19
Instructions marked with * are available in EH2/SV series MPU.
Note:
1. For applicable models, ES includes ES/EX/SS; SA includes SA/SX/SC; EH includes EH/EH2/SV.
2. ES/EX/SS series MPU does not support pulse execution type instructions (P instruction).

6 Application Instructions API 00-49

Controllers
00 CJ P Conditional Jump ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
OP Range Program Steps

P0~P255 CJ, CJP: 3 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: The destination pointer of conditional jump
Explanations:
1. Operand S can designate P
2. P can be modified by index register E, F
3. In ES/EX/SS series models: Operand S can designate P0 ~ P63
4. In SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV series models: Operand S can designate P0 ~ P255
5. When the user does not wish a particular part of PLC program in order to shorten the scan time and execute
dual outputs, CJ instruction or CJP instruction can be adopted.
6. When the program designated by pointer P is prior to CJ instruction, WDT timeout will occur and PLC will stop
running. Please use it carefully.
7. CJ instruction can designate the same pointer P repeatedly. However, CJ and CALL cannot designate the same
pointer P; otherwise an error will occur.
8. Actions of all devices while conditional jumping is being executed.
a) Y, M and S remain their previous status before the conditional jump takes place.
b) Timer 10ms and 100ms that is executing stops.
c) Timer T192 ~ T199 that execute the subroutine program will continue and the output contact executes normally.
d) The high-speed counter that is executing the counting continues counting and the output contact executes
normally.
e) The ordinary counters stop executing.
f) If the “reset instruction” of the timer is executed before the conditional jump, the device will still be in the reset
status while conditional jumping is being executed.
g) Ordinary application instructions are not executed.
h) The application instructions that are being executed, i.e. API 53 DHSCS, API 54 DHSCR, API 55 DHSZ, API 56
SPD, API 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM, API 59 PLSR, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA, continue being
executed.
Program Example 1:
1. When X0 = On, the program automatically jumps from address 0 to N (the designated label P1) and keeps its
execution. The addresses between 0 and N will not be executed.
2. When X0 = Off, as an ordinary program, the program keeps on executing from address 0. CJ instruction will not
be executed at this time.

( CJ instruction ) P***
X0
0 CJ P1
X1
Y1
X2
P1 N Y2
Program Example 2:
1. CJ instruction can be used in the following 5 conditions between MC and MCR instructions.
a) Without MC ~ MCR.
b) From without MC to within MC. Valid in the loop P1 as shown in the figure below.
c) In the same level N, inside of MC~MCR.
d) From within MC to without MCR.
e) Jumping from this MC ~ MCR to another MC ~ MCR1.
2. Actions in ES/EX/SS series models V4.7 (and below): When CJ instruction is used between MC and MCR, it
can only be applied without MC ~ MCR or in the same N layer of MC ~ MCR. Jumping from this MC ~ MCR to
another MC ~ MCR will result in errors, i.e. a) and c) as stated above can ensure correct actions; others will
cause errors.
3. When MC instruction is executed, PLC will push the status of the switch contact into the self-defined stack in
PLC. The stack will be controlled by the PLC, and the user cannot change it. When MCR instruction is executed,
PLC will obtain the previous status of the switch contact from the top layer of the stack. Under the conditions as
stated in b), d) and e), the times of pushing-in and obtaining stack may be different. In this case, the maximum
stack available to be pushed in is 8 and the obtaining of stacks cannot resume once the stack becomes empty.
Thus, when using CALL or CJ instructions, the user has to be aware of the pushing-in and obtaining of stacks.
X0
MC N0
X2
CJ P0
X3
CJ P1
X1
MC N1
M1000
P1 Y1
MCR N1
M1000
P0 Y0
MCR N0
1
This function is only available in ES/EX/SS series models V4.9 (and above) and SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV series models.

Program Example 3:
1. The states of each device
Contact state before CJ Contact state when CJ is Output coil state when CJ is
Device
is executed being executed being executed
* 1
M1, M2, M3 Off M1, M2, M3 OfftOn Y1 , M20, S1 Off
Y, M, S
* 1
M1, M2, M3 On M1, M2, M3 OntOff Y1 , M20, S1 On
M4 Off M4 OfftOn Timer T0 is not enabled.

10ms, 100ms
Timer Timer T0 immediately stops
ES/SA/EH M4 On M4 OntOff and is latched. M0 OntOff,
T0 is reset as 0.
M6 Off M6 OfftOn Timer T240 is not enabled.
Once the timer function is
1ms, 10ms, 100ms
*2 enabled and when met with
Timer CJ instruction, all
(accumulative) M6 On M6 OntOff accumulative timers will stop
SA/EH timing and stay latched. M0
OntOff. T240 remains
unchanged.
M7, M10 Off M10 On/Off trigger Counter does not count.
3 Counter C0 stops counting

C0 ~ C234 * M7 Off, M10 On/Off and stays latched. After M0
M10 On/Off trigger
trigger goes Off, C0 resumes its
counting.
Application instructions are

M11 Off M11 OfftOn
not executed.
Application The skipped application

instruction instructions are not executed,
M11 On M11 OntOff
but API 53 ~ 59, API 157 ~
159 keep being executed.
*1: Y1 is a dual output. When M0 is Off, M1 will control Y1. When M0 is On, M12 will control Y1.
*2: When the timers (T192 ~ T199, applicable in SA/EH series MPU) used by a subroutine re driven and encounter
the execution of CJ instruction, the timing will resume. After the timing target is reached, the output contact of the
timer will be On.
*3: When the high-speed counters (C235 ~ C255) are driven and encounter the execution of CJ instruction, the
counting will resume, as well as the action of the output points.

2. Y1 is a dual output. When M0 = Off, Y1 is controlled by M1. When M0 = On, Y1 is controlled by M12.
M0
CJ P0
M1
Y1
M2
M20
M17
CJ P0
M3
S1
M4
TMR T0 K10
M5
RST T127
M6
TMR T127 K1000
M7
RST C0
M10
CNT C0 K20
M11
MOV K3 D0
M0
P0 CJ P63
M12
Y1
M13
P63 RST T127
RST C0
RST D0
END


Controllers
01 CALL P Call Subroutine ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
OP Range Program Steps

P0 ~ P255 CALL, CALLP: 3 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: The pointer of call subroutine.
Explanations:
1. Operand S can designate P.
2. P can be modified by index register E, F.
3. In ES/EX/SS series models: Operand S can designate P0 ~ P63.
4. In SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV series models: Operand S can designate P0 ~ P255.
5. Edit the subroutine designated by the pointer after FEND instruction.
6. The number of pointer P, when used by CALL, cannot be the same as the number designated by CJ instruction.
7. If only CALL instruction is in use, it can call subroutines of the same pointer number with no limit on times.
8. Subroutine can be nested for 5 levels including the initial CALL instruction. (If entering the sixth level, the
subroutine won’t be executed.)
API Mnemonic Function

Controllers
02 SRET Subroutine Return ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
OP Descriptions Program Steps

Automatically returns to the step immediately following the SRET: 1 steps
N/A
CALL instruction which activated the subroutine
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Explanations:
1. No operand. No contact to drive the instruction is required.
2. The subroutine will return to main program by SRET after the termination of subroutine and execute the
sequence program located at the next step to the CALL instruction.
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, CALL instruction is executed and the program jumps to the subroutine designated by P2. When
SRET instruction is executed, the program returns to address 24 and continues its execution.

P***
X0
20 CALL P2 call subroutine P***
X1
24 Y1
FEND
P2 Y0
Subroutine P2
Y0
SRET subroutine return
Program Example 2:
1. When X10 goes from Off to On, its rising-edge trigger executes CALL P10 instruction and the program jumps to
the subroutine designated by P10.
2. When X11 is On, CALL P11 is executed and the program jumps to the subroutine designated by P11.
5. When X14 is On, CALL P14 is executed and the program jumps to the subroutine designated by P14. When
SRET is executed, the program returns to the previous P※ subroutine and continues its execution.
6. After SRET instruction is executed in P10 subroutine, returning to the main program.

X0 X2
INC D0 P12 INC D30
Y0 Y10
X10 X13
CALL P10 CALL P13
Main subroutine
X0 Program X2
INC D1 INC D31
Y1 Y11
FEND SRET
X2 X2
P10 INC D10 P13 INC D40
Y4 Y12
X11 X14
CALL P11 CALL P14
subroutine subroutine
X2 X2
INC D11 INC D41
Y5 Y13
SRET SRET
X2 X2
P11 INC D20 P14 INC D50
Y6 Y14
X12 subroutine
CALL P12 SRET
subroutine
X2
INC D21 END
Y7
SRET


Controllers
03 IRET Interrupt Return ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

IRET ends the processing of an interruption subroutine and IRET: 1 steps
N/A
returns to the execution of the main program.
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Explanations:
2. Interruption return refers to interrupt the subroutine.
3. After the interruption is over, returning to the main program from IRET to execute the next instruction where the
program was interrupted.

Controllers
04 EI Enable Interrupts ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

See more details of the explanation on this instruction in DI EI: 1 steps
N/A
(Disable Interruption) instruction.
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Explanations:
2. The pulse width of the interruption signal should be >200us.
3. See DI instruction for the range of the No. of I for all models.
4. See DI instruction for more details about M1050 ~ M1059, M1280 ~ M1299.

Controllers
05 DI Disable Interrupts ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

When the special auxiliary relay M1050 ~ M1059, M1280 ~ DI: 1 step
M1299 for disabling interruption is driven, the corresponding
N/A
interruption request will not be executed even in the range
allowed for interruptions.
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Explanations:
2. EI instruction allows interrupting subroutine in the program, e.g. external interruption, timed interruption, and
high-speed counter interruption.

3. In the program, using interruption subroutine between EI and DI instruction is allowed. However, you can
choose not to use DI instruction if there is no interruption-disabling section in the program.
4. When M1050 ~ M1059 are the special auxiliary relays to drive disabling interruption in ES/SA, or M1280 ~
M1299 are the special auxiliary relays to drive disabling interruption in EH/EH2/SV, the corresponding
interruptions will not be executed even in the area allowed for interruptions.
5. Pointer for interruption (I) must be placed after FEND instruction.
6. Other interruptions are not allowed during the execution of interruption subroutine.
7. When many interruptions occur, the priority is given to the firstly executed interruption. If several interruptions
occur simultaneously, the priority is given to the interruption with the smaller pointer No.
8. The interruption request occurring between DI and EI instructions that cannot be executed immediately will be
memorized and will be executed in the area allowed for interruption.
9. The time interruptions in ES/SA will not be memorized.
10. When using the interruption pointer, DO NOT repeatedly use the high-speed counter driven by the same X input
contact.
11. When immediate I/O is required during the interruption, write REF instruction in the program to update the status
of I/O.
Program Example:
During the operation of PLC, when the program scans to the area between EI and DI instructions and X1 = Off→On
or X2 = Off→On, interruption subroutine A or B will be executed. When the subroutine executes to IRET, the program
will return to the main program and resumes its execution.
EI
X0 Enable interruption
Y1
DI
Disable interruption
EI
Enable interruption
FEND
I 101 Y0
Interruption subroutine A
IRET
I 201 Y0
Interruption subroutine B
IRET
Remarks:
1. No. of interruption pointer I in ES/EX/SS:
a) External interruptions: (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3) 4 points2.
b) Time interruptions: I6□□, 1 point (□□ = 10 ~ 99, time base = 1ms) (support V5.7 and above)
2
Input points occupied by external interruptions cannot be used for inputs of high-speed counters; otherwise grammar check errors may occur
when the program is written in PLC.

c) Communication interruption for receiving specific words (I150) (support V5.7 and above)
2. No. of interruption pointer I in SA/SX/SC:
a) External interruptions: (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3), (I401, X4), (I501, X5) 6 points.
b) Time interruptions: I6□□, I7□□ 2 points. (□□ = 1 ~ 99ms, time base = 1ms)
c) High-speed counter interruptions: I010, I020, I030, I040 4 points. (used with API 53 DHSCS instruction to
generate interruption signals)
d) Communication interruption for receiving specific words .(I150)
e) The order for execution of interruption pointer I: high-speed counter interruption, external interruption, time
interruption and communication interruption for receiving specific words.
f) Among the following 6 interruption No., (I001, I010), (I101, I020), (I201, I030), (I301, I040), (I401, I050), (I501,
I060), the program allows the user to use only one of the two numbers in a pair. If the user uses the two
numbers in the pair, grammar check errors may occur when the program is written into PLC.
3. No. of interruption pointer I in EH/EH2/SV:
a) External interruptions: (I00□, X0), (I10□, X1), (I20□, X2), (I30□, X3), (I40□, X4), (I50□, X5) 6 points. (□ = 0
designates interruption in falling-edge, □ = 1 designates interruption in rising-edge)
b) Time interruptions: I6□□, I7□□, 2 points. (□□ = 1~99ms, time base = 1ms)
I8□□ 1 point. (□□ = 1 ~ 99ms, time base = 0.1ms)
c) High-speed counter interruptions: I010, I020, I030, I040, 1050, 1060 6 points. (used with API 53 DHSCS
instruction to generate interruption signals)
d) When pulse output interruptions I110, I120 (triggered when pulse output is finished), I130, I140 (triggered when
the first pulse output starts) are executed, the currently executed program is interrupted and jumps to the
designated interruption subroutine.
e) Communication interruption: I150, I160, I170
f) Frequency measurement card interruption: I180
g) The order for execution of interruption pointer I: external interruption, time interruption, high-speed counter
interruption, pulse interruption, communication interruption and frequency measurement card interruption.
4. “Disable interruption” flags in ES/EX/SS:
Flag Function
M1050 Disable external interruption I001
M1056 Disable time interruption I6□□
5. “Disable interruption” flags in SA/SX/SC:
Flag Function


M1059 Disable high-speed counter interruption I010 ~ I060
6. “Disable interruption” flags in EH/EH2/SV:
Flag Function
M1280 Disable external interruption I00□
M1289 Disable high-speed counter interruption I010
M1295 Disable pulse output interruption I110
M1299 Disable communication interruption I150
M1302 Disable frequency measurement card interruption I180
M1340 Generate interruption I110 after CH0 pulse is sent
M1341 Generate interruption I120 after CH1 pulse is sent
M1342 Generate interruption I130 when CH0 pulse is being sent
M1343 Generate interruption I140 when CH1 pulse is being sent


Controllers
06 FEND The End of The Main Program (First End) ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

N/A No contact to drive the instruction is required. FEND: 1 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Explanations:
1. This instruction denotes the end of the main program. It has the same function as that of END instruction when
being executed by PLC.
2. CALL must be written after FEND instruction and add SRET instruction in the end of its subroutine. Interruption
program has to be written after FEND instruction and IRET must be added in the end of the service program.
3. If several FEND instructions are in use, place the subroutine and interruption service programs between the
final FEND and END instruction.
4. After CALL instruction is executed, executing FEND before SRET will result in errors in the program.
5. After FOR instruction is executed, executing FEND before NEXT will result in errors in the program.
CJ Instruction Program Flow:
The program flow The program flow when X=On

when X0=off, 0 and the program jumps to P0.
X1=off
main
program
X0
CJ P0
X1
CALL P63
main
program
main
P0 program
CALL instruction
P63
subroutine
I301 Interruption
subroutine

CALL Instruction Program Flow:
The program flow

when X0=off, 0 The program flow
X1=off when X0=Off,
main
X1=On.
program
X0
CJ P0
X1
CALL P63
main
program
main
P0 program
CALL instruction
P63
subroutine
Interruption
I301
subroutine


Controllers
07 WDT P Watchdog Timer Refresh ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

N/A WDT, WDTP: 1 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Explanations:
1. No operand.
2. The watchdog timer in DVP series PLCs is used for monitoring the operation of the PLC system.
3. WDT instruction can be used to reset Watch Dog Timer. If the PLC scan time (from step 0 to END or when
FEND instruction is executed) exceeds 200ms, PLC ERROR LED will flash. The user will have to turn off PLC
and back On again. PLC will determine RUN/STOP status by RUN/STOP switch. If there is no RUN/STOP
switch, PLC will return to STOP status automatically.
4. When to use WDT:
a) When errors occur in the PLC system.
b) When the executing time of the program is too long, resulting in the scan time being larger than the content in
D1000, the user can improve the problem by the following two methods.
Using WDT instruction STEP0 END(FEND)
WDT
t1 t2
Using the set value in D1000 (default value: 200ms) to change the time for watchdog.
Program Example:
Assume the scan time of the program is 300ms, divide the program into two parts and place WDT instruction in the
middle of the two parts, making scan time of the first half and second half of the program being less than 200ms.
300ms program
END
Dividing the program to two parts
so that both parts' scan time are
less than 200ms.
150ms program
X0
WDT Watchdog timer reset
150ms program
END


Controllers
08 FOR Start of a FOR-NEXT Loop ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F FOR: 3 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: The number of repeated nested loops
Explanations:
1. No contact to drive the instruction is required.

Controllers
09 NEXT End of a FOR-NEXT Loop ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

N/A NEXT: 1 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Explanations:
2. FOR instruction indicates FOR ~ NEXT loops executing back and forth N times before escaping for the next
execution.
3. N = K1 ~ K32,767. N is regarded as K1 when N ≤ 1.
4. When FOR~NEXT loops are not executed, the user can use the CJ instruction to escape the loops.
5. Error will occur when
a) NEXT instruction is before FOR instruction.
b) FOR instruction exists but NEXT instruction does not exist.
c) There is NEXT instruction after FEND or END instruction.
d) The number of instructions between FOR ~ NEXT differs.
6. FOR~NEXT loops can be nested for maximum five levels. Be careful that if there are too many loops, the
increased PLC scan time may cause timeout of watchdog timer and error. Users can use WDT instruction to
modify this problem.
Program Example 1:
After program A has been executed for 3 times, it will resume its execution after NEXT instruction. Program B will be
executed for 4 times whenever program A is executed once. Therefore, program B will be executed 3 × 4 = 12 times
in total.

FOR K3
FOR K4
B A
NEXT
NEXT
Program Example 2:
When X7 = Off, PLC will execute the program between FOR ~ NEXT. When X7 = On, CJ instruction jumps to P6 and
avoids executing the programs between FOR ~ NEXT.
X7
CJ P6
M0
MOV K0 D0
FOR K3
M0
MOV D0 D1
INC D0
MEXT
X10
P6 Y10

Program Example 3:
When the programs between FOR ~ NEXT are not to be executed, the user can adopt CJ instruction for a jumping.
When the most inner FOR ~ NEXT loop is in the status of X1 = On, CJ instruction executes jumping to P0 and skips
the execution on P0.
X0
TMR T0 K10
FOR K4X100
X0
INC D0
FOR K2
X0
INC D1
FOR K3
X0
INC D2
FOR K4
X0
WDT
INC D3
X1
CJ P0
FOR K5
X0
INC D4
NEXT
P0 NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
END


Controllers
10 D CMP P Compare ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F CMP, CMPP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DCMP, DCMPP: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Comparison Value 1 S2: Comparison Value 2 D: Comparison result
Explanations:
1. If S1 and S2 are used in device F, only 16-bit instruction is applicable.
2. Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices.
4. The contents in S1 and S2 are compared and the result will be stored in D.
5. The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed binary values. When b15
= 1 in 16-bit instruction or b31 = 1 in 32-bit instruction, the comparison will regard the value as negative binary
values.
Program Example:
1. Designate device Y0, and operand D automatically occupies Y0, Y1, and Y2.
2. When X10 = On, CMP instruction will be executed and one of Y0, Y1, and Y2 will be On. When X10 = Off, CMP
instruction will not be executed and Y0, Y1, and Y2 remain their status before X10 = Off.
3. If the user need to obtain a comparison result with ≥ ≤, and ≠, make a series parallel connection between Y0 ~
Y2.
X10
CMP K10 D10 Y0
Y0
If K10>D10, Y0 = On
Y1
If K10=D10, Y1 = On
Y2
If K10<D10, Y2= On
4. To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction.
X10 X10
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2
RST M1
RST M2


Controllers
11 D ZCP P Zone Compare ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ZCP, ZCPP: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DZCP, DZCPP: 17 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
S * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Lower bound of zone comparison S2: Upper bound of zone comparison S: Comparison value
D: Comparison result
Explanations:
1. If S1, S2 and S are used in device F, only 16-bit instruction is applicable.
2. The content in S1 should be smaller than the content in S2.
3. Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices.
5. S is compared with its S1, S2 and the result is stored in D.
6. When S1 > S2, the instruction performs comparison by using S1 as the lower/upper bound.
7. The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed binary values. When b15
= 1 in 16-bit instruction or b31 = 1 in 32-bit instruction, the comparison will regard the value as negative binary
values.
Program Example:
1. Designate device M0, and operand D automatically occupies M0, M1 and M2.
2. When X0 = On, ZCP instruction will be executed and one of M0, M1, and M2 will be On. When X0 = Off, ZCP
instruction will not be executed and M0, M1, and M2 remain their status before X0 = Off.
X0
ZCP K10 K100 C10 M0
M0
If C10 < K10, M0 = On
M1
If K10 <
= C10 <
= K100, M1 = On
M2
If C10 > K100, M2 = On
3. To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction.

X0 X0
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2
RST M1
RST M2


Controllers
12 D MOV P Move ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MOV, MOVP: 5 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DMOV, DMOVP: 9 steps
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source of data D: Destination of data
Explanations:
1. If S and D are used in device F, only 16-bit instruction is applicable.
3. When this instruction is executed, the content of S will be moved directly to D. When this instruction is not
executed, the content of D remains unchanged.
4. If the operation result refers to a 32-bit output, (i.e. application instruction MUL and so on), and the user needs
to move the present value in the 32-bit high-speed counter, DMOV instruction has to be adopted.
Program Example:
1. MOV instruction has to be adopted in the moving of 16-bit data.
a) When X0 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X0 = On, the value K10 will be moved to D10 data
register.
b) When X1 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X1 = On, the present value T0 will be moved to
D10 data register.
2. DMOV instruction has to be adopted in the moving of 32-bit data.
When X2 = Off, the content in (D31, D30) and (D41, D40) will remain unchanged. If X2 = On, the present value
of (D21, D20) will be sent to (D31, D30) data register. Meanwhile, the present value of C235 will be moved to
(D41, D40) data register.
X0
MOV K10 D0
X1
MOV T0 D10
X2
DMOV D20 D30
DMOV C235 D40


Controllers
13 SMOV P Shift Move ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SMOV, SMOVP: 11 steps
S * * * * * * * * *
m1 * *
m2 * *
D * * * * * * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source of data m1: Start digit to be moved of the source data m2: Number of digits (nibbles) to be moved of the
source data D: Destination device n: Start digit of the destination position for the moved digits
Explanations:
1. This instruction is able to re-allocate or combine data. When the instruction is executed, m2 digits of contents
starting from digit m1 (from high digit to low digit) of S will be sent to m2 digits starting from digit n (from high digit
to low digit) of D.
2. Range: m1 = 1 ~ 4; m2 = 1 ~ m1; n = m2 ~ 4
4. M1168 is designated by SMOV working mode. When M1168 = On, the program is in BIN mode. When M1168 =
Off, the program is in BCD mode.
Program Example 1:
1. When M1168 = Off (in BCD mode) and X0 = On, the 4th (thousand) and 3rd (hundred) digit of the decimal value
in D10 start to move to the 3rd (hundred) and 2nd (ten) digit of the decimal value in D20. 103 and 100 of D20
remain unchanged after this instruction is executed.
2. When the BCD value exceeds the range of 0 ~ 9,999, PLC will determine an operation error and will not execute
the instruction. M1067, M1068 = On and D1067 records the error code OE18 (hex).
M1001
M1168
X0
SMOV D10 K4 K2 D20 K3
D10(BIN 16 bits)
Auto conversion
3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10 D10(BCD 4 digits)
Unchanged Shift move
Unchanged
2
10
3
10 10
1
10
0
D20(BCD 4 digits)
Auto conversion
D20(BIN 16 bits)
Before the execution, assume D10 = K1234 and D20 = K5678. After the execution, D10 will remain unchanged and
D20 will become K5128.

Program Example 2:
When M1168 = On (in BIN mode) and SMOV instruction is in use, D10 and D20 will not be converted in BCD format
but be moved in BIN format (4 digits as a unit).
M1000
M1168
X0
SMOV D10 K4 K2 D20 K3
Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1

D10(BIN 16 bits)
Moving digits
D20(BIN 16 bits)
Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1
Unchanged Unchanged
Before the execution, assume D10 = H1234 and D20 = H5678. After the execution, D10 will remain unchanged and
D20 will become H5128.
Program Example 3:
1. This instruction can be used to combine the DIP switches connected to the input terminals with interrupted No.
2. Move the 2nd right digit of the DIP switch to the 2nd right digit of D2, and the 1st left digit of the DIP switch to the
1st right digit of D1.
3. Use SMOV instruction to move the 1st digit of D1 to the 3rd digit of D2 and combine the two DIP switches into
one.
2 1 0
10 10 10
6 4 2
8 8
8
X13~X10 X27~X20
PLC
M1001
M1168
M1000
(X20~X27)BCD
BIN K2X20 D2 2 digits D2(BIN)
(X10~X13)BCD
BIN K1X10 D1 1 digit D1(BIN)
SMOV D1 K1 K1 D2 K3


Controllers
14 D CML P Compliment ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F CML, CMLP: 5 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DCML, DCMLP: 9 steps
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source of data D: Destination device
Explanations:
3. This instruction can be used for phase-reversed output.
4. Reverse the phase (0→1, 1→0) of all the contents in S and send the contents to D. Given that the content is a
constant K, K will be automatically converted into a BIN value.
Program Example 1:
1. When X10 = On, b0 ~ b3 in D1 will be phase-reversed and send to Y0 ~ Y3.
X10
CML D1 K1Y0
b 15 b3 b2 b1 b0
D1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Symbol bit (0=positive, 1=negative)
0 1 0 1
No data Sending the phase-reversed data
Program Example 2:
The loop below can also adopt CML instruction (see right below).
X000
M0
X001
M1
X002
M2
X003
M3
M1000
CML K1X0 K1M0
X000 Normally on contact
M0
X001
M1
X002
M2
X003
M3


Controllers
15 BMOV P Block Move ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F BMOV, BMOVP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start of source devices D: Start of destination devices n: Number of data to be moved
Explanations:
1. Range of n: 1 ~ 512
3. The contents in n registers starting from the device designated by S will be moved to n registers starting from
the device designated by D. If n exceeds the actual number of available source devices, only the devices that
fall within the valid range will be used.
Program Example 1:
When X10 = On, the contents in registers D0 ~ D3 will be moved to the 4 registers D20 ~ D23.
X10
D20 K4 D0 D20
D1 D21
n=4
D2 D22
D3 D23
Program Example 2:
1. Assume the bit devices KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS are designated for moving, the number of digits of S and D has
to be the same, i.e. their n has to be the same.
2. ES/EX/SS do not support the use of KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS and E, F index register modification.
M1000
K1M0 K1Y0 K3 M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
n=3
M6
M7
M8 Y10
M9 Y11
M10 Y12
M11 Y13

Program Example 3:
To avoid coincidence of the device numbers to be moved designated by the two operands and cause confusion,
please be aware of the arrangement on the designated device numbers.
1. When S > D, the instruction is processed following the order 1→2→3
X10 1
BMOV D20 D19 K3 D20 D19
2
D21 D20
3
D22 D21
2. In EH/EH2/SV, when S < D, the instruction is processed following the order 1→2→3
X11 3
BMOV D10 D11 K3 D10 D11
2
D11
1
D12 D13
3. In ESEX/SS/SA/SX/SC, when S < D, avoid the number difference of “1” and the instruction is processed
following the order 3→2→1. If the devices have the number difference of “1”, the contents in D11 ~ D13 will all
be the content in D10.
X11 3
BMOV D10 D11 K3 D10 D11
2
D11
1
D12 D13


Controllers
16 D FMOV P Fill Move ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F FMOV, FMOVP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DFMOV, DFMOVP: 13 steps
D * * * * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source of data D: Destination of data n: Number of data to be moved
Explanations:
1. If S is used in device F, only 16-bit instruction is applicable.
2. Range of n: 1~ 512 (16-bit instruction); 1 ~ 256 (32-bit instruction).
4. The contents in n registers starting from the device designated by S will be moved to n registers starting from
the device designated by D. If n exceeds the actual number of available source devices, only the devices that
fall within the valid range will be used.
5. ES/EX/SS do not support the use of KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS and E, F index register modification.
Program Example:
When X10 = On, K10 will be moved to the 5 consecutive registers starting from D10.
X10
FMOV K10 D10 K5
K10 K10 D10
K10 D11
K10 D12 n=5
K10 D13
K10 D14


Controllers
17 D XCH P Exchange ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F XCH, XCHP: 5 steps
D1 * * * * * * * * DXCH, DXCHP: 9 steps
D2 * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
D1: Data to be exchanged 1 D2: Data to be exchanged 2
Explanations:
1. If D1 and D2 are used in device F, only 16-bit instruction is applicable.
3. The contents in the devices designated by D1 and D2 will exchange.
4. Flag: M1303 (designated by XCH working mode).
Program Example 1:
When X0 = Off→On, the contents in D20 and D40 exchange with each other.
X0 Before After
XCHP D20 D40 execution execution
D20 120 40 D20
D40 40 120 D40
Program Example 2:
When X0 = Off → On, the contents in D100 and D200 exchange with each other.
X0 Before After
DXCHP D100 D200 execution execution
D100 D100
D101 20 40 D101
D200 D200
D201 40 20 D201
Remarks:
1. ES/EX/SS do not support M1303.
2. As a 16-bit instruction, when the devices designated by D1 and D2 are the same and M1303 = On, the upper and
lower 8 bits of the designated devices exchange with each other.
3. As a 32-bit instruction, when the devices designated by D1 and D2 are the same and M1303 = On, the upper and
lower 16 bits in the individual designated device exchange with each other.
4. When X0 = On and M1303 = On, the 16-bit contents in D100 and those in D101 will exchange with each other.

X0 Before After
M1303 execution execution
D100L 9 8 D100L
DXCHP D100 D100
D100H 20 40 D100H
D101L 8 9 D101L
D101H 40 20 D101H


Controllers
18 D BCD P Binary Coded Decimal ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F BCD, BCDP: 5 steps
S * * * * * * * * * DBCD, DBCDP: 9 steps
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source of data D: Conversion result
Explanations:
3. Flags: M1067 (operation error); M1068 (operation error); D1067 (error code)
4. The content in S (BIN value) is converted into BCD value and stored in D.
5. As a 16-bit (32-bit) instruction, when the conversion result exceeds the range of 0 ~ 9,999 (0 ~ 99,999,999), and
M1067, M1068 = On, D1067 will record the error code 0E18 (hex).
6. The four arithmetic operations and applications in PLC and the execution of INC and DEC instructions are
performed in BIN format. Therefore, if the user needs to see the decimal value display, simply use this
instruction to convert the BIN value into BCD value.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, the binary value of D10 will be converted into BCD value, and the 1s digit of the conversion
result will be stored in K1Y0 (Y0 ~ Y3, the 4 bit devices).
X0
BCD D10 K1Y0
2. When D10 = 001E (hex) = 0030 (decimal), the execution result will be: Y0 ~ Y3 = 0000(BIN).


Controllers
19 D BIN P Binary ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F BIN, BINP: 5 steps
S * * * * * * * * * DBIN, DBINP: 9 steps
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source of data D: Conversion result
Explanations:
3. Flags: M1067 (operation error); M1068 (operation error); D1067 (error code)
4. The content in S (BCD value) is converted into BIN value and stored in D.
5. Valid range of S : BCD (0 ~ 9,999), DBCD (0 ~ 99,999,999)
6. Provided the content in S is not a BCD value (in hex and any one of its digits does not fall in the range of 0 ~ 9),
an operation error will occur. M1067, M1068 = On and D1067 records the error code 0E18 (hex).
7. Constant K and H will automatically be converted into BIN format. Thus, they do not need to adopt this
instruction.
Program Example:
When X0 = On, the BCD value of K1M0 will be converted to BIN value and stored in D10.
X0
BIN K1M0 D10
Remarks:
Explanations on BCD and BIN instructions:
1. When PLC needs to read an external DIP switch in BCD format, BIN instruction has to be first adopted to
convert the read data into BIN value and store the data in PLC.
2. When PLC needs to display its stored data by a 7-segment display in BCD format, BCD instruction has to be
first adopted to convert the data into BCD value and send the data to the 7-segment display.
3. When X0 = On, the BCD value of K4X0 is converted into BIN value and sent it to D100. The BIN value of D100
will then be converted into BCD value and sent to K4Y20.
X0
BIN K4X0 D100
BCD D100 K4Y20

3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10
6 6 4 2 4-digit DIP switch in BCD format
8 8 8 8
X17 X0
4-digit BCD value
Using BIN instruction to store

the BIN value into D100
Using BCD instruction to convert the

content in D100 into a 4-digit BCD value.
Y37 Y20
4-digit 7-segment display in BCD format


Controllers
20 D ADD P Addition ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ADD, ADDP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DADD, DADDP: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Summand S2: Addend D: Sum
Explanations:
1. If S1, S2 and D are used in device F, only 16-bit instruction is applicable.
3. Flags: M1020 (zero flag); M1021 (borrow flag); M1022 (carry flag)
4. This instruction adds S1 and S2 in BIN format and store the result in D.
5. The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic addition, e.g. 3 + (-9) = -6.
6. Flag changes in binary addition
In 16-bit BIN addition,
a) If the operation result ＝ 0, zero flag M1020 = On.

b) If the operation result ＜ -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On.
c) If the operation result ＞ 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On.
In 32-bit BIN addition,

b) If the operation result ＜ -2,147,483,648, borrow flag M1021 = On.
c) If the operation result ＞ 2,147,483,647, carry flag M1022 = On.
Program Example 1:
In 16-bit BIN addition:
When X0 = On, the content in D0 will plus the content in D10 and the sum will be stored in D20.
X0
ADD D0 D10 D20
Program Example 2:
In 32-bit BIN addition:
When X0 = On, the content in (D31, D30) will plus the content in (D41, D40) and the sum will be stored in (D51, D50).
D30, D40 and D50 are low 16-bit data; D31, D41 and D51 are high 16-bit data.
X10
DADD D30 D40 D50
(D31, D30) + (D41, D40) = (D51, D50)

Remarks:
Flags and the positive/negative sign of the values:
16-bit : Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag
- +
-2、-1、0、-32,768 -1、0、1 32,767、0、1、2
The highest bit of The highest bit of

Borrow flag Carry flag
the data = 1 (negative) the data = 0 (positive)
32-bit : Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag
- +
-2、-1、0、-2,147,483,648 -1、0、1 2,147,483,647、0、1、2
The highest bit of The highest bit of

Borrow flag Carry flag
the data = 1 (negative) the data = 0 (positive)


Controllers
21 D SUB P Subtraction ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SUB, SUBP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DSUB, DSUBP: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Minuend S2: Subtrahend D: Remainder
Explanations:
4. This instruction subtracts S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D.
5. The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic subtraction.
6. Flag changes in binary subtraction
In 16-bit instruction:
b) If the operation result ＜ –32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On.
c) If the operation result ＞ 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On.
In 32-bit instruction:
b) If the operation result ＜ –2,147,483,648, borrow flag M1021 = On.
c) If the operation result ＞ 2,147,483,647, carry flag M1022 = On.
7. For flag operations of SUB instruction and the positive/negative sign of the value, see the explanations in ADD
instruction on the previous page.
Program Example 1:
In 16-bit BIN subtraction:
When X0 = On, the content in D0 will minus the content in D10 and the remainder will be stored in D20.
X0
SUB D0 D10 D20
Program Example 2:
In 32-bit BIN subtraction:
When X10 = On, the content in (D31, D30) will minus the content in (D41, D40) and the remainder will be stored in
(D51, D50). D30, D40 and D50 are low 16-bit data; D31, D41 and D51 are high 16-bit data.
X10
DSUB D30 D40 D50
(D31, D30) − (D41, D40) = (D51, D50)


Controllers
22 D MUL P Multiplication ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MUL, DMULP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DMUL, DMULP: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Multiplicand S2: Multiplicator D: Product
Explanations:
2. If D is used in device E, only 16-bit instruction is applicable.
3. In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices.
6. This instruction multiplies S1 by S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D. Be careful with the positive/negative
signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit and 32-bit operations.
7. In 16-bit BIN multiplication,
+1
b15................ b00 b15................ b00 b31............ b16 b15............. b00

X =
b15 is a symbol bit b15 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1)
Symbol bit = 0 refers to a positive value.

Symbol bit = 1 refers to a negative value.
When D serves as a bit device, it can designate K1 ~ K4 and construct a 16-bit result, occupying consecutive 2
groups of 16-bit data. ES/EX/SS only stores low 16-bit data.
8. 32-bit BIN multiplication,
+1 +1 +3 +2 +1
b31.. b16 b15.. b00 b31.. b16 b15.. b00 b63. b48 b47. b32 b31. b16 b15. b00
X =
b31 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit b63 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+3 )
Symbol bit = 0 refers to a positive value.

Symbol bit = 1 refers to a negative value.
groups of 32-bit data.
Program Example:
The 16-bit D0 is multiplied by the 16-bit D10 and brings forth a 32-bit product. The higher 16 bits are stored in D21

and the lower 16-bit are stored in D20. On/Off of the most left bit indicates the positive/negative status of the result
value.
X0
MUL D0 D10 D20
MUL D0 D10 K8M0


Controllers
23 D DIV P Division ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DIV, DIVP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * DDIV, DDIVP: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Dividend S2: Divisor D: Quotient and remainder
Explanations:
2. If D is used in device E, only 16-bit instruction is applicable.
6. This instruction divides S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D. Be careful with the positive/negative
signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit and 32-bit operations.
7. This instruction will not be executed when the divisor is 0. M1067 and M1068 will be On and D1067 records the
error code 0E19 (hex).
8. In 16-bit BIN division,
Quotient Remainder
+1
/ =
groups of 16-bit data and bringing forth the quotient and remainder. ES/EX/SS is able to bring forth only quotient
without the remainder.
9. In 32-bit BIN division,
Quotient Remainder
+1 +1 +1 +3 +2
/ =
groups of 32-bit data and bringing forth the quotient and remainder.
Program Example:
When X0 = On, D0 will be divided by D10 and the quotient will be stored in D20 and remainder in D21. On/Off of the
highest bit indicates the positive/negative status of the result value.

X0
DIV D0 D10 D20
DIV D0 D10 K4Y0


Controllers
24 D INC P Increment ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F INC, INCP: 3 steps
D * * * * * * * * DINC, DINCP: 5 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
D: Destination device
Explanations:
1. If D is used in device F, only 16-bit instruction is applicable.
3. If the instruction is not a pulse execution one, the content in the designated device D will plus “1” in every scan
period whenever the instruction is executed.
4. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (INCP, DINCP).
5. In 16-bit operation, 32,767 pluses 1 and obtains -32,768. In 32-bit operation, 2,147,483,647 pluses 1 and
obtains -2,147,483,648.
6. The operation results will not affect M1020 ~ M1022.
Program Example:
When X0 = Off→On, the content in D0 pluses 1 automatically.
X0
INCP D0


Controllers
25 D DEC P Decrement ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DEC, DECP: 3 steps
D * * * * * * * * DDEC, DDECP: 5 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
3. If the instruction is not a pulse execution one, the content in the designated device D will minus “1” in every scan
period whenever the instruction is executed.
4. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (DECP, DDECP).
5. In 16-bit operation, -32,768 minuses 1 and obtains 32,767. In 32-bit operation, -2,147,483,648 minuses 1 and
obtains 2,147,483,647.
6. The operation results will not affect M1020 ~ M1022.
Program Example:
When X0 = Off→On, the content in D0 minuses 1 automatically.
X0
DECP D0


Controllers
W
26 AND P Logical Word AND ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
D
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F WAND, WANDP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DAND, DANDP: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Source data device 1 S2: Source data device 2 D: Operation result
Explanations:
3. This instruction conducts logical AND operation of S1 and S2 and stores the result in D.
4. Operation rule: The corresponding bit of the operation result in D will be “0” if any of the bits in S1 or S2 is “0”.
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, the 16-bit D0 and D2 will perform WAND, logical AND operation, and the result will be stored in D4.
X0
WAND D0 D2 D4
b15 b0
D0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Before
WAND
execution
D2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
After
execution D4 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Program Example 2:
When X1 = On, the 32-bit (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) will perform DAND, logical AND operation, and the result will be
stored in (D41, D40).
X1
DAND D10 D20 D40
b31 b15 b0
D11 D10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Before
execution DAND
D21 D20 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
After
execution D41 D40 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0


Controllers
W
27 OR P Logical Word OR ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
D
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F WOR, WORP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DOR, DORP: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
3. This instruction conducts logical OR operation of S1 and S2 and stores the result in D.
4. Operation rule: The corresponding bit of the operation result in D will be “1” if any of the bits in S1 or S2 is “1”.
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, the 16-bit D0 and D2 will perform WOR, logical OR operation, and the result will be stored in D4.
X0
WOR D0 D2 D4
b15 b0
D0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before
WOR
execution
D2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After
execution D4 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
Program Example 2:
When X1 = On, the 32-bit (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) will perform DOR, logical OR operation, and the result will be
X1
DOR D10 D20 D40
b31 b15 b0
D11 D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before
DOR
execution
D21 D20 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After
execution D41 D40 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1


Controllers
W
28 XOR P Logical Exclusive OR ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
D
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F WXOR, WXORP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DXOR, DXORP: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
3. This instruction conducts logical XOR operation of S1 and S2 and stores the result in D.
4. Operation rule: If the bits in S1 and S2 are the same, the corresponding bit of the operation result in D will be “0”;
if the bits in S1 and S2 are different, the corresponding bit of the operation result in D will be “1”.
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, the 16-bit D0 and D2 will perform WXOR, logical XOR operation, and the result will be stored in D4.
X0
WXOR D0 D2 D4
b15 b0
D0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before
WOR
execution
D2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After
execution D4 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Program Example 2:
When X1 = On, the 32-bit (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) will perform DXOR, logical XOR operation, and the result will be
X1
DXOR D10 D20 D40
b31 b15 b0
D11 D10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Before
DXOR
execution
D21 D20 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
After
D41 D40 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
execution


Controllers
29 D NEG P 2’s Complement (Negative) ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F NEG, NEGP: 3 steps
D * * * * * * * * DNEG, DNEGP: 5 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
D: Device to store 2’s complement
Explanations:
3. This instruction converts a negative BIN value into an absolute value.
4. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (NEGP, DNEGP).
Program Example 1:
When X0 = Off→On, the phase of every bit of the content in D10 will be reversed (0→1, 1→0) and pluses 1. The
result will then be stored in D10.
X0
NEGP D10
Program Example 2:
Obtaining the absolute value of a negative value:
a) When the 15th bit of D0 is “1”, M0 = On. (D0 is a negative value).
b) When M0 = Off→On, NEG instruction will obtain 2’s complement of D0 and further its absolute value.
M1000
BON D0 M0 K15
Normal ON contact
M0
NEGP D0
Program Example 3:
Obtaining the absolute value by the remainder of the subtraction. When X0 = On,
a) If D0 > D2, M0 = On.
b) If D0 = D2, M1 = On.
c) If D0 < D2, M2 = On.
d) D4 is then able to remain positive.

X0
CMP D0 D2 M0
M0
SUB D0 D2 D4
M1
M2
SUB D2 D0 D4
Remarks:
Negative value and its absolute value
a) The sign of a value is indicated by the highest (most left) bit in the register. 0 indicates that the value is a positive
one and 1 indicates that the value is a negative one.
b) NEG instruction is able to convert a negative value into its absolute value.
(D0=2)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
(D0=1)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
(D0=0)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(D0=-1) (D0)+1=1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
(D0=-2) (D0)+1=2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
(D0=-3) (D0)+1=3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
(D0=-4) (D0)+1=4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
(D0=-5) (D0)+1=5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
(D0=-32,765) (D0)+1=32,765
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
(D0=-32,766) (D0)+1=32,766
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
(D0=-32,767) (D0)+1=32,767
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(D0=-32,768) (D0)+1=-32,768
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Max. absolute value is 32,767


Controllers
30 D ROR P Rotation Right ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ROR, RORP: 5 steps
D * * * * * * * * DROR, DRORP: 9 steps
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
D: Device to be rotated n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation
Explanations:
2. If D is designated as KnY, KnM, and KnS, only K4 (16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) are valid.
3. Range of n: K1 ~ K16 (16-bit); K1 ~ K32 (32-bit)
5. Flag: M1022 (carry flag)
6. This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the right for n bits.
7. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (RORP, DRORP).
Program Example:
When X0 = Off→On, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to the right, as shown in the figure below. The bit
marked with ※ will be sent to carry flag M1022.
X0
RORP D10 K4
Rotate to the right

h igher bit lower bit
D10 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 Carry
flag
16 bits
After one rotation
to the right
h igher bit lower bit
D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Carry
flag


Controllers
31 D ROL P Rotation Left ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ROL, ROLP: 5 steps
D * * * * * * * * DROL, DROLP: 9 steps
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
6. This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the left for n bits.
7. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (ROLP, DROLP).
Program Example:
When X0 = Off→On, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to the left, as shown in the figure below. The bit
marked with ※ will be sent to carry flag M1022.
X0
D10 K4
Rotate to the left

higher bit lower bit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D10
Carry
flag 16 bits
After one rotation
to the left
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D10
Carry
flag


Controllers
32 D RCR P Rotation Right with Carry ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F RCR, RCRP: 5 steps
D * * * * * * * * DRCR, DRCRP: 9 steps
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
6. This instruction rotates the device content designated by D together with carry flag M1022 to the right for n bits.
7. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (RCRP, DRCRP).
Program Example:
When X0 = Off→On, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 together with carry flag M1022 (total 17 bits) will rotate to
the right, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry flag M1022.
X0
D10 K4
Rotate to the right

D10 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
Carry
flag
16 bits
After one rotation
higher bit to the right lower bit
D10 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
Carry
flag


Controllers
33 D RCL P Rotation Left with Carry ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F RCL, RCLP: 5 steps
D * * * * * * * * DRCL, DRCLP: 9 steps
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
6. This instruction rotates the device content designated by D together with carry flag M1022 to the left for n bits.
7. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (RCLP, DRCLP).
Program Example :
When X0 = Off→On, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 together with carry flag M1022 (total 17 bits) will rotate to
the left, as shown in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry flag M1022.
X0
RCLP D10 K4
Rotate to the left

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D10
Carry
flag
16 bits
After one rotation
to the left
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 D10
Carry
flag


Controllers
34 SFTR P Bit Shift Right ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SFTR, SFTRP: 9 steps
S * * * *
D * * *
n1 * *
n2 * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start No. of the shifted device D: Start No. of the device to be shifted n1: Length of data to be shifted
n2: Number of bits to be shifted in 1 shift
Explanations:
1. Range of n1: 1~ 1,024
2. Range of n2: 1 ~ n1
3. In ES/EX/SS, 1 ≤ n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 512
4. ES/EX/SS series MPU does not support E, F index register modification.
6. This instruction shifts the bit device of n1 bits (desired length for shifted register) starting from D to the right for n2
bits. S is shifted into D for n2 bits to supplement empty bits.
7. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (SFTRP).
Program Example:
1. When X0 = Off→On, M0 ~M15 will form 16 bits and shifts to the right (4 bits as a group).
2. The figure below illustrates the right shift of the bits in one scan.
n M3 ~ M0 → carry
o M7 ~ M4 → M3 ~ M0
p M11 ~ M8 → M7 ~ M4
q M15 ~ M12 → M11 ~ M8
r X3 ~ X0 → M15 ~ M12 completed

X0
SFTR X0 M0 K16 K4
4 bits as a group shifting to the right

X3 X2 X1 X0
5
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 carry
4 3 2 1


Controllers
35 SFTL P Bit Shift Left ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SFTL, SFTLP: 9 steps
S * * * *
D * * *
n1 * *
n2 * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
n2: Number of bits to be shifted in 1 shift
Explanations:
1. Range of n1: 1~ 1,024
3. In ES/EX/SS, 1 ≤ n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 512
6. This instruction shifts the bit device of n1 bits (desired length for shifted register) starting from D to the left for n2
bits. S is shifted into D for n2 bits to supplement empty bits.
7. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (SFTLP).
Program Example:
1. When X0 = Off→On, M0 ~M15 will form 16 bits and shifts to the left (4 bits as a group).
2. The figure below illustrates the left shift of the bits in one scan.
n M15 ~ M12 → carry
o M11 ~ M8 → M15 ~ M12
p M7 ~ M4 → M11 ~ M8
q M3 ~ M0 → M7 ~ M4
r X3 ~ X0 → M3 ~ M0 completed
X0
SFTR X0 M0 K16 K4
4 bits as a group shifting to the left

X3 X2 X1 X0
5
carry M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
1 2 3 4


Controllers
36 WSFR P Word Shift Left ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F WSFR, WSFRP: 9 steps
S * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n1 * *
n2 * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
ES EX SS SA SX SC EH ES EX SS SA SX SC EH ES EX SS SA SX SC EH
Operands:
n2: Number of words to be shifted in 1 shift
Explanations:
1. The type of devices designated by S and D has to be the same, e.g. KnX, KnY, KnM, and KnS as a category and
T, C, and D as another category.
2. Provided the devices designated by S and D belong to Kn type, the number of digits of Kn has to be the same.
3. Range of n1: 1~ 512
6. This instruction shifts the stack data of n1 words starting from D to the right for n2 words. S is shifted into D for n2
words to supplement empty words.
7. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (WSFRP)
Program Example 1:
1. When X0 = Off→On, the 16 register stack data composed of D20 ~ D35 will shift to the right for 4 registers.
2. The figure below illustrates the right shift of the words in one scan.
n D23 ~ D20 → carry
o D27 ~ D24 → D23 ~ D20
p D31 ~ D28 → D27 ~ D24
q D35 ~ D32 → D31 ~ D28
r D13 ~ D10 → D35 ~ D32 completed
X0
WSFRP D10 D20 K16 K4
Right-shifting for 4 registers

D13 D12 D11 D10
5
D35 D34 D33 D32 D31 D30 D29 D28 D27 D26 D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20 Carry
4 3 2 1

Program Example 2:
1. When X0 = Off→On, the bit register stack data composed of Y10 ~ Y27 will shift to the right for 2 digits.
2. The figure below illustrates the right shift of the words in one scan.
n Y17 ~ Y10 → carry
o Y27 ~ Y20 → Y17 ~ Y10
p X27 ~ X20 → Y27 ~ Y20 completed

When using Kn type device, please designate the same number of digits.
X0
WSFRP K1X20 K1Y10 K4 K2
Right-shifting for 2 digits

X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20
3
Y27 Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 Carry
2 1


Controllers
37 WSFL P Word Shift Left ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F WSFL, WSFLP: 9 steps
S * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n1 * *
n2 * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
n2: Number of words to be shifted in 1 shift
Explanations:
1. The type of devices designated by S and D has to be the same, e.g. KnX, KnY, KnM, and KnS as a category and
T, C, and D as another category.
2. Provided the devices designated by S and D belong to Kn type, the number of digits of Kn has to be the same.
3. Range of n1: 1~ 512
6. This instruction shifts the stack data of n1 words starting from D to the left for n2 words. S is shifted into D for n2
words to supplement empty words.
7. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (WSFLP)
Program Example:
1. When X0 = Off→On, the 16 register stack data composed of D20 ~ D35 will shift to the left for 4 registers.
2. The figure below illustrates the left shift of the words in one scan.
n D35 ~ D32 → carry
o D31 ~ D28 → D35 ~ D32
p D27 ~ D24 → D31 ~ D28
q D23 ~ D20 → D27 ~ D24
r D13 ~ D10 → D23 ~ D20 completed
X0
WSFLP D10 D20 K16 K4
Left-shifiting for 4 registers D13 D12 D11 D10

5
Carry D35 D34 D33 D32 D31 D30 D29 D28 D27 D26 D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20
1 2 3 4


Controllers
38 SFWR P Shift Register Write ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SFWR, SFWRP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Device of stack data written in D: Start No. of stack data n: Length of stack data
Explanations:
1. Range of n: 2 ~ 512
4. The stack data of n words starting from D are defined as “first-in, first-out” stack data and designate the first
device as the pointer. When the instruction is executed, the content in the pointer pluses 1, and the content in
the device designated by S will be written into the designated location in the “first-in, first-out” stack data
designated by the pointer. When the content in the pointer exceeds n - 1, this instruction will not process any
new value written in and the carry flag M1022 = On.
5. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (SFWRP)
Program Example:
1. Pointer D0 is reset as 0. When X0 = Off→On, the content in D20 will be sent to D1 and the content in pointer D0
becomes 1. After the content in D20 is changed, make X0 = Off→On again, and the content in D2 will be sent to
D2 and the content in D0 becomes 2.
2. The figure below illustrates the shift and writing in 1~2 execution of the instruction.
n The content in D20 is sent to D1.
o The content in pointer D0 becomes 1.
X10
RST D0 Reset the content of D0 as 0 in advance
X0
SFWRP D20 D0 K10
n = 10 points
D20 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
pointer
D0 = 3 2 1
Remarks:
This instruction can be used together with API 39 SFRD for the reading/writing of “first-in, first-out” stack data.


Controllers
39 SFRD P Shift Register Read ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SFRD, SFRDP: 7 steps
S * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start No. of stack data D: Device of stack data read out n: Length of stack data
Explanations:
1. Range of n: 2 ~ 512
3. Flag: M1020 (zero flag)
4. The stack data of n words starting from S are defined as “first-in, first-out” stack data and designate the first
device as the pointer. When the instruction is executed, the content in the pointer minuses 1, and the content in
the device designated by S will be written into the designated location in the “first-in, first-out” stack data
designated by the pointer. When the content in the pointer equals 0, this instruction will not process any new
value written in and the zero flag M1020 = On.
5. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (SFRDP)
Program Example:
1. When X0 = Off→On, the content in D1 will be sent to D21 and D9~D2 will shift to the right for 1 register (content
in D9 remains unchanged) and the content in D0 minus 1.
2. The figure below illustrates the shift and reading in 1~3 execution of the instruction.
n The content in D1 is sent to D21.
o D9 ~ D2 shift to the right for 1 register.
p The content in D0 minuses 1.

X0
SFRDP D0 D21 K10
n = 10 points
D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D21
pointer
data read
Remarks:
This instruction can be used together with API 38 SFWR for the reading/writing of “first-in, first-out” stack data.


Controllers
40 ZRST P Zero Reset ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ZRST, ZRSTP: 5 steps
D1 * * * * * *
D2 * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
D1: Start device of the range to be reset D2: End device of the range to be reset
Explanations:
1. No. of operand D1 ≤ No. of operand D2.
2. D1 and D2 have to designate devices of the same type.
5. When the instruction is executed, area from D1 to D2 will be cleared.
6. In ES/EX/SS, 16-bit counter and 32-bit counter cannot use ZRST instruction together.
7. In SA/EH, 16-bit counter and 32-bit counter can use ZRST instruction together.
8. When D1 > D2, only operands designated by D2 will be reset.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, auxiliary relays M300 ~ M399 will be reset to Off.
2. When X1 = On, 16 counters C0 ~ C127 will all be reset (writing in 0; contact and coil being reset to Off).
3. When X10 = On, timers T0 ~ T127 will all be reset (writing in 0; contact and coil being reset to Off).
4. When X2 = On, steps S0 ~ S127 will be reset to Off.
5. When X3 = On, data registers D0 ~ D100 will be reset to 0.
6. When X4 = On, 32-bit counters C235 ~ C254 will all be reset. (writing in 0; contact and coil being reset to Off)
X0
ZRST M300 M399
X1
ZRST C0 C127
X10
ZRST T0 T127
X2
ZRST S0 S127
X3
ZRST D0 D100
X4
ZRST C235 C254
Remarks:
1. Devices, e.g. bit devices Y, M, S and word devices T, C, D, can use RST instruction.
2. API 16 FMOV instruction is also to send K0 to word devices T, C, D or bit registers KnY, KnM, KnS for reset.

X0
RST M0
RST T0
RST Y0
FMOV K0 D10 K5


Controllers
41 DECO P Decode ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DECO, DECOP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source device to be decoded D: Device for storing the decoded result n: Length of decoded bits
Explanations:
1. Range of n when D is a bit device: 1 ~ 8
2. Range of n when D is a word device: 1 ~ 4
5. The lower “n” bits of S are decoded and the results of “2n” bits are stored in D.
6. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (DECOP)
Program Example 1:
1. When D is used as a bit device, n = 1 ~ 8. Errors will occur if n = 0 or n > 8.
2. When n = 8, the maximum points to decode is 28 = 256 points. (Please be aware of the storage range of the
devices after the decoding and do not use the devices repeatedly.)
3. When X10 = Off→On, this instruction will decode the content in X0 ~ X2 to M100 ~ M107.
4. When the source of data is 1 + 2 = 3, set M103, the 3rd bit starting from M100, as 1.
5. After the execution of this instruction is completed and X10 turns to Off, the content that has been decoded and
output keeps acting.
X10
DECOP D10 D20 K3
X2 X1 X0
0 1 1
4 2 1
3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
M107 M106 M105 M104 M103 M102 M101 M100
Program Example 2:
1. When D is used as a word device, n = 1 ~ 4. Errors will occur if n = 0 or n > 4.
2. When n = 4, the maximum points to decode is 24 = 16 points.
3. When X10 = Off→On, this instruction will decode b2 ~ b0 in D10 to b7 ~ b0 in D20. b15 ~ b8 that have not been
used in D20 will all become 0.

4. The lower 3 bits of D10 are decoded and stored in the lower 8 bits of D20. The higher 8 bits of D20 are all 0.
5. After the execution of this instruction is completed and X10 turns to Off, the content that has been decoded and
output keeps acting.
X10
DECOP D10 D20 K3
D10
b15 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
4 2 1
all be 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
b15 b0
D20


Controllers
42 ENCO P Encode ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ENCO, ENCOP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source device to be encoded D: Device for storing the encoded result n: Length of encoded bits
Explanations:
1. Range of n when S is a bit device: 1 ~ 8
2. Range of n when S is a word device: 1 ~ 4
5. The lower “2n” bits of S are encoded and the result is stored in D.
6. If several bits of S are 1, the first bit that is 1 will be processed orderly from high bit to low bit.
7. If no bits of S is 1, M1067, M1068 = On and D1067 records the error code 0E1A (hex).
8. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (ENCOP)
Program Example 1:
1. When S is used as a bit device, n = 1 ~ 8. Errors will occur if n = 0 or n > 8.
2. When n = 8, the maximum points to encode is 28 = 256 points.
3. When X10 = Off→On, this instruction will encode the 23 bits data (M0 ~ M7) and store the result in the lower 3
bits (b2 ~ b0) of D0. b15 ~ b3 that have not been used in D0 will all become 0.
4. After the execution of this instruction is completed and X10 turns to Off, the content in D remains unchanged.
X0
ENCOP M0 D0 K3
M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
all be 0
4 2 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
b15 D0 b0
Program Example 2:
1. When S is used as a word device, n = 1 ~ 4. Errors will occur if n = 0 or n > 4.
2. When n = 4, the maximum points to decode is 24 = 16 points.
3. When X10 = Off→On, this instruction will encode 23 bits (b0 ~ b7) in D10 and stores the result in the lower 3 bits
(b2 ~ b0) of D20. b15 ~ b3 that have not been used in D20 will all become 0. b8 ~ b15 of D10 are invalid data.

4. After the execution of this instruction is completed and X10 turns to Off, the content in D remains unchanged.
X0
ENCOP D10 D20 K3
Invalid data
b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
b15 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D10
7
all be 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
b15 D20 b0


Controllers
43 D SUM P Sum of Active Bits ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SUM, SUMP: 5 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DSUM, DSUMP: 9 steps
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source device D: Destination device for storing counted value
Explanations:
4. Among the bits of S, the total of bits whose content is “1” will be stored in D.
5. When all the 16 bits of S are “0”, zero flag M1020 = On.
6. When 32- instruction is in use, D will occupy 2 registers.
Program Example:
When X10 = On, among the 16 bits of D0, the total of bits whose content is “1” will be stored in D2.
X10
SUM D0 D2
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 K3
D0 D2


Controllers
44 D BON P Check Specified Bit Status ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F BON, BONP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DBON, DBONP: 13 steps
D * * *
n * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source device D: Device for storing check result n: Bits specified for check
Explanations:
2. Range of n: 0 ~ 15 (16-bit instruction); 0 ~ 31 (32-bit instruction)
4. When the nth bit of S is “1”, D = On; when the nth bit of S is “0”, D = Off.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, assume the 15th bit of D0 is “1”, and M0 = On. Assume the 15th bit of D0 is “0”, and M0 = Off.
2. When X0 goes Off, M0 will remains in its previous status.
X0
BON D0 M0 K15
b15 b0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 M0=Off
D0
b15 b0
1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 M0=On
D0


Controllers
45 D MEAN P Mean ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MEAN, MEANP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * DMEAN, DMEANP: 13 steps
D * * * * * * * *
n * * * * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start device to obtain mean value D: Destination device for storing mean value n: The number of consecutive
source devices used
Explanations:
2. Range of n: 1 ~ 64
3. In ES/EX/SS series models: Operand S cannot designate KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS.
6. After the content of n devices starting from S are added up, the mean value of the result will be stored in D.
7. Remainders in the operation will be left out.
8. Provided the No. of designated device exceeds its normal range, only the No. within the normal range can be
processed.
9. If n falls without the range of 1 ~ 64, PLC will determine it as an “instruction operation error”.
Program Example:
When X10 = On, the contents in 3 (n = 3) registers starting from D0 will be summed and then divided by 3. The
obtained mean value will be stored in D10 and the remainder will be left out.
X10
MEAN D0 D10 K3
(D0+D1+D2)/3 D10
D0 K100
D1 K113 D10 K112
Remainder = 3, left out

D2 K125


Controllers
46 ANS Timed Annunciator Set ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ANS: 7 steps
S *
m *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Timer for monitoring annunciator m: Time setting D: Annunciator device
Explanations:
1. Range of S: for SA/SX/SC T0 ~ T191; for EH/EH2/SV T0 ~ T199.
2. m can designate K1 ~ K32,767 (unit: 100ms)
3. Range of D: for SA/SX/SC S896 ~ S1023; for EH/EH2/SV S900 ~ S1023.
5. Flags: M1048 (annunciator in action); M1049 (valid monitoring)
6. This instruction is used for enabling the annunciator.
Program Example:
If X3 = On for more than 5 seconds, annuniciator point S999 = On. Even X3 goes Off afterwards, S999 will still keep
On. However, T10 will be reset to Off and the present value = 0.
X3
ANS T10 K50 S999

Controllers
47 ANR P Annunciator Reset ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

N/A ANR, ANRP: 1 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit

Explanations:
1. No operand.
2. This instruction is used for resetting the annunciator.
3. When more than one annuciators are On, the annunciator of smaller number will be reset.
4. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (ANRP)
Program Example:
1. If X10 and X11 = On at the same time for more than 2 seconds, annuniciator point S910 = On. Even X10 and
X11 go Off afterwards, S910 will still keep On. However, T10 will be reset to Off and the present value = 0.

2. When X10 and X11 are On at the same time for less than 2 seconds, the present value of T10 will be reset to 0.
3. When X3 goes from Off to On,
S896 ~ S1023 in SA/SX/SX are able to reset the annunciators in action.
S900 ~ S1023 in EH/EH2/SV are able to reset the annunciators in action.
4. When X3 goes from Off to On again, the annuniator with secondary smaller No. will be reset.
X10 X11
ANS T10 K20 S910
X3
ANRP
Remarks:
1. Flag:
a) M1048 (annunciator in action): When M1049 = On, any of the annunciators among S896 ~ S1023 in
SA/SX/SC or S900 ~ S1023 in EH/EH2/SV starts output, M1048 will be On.
b) M1049 (valid monitoring): When M1049 = On, D1049 will automatically display the annuciator of the
smallest number in action.
2. Application of annunciators:
I/O point configuration:
X0: Forward switch Y0: Forward S910: Forward annunciator
X1: Backward switch Y1: Backward S920: Backward annunciator
X2: Front position switch Y2: Annunciator indicator
X3: Back position switch
X4: Annunciatro reset button
M1000
M1049
Y0 X2
ANS T0 K100 S910
Y1 X3
ANS T1 K200 S920
X0 X2
Y0
Y0
X1 X3
Y1
Y1
M1048
Y2
X4
ANRP
1. M1048 and D1049 are valid only when M1049 = On.

2. When Y0 = On for more than 10 seconds and the device fails to reach the frong position X2, S910= On.
3. When Y1 = On for more than 10 seconds and the device fails to reach the back position X3, S920= On.

4. When backward switch X1 = On and backward device Y1 = On, Y1 will go Off only when the device reaches the
back position switch X3.
5. Y2 will be On when any annunciator is enabled. Whenever X4 is on, 1 annunciator in action will be reset. The
reset starts from the annunciator with the smallest No.


Controllers
48 D SQR P Square Root ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SQR, SQRP: 5 steps
S * * * DSQR, DSQRP: 9 steps
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source device D: Device for storing the result
Explanations:
2. Flags: M1020 (zero flag); M1021 (borrow flag); M1067 (instruction operation error)
3. This instruction performs a square root operation on S and stores the result in D.
4. S can only be a positive value. If S is negative, PLC will regard it as an “instruction operation error” and will not
execute this instruction. M1067 and M1068 = On and D1067 records the error code 0E1B (hex).
5. The operation result D should be integer only, and the decimal will be left out. Borrow flag M1021 = On.
6. When the operation result D = 0, zero flag M1020 = On.
Program Example:
When X10 = On, the instruction performs a square root on D0 and stores the result in D12.
X10
SQR D0 D12
D0 D12


Controllers
Convert BIN integer to binary floating
49 D FLT P ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
point
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F FLT, FLTP: 5 steps
S * DFLT, DFLTP: 9 steps
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source device for conversion D: Device for storing the conversion result
Explanations:
2. Flags: M1081 (FLT instruction function switch); M1020 (zero flag); M1021 (borrow flag); M1022 (carry flag)
3. D will occupy 2 consecutive devices
4. When M1081 is Off, BIN integer is converted into binary floating point value. At this time, S of the 16-bit
instruction, FLT, occupies 1 register and D occupies 2 registers.
a) If the absolute value of the conversion result ＞ max. floating value, carry flag M1022 = On.
b) If the absolute value of the conversion result ＜ min. floating value, carry flag M1021 = On.
c) If the conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020 = On.
5. When M1081 is On, binary floating point value is converted into BIN integer (digits after decimal point are left
out). At this time, S of the 16-bit instruction, FLT, occupies 2 registers and D occupies 1 register (action same as
that of INT instruction).
a) If the conversion result exceeds the range of BIN integer available in D (for 16-bit: -32,768 ~ 32,767; for 32-bit:
-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647), D will obtain the maximum or minimum value and carry flag M1022 = On.
b) If any digits is left out during the conversion, borrow flag M1021 = On.
c) If S = 0, zero flag M1020 = On.
d) After the conversion, D stores the result in 16 bits.
Program Example 1:
1. When M1081 = Off, the BIN integer is converted into binary floating point value.
2. When X10 = On, D0 (BIN integer) is converted into D13 and D12 (binary floating point value).
3. When X11 = On, D1 and D0 (BIN integer) are converted into D21 and D20 (binary floating point value).
4. If D0 = K10, X10 will be On. The 32-bit value of the converted floating point will be H41200000 and stored in
32-bit register D12 (D13).
5. If 32-bit register D0 (D1) = K100,000, X11 will be On. The 32-bit value of the converted floating point will be
H47C35000 and stored in 32-bit register D20 (D21).

M1002
RST M1081
X10
FLT D0 D12
X11
DFLT D0 D20
Program Example 2:
1. When M1081 = On, the binary floating point value is converted into BIN integer (the decimal is left out).
2. When X10 = On, D0 and D1 (binary floating point value) are converted into D12 (BIN integer). If D0 (D1) =
H47C35000, the floating point value will be presented as 100,000. Due to that the value is larger than the value
presentable by the 16-bit register D12, the result will be D12 = K32, 767 and M1022 = On.
3. When X11 = On, D1 and D0 (binary floating point value) are converted into D21 and D20 (BIN integer). If D0 (D1)
= H47C35000, the floating point value will be presented as 100,000. The result will be stored in the 32-bit
register D20 (D21).
M1002
SET M1081
X10
FLT D0 D12
X11
DFLT D0 D20
Program Example 3:
Please use this instruction to complete the following operation.
(D10) (X7~X0) K61.5 (D21,D20)

binary floating point
16-bit BIN 2-digit BCD 6
7
1 2 5 4 (D31,D30)
decimal floating point (for monitoring )
(D101,D100) (D200) BIN (D301,D300) 8
(D41,D40)
binary floating point binary floating point
3 32 -bit integer
(D203,D202)
(D401,D400)

M1000
FLT D10 D100
1
BIN K2X0 D200
2
FLT D200 D202
3
DEDIV K615 K10 D300
4
DEDIV D100 D202 D400

5
DEMUL D400 D300 D20

6
DEBCD D20 D30

7
DINT D20 D40

8
○
1 D10 (BIN integer) is converted to D101 and D102 (binary floating point value).
○
2 X7 ~ X0 (BCD value) are converted to D200 (BIN value).
○
3 D200 (BIN integer) is converted to D203 and D202 (binary floating point value).
4The result of K615 ÷ K10 is stored in D301 and D300 (binary floating point value).
5 The result of binary decimal division (D101, D100) ÷ (D203, D202) is stored in D401 and D400 (binary floating
○
point value).
6 The result of binary decimal multiplication (D401, D400) × (D301, D300) is stored in D21 and D20 (binary
○
floating point value).
○
7 D21 and D20 (binary floating point value) are converted to D31 and D30 (decimal floating point value).
○
8 D21 and D20 (binary floating point value) are converted to D41 and D40 (BIN integer).


Controllers
50 REF P Refresh ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F REF, REFP: 5 steps
D * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
D: Start device to be I/O refreshed n: Number of items to be I/O refreshed
Explanations:
1. D must designate X0, X10, Y0, Y10…the points whose 1s digit is “0”. See remarks for more details.
2. Range of n: 8 ~ 256 (has to be the multiple of 8).
4. The status of all PLC input/output terminals will be updated after the program scans to END. When the
program starts to scan, the status of the external input terminal is read and stored into the memory of the input
point. The output terminal will send the content in the output memory to the output device after END instruction
is executed. Therefore, this instruction is applicable when the latest input/output data are needed for the
operation.
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, PLC will read the status of input points X0 ~ X17 immediately and refresh the input signals without
any input delay.
X0
REF X0 K16
Program Example 2:
When X0 = On, the 8 output signal from Y0 ~ Y7 will be sent to output terminals and refreshed without having to wait
for the END instruction for output.
X0
REF Y0 K8
Remarks:
The instruction only process the I/O points X0 ~ X17 and Y0 ~ Y17 of ES/EX/SS/SA/SX/SC series MPU, namely n =
K8 or n = K16.
D V P - P L C A P P L I C AT I O N M A N U A L 7-1

Controllers
51 REFF P Refresh and Filter Adjust ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F REFF, REFFP: 3 steps
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
n: Response time (unit: ms)
Explanation:
1. Range of n: for SA/SX/SC, n = K0 ~ K20; for EH/EH2/SV, n = K0 ~ K60.
2. To avoid interferences, X0 ~ X17 of EH/EH2/SV series MPU and X0 ~ X7 of SA/SX/SC series MPU are
equipped with digital filters on output terminals. Digital filters adjust the response time by REFF instruction.
This instruction sets up n directly in D1020 (adjusting the response time of X0 ~ X7) and D1021 (adjusting the
response time of X10 ~ X17).
3. Rules for adjusting the reponse time of the filter at X0 ~ X17:
a) When the power of PLC turns from Off to On or the END instruction is being executed, the response time
will be determined upon the contents in D1020 and D1021.
b) You can use MOV instruction in the program to move the time values to D1020 and D1021 and make
adjustments in the next scan.
c) You can use REFF instruction to change the response time during the execution of the program. The
changed response time will be move to D1020 and D1021 and you can make adjustments in the next scan.
Program Example:
1. When the power of PLC turns from Off to On, the response
X20
time of X0 ~ X17 will be determined by the contents in D1020 REFF K5
and D1021. X0
Y1
2. When X20 = On, REFF K5 will be executed and the response
X20
time will be changed to 5ms for the adjustment in the next REFF K20
scan. X1
Y2
3. When X20 = Off, the REFF K20 will be executed and the
response time will be changed to 20ms for the adjustment in
END
the next scan.
Remarks:
When inserting an interruption subroutine in the program or using the high speed counter or API 56 SPD instruction,
the corresponding signals at the input terminals will not delay and has nothing to do with this instruction.
7-2 D V P - P L C A P P L I C AT I O N M A N U A L

Controllers
52 MTR Input Matrix ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MTR: 9 steps
S *
D1 *
D2 * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start device of matrix input D1: Start device of matrix output D2: Corresponding start device for matrix scan
n: Number of arrays in matrix scan
Explanations:
1. S must designate X0, X10…the X points whose 1st digit is “0” and occupies 8 consecutive points.
2. D1 must designate Y0, Y10…the Y points whose 1st digit is “0” and occupies n consecutive points.
3. D2 must designate Y0, M0. S0…the Y, M, S points whose 1st digit is “0”.
4. Range of n: 2 ~ 8.
6. Flag: M1029 (execution of the instruction is completed).
7. S is the start device No. of all input terminals connected to the matrix. Once S is designated, the 8 points
following the No. will be the input terminals in the matrix.
8. D1 designate the start device No. of transistor output Y in the matrix scan.
9. This instruction occupies continuous 8 input devices starting from S. n external output terminals starting from
D1 read the 8 switches of n arrays by matrix scan, obtaining 8 × n multiple-matrix input points. The status of
scanned switches will be stored in the devices starting from D2.
10. Maximum 8 input switches can be parallelly connected in 8 arrays and obtaining 64 input points (8 × 8 = 64).
11. When the 8-point 8-array matrix inputs are in use, the reading time of each array is approximately 25ms,
totaling the reading of 8 arrays 200ms, i.e. the input signals with On/Off speed of over 200ms are not
applicable in a matrix input.
12. The drive contact of this instruction uses normally On contact M1000.
13. Whenever this instruction finishes a matrix scan, M1029 will be On for one scan period.
14. There is no limitation on the number of times using the instruction, but only one instruction can be executed in
a period of time.
Program Example:
1. When PLC RUN, MRT instruction will start to be executed. The statuses of the external 2 arrays of 16 switches
will be read in order and stored in the internal relays M10 ~ M17, M20 ~ M27.
M1000
MTR X40 Y40 M10 K2
2. The figure below illustrates the external wiring of the 2-array matrix input loop constructed by X40 ~ X47 and
Y40 ~ Y41. The 16 switches correponds to the internal relays M10 ~ M17, M20 ~ M27. Should be used with
MTR instruction.
Must c onnec t to the diode

of 0.1A/50V, 1N4148, in series
M2 0 M2 1 M2 2 M2 3 M2 4 M2 5 M2 6 M2 7
M10: the internal relay X 41 X 42 X 43 X 44 X 45 X 46 X 47

corresponding to
the external switch
M1 0 M11 M1 2 M1 3 M1 4 M1 5 M1 6 M1 7
24G +24V S/S X40 X41 X42 X43 X44 X45 X46 X47
C Y40 Y41 Y42 Y43 Y44 Y45 Y46 Y47
3. See the figure above. The 8 points starting from X40 start to perform a matrix scan from Y40 ~ Y41 (n = 2). D2
designates that the start device No. of the read results is M10, indicating that the first array is read to M10 ~
M17 and the second array is read to M20 ~ M27.
Read input signals in the 1st array
Y40 1 3
Read input signals in the 2nd array
Y41 2 4
25ms
Processing time of each array: approx. 25ms

Controllers
53 D HSCS High Speed Counter Set ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DHSCS: 13 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * *
S2 *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Comparative value S2: No. of high speed counter D: Comparison result
Explanations:
1. S2 has to designate the No. of high speed counters C235 ~ C255. See remarks for more details.
2. D can designate I0□0; □ = 1 ~ 6. ES series MPU does not support this.
3. D of ES and SA series MPU does not support E, F index register modification.
5. Flags: M1289 ~ M1294 are interruption disability of the high speed counters in EH/EH2/SV series MPU. See
Program Example 3 for more details.
6. The high speed counter inputs counting pulses from the corresponding external input terminals X0 ~ X17 by
inserting an interruption. When the high speed counter designated in S2 pluses 1 or minuses 1, DHSCS
instruction will perform a comparison immediately. When the present value in the high speed counter equals
the comparative value designated in S1, device designated in D will turn On. Even the afterward comparison
results are unequal, the device will still be On.
7. If the devices specified as the device D are Y0 ~ Y17, when the compare value and the present value of the
high-speed counter are equal, the comparison result will immediately output to the external inputs Y0 ~ Y17,
and other Y devices will be affected by the scan cycle. However, M, S devices are immediate output and will
not be affected by the scan cycle.
Program Example 1:
After PLC RUN and M0 = On, DHSCS instruction will be executed. When the present value in C235 changes from
99 to 100 or 101 to 100, Y10 will be On constantly.
M1000
DCNT C235 K1000
M0
DHSCS K100 C235 Y10 On immediately
Program Example 2:
Differences between Y output of DHSCS instruction and general Y output:
a) When the present value in C249 changes from 99 to 100 or 101 to 100, Y10 outputs immediately to the external
output point by interruption and has nothing to do with the PLC scan time. However, the time will still be delayed
by the relay (10ms) or transistor (10us) of the output module.
b) When the present value in C249 changes from 99 to 100, the drive contact of C249 will be On immediately. When
the execution arrives at SET Y17, Y17 will still be affected by the scan time and will output after END instruction.
M1000
DCNT C249 K100
DHSCS K100 C249 Y10 On immediately

C249
SET Y17
Program Example 3:
1. High speed counter interruption:
a) Operand D of DHSCS instruction can designate I0□0, □ = 1 ~ 6, as the timing of interruption when the
counting reaches its target.
b) ES/EX/SS series MPU does not support high speed counter interruption.
c) SA/SX/SC series MPU supports high speed counter interruption. However, when DHSCS instruction
designates an I interruption, the designated high speed counter cannot be used in DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ
instructions. Misuse of high speed counter will result in error.
d) For SA/SX/SC series MPU, when the counting reaches the target, the interruption will occur. X0 is the
counter for counting input and the interruption No. is I010 (1 phase 2 inputs and A-B phase counter No. C246
~ C254 can only designate I010). X1 designates I020; X2 designates I030; X3 designates I040; X4
designates I050; X5 designates I060, totaling 6 points.
e) When the present value in C251 changes from 99 to 100 or 101 to 100, the program will jump to I010 and
execute the interruption service subroutine.
EI
M1000
DCNT C251 K1000
DHSCS K100 C251 I010
FEND
M1000
I010 Y1
IRET
END
2. In SA/SX/SC series MPU, M1059 is “I010 ~ I060 high speed counter interruption forbidden” flag.
3. In EH/EH2/SV series MPU, M1289 ~ M1294 are the respectively for I010 ~ I060 “high speed counter
interruption forbidden flags”, i.e. when M1294 = On, I060 interruption will be forbidden.
Interruption pointer I No. Interruption forbidden flag Interruption pointer I No. Interruption forbidden flag
I010 M1289 I040 M1292

I020 M1290 I050 M1293
I030 M1291 I060 M1294
Remarks:
1. The output contact of the high speed counter and the comparative outputs of API 53 DHSCS, API 34 DHSCR
and API 55 DHSZ instructions only perform comparison and contact outputs when there is a counting input.
When using data operation instructions, e.g. DADD, DMOV, for changing the present value in the high speed
counter or making the present value equals the set value, there will not be comparisons or comparative
outputs because there is no counting inputs.
2. High speed counters supported by ES/EX/SS series MPU (total bandwidth: 20KHz):
Type 1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase 2 inputs
C235 C236 C237 C238 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254
Input
X2 U/D U/D R R R R
X3 U/D R S S S
a) Input points X0 and X1 can be planned as counters of higher speed (1 phase input can reach 20KHz).
However, the total counting frequency of the two input points has to be smaller or equal 20KHz. Provided
the input is a 2-phas input signal, the counting frequency will be approximately 4KHz. The frequency of
the input points X2 and X3 (1-phase) can reach 10KHz.
b) For ES/EX/SS series MPU, the uses of DHSCS instructio with DHSCR instruction cannot be more than 4
times.
3. High speed counters supported by SA/SX series MPU (total bandwidth: 40KHz):
Type 1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase 2 inputs
C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254
Input
X0 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A B A
X1 U/D R R D D D B B A B
X2 U/D U/D R R R R
X3 U/D R S S S
X4 U/D
X5 U/D
a) Input points X0 and X1 for 1-phase input can reach a frequency of 20KHz and X2 ~ X5 can reach 10KHz.
2-phase input (X0, X1) C251, C252 and C254 can reach a frequency of 4KHz and C253 reach 25KHz
(only supports 4 times frequency counting).
b) Functions of the input point X5:
i) When M1260 = Off, C240 is the general U/D high speed counuter.
ii) When M1260 = On and C240 is enabled by DCNT instruction, X5 will be the shared reset signal for
C235 ~ C239. The counter C240 will still receive the counting input signals from X5.
4. High speed counters supported by SC series MPU (total bandwidth: 130KHz):
Type
1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs
C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C245 C246 C247 C249 C250 C251 C252 C254 C255
Input
X2 U/D U/D R R R R
X3 U/D R S S S
X4 U/D
X5 U/D
X10 U/D U A
X11 U/D D B
a) The functions of the high speed counters of input points X0 ~ X5 are the same of those in SA/SX series
MPU.
b) The input points of 1-phase input X10 (C243), X11 (C245) and (X10, X11) C250 can reach a frequency of
100KHz. The total bandwidth of X10 ~ X11 is 130KHz. C255 of the 2-phase input (X10, X11) can reach a
frequency of 50KHz.
c) For SA/SX/SC series MPU, the uses of DHSCS instruction with DHSCR instruction cannot be more than 6
times and the uses of DHSZ instruction cannot be more than 6 times as well. When DHSCR instruction
designates I interruption, the designated high speed counter cannot be used in other DHSCS, DHSCR
and DHSZ instructions.
d) The functions of X10 ~ X11 high speed counters in SC series MPU:
i) When X10 and X11 are set as 1-phase 1 input or 1-phase 2 inputs. The maximum frequency of a
single phase can reach 100KHz. When they are set as 2-phase 2 inputs, the maximum frequency can
reach 50KHz.
ii) X10 and X11 can select rising-edge counting mode or falling-edge counting mode. X10 is set by
D1166 and X11 is set by D1167. K0: rising-edge counting. K1: falling-edge counting. K2: rising/falling
edge counting (only supports X10).
iii) The counting up and down of C243 are determined by the On/Off of M1243. The counting up and
down of C245 are determined by the On/Off of M1245. Rising-edge and falling-edge counting are not
able to take place at the same time. The rising-edge trigger and falling-edge trigger of C250 are
determined by the content (K0 or K1) of D1166. C255 can only be used in a 4 times frequency
counting and you can only select rising-edge trigger.
iv) When C243 or C245 is in use, you will not be able to use C250 or C255, and vice versa.
v) High speed counter and high speed comparator:
Output reaches
comparative value
X10 C243 r
a to Set value 10
X11 p ar
C245 m
Co Set value 11
C250
High-speed
comparison instruction
C255
vi) Explanations on high speed counter and high speed comparator:

(1) When DHSCS and DHSCR instructions use the high speed counter (C243/C245/C250/C255),
they can only use the set values of 2 groups of high speed comparative instructions. Assume that
a group of comparative instruction DHSCS D0 C243 Y10 is already in use, you can only set
another group DHSCR D2 C243 Y10 or DHSCS D4 C245 Y10.
(2) When DHSZ instruction use the high speed counter (C243/C245/C250/C255), it can only use the
set value of a group of comparators.
(3) The number of set values in a high-speed comparative instruction offered in SA/SX series MPU
will not decrease becasus of the addition of the new high speed counters.
(4) If the high-speed comparative instruction DHSCS requires a high-speed reponse output, it is
suggested that you use Y10 or Y11 for the output. If you use other general devices for the output,
there will be delay of 1 scan period. For example, when in I0x0 interruption, C234 will correspond
to I020, C245 to I040 and C250/C255 to I060.
(5) The high-speed comparative instruction DHSCR can clear output devices and counter devices,
but only the counters used by the same instruction, e.g. DHSCR K10 C243 C243. This function
can only applied in the four special high speed counters C243, C245, C250 and C255.
e) Counting modes:
i) The 2-phase 2 inputs counting mode of the high speed counters in ES/EX/SS (V5.5 and above) and
SA/SX/SC series MPU is set by special D1022 with normal frequency, double frequency and 4 times
frequency modes. The contents in D1022 will be loaded in in the first scan when PLC is switched from
STOP to RUN.
Device No. Function
D1022 Setting up the multiplied frequency of the counter
D1022 = K1 Normal frequency mode selected
D1022 = K2 or 0 Double frequency mode selected (default)
D1022 = K4 4 times frequency mode selected
ii) Multiplied frequency mode (qr indicates the occurrence of counting)

Counting mode Counting wave pattern
A-phase
frequency)
(Normal
1 B-phase
A-phase
2-phase 2 inputs
frequency)
(Double
B-phase
2
A-phase
frequency)
(4 times
B-phase
4
5. EH/EH2/SV series MPU supports high speed counters. C235 ~ C240 are program-interruption 1-phase high
speed counter with a total bandwidth of 20KHz, can be used alone with a counting frequency of up to 10KHz.
C241 ~ C254 are hardware high speed counter (HHSC). There are four HHSC in EH/EH2/SV series MPU,
HHSC0 ~ 3. The pulse input frequency of HHSC0 and HHSC1 can reach 200KHz and that of HHSC2 and
HHSC3 can reach 20KHz (1 phase or A-B phase). The pulse input frequency of HHSC0 ~ 3 of 40EH2 series
MPU can reach 200KHz, among which:
a) Every HHSC can only be designated to one counter by DCNT instruction.
b) There are three counting modes in every HHSC (see the table below):
i) 1-phase 1 input refers to “pulse/direction” mode.
ii) 1-phase 2 inputs refers to “clockwise/counterclockwise (CW/CCW)” mode.
iii) 2-phase 2 inputs refers to “A-B phase” mode.
Counter Program-interruption
type
Hardware high speed counter
high speed counter
Type
1-phase 1 input 1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase 2 inputs
C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C246 C247 C248 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254
Input
X0 U/D U/D U A
X1 U/D D B
X2 U/D R R R
X3 U/D S S S
X4 U/D U/D U A
X5 U/D D B
X6 R R R
X7 S S S
X10 U/D U A
X11 D B
X12 R R R
X13 S S S
X14 U/D U A
X15 D B
X16 R R R
X17 S S S
B: Progressively decreasing input B: B phase input R: Input cleared
c) In EH/EH2/SV series MPU, there is no limitation on the times of using the hardware high speed counter
related instructions, DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ. However, when these instructions are enabled at the
same time, there will be some limitations. DHSCS instruction will occupy 1 group of settings, DHSCR 1
group of settings and DHSZ 2 groups of settings. There three instructions cannot occupy 8 groups of
settings in total; otherwise the system will ignore the instructions which are not the first scanned and
enabled.
d) System structure of the hardware high speed counters:
i) HHSC0 ~ 3 have reset signals and start signals from external inputs. Settings in M1272, M1274,
M1276 and M1278 are reset signals of HHSC0, HHSC1, HHSC2 and HHSC3. Settings in M1273,
M1275, M1277 and M1279 are start signals of HHSC0, HHSC1, HHSC2 and HHSC3.
ii) If the external control signal inputs of R and S are not in use, you can set M1264/M1266/M1268/M1270
and M1265/M1267/M1269/M1271 as True and disable the input signals. The corresponding external
inputs can be used again as general input points (see the figure below).
iii) When special M is used as a high speed counter, the inputs controlled by START and RESET will be
affected by the scan time.
D V P - P L C A P P L I C AT I O N M A N U A L 7 - 11
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 U/D Present value in counter Counting reaches set value
C ounting pulses U HHSC0
X0 X4 X10 X14
A
HHSC1
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 Comparator 8 set values
HHSC2
X5 C ounting pulses D
X1 X11 X15
B HHSC3
DHSCS occupies 1 group of set values

HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 Output reaches DHSCR occupies 1 group of set values
Counting up/dow n comparative value DHSCZ occupies 2 groups of set values
D1225 D1226 D1227 D1228 Select counting m odes monitoring flag for outputs
Set values 1 ~ 4 indicate
Mode 1 ~ 4 (1 ~ 4 times frequency)
High-speed Output reaches

HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 U/D mode setup flag H HSC0 M1246 M1251 comparative
instruction comparative value
C241 C242 C243 C244 H HSC1 M1247 M1252
M1241 M1242 M1243 M1244 DHSCS SET/RES ET
H HSC2 M1248 M1253 DHSCR I 010 ~ I 060 clear
the present value
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 H HSC3 M1249 M1254 DHSCZ
X2 X6 X12 X16
AND Reset signal R Interruption forbidden flag
M1264 M1266 M1268 M1270 OR
I 010 M1289
I 020 M1290
I 030 M1291
M1272 M1274 M1276 M1278
I 040 M1292
I 050 M1293
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 I 060 M1294
X3 X7 X13 X17
AND Start signal S
M1265 M1267 M1269 M1271 OR
M1273 M1275 M1277 M1279
e) Counting modes:
Special D1225 ~ D1228 are for setting up different counting modes of the hardware high speed counters
(HHSC0 ~ 3) in EH/EH2/SV series MPU. There are normal ~ 4 times frequency for the counting and the
default setting is double frequency.
Counting modes Wave pattern

Set value in
Type Counting up(+1) Counting down(-1)
special D
1 U/D
(Normal
frequency) U/D FLAG
1-phase
1 input 2 U/D
(Double
frequency) U/D FLAG
1 U
(Normal
frequency) D
1-phase
2 inputs 2 U
(Double
frequency) D
1 A
(Normal
frequency) B
2 A
(Double
2-phase frequency) B
2 inputs 3 A
(Triple
frequency) B
4 A
(4 times
frequency) B
f) Special registers for relevant flags and settings of high speed counters:
Flag Function
M1152 Set DHSZ instruction as frequency control mode
M1153 DHSZ frequency control mode has been executed.
Monitor the counting direction of high speed counters C246 ~ C255
M1260 X5 as the reset input signal of all high speed counters
M1261 High-speed comparison flag for DHSCR instruction
Flag Function
Special D Function
D1022 Multiplied frequency of A-B phase counters for ES/SA series MPU
D1151 Register for DHSZ instruction frequency control mode (counting by table)
D1152 (low word) In frequency control mode, DHSZ reads the upper and lower limits in the table
D1153 (high word) counting register D1153 and D1152.
Switching between rising/falling edge counting modes of X10 (for SC series

D1166
MPU only)
Switching between rising/falling edge counting modes of X11 (for SC series
D1167
MPU only)
D1225 The counting mode of the 1st group counters (C241, C246, C251)
D1226 The counting mode of the 2nd group counters (C242, C247, C252)
D1227 The counting mode of the 3rd group counters (C243, C248, C253)
D1228 The counting mode of the 4th group counters (C244, C249, C254)
Counting modes of HHSC0 ~ HHSC3 in EH/EH2/SV series MPU (default = 2)
1: Normal frequency counting mode
D1225 ~ D1228 2: Double frequency counting mode
3: Triple frequency counting mode
4: 4 times frequency counting mode

Controllers
54 D HSCR High Speed Counter Reset ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DHSCR: 13 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * *
S2 *
D * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Comparative value S2: No. of high speed counter D: Comparison result
Explanations:
1. S2 has to designate the No. of high speed counters C235 ~ C255. See remarks of API 53 DHSCS for more
details.
2. D of EH/EH2/SV series MPU can designate the No. of high speed counters C241 ~ C254 that are the same as
the counters designated by S2.
3. D of SC series MPU can designate the No. of high speed counters C243, C245, C250 and C255 that are the
same as the counters designated by S2.
4. D of ES/EX/SS/SA/SX series MPU does not support device C.
6. Flags: M1150 ~ M1333; see remarks of API 53 DHSCS for more details. ES/EX/SS/SA/SX/SC series MPU
does not support M1261 (high speed counter external reset mode designation); see remarks for more details.
7. The high speed counter inputs counting pulses from the corresponding external input terminals X0 ~ X17 by
inserting an interruption. When the No. of high-speed counter designated in S2 “+1“ or “-1”, DHSCR will
perform a comparison immediately. When the present value in the high speed counter equals the comparative
value designated in S1, the device designated in D will turn Off and even the afterward comparison results are
unequal, the device will still be Off.
8. If the devices designated in D are Y0 ~ Y17, when the comparative value equals the present value in the high
speed counter, the comparison result will immediately output to the external output terminals Y0 ~ Y17 (and
clear the designated Y output) and the rest of Y devices will be affected by the scan cycle. Devices M and S
act immediately without being affected by the scan cycle.
Program Example 1:
1. When M0 = On and the present value in the high speed counter C251 changes from 99 to 100 or 101 to 100,
Y10 will be cleared and Off.
2. When the present value in the high speed counter C251 changes from 199 to 200, the contact of C251 will be
On and make Y0 = On. However, the program scan time will delay the output.
3. Y10 will immediately reset the status when the counting reaches its target. D is also able to designate high
speed counters of the same No. See Program Example 2.
M1000
DCNT C251 K200
M0
DHSCR K100 C251 Y10
C251
SET Y0
Program Example 2:
When DHSCR instruction designates the same high speed counter, and the present value in the high speed counter
C251 changes from 999 to 1,000 or 1,001 to 1,000, C251 will be reset to Off.
1,000
200
M1000 Not affected by scan time
DCNT C251 K200 C251 output contact
DHSCR K1000 C251 C251

Affected by scan time
Remarks:
1. DVP all series MPU support high speec counters. For the limitation on the use of instructions, see remarks of
API 53 DHSCS for more details.
2. M1261 of EH/EH2/SV series MPU designates the external reset modes of the high speed counter. Some high
speec counters have input points for external reset; therefore, when the input point is On, the present value in
the corresponding high speed counter will be cleared to 0 and the output contact will be Off. If you wish the reset
to be executed immediately by the external output, you have to set M1261 to be On.
3. M1261 can only be used in the hardware high speed counter C241 ~ C255.
4. Example:
a) X2 is the input point for external reset of C251.
b) Assume Y10 = On.
c) When M1261 = Off and X2 = On, the present value in C251 will be cleared to 0 and the contact of C251 will
be Off. When DHSCR instruction is executed, there will be no counting input and the comparison result will
not output. The external output will not execute the reset; therefore Y10 = On will remain unchanged.
d) When M1261 = On and X2 = On, the present value in C251 will be cleared to 0 and the contact of C251 will
be Off. When DHSCR instruction is executed, there will be no counting input but the comparison result will
output. Therefore, Y10 will be reset.
M1000
DCNT C251 K1000
DHSCR K0 C251 Y10

X10
M1261

Controllers
55 D HSZ High Speed Zone Compare ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DHSZ: 17 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * *
S *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Lower bound of the comparison zone S2: Upper bound of the comparison zone S: No. of high speed
counter D: Comparison result
Explanations:
1. S1 has to be euqal to or smaller than S2. (S1 ≤ S2)
2. When S1 > S2, the instruction will perform a comparison by using S1 as the upper bound and S2 as the lower
bound.
3. S has to designate high speed counters C235 ~ C255, See remarks of API 53 DHSCS for more details.
4. D will occupy 3 consecutive devices.
5. Flags: M1150 ~ M1333; see remarks of API 53 DHSCS for more details. M1150, M1151 DHSZ executing
multiple points comparison mode; see Program Example 3 for more details; SA/SX/SC series MPU does not
support. M1152, M1153 DHSZ as frequency control mode; see Program Example 4 for more details; SA/SX/SC
series MPU does not support.
6. The output will not be affected by the scan time.
7. The zone comparisons and outputs are all processed by inserting interruptions.
Program Example 1:
1. Designate device Y0 and Y0 ~ Y2 will be automatically occupied.
2. When DHSZ instruction is being executed and the counting of the high speed counter C246 reaches upper and
lower bounds, one of Y0 ~ Y2 will be On
M1000
DCNT C246 K20000
DHSZ K1500 K2000 C246 Y0

Y0
When the present value in C246 < K1,500, Y0 = On
Y1
When K1,500 < present value in C246 < K2,000, Y1 = On
Y2
When the present value in C246 > K2,000, Y2 = On
Program Example 2:
1. Use DHSZ instruction for high/low speed stop control. C251 is an A-B phase high speed counter and DHSZ only
performs comparison output when there is a C251 counting pulse input. Therefore, even when the present value
in the counter is 0, Y10 will not be On.
2. When X10 = On, DHSZ will require that Y10 has to be On when the present value in the counter ≤ K2,000. To
solve this requirement, you can execute DZCPP instruction when the program was first RUN and compare
C251 with K2,000. When the present value in the counter ≤ K2,000, Y10 will be On. DZCPP instruction is a
pulse execution instruction and will only be executed once with Y10 being kept On.
3. When the drive contact X10 = Off, Y10 ~ Y12 will be reset to Off.
X10
RST C251
ZRST Y10 Y12

M1000
DCNT C251 K10000
X10
DZCPP K2000 K2400 C251 Y10
DHSZ K2000 K2400 C251 Y10
4. The timing diagram
Speed of variable speed

transmission equipment
X10
high speed
forward Y10
low speed
Y11
forward
Stop Y12
Present value in 2,400

counter C251 2,000
Program Example 3:
1. Program Example 3 is only applicable to EH/EH2/SV series MPU.
2. The multiple set values comparison mode: If D of DHSZ instruction designates a special auxiliary relay M1150,
the instruction will be able to compare (output) the present value in the high speed counter with many set
values.
3. In this mode,
- S1: start device in the comparison table. S1 can only designate data register D and can be modified by E and
F. Once this mode is enabled, S1 will not be changed even the E and F has been changed.
- S2: number of group data to be compared. S2 can only designate K1 ~ K255 or H1 ~ HFF and can be
modified by E and F. Once this mode is enabled, S2 cannot be changed. If S2 is not within its range, error
code 01EA (hex) will display and the instruction will not be executed.
- S: No. of high speed counter (designated as C241 ~ C254).
- D: Designated mode (can only be M1150)
4. The No. of start register designated in S1 and the number of rows (groups) designated in S2 construct a
comparison table. Please enter the set values in every register in the table before executing the instruction.
5. When the present value in the counter C251 designated in S equals the set values in D1 and D0, the Y output
designated by D2 will be reset to Off (D3 = K0) or On (D3 = K1) and be kept. Output Y will be processed as an
interruption. No. of Y output pointss are in decimal (range: 0 ~ 255). If the No. falls without the range,
SET/RESET will not be enabled when the comparison reaches its target.
6. When this mode is enabled, PLC will first acquire the set values in D0 and D1 as the target value for the first
comparison section. At the same time, the index value displayed in D1150 will be 0, indicating that PLC
performs the comparison based on the group 0 data.
7. When the group 0 data in the table have been compared, PLC will first execute the Y output set in group 0 data
and determine if the comparison reaches the target number of groups. If the comparison reaches the target,
M1151 will be On; if the comparison has not reached the final group, the content in D1150 will plus 1 and
continue the comprison for the next group.
8. M1151 is the flag for the completion of one execution of the table, can be Off by the user. Or when the next
comparion cycle takes place and the group 0 data has been compared, PLC will automatically reset the flag.
9. When the drive contact of the instruction X10 goes Off, the execution of the instruction will be interrupted and
the content in D1150 (table counting register) will be reset to 0. However, the On/Off status of all outputs will be
remained.
10. When the instruction is being executed, all set values in the comparison table will be regarded as valid values
only when the scan arrives at END instruction for the first time.
11. This mode can only be used once in the program.
12. This mode can only be used on the hardware high speed counters C241 ~ C254.
13. When in this mode, the frequency of the input counting pulses cannot exceed 50KHz or the neighboring two
groups of comparative values cannot differ by 1; otherwise there will not be enough time for the PLC to react
and result in errors.
X10
DHSZ D0 K4 C251 M1150
The comparison table:
32-bit data for comparison Table counting

No. of Y output On/Off indication
High word Low word register D1150
D1 (K0) D0 (K100) D2 (K10) D3 (K1) 0

D5 (K0) D4 (K200) D6 (K11) D7 (K1) 1
D9 (K0) D8 (K300) D10 (K10) D11 (K0) 2
D13 (K0) D12 (K400) D14 (K11) D15 (K0) 3
K10: Y10 K0: Off 0→1→2→3→0
K11: Y11 K1: On Cyclic scan
Present value
in C251
400
300
200
100
Y10
Y11
M1151
3
2
1
D1150 0 0
14. Special registers for flags and relevant settings:

Flag Function
Special D Function
Program Example 4:
1. Program Example 4 is only applicable to EH/EH2/SV series MPU.
2. DHSZ and DPLSY instructions are combined for frequency control. If D of DHSZ instruction is a special auxiliary
relay M1152, the present value in the counter will be able to control the pulse output frequency of DPLSY
instruction.
3. In this mode,
- S1: start device in the comparison table. S1 can only designate data register D and can be modified by E and
F. Once this mode is enabled, S1 will not be changed even the E and F has been changed.
- S2: number of group data to be compared. S2 can only designate K1 ~ K255 or H1 ~ HFF and can be
modified by E and F. Once this mode is enabled, S2 cannot be changed. If S2 is not within its range, error
code 01EA (hex) will display and the instruction will not be executed.
- S: No. of high speed counter (designated as C241 ~ C254).
- D: Designated mode (can only be M1152)

4. This mode can only be used once. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, this mode can only be used in the hardware
high speed counter C241 ~ C254. Please enter the set values in every register in the table before executing the
instruction.
5. When this mode is enabled, PLC will first acquire the set values in D0 and D1 as the target value for the first
comparison section. At the same time, the index value displayed in D1152 will be 0, indicating that PLC
performs the comparison based on the group 0 data.
6. When the group 0 data in the table have been compared, PLC will first execute at the frequency set in group 0
data (D2, D3) and copy the data to D1152 and D1153, determining if the comparison reaches the target number
of groups. If the comparison reaches the target, M1153 will be On; if the comparison has not reached the final
group, the content in D1151 will plus 1 and continue the comprison for the next group.
7. M1153 is the flag for the completion of one execution of the table, can be Off by the user. Or when the next
comparion cycle takes place and the group 0 data has been compared, PLC will automatically reset the flag.
8. If you wish to use this mode with PLSY instruction, please preset the value in D1152.
9. If you wish to stop the execution at the last row, please set the value in the last row K0.
10. When the drive contact of the instruction X10 goes Off, the execution of the instruction will be interrupted and
the content in D1151 (table counting register) will be reset to 0.
11. When in this mode, the frequency of the input counting pulses cannot exceed 50KHz or the neighboring two
groups of comparative values cannot differ by 1; otherwise there will not be enough time for the PLC to react
and result in errors.
X10
DHSZ D0 K5 C251 M1152
PLS M0
M0
DPLSY D1152 K0 Y0
The comparison table:
32-bit data for comparison Pulse output frequency Table counting

High word Low word 0 ~ 200KHz register D1151
D1 (K0) D0 (K0) D3, D2 (K5,000) 0

D5 (K0) D4 (K100) D7, D6 (K10,000) 1
D9 (K0) D8 (K200) D11, D10 (K15,000) 2
D13 (K0) D12 (K300) D15, D14 (K6,000) 3
D17 (K0) D16 (K400) D19, D18 (K0) 4
0→1→2→3→4
Cyclic scan
Present value 500

in C251
400
300
200
100
0
(Hz)
15,000
10,000
5,000
0
M1153
4
3
2
1
D1151 0 0
12. Special registers for flags and relevant settings:

Flag Function
M1152 DHSZ instruction in frequency control mode
M1153 The execution of DHSZ frequency control mode is completed.
Special D Function
D1152 (low word) In frequency control mode, DHSZ reads the upper and lower limits in the
D1153 (high word) table counting register D1153 and D1152.
D1336 (low word)

Current number of pulses output by DPLSY instruction
D1337 (high word)
13. The complete program:
X10
DMOVP K5000 D2
DMOVP K10000 D6
DMOVP K15000 D10
DMOVP K6000 D14
DMOVP K0 D18
DMOVP K0 D0
DMOVP K100 D4
DMOVP K200 D8
DMOVP K300 D12
DMOVP K400 D16
DHSZ D0 K5 C251 M1152
PLS M0
M0
DPLSY D1152 K0 Y0
Frequency Number Output

of point
pulses
14. During the execution of DHSZ instruction, do not modify the set values in the comparison table.
15. The designated data will be arranged into the the above program diagram when the program executes to END
instruction. Therefore, PLSY instruction has to be executed after DHSZ instruction has been executed once.

Controllers
56 SPD Speed Detection ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SPD: 7 steps
S1 *
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: External pulse input terminal S2: Pulse receiving time (ms) D: Detected result
Explanations:
2. Flag: M1100 (SPD instruction performs sampling for one time)
3. External pulse input terminals designated in S1 for all series MPU:
MPU
ES/EX/SS (V5.7and above) SA/SX/SC EH/EH2/SV
Input
Available input points X1, X2 X0, X1, X2 X0 ~ X3
4. For SA/SX (V1.4 and above) series MPU and SC (V1.2 and above) series MPU, the new X0 and X1 can be
used together with A-B phase input points. When “A ahead of B” detection result is a positive value and “B
ahead of A” detection result is a negative value, the multiplied frequency of the counter can be set by D1022.
5. The received number of pulses of the input terminal designated in S1 is calculated within the time (in ms)
designated in S2. The result is stored in the register designated in D.
6. D will occupy 5 consecutive devices. D + 1 and D are the detected value obtained from the previous pulses; D
+3 and D + 2 are the current accumulated number of values; D + 4 is the counting time remaining (max.
32,767ms).
7. Pulse frequency detection for all series:
MPU ES/EX/SS (V5.7 and above) SA/SX/SC EH/EH2/SV
X0/X1 A-B phase input (4KHz) X0/X1 (100KHz)

Max. frequency X1 (20KHz), X2 (10KHz)
X1 (30KHz), X2 (10KHz) X2/X3 (10KHz)
8. This instruction is mainly used for obtaining a proportional value of rotation speed. The result D and rotation
speed will be in proportion. The following equation is for obtaining the rotation speed of motor.
N: Rotation speed
60(D0)
N= × 10 (rpm)
3 n: The number of pulses produced per rotation
nt t: Detecting time designated in S2 (ms)
9. The X input point designated by this instruction cannot be used again as the pulse input terminal of the high
speed counter or as an external interruption signal.
10. When M1036 in SC (V1.4 and above) series MPU is enabled, SPD instruction can detect the speeds at X0 ~ X5
at the same time with a total bandwidth of 40KHz. See 2.11 for more details for how to use M1036.
11. There is no limitation on the times of using this instruction in the program, but only one instruction will be
executed at a time.
12. When SPD instruction is enabled and M1100 = On, SPD instruction will perform a sampling at the moment when
M1100 goes from Off to On and stop the sampling. If you wish to resume the sampling, you have to turn Off
M1100 and re-enable SPD instruction.
Program Example:
1. When X7 = On, D2 will calculate the high-speed pulses input by X1 and stop the calculation automatically after
1,000ms. The result will be stored in D0.
2. When the 1,000ms counting is completed, D2 will be cleared to 0. When X7 is On again, D2 will start the
calculation again.
X7
SPD X1 K1000 D0
X7
X1
D2: Present value D0: Detected value
Content in D2
1,000ms 1,000ms
1,000
Content in D4 D4: Remaining time (ms)
Remarks:
1. When ES/EX/SS (V5.7 and above) and SA/SX/SC series MPU use X1 or X2, the relevant high speed counters
or external interruptions I101 and I201 cannot be used.
2. For SC (V1.4 and above) series MPU, when M1036 is enabled, the speed of X0 ~ X5 can be detected at the
same time.

Controllers
57 D PLSY Pulse Y Output ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F PLSY: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DPLSY: 13 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Pulse output frequency S2: Number of output pulses D: Pulse output device (please use transistor output
module)
Explanations:
1. The program of ES/EX/SS series MPU can use PLSY instruction two times but cannot designate the same Y
device.
3. S1 designates the pulse output frequency. With M1133 ~ M1135 and D1133, Y0 of SA/SX series MPU is able to
output pulses at 50KHz. See 2.11 for M1133 ~ M1135 and D1133.
Range of output frequency for all series:
MPU ES/EX/SS SA/SX SC EH EH2/SV
Y0: 0 ~ 30KHz Y0: 0 ~ 200KHz

Y0: 0 ~10KHz Y0: 0 ~ 32KHz Y1: 0 ~ 30KHz Y0: 1 ~ 200KHz Y2: 0 ~ 200KHz
Frequency range
Y1: 0 ~10KHz Y1: 0 ~10KHz Y10: 77 ~ 100KHz Y2: 1 ~ 200KHz Y4: 0 ~ 200KHz
Y11: 77 ~ 100KHz Y6: 0 ~ 200KHz
4. S2 designates the number of output pulses. The 16-bit instruction can designate 1 ~ 32,767 pulses and the
32-bit instruction can designate 1 ~ 2,147,483,647 pulses.
Number of continuous pulses for all series:
MPU ES/EX/SS/SA/SX/SC SC EH/EH2/SV
M1010 (Y0) On The number of output
How to designate M1010 (Y0) On M1023 (Y1) On pulses designated for

continuous pulses M1023 (Y1) On Y0, Y2, Y4 and Y6 is set
The number of output pulses designated
for Y10 and Y11 is set to K0. to K0
5. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, when the number of output pulses is set to 0, there will be continuous pulse output
with no limitation on the number of pulses. For ES/EX/SS/SA/SX/SC series MPU, you have to make M1010 (Y0)
or M1023 (Y1) On to allow a continuous pulse output with no limitation on the number of pulses.
6. For the pulse output device designated in D, EH series MPU can designate Y0 and Y2, EH2/SV series MPU can
designate Y0, Y2, Y4 and Y6, ES/EX/SS/SA/SX series MPU can designate Y0 and Y1, SC series MPU can
designate Y0, Y1, Y10 and Y11. (SC V1.2 and above series MPU supports Y10 and Y11).
7. EH series MPU has two groups of A-B phase pulse output from CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3); EH2/SV series
MPU has four groups of A-B phase pulse output from CH0 (Y0, Y1), CH1 (Y2, Y3), CH2 (Y4, Y5) and CH3 (Y6,
Y7). See 2.3 and remarks for how to set up.
8. When PLSY instruction is executed, it will designate the number of output pulses (S2) output from the output
device (D) at a pulse output frequency (S1).
9. When PLSY instruction is used in the program, its outputs cannot be the same as those in API 58 PWM and API
59 PLSR.
10. Pulse output completed flags for all series:
ES/EX/SS
MPU SC EH/EH2/SV EH2/SV
SA/SX/SC
Output device Y0 Y1 Y10 Y11 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6
Flag M1029 M1030 M1102 M1103 M1029 M1030 M1036 M1037
11. For ES/EX/SS/SA/SX/SC/EH series MPU, when PLSY and DPLSY instruction is disabled, the pulse output
completed flags will all be Off automatically.
12. For EH2/SV series MPU, when PLSY and DPLSY instruction is disabled, the user will have to reset the pulse
output completed flags.
13. The user has to reset the pulse output completed flags after the pulse output is completed.
14. After PLSY instruction starts to be executed, Y will start a pulse output. Modifying S2 at this moment will not
affect the current output. If you wish to modify the number of output pulses, you have to first stop the execution
of PLSY instruction and modify the number.
15. S1 can be modified when the program executes to PLSY instruction.
16. Off time : On time of the pulse output = 1 : 1.
17. When the program executes to PLSY instruction, the current number of output pulses will be stored in the
special data registers D1336 ~ D1339. See remarks for more details.
18. For SA/EH series MPU, there is no limitation on the times using this instruction. For SA/SX/SC/EH series MPU,
the program allows two instructions being executed at the same time. For EH2/SV series MPU, the program
allows four instructions being executed at the same time.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, there will be 200 pulses output from Y0 at 1KHz. When the pulse output is completed, M1029
will be On and Y10 will be On.
2. When X0 = Off, the pulse output from Y0 will stop immediately. When X0 is On again, the output will start again
ffrom the first pulse.
X0
PLSY K1000 K200 Y0
M1029
Y10
0.5ms
Y0 output 1 2 3 200
1ms
Remarks:
1. Flags and special registers for ES/EX/SS series MPU:
M1010: When On, Y0 output will be continuous with no limitation on the number of pulses. When Off, the
number of output pulses from Y0 will be decided by S2.
M1023: When On, Y1 output will be continuous with no limitation on the number of pulses. When Off, the
number of output pulses from Y1 will be decided by S2.
M1029: On when Y0 pulse output is completed.
M1030: On when Y1 pulse output is completed.
M1078: Y0 output pauses.
M1079: Y1 output pauses.
D1030: Low word of the current number of output pulses from Y0
D1031: High word of the current number of output pulses from Y0
D1032: Low word of the current number of output pulses from Y1
D1033: High word of the current number of output pulses from Y1
2. Flags and special registers for SA/SX/SC series MPU:
M1010: (SA/SX/SC) When On, Y0 output will be continuous with no limitation on the number of pulses.
When Off, the number of output pulses from Y0 will be decided by S2.
M1023: (SA/SX/SC) When On, Y1 output will be continuous with no limitation on the number of pulses.
When Off, the number of output pulses from Y1 will be decided by S2.
M1029: (SA/SX/SC) On when Y0 pulse output is completed.
M1030: (SA/SX/SC) On when Y1 pulse output is completed.
M1078: (SA/SX/SC) Y0 output pauses.
M1079: (SA/SX/SC) Y1 output pauses.
M1102: (SC) On when Y10 pulse output is completed.
M1103: (SC) On when Y11 pulse output is completed.
D1030: (SA/SX/SC) Low word of the current number of output pulses from Y0
D1031: (SA/SX/SC) High word of the current number of output pulses from Y0
D1032: (SA/SX/SC) Low word of the current number of output pulses from Y1
D1033: (SA/SX/SC) High word of the current number of output pulses from Y1
D1348: (SC) Low word of the current number of output pulses from Y10
D1349: (SC) High word of the current number of output pulses from Y10
D1350: (SC) Low word of the current number of output pulses from Y11
D1351: (SC) High word of the current number of output pulses from Y11
3. Flags and special registers for EH/EH2/SV series MPU:

M1010: (EH/EH2/SV) When On, CH0, CH1, CH2 and CH3 will output pulses at END instruction. Off when
the output starts.
M1029: (EH/EH2/SV) On when CH0 pulse output is completed.
M1030: (EH/EH2/SV) On when CH1 pulse output is completed.
M1036: (EH2/SV) On when CH2 pulse output is completed.
M1037: (EH2/SV) On when CH3 pulse output is completed.
M1334: (EH/EH2/SV) CH0 pulse output pauses.
M1520: (EH2/SV) CH2 pulse output pauses.
M1336: (EH/EH2/SV) CH0 pulse output has been sent.
M1522: (EH2/SV) CH2 pulse output has been sent.
M1338: (EH/EH2/SV) CH0 offset pulses enabled.
M1339: (EH/EH2/SV) CH1 offset pulses enabled.
M1340: (EH/EH2/SV) I110 interruption occurs after CH0 pulse output is completed.
M1341: (EH/EH2/SV) I120 interruption after occurs CH1 pulse output is completed.
M1342: (EH/EH2/SV) I130 interruption occurs when CH0 pulse output is sending.
M1343: (EH/EH2/SV) I140 interruption occurs when CH0 pulse output is sending.
M1344: (EH/EH2/SV) CH0 pulse compensation enabled.
M1345: (EH/EH2/SV) CH1 pulse compensation enabled.
M1347: (EH/EH2/SV) CH0 pulse output reset flag
M1348: (EH/EH2/SV) CH1 pulse output reset flag
M1524: (EH2/SV) CH2 pulse output reset flag
M1525: (EH2/SV) CH3 pulse output reset flag
D1220: (EH/EH2/SV) Phase setting of CH0 (Y0, Y1): D1220 determines the phase by the last two bits;
other bits are invalid.
1. K0: Y0 output
2. K1: Y0, Y1 AB-phase output; A ahead of B.
3. K2: Y0, Y1 AB-phase output; B ahead of A.
4. K3: Y1 output
D1221: (EH/EH2/SV) Phase setting of CH1 (Y2, Y3): D1221 determines the phase by the last two bits;
1. K0: Y2 output
4. K3: Y3 output
D1229: (EH2/SV) Phase setting of CH2 (Y4, Y5): D1229 determines the phase by the last two bits; other
bits are invalid.
1. K0: Y4 output
4. K3: Y5 output
D1230: (EH2/SV) Phase setting of CH3 (Y6, Y7): D1230 determines the phase by the last two bits; other
bits are invalid.
1. K0: Y6 output
4. K3: Y7 output
D1328: (EH/EH2/SV) Low word of the number of CH0 offset pulses
D1329: (EH/EH2/SV) High word of the number of CH0 offset pulses
D1330: (EH/EH2/SV) Low word of the number of CH1 offset pulses
D1331: (EH/EH2/SV) High word of the number of CH1 offset pulses
D1332: (EH/EH2/SV) Low word of the number of remaining pulses at CH0
D1333: (EH/EH2/SV) High word of the number of remaining pulses at CH0
D1334: (EH/EH2/SV) Low word of the number of remaining pulses at CH1
D1335: (EH/EH2/SV) High word of the number of remaining pulses at CH1
D1336: (EH/EH2/SV) Low word of the current number of output pulses at CH0
D1337: (EH/EH2/SV) High word of the current number of output pulses at CH0
D1338: (EH/EH2/SV) Low word of the current number of output pulses at CH1
D1339: (EH/EH2/SV) High word of the current number of output pulses at CH1
D1375: (EH2/SV) Low word of the current number of output pulses at CH2
D1376: (EH2/SV) High word of the current number of output pulses at CH2
D1377: (EH2/SV) Low word of the current number of output pulses at CH3
D1378: (EH2/SV) High word of the current number of output pulses at CH3
D1344: (EH/EH2/SV) Low word of the number of compensation pulses at CH0
D1345: (EH/EH2/SV) High word of the number of compensation pulses at CH0
D1346: (EH/EH2/SV) Low word of the number of compensation pulses at CH1
D1347: (EH/EH2/SV) High word of the number of compensation pulses at CH1
4. When there are many high speed output instructions (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) for Y0 output in a program, PLC will
only execute the settings and outputs of the instruction that is first enabled.
5. More explanations on M1347 and M1348:
If M1347 and M1348 is enabled, and when the execution of PLSY instruction has been completed, M1347/M1348
will be reset automatically, i.e. you do not have to turn the status of the drive contact from Off to On before PLSY
instruction and when PLC scans to the instruction (assume the drive contact of the instruction is True), there will
still be pulse output. PLC detects the status of M1347 and M1348 when END instruction is being executed.
Therefore, when the pulse output is completed and if PLSY instruction is a continuous execution one, there will be
a scan time of delay in the next string of pulse output.
Program Example 1:
EI
FEND
M1000
I 001 DPLSY K1000 K1000 Y0
SET M1347
IRET
M1000
I 101 DPLSY K1000 K1000 Y2
SET M1348
IRET
END
Explanations:
a) Whenever X0 is triggered, Y0 will output 1,000 pulses; whenever X1 is triggered, Y2 will output 1,000 pulses.
b) When X triggers Y pulse output, there should be an interval of at least one scan time between the end of Y
pulse output and the next X-triggered output.
Program Example 2:
X1
M1347
X2
PLSY K1000 K1000 Y0
END
Explanations:
When both X1 and X2 are On, Y0 pulse output will keep operating. However, there will be a short pause (approx.
1 scan time) every 1,000 pulses before the output of the next 1,000 pulses.

Controllers
58 PWM Pulse Width Modulation ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F PWM: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Pulse output width S2: Pulse output period D: Pulse output device (please use transistor output module)
Explanations:
1. S1 ≤ S2.
3. In ES/EX/SS series MPU, PWM instruction can only be used once in the program.
4. Flags: See remarks for more details.
5. Range of S1: (t) 0 ~ 32,767ms.
6. Range of S2: (T) 1 ~ 32,767ms (but S1 ≤ S2).
7. D for all series MPU:
MPU ES/EX/SS/SA/SX/SC EH EH2/SV
Output point Y1 Y0, Y2 Y0, Y2, Y4, Y6
8. When PWM instruction is used in the program, its outputs cannot be the same as those of API 57 PLSY and API
59 PLSR.
9. PWM instruction designates the pulse output width in S1 and pulse output period in S2 and outputs from output
device D.
10. For SA/SX/SC series MPU, When, S1 ≤ 0 or S2 ≤ 0 or S1 > S2, there will be operational errors (M1067 and
M1068 will not be On), and there will be no output from the pulse output device. When S1 = S2, the pulse output
device will keep being On.
11. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, When, S1 < 0 or S2 ≤ 0 or S1 > S2, there will be operational errors (M1067 and
M1068 will be On), and there will be no output from the pulse output device. When S1 = 0, M1067 and M1068
will not be On and there will be no output from the pulse output device. When S1 = S2, the the pulse output
device will keep being On.
12. S1 and S2 can be changed when PWM instruction is being executed.
13. For SA/EH series MPU, there is no limitation on the times using this instruction in the program. However, for
SA/SX/SC/EH series MPU, two instructions are allowed to be executed at the same time; for EH2/SV series
MPU, four instructions are allowed to be executed at the same time.
Program Example:
When X0 = On, Y1 will output the pulses as below. When X0 = Off, Y1 output will also be Off.
X0
PWM K1000 K2000 Y1
t=1,000ms
Y1 output
T=2,000ms
Remarks:
1. Flags for ES/EX/SS/SA/SX/SC series MPU:
M1070: Y1 pulse output time unit switch. When Off: 1ms; when On: 100us
2. Flags and special registers for EH/EH2/SV series MPU:
M1010: (EH/EH2/SV) When On, CH0, CH1, CH2 and CH3 will output pulses when END instruction is
executed. Off when the output starts.
M1070: (EH/EH2/SV) The setting of time unit of CH0 has to work with D1371.
M1071: (EH/EH2/SV) The setting of time unit of CH1 has to work with D1372.
M1258: (EH/EH2/SV) CH0 pulse output signals reverse.
M1259: (EH/EH2/SV) CH1 pulse output signals reverse.
M1526: (EH2/SV) CH2 pulse output signals reverse.
M1527: (EH2/SV) CH3 pulse output signals reverse.
M1530: (EH2/SV) The setting of time unit of CH2 has to work with D1373.
M1531: (EH2/SV) The setting of time unit of CH3 has to work with D1374.
D1336: (EH/EH2/SV) Low word of the current number of output pulses from CH0.
D1337: (EH/EH2/SV) High word of the current number of output pulses from CH0.
D1338: (EH/EH2/SV) Low word of the current number of output pulses from CH1.
D1339: (EH/EH2/SV) High word of the current number of output pulses from CH1.
D1371: (EH/EH2/SV) Time unit of CH0 output pulses when M1070 = On.
D1372: (EH/EH2/SV) Time unit of CH1 output pulses when M1071 = On.
D1373: (EH2/SV) Time unit of CH2 output pulses when M1530 = On.
D1374: (EH2/SV) Time unit of CH3 output pulses when M1531 = On.
D1375: (EH2/SV) Low word of the current number of output pulses from CH2.
D1376: (EH2/SV) High word of the current number of output pulses from CH2.
D1377: (EH2/SV) Low word of the current number of output pulses from CH3.
D1378: (EH2/SV) High word of the current number of output pulses from CH3.
3. Time unit settings for EH/EH2/SV series MPU:
You cannot modify M1070 in the program.
D1371, D1372, D1373 and D1374 determine the time unit of the output pulses from CH0, CH1, CH2 and CH3
and the default setting is K1. If your set value is not within the range, the default value will be adopted.
D1371, D1372, D1373, D1374 K0 K1 K2 K3
Time unit 10us 100us 1ms 10ms
4. When there are many high speed pulse output instructions (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) in a program for Y0 output, and
provided these instructions are being executed in the same scan period, PLC will set up and output the
instructions with the fewest steps.

Controllers
59 D PLSR Pulse Ramp ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F PLSR: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DPLSR: 17 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
S3 * * * * * * * * * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Maximum speed of pulse output S2: Total number of output pulses S3: Acceleration/deceleration time (ms)
D: Pulse output device (please use transistor output module)
Explanations:
2. For ES/EX/SS series MPU, PLSR instruction can be used twice in the program but the outputs cannot be
overlapped.
3. Flags: See remarks of API 57 PLSY.
4. Range of S1: 10 ~ 32,767Hz (16-bit); 10 ~ 200,000Hz (32-bit). The maximum speed has to be 10’s multiple; if
not, the 1s digit will be left out. 1/10 of the maximum speed is the variation of one acceleration or deleration.
Please be aware if the variation reponds to the acceleration/deceleration demand from the step motor, in case
the step motor may crash.
5. Range of S2: 110 ~ 32,767 (16-bit); 110 ~ 2,147,483,647 (32-bit). If S2 is less than 110, the pulet output will be
abnormal.
6. Range of S3: below 5,000ms. The acceleration time and deceleration time have to be the same.
a) The acceleration/deceleration time has to be 10 times longer than the maximum scan time (D1012). If not,
the slope of accleration and deceleration will be incorrect.
b) The minimum set value of acceleration/deceleration time can be obtained from the following equation:
90,000
S3 >
S1
If the set value is less than the result obtained from the equation, the acceleration/deceleration time will be
longer. If the set value is less than 90,000/S1, use the result of 90,000/S1 as the set value.
c) The maximum set value of acceleration/deceleration time can be obtained from the following equation:
S2
S3 < X 818
S1
d) The speed variation is fixed to 10 steps. If the input acceleration/deceleration time is longer than the
maximum set value, the acceleration/deceleration time will follow the maximum set time. If shorter than the
minimum set value, the accleration/deceleration time will follow the minimum set time.
7. D for all series MPU:

MPU ES/EX/SS/SA/SX/SC EH EH2/SV
Output point Y0, Y1 Y0, Y2 Y0, Y2, Y4, Y6
8. EH series MPU has two groups pf A-B phase pulse output CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3). EH2/SV series MPU
has four groups pf A-B phase pulse output CH0 (Y0, Y1), CH1 (Y2, Y3), CH2 (Y4, Y5) and CH3 (Y6, Y7). See
remarks of API 57 PLSY for how to set up.
9. PLSR instruction is a pulse output instruction with acclerating and decelerating functions. The pulses accelerate
from the static status to target speed and decelerates when the target distance is nearly reached. The pulse
output will stop when the target distance is reached.
10. When PLSR instruction is executed, after S1, S2 and S3 are set, the pulses will output from D. The output starts
at the frequency of increasing S1/10 at a time. The time forf every frequency is fixed at S3/9.
11. S1, S2 and S3 can be changed when PLSR instruction is being executed.
12. For ES/EX/SS/SA/SX/SC series MPU, when all the Y0 pulses have been sent, M1029 will be On; when all the
Y1 pulses have been sent, M1030 will be On. Next time when PLSR instruction is enabled, M1029 or M1030 will
be 0 again and after the pulse output is completed, it will become 1 again.
13. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, when all the CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulses have been sent, M1029 will be On; when all the
CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulses have been sent, M1030 will be On; when CH2 (Y4, Y5) pulses have been sent, M1036 will
be On; when CH3 (Y6, Y7) pulses have been sent, M1037 will be On. Next time when PLSR instruction is
enabled, M1029, M1030, M1036 or M1037 will be 0 again and after the pulse output is completed, they will
become 1 again.
14. During every acceleration section, the number of pulses ( frequency × time) may not all be integers. PLC will
round up the number to an integer before the output. Therefore, the acceleration time of every section may not
be exactly the same. The offset is determined upon the frequency and the decimal after rounding up. In order to
ensure the correct number of output pulses, PLC will supplement insufficient pulses in the last section.
15. For SA/EH series MPU, there is no limitation on the times of using this instruction in the program. However, for
SA/SX/SC/EH series MPU, two instructions can be exeucted at the same time; for EH2/SV series MPU, four
instructions can be executed at the same time.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, the pulses will output at the maximum frequency 1,000Hz with the total number D10 at 3,000ms
from Y0. The frequency will increase by 1,000/10Hz at a time and every frequency will last for 3,000/9ms.
2. When X10 is Off, the output will be interrupted. When X0 is On again, the counting of pulses will start from 0.
X0
PLSR K1000 D10 K3000 Y0
Output: Y0 or Y2
Pulse speed (Hz)
Time interval among Targeted speed: 10 ~ 200,000Hz

pulse outputs
= S 3 x 1/10 10 10
9 9
Every speed variation
8 8 = S 1 x 1/10
7 S2 7
6 6
5 10-step 10-step 5
variations variations
4 4
3 3
16-bit command:110~32,767PLS
2 32-bit command:110~2,147,483,647PLS2
1 1
Time(Sec)
Accel time ( S 3) Decel time ( S 3)
below 5,000ms below 5,000ms
Remarks:
1. The outputs cannot be the same as those of API 57 PLSY and API 58 PWM.
2. When there are many high speed pulse output instructions (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) in a program for Y0 output, and
provided these instructions are being executed in the same scan period, PLC will set up and output the
instructions with the fewest steps.
3. With M1133 ~ M1135 and D1133, Y0 of SA/SX/SC series MPU can output pulses at up to 50KHz. See 2.11 for
more details of special D and special M.
Range of output frequecies for all series:
MPU ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH EH2/SV
Y0: 10 ~ 200,000Hz
Y0: 10 ~ 10,000Hz Y0: 10 ~ 30,000Hz Y0: 10 ~ 200,000Hz Y2: 10 ~ 200,000Hz
Range
Y1: 10 ~ 10,000Hz Y1: 10 ~ 30,000Hz Y2: 10 ~ 200,000Hz Y4: 10 ~ 200,000Hz
Y6: 10 ~ 200,000Hz
Functions in EH series MPU:

1. Relevant devices for EH/EH2/SV series MPU:
X0
PLSR K1000 D10 K3000 Y0
2. The range of pulse speed for this instruction is 10 ~ 200,000Hz. If the set values of maximum speed and
acceleration/deceleration time exceed the range, PLC will operate by the default value that is within the range.
Operand S1 S2 S3 D
Explanation Max. frequency Total number of pulses Accel/Decel time Output point
16-bit 10 ~ 32,767Hz 110 ~ 32,767
Range 1 ~ 5,000ms Y0 ~ Y7
32-bit 10 ~ 200KHz 110 ~ 2,147,483,647
K0: No output
Kn: Designated See settings of D1220,
Definition Kn: Designated Flag: M1067, M1068
number D1221
frequency
Frequency F
Maximum speed: 10 ~ 200,000Hz
Total number of output pulses
F0 16-bit instruction: 110 ~ 32,767PLS

Start
frequency 32-bit instruction: 110 ~ 2,147,483,647PLS
Accel time Decel time
1 ~ 5,000ms 1 ~ 5,000ms
3. The acceleration/deceleration of EH/EH2/SV series MPU is based on the number of pulses. If the output cannot
reach the maximum acceleration frequency within the acceleration/deceleration time offered, the instruction will
automatically adjust the acceleration/deceleration time and the maximum frequency.
4. The operands have to be set before the execution of the instruction.
5. All acceleration/deceleration instructions are included with the brake function. The brake function will be
enabled when PLC is performing acceleration and the switch contact is suddenly Off. The deceleration will
operate at the slope of the acceleration.
Frequency F
Original acceleration path
Brake path
S1
F0
Time T

Controllers
60 IST Initial State ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F IST: 7 steps
S * * *
D1 *
D2 *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start device in the designated operation mode D1: The smallest No. of designated step in auto mode
D2: The biggest No. of designated step in auto mode
Explanations:
2. Range of D1 and D2: for SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV S20 ~ S899; for ES/EX/SS S20 ~ S127; D2 > D1.
4. ES/SA series MPU does not support E, F index register modification.
5. IST instruction can only be used once in the program.
7. IST instruction is a handy instruction specifically for the initial status of step ladder control procedure to
accommodate special auxiliary relay.
Program Example 1:
1. Use of IST instruction
M1000
IST X10 S20 S60
S X10: Individual operation X14: Continuous operation

X11: Zero return X15: Zero return enabled switch
X12: Step operation X16: Start switch
X13: One cycle operation X17: Stop switch
2. When IST instruction is being executed, the following special auxiliary relays will switch automatically.
M1040: Operation forbidden S0: Initiates manual operation
M1041: Operation starts S1: Initiates zero return
M1042: Pulse output enabled S2: Initiates auto operation
M1047: STL monitor enabled
3. S10 ~ S19 are for zero return and cannot be used as general steps. When S0 ~ S9 are in use, S0 ~ S2 represent
manual operation mode, zero return mode and auto operation mode. Therefore, in the program , you have to
write the circuit of the three steps in advance.
4. When switched to S1 (zero return) mode, any On in S10 ~ S19 will result in no zero return.
5. When switched to S2 (auto operation) mode, any On of the S in D1 ~ D2 or M1043 = On will result in no auto
operation.
Program Example 2:
1. Robot arm control (by IST instruction):
a) Motion request: Separate the big ball and small ball and move them to different boxes. Configure the control
panel for the control.
b) Motions of the robot arm: descending, clipping ball, ascending, right shifting, releasing ball, ascending, left
shifting.
c) I/O devices:
Left-limit X1 Right-limit X2 Right-limit X3

Y0 (big) (small)
Upper-limit X4 Y3 Y2
Y1
Lower-limit X5
Ball size Big Small
sensor X0
2. Operation modes:
Manual operation: Turn On/Off of the load by a single button.
Zero return: Press the zero return button to automatically zero-return the machine.
Auto operation:
a) Single step operation: Press “auto start” button for every one step forward.
b) One cycle operation: Press “auto start” button at the zero point. After a cycle of auto operation, the operation
will stops at the zero point. Press “auto stop” button in the middle of the operation to stop the operation and
press “auto start” to restart the operation. The operation will resume until it meets the zero point.
c) Continuous operation: Press “auto start” button at the zero point to resume the operation. Press “auto stop” to
operate until it meets the zero point.
3. The control panel:
Start Power Start Zero Return X15 Auto Start X16
Stop Power Auto Stop X17
Clip Right
Ball Ascend Shift Step X12
X20 X22 X24 Zero Return X11

One cycle
Operation X13
Release Left
Ball Descend Shift
Manual Continuous
X21 X23 X25 Operation X10 Operation X14
a) Ball size sensor X0.

b) Robot arm: left limit X1, big ball right limit X2, small ball right limit X3, upper limit X4, lower limit X5.
c) Robot arm: ascending Y0, descending Y1, right shifting Y2, left shifting Y3, clipping Y4.
Start Circuit
X0 X1 Y4
M1044
M1000
IST X10 S20 S80
Manual Operation Mode
S0 X20
X21
RST Y4 Clipping released
X22 Y1
Y0 Ascending
X23 Y0 Interlocked
Y1 Descending
X24 X4 Y3
Y2 Right shifting
Interlocked
X25 X4 Y2 Robot arm ascends to upper limit (X4 On)
Y3 Left shifting
Zero Return Mode

SFC:
S1
X15
S10 RST Y4 Clipping released

X4
S11 RST Y2 Right shifting stops

X1
S12 SET M1043 Enable zero return completed flag
Ladder Diagram:
S1 X15
S SET S10 Enter zero return mode
S10

X4
SET S11
S11
S RST Y2 Right shifting stops
Y3
X1
SET S12 Robot arm left shifting to left limit (X1 On)
S12
S SET M1043 Enable zero return completed flag
Auto Operation Modes

SFC:
S2
M1041
M1044
S20 Y1
X5 X5
X0 X0
S30 SET Y4 S40 SET Y4

T0 T1
X4 X4
S31 Y0 S41 Y0
X4 X4
X2 X3
S32 Y2 S42 Y2
X2 X3
X5
S50 Y1
X5
S60 RST Y4
TMR T2 K30
T2
X4
S70 Y0
X4
X1
S80 Y3
X1
S2
Ladder Diagram:
S2 M1041 M1044
S SET S20 Enter auto operation mode
S20
X5 X0
SET S30
X5 X0
SET S40
S30
TMR T0 K30
T0
SET S31
S31 X4
X4
SET S32
S32 X2
S Y2 Right shifting
X2
SET S50
S40
TMR T1 K30
T1
SET S41
S41 X4
X4
SET S42
S42 X3
S Y2 Right shifting
X3
SET S50
S50 X5
X5
SET S60
S60
TMR T2 K30
T2
SET S70
S70 X4
X4
SET S80
S80 X1
S Y3 Robot arm left shifting to left limit (X1 On)
X1
S2
RET
END
Remarks:
Flag explanations:
M1040: When On, all step operations are forbidden.
1. Manual mode: M1040 keeps being On
2. Zero return/one cycle operation mode: Between the timing of pressing “auto stop” and “auto start”
buttons, M1040 will keep being On.
3. Step mode: M1040 keeps being On until “auto start” button is pressed.
4. Continuous operation mode: When PLC goes from STOP to RUN, M1040 will keep being On and
turn Off when “auto start” button is pressed.
M1041: Step operation starts. Special M for initial S2 to move to the next step.
1. Manual/zero return mode: M1041 keeps being Off.
2. Step/one cycle operation mode: M1041 will only be On when “auto start” button is pressed.
3. Continuous operation mode: M1041 keeps On when “auto start” button is pressed; Off when “auto
stop” button is pressed.
M1042: Enabling pulse output. Sending pulses once when “auto start” button is pressed.
M1043: On when zero return is completed.
M1044: In continuous operation mode, M1044 has to be On to more S2 to the next step.
M1045: All output resets are forbidden.
If the machine (not at the zero point) goes
- from manual (S0) to zero return (S1)
- from auto (S2) to manual (S0)
- from auto (S2) to zero return (S1)
1. When M1045 is Off, and any of the S among D1 ~ D2 is On, SET Y output and the step in action will
be reset to Off.
2. When M1045 is On, SET Y output will be remained but the step in action will be reset to Off
If the machine executes zero return (at the zero point) and goes from zero return (S1) to manual (S0),
no matter M1045 is On or Off, SET Y output will be remained but the step in action will be reset to Off.
M1046: STL state setting. On when any of the steps is On. When M1047 is forced On, On of any S will result in
On of M1046. D1040 ~ D1047 will record the No. of the previous 8 points before On of S.
M1047: On for enabling STL monitor. When IST instruction starts to be executed, M1047 will be forced On. In
every scan time, as long as IST instruction is still On, M1047 will be forced On. M1047 monitors all the
S.
D1040 ~
On status of step No. 1 ~ 8
D1047:

Controllers
61 D SER P Search a Data Stack ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SER, SERP: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * * DSER, DSERP: 17 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Start device for data stack comparison S2: Data to be compared D: Start device for storing comparison
result n: Length of data to be compared
Explanations:
1. When S2 are used in device F, only 16-bit instruction is applicable.
2. D will occupy 5 consecutive points.
3. Range of n: for 16-bit instruction 1 ~ 256; for 32-bit instruction 1 ~ 128.
5. The n data in the registers starting from S1 are compared with S2 and the results are stored in the registers
starting from D.
6. In the 32-bit instruction, S1, S2, D and n will designate 32-bit registers.
7. For D, the 16-bit counters and 32-bit counters in SA/SX/SC series MPU cannot be mixed when being used.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, the data stack consist of D10 ~ D19 will be compared against D0 and the result will be stored in
D50 ~ D52. If there are equivalent values appearing during the comparison, D50 ~ D52 will all be 0.
2. The data are compared algebraically. (-10 < 2).
3. The No. of the register with the smallest value among the compared data will be recorded in D53; the biggest
will be recorded in D54. When there are more than one smallest value or biggest value, device D will record the
No. of the register with bigger value.
X0
SER D10 D0 D50 K10
Data to be
S1 Content Data No. Result D Content Description
compared
Total number of data with
D10 88 0 D50 4
S2 equivalent values
D11 100 1 Equal D51 1 No. of the first equivalent value
D12 110 2 D52 8 No. of the last equivalent value
n D13 150 3 D53 7 No. of the smallest value
D14 100 D0 = K100 4 Equal D54 9 No. of the biggest value
D15 300 5
D16 100 6 Equal
D17 5 7 Smallest
D18 100 8 Equal
D19 500 9 Biggest

Controllers
62 D ABSD Absolute Drum Sequencer ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ABSD: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * * DABSD: 17 steps
S2 * * *
D * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Start device in the data table S2: No. of counter D: Start No. of the devices for the comparison results
n: Number of data for comparison
Explanations:
1. When S1 designates KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, the 16-bit instruction has to designate K4 and 32-bit instruction
has to designate K8.
2. Range of n: 1 ~ 64
4. ABSD instruction is for the absolute control of the multiple output pulses generated by the present value in the
counter.
5. S2 of DABSD instruction can designate high speed counters. However, when the present value in the high
speed counter is compared with the target value, the result cannot output immediately owing to the scan time. If
an immediate output is required, please use DHSZ instruction that is exclusively for high speed counters.
Program Example:
1. Before the execution of ABSD instruction, use MOV instruction to write all the set values into D100 ~ D107 in
advance. The even-number D is for lower bound value and the odd-number D is for upper bound value.
2. When X10 = On, the present value in counter C10 will be compared with the four groups of lower and upper
bound values in D100 ~ D107. The comprison results will be stored in M10 ~ M13.
3. When X10 = Off, the original On/Off status of M10 ~ M13 will be remained.
X10
ABSD D100 C10 M10 K4
C10 X11
RST C10
X11
CNT C10 K400
4. M10~ M13 will be On when the present value in C10 ≦ upper bound value or ≧ lower bound value.
Lower bound value Upper bound value Present value in C10 Output
D100 = 40 D101 = 100 40 ≦ C10 ≦ 100 M10 = On
D102 = 120 D103 = 210 120 ≦ C10 ≦ 210 M11 = On
D104 = 140 D105 = 170 140 ≦ C10 ≦ 170 M12 = On
D106 = 150 D107 = 390 150 ≦ C10 ≦ 390 M13 = On
5. If the lower bound value > upper bound value, when C10 < upper bound value (60) or > upper bound value (140),
M12 will be On.
D100 = 40 D101 = 100 40 ≦ C10 ≦ 100 M10 = On
D102 = 120 D103 = 210 120 ≦ C10 ≦ 210 M11 = On
D104 = 140 D105 = 60 60 ≦ C10 ≦ 140 M12 = On
D106 = 150 D107 = 390 150 ≦ C10 ≦ 390 M13 = On
40 100
M10
120 210
M11
60 140
M12
150 390
M13
0 200 400
API Mnemonic Operands Function Controllers

63 INCD Incremental Drum Sequencer ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F INCD: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * *
S2 *
D * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Start device in the data table S2: No. of counter D: Start No. of the devices for the comparison results
n: Number of data for comparison
Explanations:
1. When S1 designates KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, it has to designate K4.
2. In the 16-bit instruction, S2 has to designate C0 ~ C198 and will occupy 2 consecutive No. of counters.
3. Range of n: 1 ~ 64
5. Flag: M1029 (instruciton execution completed)
6. INCD instruction is for the relative control of the multiple output pulses generated by the present value in the
counter.
7. The present value in S2 is compared with S1. S2 will be reset to 0 whenever a comparison is completed. The
current number of data processed in temporarily stored in S2 + 1.
8. When n data have been processed, M1029 will be On for one scan period.
Program Example:
1. Before the execution of INCD instruction, use MOV instruction to write all the set values into D100 ~ D104 in
advance. D100 = 15, D101 = 30, D102 = 10, D103 = 40, D104 = 25.
2. The present value in C10 is compared against the set values in D100 ~ D104. The present value will be reset to
0 whenever a comparison is completed.
3. The current number of data having been processed is temporarily stored in C11.
4. The number of times of reset is temporarily stored in C11.
5. Whenever the content in C11 pluses 1, M10 ~ M14 will also correspondingly change. See the timing diagram
below.
6. After the 5 groups of data have been compared, M1029 will be On for one scan period.
7. When X0 goes from On to Off, C10 and C11 will both be reset to 0 and M10 ~ M14 will all be Off. When X0 is On
again, the instruction will start its execution again from the beginning.
X0 M1013
CNT C10 K100
INCD D100 C10 M10 K5
X0
40
30 30
25
C10 15 15 15
10
Present value
4
C11 3
2
1 0 1 0 1
Present value 0
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M1029

Controllers
64 TTMR Teaching Timer ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F TTMR: 5 steps
D *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
D: Device No. for storing the “On” time of button switch n: Multiple setting
Explanations:
2. Range of n: 0 ~ 2
4. For SA series MPU, TTMR instruction can be used 8 times in the program.
5. The “On” time (unit: 100ms) of the external button switch is stored in device No. D + 1. The “On” time (unit:
second) of the switch is multiplied by n and stored in D.
6. Multiple setting:
When n = 0, unit of D = second
When n = 1, unit of D = 100ms (D × 10)
When n = 2, unit of D = 10ms (D × 100)
Program Example 1:
1. The “On” (being pressed) time of button switch X0 is stored in D1. The setting of n is stored in D0. Therefore, the
button switch will be able to adjust the set value in the timer.
2. When X0 goes Off, the content in D1 will be cleared to 0, but the content in D0 will remain.
X0
TTMR D0 K0
X0
D1
D0
D1
D0
T T
On time (sec) On time (sec)
3. Assume the “On” time of X0 is T (sec.), see the relation between D0, D1 and n in the table below.
n D0 D1 (unit: 100ms)
K0 (unit: s) 1×T D1 = D0 × 10
K1 (unit: 100 ms) 10 × T D1 = D0
K2 (unit: 10 ms) 100 × T D1 = D0/10
Program Example 2:
1. Use TMR instruction to write in 10 groups of set time.
2. Write the set values into D100 ~ D109 in advance.
3. The timing unit for timer T0 ~ T9 is 0.1 sec. The timing unit for the teaching timer is 1 sec.
4. Connect the 1-bit DIP switch to X0 ~ X3 and use BIN instruction to convert the set value of the switch into a bin
value and store it in E.
5. Store the “On” time (sec.) of X10 in D200.
6. M0 refers to the pulses generated from one scan period after the button switch of the teaching timer X10 is
released.
7. Use the set number of the DIP switch as the indirectly designated pointer and send the content in D200 to
D100E (D100 ~ D109).
M10
TMR T0 D100
M11
TMR T1 D101
M19
TMR T9 D109
M1000
BIN K1X0 E
X10
TTMR D200 K0
X10
PLF M0
M0
MOV D200 D100E
Remarks:
1. For SA series MPU, TTMR instruction can be used 8 times in the program. But in a subroutine or interruption
subroutine, the instruction can only be used once.
2. For EH series MPU, there is no limitation on the times using this instruction in the program and 8 instructions can
be executed at the same time.

Controllers
65 STMR Special Timer ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F STMR: 7 steps
S *
m * *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: No. of timer m: Set value in timer (unit: 100ms) D: No. of start output device
Explanations:
1. Range of S: for SA/SX/SC T0 ~ T191; for EH/EH2/SV T0 ~ T199
2. Range of m: 1 ~ 32,767
5. STMR instruction is used for Off-delay, one shot timer and flashing sequence.
6. The No. of timers designated by STMR instructions can be used only once.
Program Example:
1. When X10 = On, STMR instruction will designate timer T0 and set the set value in T0 as 5 seconds.
2. Y0 is the contact of Off-delay. When X10 goes from Off to On, Y0 will be On. When X10 goes from On to Off, Y0
will be Off after a five seconds of delay.
3. When X10 goes from On to Off, there will be a five seconds of Y1 = On output.
4. When X10 goes from Off to On, there will be a five seconds of Y2 = On output.
5. When X10 goes from Off to On, Y3 will be On after a five seconds of delay. When X10 goes from On to Off, Y3
will be Off after a five seconds of delay.
X10
STMR T0 K50 Y0
X10
Y0 5 sec 5 sec
Y1 5 sec 5 sec
Y2 5 sec
Y3 5 sec
6. Add a b contact of Y3 after X10, and Y1 and Y2 can operate for flashing sequence output. When X10 goes Off,
Y0, Y1 and Y3 will be Off and the content in T10 will be reset to 0.
X10 Y3
STMR T10 K50 Y0
X10
Y1
Y2 5 sec 5 sec

Controllers
66 ALT P Alternate State ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ALT, ALTP: 3 steps
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
2. When ALT instruction is executed, “On” and “Off” of D will switch.
3. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (ATLP).
Program Example 1:
When X0 goes from Off to On, Y0 will be On. When X0 goes from Off to On for the second time, Y0 will be Off.
X0
ALTP Y0
X0
Y0
Program Example 2:
Using a single switch to enable and disable control. At the beginning, M0 = Off, so Y0 = On and Y1 = Off. When X10
switches between On/Off for the first time, M0 will be On, so Y1 = On and Y0 = Off. For the second time of On/Off
switching, M0 will be Off, so Y0 = On and Y1 = Off.
X10
ALT M0
M0
Y0
M0
Y1
Program Example 3:
Generating flashing. When X10 = On, T0 will generate a pulse every 2 seconds and Y0 output will switch between On
and Off following the T0 pulses.
X10 T0
TMR T0 K20
T0
ALTP Y0

Controllers
67 RAMP Ramp Variable Value ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F RAMP: 9 steps
S1 *
S2 *
D *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Start of ramp signal S2: End of ramp signal D: Duration of ramp signal n: Scan times
Explanations:
1. Range of n: 1 ~ 32,767
4. Flags: M1026 (enabling RAMP; see remarks for more details); M1029 (RAMP execution completed).
5. This instruction is for obtaining slope (the relation between linearity and scan time). Before using this instruction,
you have to preset the scan time.
6. The set value of start ramp signal is pre-written in D10 and set value of end ramp signal in D11. When X10 = On,
D10 increases towards D11 through n (= 100) scans (the duration is stored in D12). The times of scans are
stored in D13.
7. In the program, first drive M1039 = On to fix the scan time. Use MOV instruction to write the fixed scan time to
the special data register D1039. Assume the scan time is 30ms and take the above program for example, n =
J100, the time for D10 to increase to D11 will be 3 seconds (30ms × 100).
8. When X10 goes Off, the instruction will stop its execution. When X10 goes On again, the content in D12 will be
reset to 0 for recalculation.
9. When M1026 = Off, M1029 will be On and the content in D12 will be reset to the set value in D10.
Program Example:
When this instruction is used with analog signal outputs, it will be able to buffer START and STOP.
X10
RAMP D10 D11 D12 K100
D11
D10
D12
D12
D11
D10
n scans n scans
D10<D11 D10 >D11
The scan times is stored in D13
Remarks:
D12 for enabling On/Off of M1026:
M1026=ON M1026=OFF
X10 Start signal X10 Start signal
D11
D11
D12 D12
D10 D10
M1029 M1029

Controllers
69 SORT Sort Tabulated Data ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SORT: 11 steps
S *
m1 * *
m2 * *
D *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start device for the original data m1: Groups of data to be sorted m2: Number of columns of data
D: Start device for the sorted data n: Reference value for data sorting
Explanations:
1. Range of m1: 1 ~ 32.
2. Range of m2: 1 ~ 6
3. Range of n: 1 ~ m2
5. Flag: M1029 (SORT execution completed).
6. The sorted result is stored in m1 × m2 registers starting from the device designated in D. Therefore, if S and D
designate the same register, the sorted result will be the same as the data designated in S.
7. It is better that the start No. designated in S is 0.
8. The sorting will be completed after m1 times of scans. After the sorting is completed, M1029 will be On.
9. There is no limitation on the times of using this instruction. However, only one instruction can be executed at a
time.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, the sorting will start. When the sorting is completed, M1029 will be On. DO NOT change the data
to be sorted during the execution of the instruction. If you wish to change the data, please make X0 go from Off to
On again.
X0
SORT D0 K5 K5 D50 D100
2. Example table of data sorting
Columns of data: m2
Data Column
Column 1 2 3 4 5
Row Students No. Physics English Math Chemistry
1 (D0) 1 (D5) 90 (D10) 75 (D15) 66 (D20) 79

Groups of data: m1
2 (D1) 2 (D6) 55 (D11) 65 (D16) 54 (D21) 63
3 (D2) 3 (D7) 80 (D12) 98 (D17) 89 (D22) 90
4 (D3) 4 (D8) 70 (D13) 60 (D18) 99 (D23) 50
5 (D4) 5 (D9) 95 (D14) 79 (D19) 75 (D24) 69
Sorted data when D100 = K3.
Columns of data: m2
Data Column
Column 1 2 3 4 5
1 (D50) 4 (D55) 70 (D60) 60 (D65) 99 (D70) 50

Groups of data: m1
2 (D51) 2 (D56) 55 (D61) 65 (D66) 54 (D71) 63
3 (D52) 1 (D57) 90 (D62) 75 (D67) 66 (D72) 79
4 (D53) 5 (D58) 95 (D63) 79 (D68) 75 (D73) 69
5 (D54) 3 (D59) 80 (D64) 98 (D69) 89 (D74) 90
Sorted data when D100 = K5.
Columns of data: m2
Data Column
Column 1 2 3 4 5
1 (D50) 4 (D55) 70 (D60) 60 (D65) 99 (D70) 50

Groups of data: m1
2 (D51) 2 (D56) 55 (D61) 65 (D66) 54 (D71) 63
3 (D52) 5 (D57) 95 (D62) 79 (D67) 75 (D72) 69
4 (D53) 1 (D58) 90 (D63) 75 (D68) 66 (D73) 79
5 (D54) 3 (D59) 80 (D64) 98 (D69) 89 (D74) 90

Controllers
70 D TKY Ten Key Input ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F TKY: 7 steps
S * * * * DTKY: 13 steps
D1 * * * * * * * *
D2 * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start device for key input D1: Device for storing keyed-in value D2: Key output signal
Explanations:
1. S will occupy 10 consecutive points; D2 will occupy 11 consecutive points.
3. For SA series MPU, S and D2 do not support E, F index register modification.
4. This instruction designates 10 external input points (representing decimal numbers 0 ~ 9) starting from S. The 10
points are respectively connected to 10 keys. By pressing the keys, you can enter a 4-digit decimal figure 0 ~
9,999 (16-bit instruction) or a 8-digit figure 0 ~ 99,999,999 (32-bit instruction) and store the figure in D1. D2 is
used for storing key status.
time.
Program Example:
1. Connect the 10 input points starting from X0 to the 10 keys (0 ~ 9). When X20 = On, the instruction will be
executed and the keyed-in values will be stored in D0 in bin form. The key status will be stored in M10 ~ M19.
X20
TKY X0 D0 M10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0V +24V S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11
PLC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 number key
BCD value 1-digit BCD code
overflow 10
3
10
2
10
1
10
0
BCD value
BIN value D0
2. As shown in the timing chart below, the 4 points X5, X3, X0, and X1 connected to the keys are entered in order
and you can obtain the result 5,301. Store the result in D0. 9,999 is the maximum value allowed to stored in D0.
Once the value exceeds 4 digits, the highest digit will overflow.
3. M12 = On when from X2 is pressed to the other key is pressed. Same to other keys.
4. When any of the keys in X0 ~ X11 is pressed, one of M10 ~ 19 will be On correspondingly.
5. M20 = On when any of the keys is pressed.
6. When X20 goes Off, the keyed-in value prior to D0 will remain unchanged, but M10 ~ M20 will all be Off.
X0 3
X1 4
X3 2
X5 1
M10
M11
M13
M15
Key output
signal
M20 1 2 3 4

Controllers
71 D HKY Hexadecimal Key Input ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F HKY: 9 steps
S * DHKY: 17 steps
D1 *
D2 * * * * *
D3 * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start device for key scan input D1: Start device for key scan output D2: Device for storing keyed-in value
D3: Key output signal
Explanations:
2. D1 will occupy 4 consecutive points.
3. D3 will occupy 8 consecutive points.
5. For SA series MPU, S, D1 and D3 do not support E, F index register modification.
6. Flags: M1029 (On whenever a matrix scan period is completed); M1167 (HKY input modes switch). See remarks
for more details.
7. This instruction designates 4 continuous external input points starting from S and 4 continuous external input
points starting from D1 to construct a 16-key keyboard by a matrix scan. The keyed-in value will be stored in D2
and D3 is used for storing key status. If several keys are pressed at the same time, the first key pressed has the
priority.
8. The keyed-in value is termporarily stored in D0. When the 16-bit instruction HKY is in use, 9,999 is the maximum
value D0 is able to store. When the value exceeds 4 digits, the highest digit will overflow. When the 32-bit
instruction DHKY is in use, 99,999,999 is the maximum value D0 is able to store. When the value exceeds 8
digits, the highest digit will overflow.
time.
Program Example:
1. Designate 4 input points X10 ~ X13 and the other 4 input points Y10 ~ Y13 to construct a 16-key keyboard.
When X4 = On, the instruction will be executed and the keyed-in value will be stored in D0 in bin form. The key
status will be stored in M0 ~ M7.
X4
HKY X10 Y10 D0 M0
2. Key in numbers:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 number key
BCD value 1-digit BCD code
overflow 103 102 101 100
BCD value
BIN value D0
3. Function keys input:

a) When A is pressed, M0 will be On and retained. When
D is pressed next, M0 will be Off, M3 will be On and F E D C B A
retained.
b) When many keys are pressed at the same time, the M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
first key pressed has the priority.
4. Key output signal:
a) When any of A ~ F is pressed, M6 will be On for once.
b) When any of 0 ~ 9 is pressed, M7 will be On for once.
5. When X4 goes Off, the keyed-in value prior to D0 will remain unchanged, but M0 ~ M7 will all be Off.
6. External wiring:
C D E F
8 9 A B
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
24G +24V S/S X10 X11 X12 X13
C Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13
PLC (transistor output)
Remarks:
1. When this instruction is being executed, it will require 8 scans to obtain one valid keyed-in value. A scan period
that is too long or too short may result in poor keyed-in effect, which can be avoided by the following methods:
a) If the scan period is too short, I/O may not be able to respond in time, resulting in not being able to read the
keyed-in value correctly. In this case, please fix the scan time.
b) If the scan period is too long, the key may respond slowly. In this case, write this instruction into the time
interruption subroutine to fix the time for the execution of this instruction.
2. Functions of M1167:
a) When M1167 = On, HKY instruction will be able to input the hexadecimal value of 0 ~ F.
b) When M1167 = Off, HKY instruction will see A ~ F as function keys.
3. Functions of D1037 (only supports EH/EH2/SV series MPU):
Write D1037 to set the overlapping time for keys (unit: ms). The overlapping time will vary upon different program
scan time and the settings in D1037.

Controllers
72 DSW Digital Switch ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DSW: 9 steps
S *
D1 *
D2 * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start device for switch scan input D1: Start device for switch scan output D2: Device for storing the set value
of switch n: Groups of switches
Explanations:
1. Range of n: 1 ~ 2
3. Flag: M1029 (DSW execution completed)
4. This instruction designates 4 or 8 consecutive external input points starting from S and 4 consecutive external
input points starting from D1 to scan read 1 or 2 4-digit DIP switches.The set values of DIP switches are stored in
D2. n decides to read 1 or 2 4-digit DIP switches.
5. There is no limitation on the times of using this instruction in the program. However, for SA series MPU, only one
instruction can be executed at a time. For EH series MPU, two instructions are allowed to be executed at a time.
Program Example:
1. The first group of DIP switches consist of X20 ~ X23 and Y20 ~ Y23. The second group of switches consist of
X24 ~ X27 and Y20 ~ Y23. When X10 = On, the instruction will be executed and the set values of the first group
switches will be read and converted into bin values before being stored in D20. The set values of the second
group switches will be read, converted into bin values and stored in D21.
X10
DSW X20 Y20 D20 K2
2. When X10 = On, the Y20 ~ Y23 auto scan cycle will be On. Whenever a scan cycle is completed, M1029 will be
On for a scan period.
3. Please use transistor output for Y20 ~ Y23. Every pin 1, 2, 4, 8 shall be connected to a diode (0.1A/50V) before
connecting to the input terminals on PLC.
X10 Cyclic operation
Y20 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
Y21 0.1s
Interruption
Y22 0.1s
Y23 0.1s
M1029 Execution completed
4. Wiring for DIP swich input:
0 1 2 3
DIP switches for 10 10 10 10
BCD wiring
Must connect to a
diode (1N4148) in
series
1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8
0V +24V S/S X20 X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27
The first group The second group
PLC
C Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23
0 1 2 3
10 10 10 10
Remarks:
1. When n = K1, D2 will occupy one register. When n = K2, D2 will occupy 2 consecutive registers.
2. Follow the methods below for the transistor scan output:
a) When X10 = On, DSW instruction will be executed. When X10 goes Off, M10 will keep being On until the
scan output completes a scan cycle and go Off.
b) When X10 is used as a button switch, whenever X10 is pressed once, M10 will be reset to Off when the scan
output designated by DSW instruction completes a scan cycle. The DIP switch data will be read completely
and the scan output will only operate during the time when the button switch is pressed. Therefore, even the
scan output is a transistor type, the life span of the transistor can be extended because it does not operate
too frequently.
X10
SET M10
M10
DSW X20 Y20 D20 K2
M1029
RST M10

Controllers
73 SEGD P Seven Segment Decoder ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SEGD, SEGDP: 5 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source device to be decoded D: Output device after the decoding
Explanations:
See the specifications of each model for their range of use.
Program Example:
When X10 = On, the contents (0 ~ F in hex) of the lower 4 bits (b0 ~ b3) of D10 will be decoded into a 7-segment
display for output. The decoded results will be stored in Y10 ~ Y17. If the content exceeds 4 bits, the lower 4 bits are
still used for the decoding.
X10
SEGD D10 K2Y10
Decoding table of the 7-segment display:
Bit Composition Status of each segment

Hex Data
combi- of the 7-
displayed
nation segment display
0 0000 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF
1 0001 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 0010 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
3 0011 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
4 0100 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
5 0101 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
6 0110 a ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON
7 0111 g b ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF
8 1000 c ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
d
9 1001 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON
A 1010 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON
B 1011 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON
C 1100 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
D 1101 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON
E 1110 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
F 1111 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON

Controllers
74 SEGL Seven Segment with Latch ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SEGL: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * *
D *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source device to be displayed in 7-segment display D: Start device for 7-segment display scan output
n: Polarity setting of output signal and scan signal
Explanations:
1. Range of n: 0 ~ 7. See remarks for more details.
2. For ES series MPU, the instruction can only be used once in the program. For EH series MPU, the instruction
can be used twice in the program. For SA series MPU, there is no limitation on the times of using the instruction,
but only one instruction can be executed at a time.
3. For ES/EX/SS/SA/SX/SC series MPU, the last digit of D should be 0 and it does not support E, F index register
modification.
4. Flag: M1029 (SEGL execution completed)
5. This instruction occupies 8 or 12 continuous external input points starting from D for displaying 1 or 2 4-digit
7-segment display data and outputs of scanned signals. Every digit carries a 7-segment display drive (to convert
the BCD codes into 7-segment display signal). The drive also carries latch control signals to retain the
7-segment display.
6. n decides there be 1 group or 2 groups of 4-digit 7-segment display and designates the polarity for the output.
7. When there is 1 group of 4-digit output, 8 output points will be occupied. When there are 2 groups of 4-digit
output, 12 output points will be occupied.
8. When this instruction is being executed, the scan output terminals will circulate the scan in sequence. When the
drive contact of the instruction goes from Off to On again, the scan output terminal will restart the scan again.
Program Example:
1. When X10 = On, this instruction starts to be executed, Y10 ~ Y17 construct a 7-segment display scan circuit.
The value in D10 will be converted into BCD codes and sent to the first group 7-segment display. The value in
D11 will be converted into BCD codes as well and sent to the second group 7-segment display. If the values in
D10 and D11 exceed 9,999, operational error will occur.
X10
SEGL D10 Y10 K4
2. When X10 = On, Y14 ~ Y17 will circulate the scan automatically. Every cycle requires 12 scan period. Whenever
a cycle is completed, M1029 will be On for a scan period.
3. When there is 1 group of 4-digit 7-segment display, n = 0 ~ 3.

a) Connect the already decoded 7-segment display terminals 1, 2, 4, 8 in parallel an connect them to Y10 ~
Y13 on the PLC. Connect the latch terminals of each digit to Y14 ~ Y17 on the PLC.
b) When X10 = On, the instruction will be executed and the content in D10 will be sent to the 7-segment
displays in sequence by the circulation of Y14 ~ Y17.
4. When there is 2 groups of 4-digit 7-segment display, n = 4 ~ 7.
a) Connect the already decoded 7-segment display terminals 1, 2, 4, 8 in parallel an connect them to Y20 ~
Y23 on the PLC. Connect the latch terminals of each digit to Y14 ~ Y17 on the PLC.
b) The contents in D10 are sent to the first group 7-segment display. The contents in D11 are sent the the
second group 7-segment display. If D10 = K1234 and D11 = K4321, the first group will display 1 2 3 4, and
the second group will display 4 3 2 1.
5. Wiring of the 7-segment display scan output:
COM Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 COM Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 COM Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23
1 2 4 8 0 1 2 3
10 10 10 10
1 1
10 3 10 2 10 100 10 3 10 2 10 10 0
1 1
2 V+ 2
V+
4 4
8 8
The first group The second group
Remarks:
1. ES/EX/SS series MPU (V4.9 and above) supports this instruction but only supports 1 group of 4-digit 7-segment
display and 8 points of output. This instruction can only be used once in the program. Range of n: 0 ~ 3.
2. D of ES/EX/SS series MPU can only designate Y0.
3. When this instruction is executed, the scan time has to be longer than 10ms. If the scan time is shorter than
10ms, please fix the scan time at 10ms.
4. n is for setting up the polarity of the transistor output and the number of groups of the 4-digit 7-segment display.
5. The output point must be a transistor module of NPN output type with open collector outputs. The output has to
connect to a pull-up resistor to VCC (less than 30VDC). Therefore, when output point Y is On, the signal output
will be in low voltage.
VCC
Pull-up resistor
Drive Y
Y
Signal output
On
PLC
6. Positive logic (negative polarity) output of BCD code

BCD value Y output (BCDcode) Signal output
b3 b2 b1 b0 8 4 2 1 A B C D
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
7. Negative logic (positive polarity) output of BCD code
BCD value Y output (BCDcode) Signal output
b3 b2 b1 b0 8 4 2 1 A B C D
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
8. Scan latched signal display
Positive logic (negative polarity) Negative logic (positive polarity)
Y output (latch) Output signal Y output (latch) Output signal
1 0 0 1
9. Settings of n:
Groups of 7-segment display 1 group 2 groups
Y output of BCD code ＋－＋－

Scan latched signal display ＋－＋－＋－＋－
n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
＋: Positive logic (negative polarity) output －: Negative logic (positive polarity) output
10. The polarity of transistor output and the polarity of the 7-segment display input can be the same or different by
the setting of n.

Controllers
75 ARWS Arrow Switch ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ARWS: 9 steps
S * * * *
D1 * * * * *
D2 *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start device for key input D1: Device to be displayed in 7-segment display D2: Start device for 7-segment
display scan output n: Polarity setting of output signal and scan signal
Explanations:
2. Range of n: 0 ~ 3. See remarks of API 74 SEGL for more details.
3. There no limitation on the times of using this instruction in the program. However, only one instruction is allowed
to be executed at a time.
4. S and D2 of SA series MPU do not support E, F index register modification and can only designate the devices
whose last digit is 0 (e.g. Y0, Y10….)
6. The output points designated by this instruction shall be transistor output.
7. When using this instruction, please fix the scan time, or place this instruction in the time interruption subroutine
(I6□□ ~ I8□□).
Program Example:
1. When this instruction is executed, X20 is defined as down key, X21 is defined as up key, X22 is defined as right
key and X23 is defined as left key. The keys are used for setting up and displaying external set values. The set
values (range: 0 ~ 9,999) are stored in D20.
2. When X10 = On, digit 103 will be the valid digit for setup. If you press the left key at this time, the valid digit will
circulate as 103 → 100 → 101 → 102 → 103 → 100.
3. If you press the right key at this time, the valid digit will circulate as 103 → 102 → 101 → 100 → 103 → 102.
During the circulation, the digit indicators connected Y24 ~ Y27 will also be On interchangeably following the
circulation.
4. If you press the up key at this time, the valid digit will change as 0 → 1 → 2 … → 8 → 9 → 0 →1. If you
press the down key, the valid digit will change as 0 → 9 → 8 … → 1 → 0 → 9. The changed value will also
be displayed in the 7-segment display.
X10
ARWS X20 D20 Y20 K0
Y24 Add up
Y25
Digit indication
Y26 LED
X21
Y27
Move to left X23 X22 Move to right

103 102 10 1 10 0
1
Y20 X20
2
Y21
4
Y22
8
Y23
Minus down
7-segment display for the 4-digit set value

The 4 switches are used for moving the digits
and increasing/decreasing set values.

Controllers
76 ASC ASCII Code Conversion ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ASC: 11 steps
S
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: English letter to be converted into ASCII code D: Device for storing ASCII code
Explanations:
1. S: enter 8 Engligh letters by using WPLSoft on computer or enter ASCII code by HPP.
3. Flag: M1161 (8/16 bit mode switch)
4. If the execution of this instruction is connected to a 7-segment display, the error message can be displayed by
English letters.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, convert A ~ H into ASCII code and stored it in D0 ~ D3.
X0
ASC ABC D EFGH D0
b15 b0
D0 42H (B) 41H (A)
D1 44H (D) 43H (C)
D2 46H (F) 45H (E)
D3 48H (H) 47H (G)
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits
2. When M1161 = On, every ASCII code converted from the letters will occupy the lower 8 bits (b7 ~ b0) of a
register. The upper 8 bits are invalid (filled by 0). One register stores a letter.
b15 b0
D0 00 H 41H (A)
D1 00 H 42H (B)
D2 00 H 43H (C)
D3 00 H 44H (D)
D4 00 H 45H (E)
D5 00 H 46H (F)
D6 00 H 47H (G)
D7 00 H 48H (H)
Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits

Controllers
77 PR Print (ASCII Code Output) ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F PR: 5 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Device for storing ASCII code D: External ASCII code output points
Explanations:
3. This instruction can only be used twice in the program.
5. Flags: M1029 (PR execution completed); M1027 (number of PR outputs)
6. This instruction will output the ASCII codes in the 4 registers starting from S from the output devices in the order
designated in D.
Program Example 1:
1. Use API 76 ASC to convert A ~ H into ASCII codes and store them in D0 ~ D3 and use this instruction to output
the codes in sequence.
2. When M1027 = Off and X10 goes On, the instruction will be executed. Designate Y10 (low bits) ~ Y17 (high bits)
as the data output points and Y20 for scan signals. Designate Y21 for the monitor signals during the execution.
In this mode, you can execute an output for 8 letters in sequence. During the output, if the drive contact goes Off,
the data output will stop immediately and all the outputs will go Off.
3. During the execution of the instruction, when X10 goes Off, all the data output will be interrupted. When X10 is
On again, the output will be restarted.
X10
PR D0 Y10
X10 start signal
Y10 ~ Y17 data

A B C D H
T: scan time (ms)
T T T
Y20 scan signal
Y21 being executed
Program Example 2:
1. PR instruction is for outputing a string of 8 bits. When the special auxiliary relay M1027 = Off, PR is able to
execute an output of maximum 8 letters in string. When M1027 = On, PR is able to execute an output of 1 ~ 16
letters in string.
2. When M1027 = On and X10 goes from Off to On, the instruction will be executed. Designate Y10 (low bits) ~ Y17
(high bits) as the data output points and Y20 for scan signals. Designate Y21 for the monitor signals during the
execution. In this mode, you can execute an output for 16 letters in sequence. During the output, if the drive
contact goes Off, the data output will stop after it is completed.
3. When the string encounters 00H (NUL), the string output will finish. The letters coming after it will not be
processed.
4. When X10 goes from On to Off, the data output will automatically stop after one cycle. If X10 keeps being On,
M1029 will not be enabled.
M1002
SET M1027
X10
PR D0 Y10
X10 start signal
Y10 ~ Y17 data First letter Last letter
T T T T: scan time or the time of

the inserted interruption
Y20 scan signal
Y21 being executed
M1029 (execution completed)
Remarks:
1. Please use transistor output for the output designated by this instruction.
2. When using this instruction, please fix the scan time or place this instruction in a timed interruption subroutine.

Controllers
Read CR Data in Special
78 D FROM P ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
Modules
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F FROM, FROMP: 9 steps
m1 * * *
m2 * * * DFROM, DFROMP: 17 steps
D * * * * * * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
m1: No. of special module m2: CR# in special module to be read D: Device for storing read data n:
Number of data to be read at a time
Explanations:
1. Range of m1 (16-bit and 32-bit): for ES/SA: 0 ~ 7, for EH/EH2 :0 ~ 255, for SV: 0 ~ 107.
2. Range of m2 (16-bit and 32-bit): for ES/SA: 0 ~ 48, for EH: 0 ~ 254, for EH2/SV: 0 ~ 499.
3. Range of n:
a) 16-bit: for ES/SA: 1 ~ (49 – m2), for EH: 1 ~ (255 – m2), for EH2/SV: 1 ~ (500 – m2).
b) 32-bit: for ES/SA: 1 ~ (49 – m2)/2, for EH: 1 ~ (255 – m2)/2, for EH2/SV: 1 ~ (500 – m2)/2.
4. ES series MPU does not support E, F index register modification.
5. m1, m2 and n of EH series MPU do not support word device D.
6. Flag: M1083 (On when allowing interruptions during FROM/TO instruction).
7. This instruction is for reading the data in the CR in special modules.
8. The 16-bit instruction can designate D = K1 ~ K4; the 32-bit instruction can designate D = K1 ~ K8.
Program Example:
1. Read CR#29 of special module No.0 into D0 and CR#30 into D1. Only 2 groups of data is read at a time (n = 2).
2. When X0 = On, the instruction will be executed. When X0 = Off, the instruction will not be executed and the data
read will not be changed.
X0
FROM K0 K29 D0 K2

Controllers
Write CR Data into Special
79 D TO P ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
Modules
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F TO, TOP: 9 steps
m1 * * * DTO, DTOP: 17 steps
m2 * * *
S * * * * * * * * * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
m1: No. of special module m2: CR# in special module to be written S: Data to be written in CR n: Number
of data to be written at a time
Explanations:
1. Range of m1 (16-bit and 32-bit): for ES/SA: 0 ~ 7, for EH/EH2: 0 ~ 255, for SV: 0 ~ 107.
2. Range of m2 (16-bit and 32-bit): for ES/SA: 0 ~ 48, for EH: 0 ~ 254, for EH2/SV: 0 ~ 499.
3. Range of n:
a) 16-bit: for ES/SA: 1 ~ (49 – m2), for EH: 1 ~ (255 – m2), for EH2/SV: 1 ~ (500 – m2).
b) 32-bit: for ES/SA: 1 ~ (49 – m2)/2, for EH: 1 ~ (255 – m2)/2, for EH2/SV: 1 ~ (500 – m2)/2.
5. m1, m2 and n of EH series MPU do not support word device D.
6. Flag: M1083 (On when allowing interruptions during FROM/TO instruction). See remarks for more details.
7. This instruction is for writing the data into the CR in special modules.
8. The 16-bit instruction can designate S = K1 ~ K4; the 32-bit instruction can designate S = K1 ~ K8.
Program Example:
1. Use 32-bit instruction DTO to write the content in D11 and D10 into CR#13 and CR#12 of special module No.0.
Only 1 group of data is written in at a time (n = 1).
2. When X0 = On, the instruction will be executed. When X0 = Off, the instruction will not be executed and the data
written will not be changed.
X0
DTO K0 K12 D10 K1
3. Operand rules
a) m1: The No. of special modules connected to PLC MPU. No. 0 is the module closest to te MPU. Maximum 8
modules are allowed to connected to a PLC MPU and they will not occupy any I/O points.
b) m2: CR#. CR (control register) is the n 16-bit memories built in the special module, numbered in decimal as
#0 ~ #n. All operation status and settings of the special module are contained in the CR.
c) FROM/TO instruction is for reading/writing 1 CR at a time. DFROM/DTO instruction is for reading/writing 2
CRs at a time.
Higher 16-bit Lower 16-bit

CR #10 CR #9 Designated CR number
d) Number of groups “n” to be transmitted: n = 2 in 16-bit instructions and n = 1 in 32-bit instructions mean
the same.
Designated device Designated CR Designated device Designated CR
D0 CR #5 D0 CR #5
D1 CR #6 D1 CR #6
D2 CR #7 D2 CR #7
D3 CR #8 D3 CR #8
D4 CR #9 D4 CR #9
D5 CR #10 D5 CR #10
16-bit instruction when n=6 32-bit instruction when n=3
4. ES/EX/SS series MPU does not have M1083. During the execution of FROM/TO instruction, all external or
internal interruption subroutines will be forbidden. The interruptions are allowed only after FROM/TO instruction
finishes its execution. FROM/TO instruction can also be used in an interruption subroutine.
5. M1083 for switching instruction modes in SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV series MPU:
a) When M1083 = Off, during the execution of FROM/TO instruction, all external or internal interruption
subroutines will be forbidden. The interruptions are allowed only after FROM/TO instruction finishes its
execution. FROM/TO instruction can also be used in an interruption subroutine.
b) When M1083 = On and an interruption signal occurs during the execution of FROM/TO instruction, the
interruption will be processed first (with a 100us delay) and the execution of FROM/TO will be stopped. After
the interruption subroutine finishes its execution, the program will jump to the next instructio of FROM/TO.
FROM/TO cannot be used in an interruption subroutine.
FROM/TO Application Example 1:

Adjust the A/D conversion curve of DVP-04AD. Set the OFFSET value of CH1 as 0V (= K0LSB) and GAIN value as
2.5V (= K2,000LSB).
M1002
TO K0 K1 H0 K1
TO K0 K33 H0 K1
X0
TO K0 K18 K0 K1
TO K0 K24 K2000 K1
1. Write H0 to CR#1 of anlog input module No. 0 and set CH1 as mode 0 (voltage input: -10V ~ +10V).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow OFFSET/GAIN tuning in CH1 ~ CH4.
3. When X0 goes from Off to On, write the OFFSET value K0 LSB into CR#18 and the GAIN value K2,000 LSB into
CR#24.

Adjust the A/D conversion curve of DVP-04AD. Set the OFFSET value of CH2 as 2mA (= K400LSB) and GAIN value
as 18mA (= K3,600LSB).
M1002
TO K0 K1 H18 K1
TO K0 K33 H0 K1
X0
TO K0 K19 K400 K1
TO K0 K25 K3600 K1
1. Write H18 to CR#1 of anlog input module No. 0 and set CH2 as mode 3 (current input: -20mA ~ +20mA).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow OFFSET/GAIN tuning in CH1 ~ CH4.
CR#25.

Adjust the D/A conversion curve of DVP-02DA. Set the OFFSET value of CH2 as 0mA (= K0LSB) and GAIN value as
10mA (= K1,000LSB).
M1002
TO K1 K1 H18 K1
TO K1 K33 H0 K1
X0
TO K1 K22 K0 K1
TO K1 K28 K1000 K1
1. Write H18 to CR#1 of anlog output module No. 1 and set CH2 as mode 3 (current output: 0mA ~ +20mA).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow OFFSET/GAIN tuning in CH1 and CH2.
CR#28.

Adjust the D/A conversion curve of DVP-02DA. Set the OFFSET value of CH2 as 2mA (= K400LSB) and GAIN value
as 18mA (= K3,600LSB).
1. Write H10 to CR#1 of anlog output module No. 1 and set CH2 as mode 2 (current output: +4mA ~ +20mA).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow OFFSET/GAIN tuning in CH1 and CH2.
CR#29.
M1002
TO K1 K1 H10 K1
TO K1 K33 H0 K1
X0
TO K1 K23 K400 K1
TO K1 K29 K3600 K1

When DVP-04AD-S is used with DVP-02DA-S
M1000
FROM K0 K0 D0 K1
LD= H88 D0 TO K0 K1 H3030 K1
TO K0 K2 K32 K2
FROM K0 K6 D20 K4
M1000
FROM K1 K0 D0 K1
CMP H49 D0 M0
M1013
INC D100
ADD D101 K5 D101
LD= K4000 D100 RST D100
LD= K4000 D101 RST D101

M1
TO K1 K1 H10 K1
M1
TO K1 K10 D100 K2
END
1. Read CR#0 of the extension module No. 0 and see if it is DVP-04AD-S: H88.
2. If D0 = H88, set the input modes: (CH1, CH3) mode 0, (CH2, CH4) mode 3.
3. Set the average times in CH1 and CH2 from CR#2 and CR#3 as K32.
4. Read the average of input signals at CH1 ~ CH4 from CR#6 ~ CR#9 and store the 4 data in D20 ~ D23.
5. Read CR#0 of the extension module No. 1 and see if it is DVP-02DA-S: H49.
6. D100 increases K1 and D101 increases K5 every second.
7. When D100 and D101 reach K4,000, they will be cleared as 0.
8. See if the model is DVP-02DA-S when M1 = On. If so, set up output mode: CH1 in mode 0 and CH2 is mode 2.
9. Write the output settings of D100 and D101 into CR#10 and CR#11. The analog output will change by the
changes in D100 and D101.

Controllers
80 RS Serial Communication Instruction ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F RS: 9 steps
S *
m * * *
D *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start device for the data to be transmitted m: Length of data to be transmitted D: Start device for receiving
data n: Length of data to be received
Explanations:
1. Range of m: 0 ~ 256
2. Range of n: 0 ~ 256
5. This instruction is a handy instruction exclusively for MPU to use RS-485 serial communication interface. The
user has to pre-store word data in S data register, set up data length m and the data receiving register D and
received data length n. If E, F index registers are used to modify S and D, the user cannot change the set values
of E and F when the instruction is being executed; otherwise errors may cause in data writing or reading.
6. Designate m as K0 if you do not need to send data. Designate n as K0 if you do not need to receive data.
7. There is no limitation on the times of using this instruction in the program, but only one instruction is allowed to
be executed at a time.
8. During the execution of RS instruction, changing the data to be transmitted will be invalid.
9. If the peripheral devices, e.g. AC motor drive, are equipped with RS-485 serial communication and its
communication format is open, you can use RS instruction to design the program for the data transmission
between PLC and the peripheral device.
10. If the communication format of the peripheral device is Modbus, DVP series PLC offers handy communication
instructions API 100 MODRD, API 101 MODWR, and API 150 MODRW, to work with the device. See
explanations of the instructions in this application manual.
11. For the special auxiliary relays M1120 ~ M1161 and special data registers D1120 ~ D1131 relevant to RS-485
communication, see remarks for more details.
Program Example 1:
1. Write the data to be transmitted in advance into registers starting from D100 and set M1122 (sending request
flag) as On.
2. When X10 = On, RS instruction will be executed and PLC will start to wait for the sending and receiving of data.
D100 starts to continuousl send out 10 data and when the sending is over, M1122 will be automatically reset to
Off (DO NOT use the program to execute RST M1122). After 1ms of waiting, PLC will start to receive the 10 data.
Store the data in consecutive registers starting from D120.
3. When the receiving of data is completed, M1123 will automatically be On. After the program finishes processing
the received data, M1123 has to be reset to Off and the PLC will start to wait for the sending and receiving of
data again. DO NOT use the program to continuously execute RST M1123.
M1002
Set up communication protocol 9600,7,E,1
MOV H86 D1120
Set up communication time-out 100ms

MOV K100 D1129
Sending request
pulses
Write in the data to be transmitted in advance
SET M1122 Set up sending request

X10
RS D100 K10 D120 K10
Receiving
completed
Process of received data
M1123
Receiving of data is completed the flag is reset.
RST M1123
The flag is reset.
Program Example 2:
Switching between 8-bit mode (M1161 = On) and 16-bit mode (M1161 = Off)
1. 8-bit mode:
The head code and tail code of the data are set up by M1126 and M1130 together with D1124 ~ D1126. When
PLC is executing RS instruction, the head code and tail code set up by the user will be sent out automatically.
M1161 = On indicates PLC in 8-bit conversion mode. The 16-bit data will be divided into the higher 8 bits and
lower 8 bits. The higher 8 bits are ignored and only the lower 8 bits are valid for data transmission.
M1000
M1161
X0
RS D100 K4 D120 K7
Sending data: (PLC -> external equipment)
STX D100L D101L D102L D103L ETX1 ETX2
Head source data register, starting from Tail code Tail code
code the lower 8 bits of D100 1 2
length = 4
Receiving data: (External equipment -> PLC)
D120L D121L D122L D123L D124L D125L D126L
Head received data register, starting from Tail code Tail code
length = 7
When receiving data, PLC will receive the head code and tail code of the data from the external equipment;
therefore, the user has to be aware of the setting of data length n.
2. 16-bit mode:
The head code and tail code of the data are set up by M1126 and M1130 together with D1124 ~ D1126. When
PLC is executing RS instruction, the head code and tail code set up by the user will be sent out automatically.
M1161 = Off indicates PLC in 16-bit conversion mode. The 16-bit data will be divided into the higher 8 bits and
lower 8 bits for data transmission.
M1001
M1161
X0
RS D100 K4 D120 K7
Sending data: (PLC -> external equipment)
STX D100L D100L D101L D101L ETX1 ETX2
Head source data register, starting from Tail code Tail code
length = 4
Receiving data: (External equipment -> PLC)
D120L D120H D121L D121H D122L D122H D123L
Head received data register, starting from Tail code Tail code
length = 7
When receiving data, PLC will receive the head code and tail code of the data from the external equipment;
therefore, the user has to be aware of the setting of data length n.
Program Example 3:
Connect PLC to VFD-B series AC motor drives (AC motor drive in ASCII Mode; PLC in 16-bit mode and M1161 = Off).
Write in the 6 data starting from parameter address H2101 in VFD-B in advance as the data to be transmitted.
M1002
MOV H86 D1120 Set up communication protocol 9600,7,E,1
MOV K100 D1129 Set up communication time-out 100ms

Sending request
pulses
Write in data to be transmitted in advance

X10
RS D100 K17 D120 K35
Receiving
completed
M1123
RST M1123 Receiving of data is completed.
The flag is reset.
PLC Ö VFD-B, PLC sends “: 01 03 2101 0006 D4 CR LF “

VFD-B Ö PLC, PLC receives “: 01 03 0C 0100 1766 0000 0000 0136 0000 3B CR LF “
Registers for sent data (PLC sends out message)
Register Data Explanation
D100 low ‘: ’ 3A H STX
D100 high ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 Address of AC motor drive: ADR
D101 low ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 (1,0)
D101 high ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
Instruction code: CMD (1,0)
D102 low ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0
D102 high ‘2’ 32 H
D103 low ‘1’ 31 H
Start data address
D103 high ‘0’ 30 H
D104 low ‘1’ 31 H
D104 high ‘0’ 30 H
D105 low ‘0’ 30 H
Number of data (counted by words)
D105 high ‘0’ 30 H
D106 low ‘6’ 36 H
D106 high ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 1
Error checksum: LRC CHK (0,1)
D107 low ‘4’ 34 H LRC CHK 0
D107 high CR DH
END
D108 low LF AH
Registers for received data (VFD-B responds with messages)
D120 high ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
D121 low ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D121 high ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D122 low ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0
D122 high ‘0’ 30 H
Number of data (counted by byte)
D123 low ‘C’ 43 H

D123 high ‘0’ 30 H
D124 low ‘1’ 31 H
Content of address 2101 H
D124 high ‘0’ 30 H
D125 low ‘0’ 30 H
D125 high ‘1’ 31 H
D126 low ‘7’ 37 H
D126 high ‘6’ 36 H
D127 low ‘6’ 36 H
D127 high ‘0’ 30 H
D128 low ‘0’ 30 H
D128 high ‘0’ 30 H
D129 low ‘0’ 30 H
D129 high ‘0’ 30 H
D130 low ‘0’ 30 H
D130 high ‘0’ 30 H
D131 low ‘0’ 30 H
D131 high ‘0’ 30 H
D132 low ‘1’ 31 H
D132 high ‘3’ 33 H
D133 low ‘6’ 36 H
D133 high ‘0’ 30 H
D134 low ‘0’ 30 H
D134 high ‘0’ 30 H
D135 low ‘0’ 30 H
D135 high ‘3’ 33 H LRC CHK 1
D136 low ‘B’ 42 H LRC CHK 0
D136 high CR DH
END
D137 low LF AH
Program Example 4:
Connect PLC to VFD-B series AC motor drives (AC motor drive in RTU Mode; PLC in 16-bit mode and M1161 = On).
Write in H12 to parameter address H2000 in VFD-B in advance as the data to be transmitted.
M1002
MOV K100 D1129 Set up communication time-out 100ms
SET M1161 8-bit mode

Sending request
pulses
Write in data to be transmitted in advance

X10
RS D100 K8 D120 K8
M1123
Receiving of data is completed.

RST M1123 The flag is reset.
PLC Ö VFD-B, PLC sends: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07

VFD-B Ö PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
Registers for sent data (PLC sends out messages)
D100 low 01 H Address
D101 low 06 H Function
D102 low 20 H
Data address
D103 low 00 H
D104 low 00 H
Data content
D105 low 12 H
D106 low 02 H CRC CHK Low
D107 low 07 H CRC CHK High
Registers for received data (VFD-B responds with messages)
D122 low 20 H
Data address
D123 low 00 H
D124 low 00 H
Data content
D125 low 12 H
Remarks:
1. Flags for the RS-485 communication of RS/MODRD/MODWR/FWD/REV/STOP/RDST/RSTEF/MODRW
instructions
Flag Function Action

For retain the communication setting. After the first program scan
is completed, the communication setting will be reset according
to the setting in the special data register D1120. When the
second program scan starts and RS instruction is being
executed, the communication settings will all be reset according
Set up and reset by the
M1120 to the settings in D1120. If your communication protocol is fixed,
user.
you can set M1120 to On and the communication protocol will not
be reset whenever
RS/MODRD/MODWR/FWD/REV/STOP/RDST/RSTEF/MODRW
instruction is executed. In this case, even the settings in D1120
are modified, the communication protocol will not be changed.
M1121 Off when the RS-485 communication data is being transmitted. By the system.
Sending request. When you need to send out or receive data by
Set up by the user; reset
instructions, you have to set M1122 to On by a pulse instruction.
M1122 automatically by the
When these instructions start to execute, PLC will start to send
system.
out or receive data. When the data transmission is completed,
M1122 will be reset automatically.
Receiving is completed. When the execution of
instructions is completed, M1123 will be set to On. You can Set up automatically by the
M1123
process the data received when M1123 is On in the program. system; reset by the user.
You have to reset M1123 to Off when the process of received
data is completed.
M1124 Waiting for receiving. On when PLC is waiting for receiving data. By the system.
Receiving status cleared. When M1125 = On, the waiting for
M1125 receiving status of PLC will be cleared. You have to reset M1125
to Off after the staus is cleared.
Set up and reset by the
User/system defined STX/ETX selection of RS instruction (see
M1126 user.
the next table for details.)
User/system defined STX/ETX selection of RS instruction (see
M1130
the next table for details.)
Data transmission is completed for communication instructions Set up automatically by the
M1127
(RS instruction not included) system; reset by the user.
M1128 Data being sent/received indication By the systme.
Receiving time-out. If you already set up a communication
time-out in D1129 and the data have not been received Set up automatically by the
M1129
completey when the time-out set is reached, M1129 will be On. system; reset by the user.
You have to reset M1129 to Off after the problem is solved.
On when the data are converted into hex of
M1131 MODRD/RDST/MODRW instructions when in ASCII mode;
otherwise, M1131 is Off.
M1140 Data receiving error of MODRD/MODWR/MODRW instructions By the system
M1141 Parameter error of MODRD/MODWR/MODRW instructions
M1142 Data receiving error of VFD-A handy commands
ASCII/RTU mode selection (used with
M1143 Set up and reset by the
MODRD/MODWR/MODRW instructions). On = RTU; Off = ASCII
user.
M1161 8/16-bit mode selection. On = 8-bit; Off = 16-bit
2. Special data register for the RS-485 communication of RS/MODRD/MODWR/FWD/REV/STOP/RDST/RSTEF

/MODRW instructions
Special D Function
For setting up the data responding delay time when a PLC MPU using RS-485
D1038
communication is used as a slave. Range: 0 ~ 10,000 (unit: 0.1ms)
When MODRD/RDST instruction is executed, PLC will automatically convert the ASCII
D1050 ~ D1055
characters in D1070 ~ D1085 into hex and store the hex value in D1050 ~ D1055.
When the RS-485 communication instructions built in PLC are executed, the receiving
end will respond with a message and the messages will be stored in D1070 ~ D1085.
D1070 ~ D1085
You can check on the responded data stored in these registers (not applicable for RS
instruction).
When the RS-485 communication instructions built in PLC are executed, the data sent
D1089 ~ D1099 will be stored in D1089 ~ D1099. You can check on whether the data sent are correct by
checking these registers (not applicable for RS instruction).
D1120 RS-485 communication protocol. See the next table for more details.
D1121 The communication address of PLC when it operates as a slave.
D1122 Remaining number of words of the data being sent
D1123 Remaining number of words of the data being received
D1124 Definition of the start word (STX). See the table above for more details.
Definition of the first end word (ETX1) of RS instruction. See the table above for more
D1125
details.
Definition of the second end word (ETX2) of RS instruction. See the table above for more
D1126
details.
Abnormal communication time-out (in ms). When D1129 = 0, there will be no time-out
occurring. When D1129 > 0 and RS/MODRD/
MODWR/FWD/REV/STOP/RDST/RSTEF/MODRW instructions are being executed, if
D1129 the first word has not been received within designated time or the time interval between
any two words exceeds the value (>0) after PLC enters the receiving mode, PLC will
automatically set M1129 to On. You can also use M1129 for handling the communication
time-out. Please be noted that you have to reset M1129 after the time-out.
D1130 Error code sent back by Modbus
For RS instruction, when the received number of words = the low byte of D1168, the
D1168
interruption I150 will be triggered.
For RS instruction, when the received data length = the low byte of D1169, the
D1169
interruption I160 will be triggered. When D1169 = 0, I160 will not be triggered.
When the RS-485 communication instruction MODRW built in PLC is executed, the data
D1256 ~ D1295 sent will be stored in D1256 ~ D1295. You can check on whether the data sent are
correct by checking these registers.
D1296 ~ D1311 For MODRW instruction, PLC will automatically convert the ASCII characters into hex.
3. How to set up RS-485 communication protocol in D1120

Content 0 1
b0 Data length 7 8
00: None
b1
Parity bits 01: Odd
b2
11: Even
b3 Stop bits 1 bit 2 bits
b4 0001 (H1) : 110
b5 0010 (H2) : 150
b6 0011 (H3) : 300
b7
0100 (H4) : 600
0101 (H5) : 1200
0110 (H6) : 2400
0111 (H7) : 4800
1000 (H8) : 9600
1001 (H9) : 19200
1010 (HA) : 38400
1011 (HB) : 57600 (does not support ES/SS V5.8 and below)
1100 (HC) : 115200 (does not support ES/SS V5.8 and below)
b8 Start word None D1124
b9 First end word None D1125
b10 Second end word None D1126
b15 ~ b11 Not defined
4. When RS instruction is in use, the frequently used communication format in the peripheral device will define the
start word and end word of the control string. Therefore, you can set up the start word and end word in D1124 ~
D1126 or use the start word and end word defined by the PLC. When you use M1126, M1130 and D1124 ~
D1126 to set up the start word and end word, b8 ~ b10 of D1120 have to be set as 1 to make valid the RS-485
communication protocol. See the table below for how to set up.
M1130
0 1
D1124: user defined D1124: H 0002
0 D1125: user defined D1125: H 0003
D1126: user defined D1126: H 0000 (no setting)
M1126
D1124: user defined D1124: H 003A (’:’)

1 D1125: user defined D1125: H 000D (CR)
D1126: user defined D1126: H 000A (LF)
5. Example of how to set up the communication format:

Assume there is a communication format: Baud rate 9600 7, N, 2
STX : “:”
ETX1 : “CR”
ETX2 : “LF”
Check the table and obtain the communication format H788 and write it into D1120.
b15 b0
D1120 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0
7 8 8
Don t care
When STX, ETX1 and EXT2 are in use, please be aware of the On and Off of the special auxiliary relays M1126
and M1130.
6. M1143 is for the selection of ASCII mode or RTU mode. On = RTU mode; Off = ASCII mode.
Take the standard Modbus format for example:
In ASCII mode (M1143 = Off)
STX Start word = ‘:’ (3AH)
Address Hi Communication address:
Address Lo The 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Function Hi Function code:
Function Lo The 8-bit function code consists of 2 ASCII codes
DATA (n-1)
Data:
…….
The n × 8-bit data consists of 2n ASCll codes
DATA 0
LRC CHK Hi LRC checksum:
LRC CHK Lo The 8-bit checksum consists of 2 ASCll code
END Hi End word:
END Lo END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH)
The communication protocol is in Modbus ASCII mode, i.e. every byte is composed of 2 ASCII characters. For
example, 64Hex is ‘64’ in ASCII, composed by ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex). Every hex ‘0’…’9’, ‘A’…’F’
corresponds to an ASCII code.
Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’
ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’

ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H
Start word (STX):
Fixed as ‘:’ (3AH)
Address:
‘0’ ‘0’: Broadcasting to all drivers
‘0’ ‘1’: To the driver at address 01
‘0’ ‘F’: To the driver at address 15
‘1’ ‘0’: To the driver at address 16
….and so on, maximum to the driver at address 255 (‘F’ ‘F’)
Function code:
‘0’ ‘3’: Read contents of many registers
‘0’ ‘6’: Write 1 word to register
‘1’ ‘0’: Write in contents of many registers
Data characters: The data sent by the user.
LRC checksum:
LCR checksum is 2’s complement of the value added from Address to Data Content.
For example: 01H + 03H + 21H + 02H + 00H + 02H = 29H. 2’s complement of 29H = D7H
End word (END):
Fixed as END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF (0AH)

For example: Read 2 continuous data stored in the registers of the driver at address 01H (see the table below).
The start register is at address 2102H.
Inquiry message: Responding message:
STX ‘: ’ STX ‘: ’
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function code Function code
‘3’ ‘3’
‘2’ Number of data ‘0’
‘1’ (counted by byte) ‘4’
Start address
‘0’ ‘1’
‘2’ Content in start address ‘7’
‘0’ 2102H ‘7’
Number of data ‘0’ ‘0’
(counted by words) ‘0’ ‘0’
‘2’ Content of address ‘0’
‘D’ 2103H ‘0’
LRC checksum
‘7’ ‘0’
CR ‘7’
END LRC check
LF ‘1’
CR
END
LF
In RTU mode (M1143 = On)
START See the following explanation
Address Communication address: In 8-bit binary
Function Function code: In 8-bit binary
DATA (n-1)
Data:
…….
n × 8-bit data
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low CRC checksum:
CRC CHK High 16-bit CRC consists of 2 8-bit binary
END See the following explanation
START:
For ES/EX/SS/SA/SX series MPU, no input signal can be ≥ 10ms.
See the table below for EH/EH2/SV series MPU:
Baud rate(bps) RTU timeout timer (ms) Baud rate (bps) RTU timeout timer (ms)
300 40 9,600 2
600 21 19,200 1
1,200 10 38,400 1
2,400 5 57,600 1
4,800 3 115,200 1
Address:
00H: Broadcasting to all drivers
01H: To the driver at address 01
0FH: To the driver at address 15
10H: To the driver at address 16…. And so on, maximum to the driver at address 254 (FE H)
Function code:
03H: Read contents of many registers
06H: Write 1 word to register

10H: Write in contents of many registers
Data characters: The data sent by the user.
CRC checksum: Starting from Address and ending at Data Content.
Step 1: Make the 16-bit register (CRC register) = FFFFH
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit message and the low 16-bit CRC register. Store the result in the CRC
register.
Step 3: Right shift CRC register for a bit and fill “0” into the high bit.
Step 4: Check the value shifted to the right. If it is 0, fill in the new value obtained in step 3 and store the value
in CRC register; otherwise, Exclusive OR A001H and CRC register and store the result in the CRC
register.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 – 4 and finish operations of all the 8 bits.
Step 6: Repeat step 2 – 5 for obtaining the next 8-bit message until the operation of all the messages are
completed. The final value obtained in the CRC register is the CRC checksum. The CRC checksum
has to be placed interchangeably in the checksum of the message.
END:
For ES/EX/SS V5.8 (and below) and SA/SX V1.1 (and below) series MPU, keep no input signal be ≥ 10ms.
See the table below for EH/EH2/SV series MPU:
Baud rate(bps) RTU timeout timer (ms) Baud rate (bps) RTU timeout timer (ms)
300 40 9,600 2
600 21 19,200 1
1,200 10 38,400 1
2,400 5 57,600 1
4,800 3 115,200 1
For example: Read 2 continuous data stored in the registers of the driver at address 01H (see the table below).
The start register is at address 2102H.
Inquiry message: Responding message:
Address 01 H Address 01 H
Function 03 H Function 03 H
21 H Number of data
Start data address 04 H
02 H (counted by byte)
Number of data 00 H Content in data address 17 H
(counted by words) 02 H 8102H 70 H
CRC CHK Low 6F H Content in data address 00 H
CRC CHK High F7 H 8103H 00 H
CRC CHK Low FE H
CRC CHK High 5C H
7. Timing diagram of RS-485 communication flag:
M1002
MOV K100 D1129 Setting communication time out 100ms

Sending request
pulses
Write the data to be transmitted in advance

X10
RS D100 K3 D120 K8
Receiving
completed
M1123
Receiving of data is completed.
RST M1123
The flag is reset.
SET M1122 X0
Execution of RS instruction X10
Transmission ready M1121
Sending request M1122 Auto reset after the data transmission is completed
Receiving completed M1123 The user has to do the reset in the program.
Waiting for receiving M1124
Communication status cleared M1125 Using this in the program will return the
status to the initial transmission ready status.
MODRD/RDST/MODRW data
receiving and conversion M1127 ASCII data being converted to hex
completed takes less than 1 scan period.
Changing direction
immediately
Transmitting and receiving M1128 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Receiving time-out M1129 On when receiving message from the time-out counter
Stop counting when receiving all the data

Receiving time-out timer, set by D1129
MODRD/RDST/MODRW M1131 Converting data
data converted to hex 3
2
Remaining words of the sent data D1122 1
0
8
7
6
5
4
3
Remaining words of the received data D1123 2
1
0

Controllers
81 D PRUN P Parallel Run ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F PRUN, PRUNP: 5 steps
S * * DPRUN, DPRUNP: 9 steps
D * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source device D: Destination device
Explanations:
1. The most right digit of X, Y and M of KnX, KnY and KnM has to be 0.
2. When S designates KnX, D has to designate KnM; when S designates KnM, D has to designate KnY.
4. This instruction sends the content in S to D in the form of octal system.
Program Example 1:
When X3 = On, the content in K4X10 will be sent to K4M10 in octal form.
X3
PRUN K4X10 K4M10
X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
M27 M26 M25 M24 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10
No change
Program Example 2:
When X2 = On, the content in K4M10 will be sent to K4Y10 in octal form.
X2
PRUN K4M10 K4Y10
Will not be transmitted
M27 M26 M25 M24 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10
Y27 Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10

Controllers
82 ASCI P Converts Hex to ASCII ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ASCI, ASCIP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start device for source data D: Start device for storing the converted result n: Number of bits to be converted
Explanations:
1. Range of n: 1 ~ 256
4. 16-bit conversion mode: When M1161 = Off, the instruction converts every bit of the hex data in S into ASCII
codes and send them to the 8 high bits and 8 low bits of D. n = the converted number of bits.
5. 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161 = On, the instruction converts every bit of the hex data in S into ASCII
codes and send them to the 8 low bits of D. n = the number of converted bits. (All 8 high bits of D = 0)
Program Example 1:
1. M1161 = Off: The 16-bit conversion mode
2. When X0 = On, convert the 4 hex values in D10 into ASCII codes and send the result to registers starting from
D20.
M1001
M1161
X0
ASCI D10 D20 K4
3. Assume
(D10) = 0123 H ‘0’ = 30H ‘4’ = 34H ‘8’ = 38H
(D11) = 4567 H ‘1’ = 31H ‘5’ = 35H ‘9’ = 39H
(D12) = 89AB H ‘2’ = 32H ‘6’ = 36H ‘A’ = 41H
(D13) = CDEF H ‘3’ = 33H ‘7’ = 37H ‘B’ = 42H
4. When n = 4, the bit structure will be as:
D10=0123 H
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 2 3
D20 High byte Low byte
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 31H 0 30H
D21 High byte Low byte
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
3 33H 2 32H

b15 D10 = H 0123 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 2 3
b15 D11 = H 4567 b0

0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
4 5 6 7
Converted to
b15 D20 b0
0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
7 H 37 6 H 36
b15 D21 b0
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 H 31 0 H 30
b15 D22 b0
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
3 H 33 2 H 32
6. When n = 1 ~ 16:
n
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8
D
D20 Low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4”
D20 High byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5”
D21 Low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6”
D21 High byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7”
D22 Low byte “3” “2” “1” “0”
D22 High byte “3” “2” “1”
D23 Llow byte “3” “2”
D23 High byte “3”
D24 Low byte
D24 High byte no
D25 Low byte change
D25 High byte
D26 Low byte
D26 High byte
D27 Low byte
D27 High byte
n
K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16
D
D20 Low byte “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D” “C”
D20 High byte “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D”
D21 Low byte “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E”
D21 High byte “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F”
D22 Low byte “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8”
D22 High byte “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9”
D23 Llow byte “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A”
D23 High byte “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B”
D24 Low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4”
D24 High byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5”
D25 Low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6”
D25 High byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7”
D26 Low byte “3” “2” “1” “0”
no
D26 High byte “3” “2” “1”
change
D27 Low byte “3” “2”
D27 High byte “3”
Program Example 2:
1. M1161 = On: The 8-bit conversion mode
2. When X0 = On, convert the 4 hex values in D10 into ASCII codes and send the result to registers starting from
D20.
M1000
M1161
X0
ASCI D10 D20 K4
3. Assume
(D10) = 0123 H ‘0’ = 30H ‘4’ = 34H ‘8’ = 38H
(D11) = 4567 H ‘1’ = 31H ‘5’ = 35H ‘9’ = 39H
(D12) = 89AB H ‘2’ = 32H ‘6’ = 36H ‘A’ = 41H
(D13) = CDEFH ‘3’ = 33H ‘7’ = 37H ‘B’ = 42H
D10=0123 H
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 2 3
ASCII code of D20=2 is 32H

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
3 2
ASCII code of D21=3 is 33H
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
3 3
b15 D10 = H 0123 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 2 3
Converted to
b15 D20 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
0 H 30
b15 D21 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
1 H 31
b15 D22 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
2 H 32
b15 D23 b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
3 H 33
6. When n = 1 ~ 16:
n
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8
D
D20 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4”
D21 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5”
D22 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6”
D23 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7”
D24 “3” “2” “1” “0”
D25 “3” “2” “1”
D26 “3” “2”
D27 “3”
D28
D29 no
D30 change
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
n
K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16
D
D20 “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D” “C”
D21 “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D”
D22 “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E”
D23 “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F”
D24 “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8”
D25 “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9”
D26 “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A”
D27 “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B”
D28 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4”
D29 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5”
D30 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6”
D31 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7”
D32 “3” “2” “1” “0”
no
D33 “3” “2” “1”
change
D34 “3” “2”
D35 “3”

Controllers
83 HEX P Converts ASCII to Hex ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F HEX, HEXP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start device for source data D: Start device for storing the converted result n: Number of bits to be converted
Explanations:
1. Range of n: 1 ~ 256
4. 16-bit conversion mode: When M1161 = Off, the instruction is in 16-bit conversion mode. ASCII codes of the 8
high bits and 8 low bits of the hex data in S are converted into hex value and sent to D (every 4 bits as a group). n
= the number of bits converted into ASCII codes.
5. 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161 = On, the instruction is in 8-bit conversion mode. Every bit of the hex data in
S are converted into ASCII codes and sent to the 8 low bits of D. n = the number of converted bits. (All 8 high bits
of D = 0)
Program Example 1:
2. When X0 = On, convert the ASCII codes stored in the registers starting from D20 into hex value and send the
result (every 4 bits as a group) to registers starting from D10. n = 4.
M1001
M1161
X0
HEX D20 D10 K4
3. Assume
S ASCII code Converted to hex S ASCII code Converted to hex
D20 low byte H 43 “C” D24 low byte H 34 “4”
D20 high byte H 44 “D” D24 high byte H 35 “5”
D21 low byte H 45 “E” D25 low byte H 36 “6”
D21 high byte H 46 “F” D25 high byte H 37 “7”
D22 low byte H 38 “8” D26 low byte H 30 “0”
D22 high byte H 39 “9” D26 high byte H 31 “1”
D23 low byte H 41 “A” D27 low byte H 32 “2”
D23 high byte H 42 “B” D27 high byte H 33 “3”
D20 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
44H D 43H C
D21 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
46H F 45H E
D10 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
C D E F
5. When n = 1 ~ 16:
D
D13 D12 D11 D10
n
1 ***C H
2 **CD H
3 *CDE H
4 CDEF H
5 The ***C H DEF8 H
6 undesignated **CD H EF89 H
7 parts in the *CDE H F89A H
registers in use
8 are all 0. CDEF H 89AB H
9 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H
10 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H
11 *CDE H F89A H B456 H
12 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H
13 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H 5670 H
14 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 6701 H
15 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 7012 H
16 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 0123 H
Program Example 2:
1. M1161 = On: The 8-bit converstion mode
M1000
M1161
X0
HEX D20 D10 K4
2. Assume
S ASCII code Converted to hex S ASCII code Converted to hex
D20 H 43 “C” D28 H 34 “4”
D21 H 44 “D” D29 H 35 “5”
D22 H 45 “E” D30 H 36 “6”
D23 H 46 “F” D31 H 37 “7”
D24 H 38 “8” D32 H 30 “0”
D25 H 39 “9” D33 H 31 “1”
D26 H 41 “A” D34 H 32 “2”
D27 H 42 “B” D35 H 33 “3”
D20 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
43H C
D21 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
44H D
D10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
C D
4. When n = 1 ~ 16:
D
D13 D12 D11 D10
n
1 ***C H
2 **CD H
3 *CDE H
4 CDEF H
5 The used ***C H DEF8 H
6 registers **CD H EF89 H
7 which are not *CDE H F89A H
specified are
8 all 0 CDEF H 89AB H
9 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H
10 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H
11 *CDE H F89A H B456 H
12 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H
13 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H 5670 H
14 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 6701 H
15 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 7012 H
16 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 0123 H

Controllers
84 CCD P Check Code ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F CCD, CCDP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * *
D * * * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start device for source data D: Device for storing the sum check result n: Number of data
Explanations:
1. Range of n: 1 ~ 256
4. The sum check is used for ensuring the correctness of the data transmission.
5. 16-bit conversion mode: When M1161 = Off, the instruction is in 16-bit conversion mode. The instruction sums
up n data (8 bits as a unit) from the start register designated in S and stores the results in the registers
designated in D. The parity bits are stored in D + 1.
6. 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161 = On, the instruction is in 8-bit conversion mode. The instruction sums up n
data (8 bits as a unit; only 8 low bits are valid) from the start register designated in S and stores the results in the
registers designated in D. The parity bits are stored in D + 1.
Program Example 1:
2. When X0 = On, the instruction will sum up 6 data stored in the register designated in D0 (8 bits as a unit; n = 6
indicates D0 ~ D2 are designated) and store the result in the register designated in D100. The parity bits are
stored in D101.
M1000
M1161
X0
CCD D0 D100 K6
(S) Content of data

D0 low byte K100 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
D0 high byte K111 = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
D1 low byte K120 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
D1 high byte K202 = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
D2 low byte K123 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

D2 high byte K211 = 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
D100 K867 Total

D101 00010001 The parity is 1 when there is a odd number of 1.
The parity is 0 when there is a even number of 1.
D100 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
D101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Parity
Program Example 2:
1. M1161 = On: The 8-bit conversion mode
2. When X0 = On, the instruction will sum up 6 data stored in the register designated in D0 (8 bits as a unit; n = 6
indicates D0 ~ D5 are designated) and store the result in the register designated in D100. The parity bits are
stored in D101.
M1000
M1161
X0
CCD D0 D100 K6
(S) Content of data

D0 low byte K100 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
D1 low byte K111 = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
D2 low byte K120 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
D3 low byte K202 = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
D4 low byte K123 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
D5 low byte K211 = 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
D100 K867 Total

D101 00 01 00 01 The parity is 1 when there is a odd number of 1.
The parity is 0 when there is a even number of 1.
D 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
D 10 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Parity

Controllers
85 VRRD P Volume Read ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F VRRD, VRRDP: 5 steps
S * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: No. of VR D: Device for storing the volume of VR
Explanations:
1. Range of S: 0 ~ 7; without function card: 0 ~ 1.
3. Flags: M1178, M1179. See remarks for more details.
4. VRRD instruction is used for reading 2 points (No.0, No.1) of PLC or the VR rotary switch volume change in the 6
points of the function cards (No.2 ~ No.7) and converting the data into values 0 ~ 255 (stored in D).
5. If you are to set up the timer by the VR volume, simply rotate the VR to modify the set time in the timer. If you are
to acquire a value larger than 255, multiply D by a constant.
Program Example 1:
1. When X0 = On, VR0 volume changed will be converted into an 8-bit BIN value (0 ~ 255) and stored in D0.
2. When X1 = On, the imer T0 will start to time with the content in D0 as the set value in the timer.
X0
VRRD K0 D0
X1
TMR T0 D0
Program Example 2:
1. Read the VR volume in order: The VR0 ~ VR7 rotary switches on the PLC correspond to S = K0 ~ K7 of VRRD
instruction. E index register modification is used in the example below, K0E = K0 ~ K7.
2. The timer converts the scale 0 ~ 10 on the rotary switch into 0 ~ 255. The timing unit of T0 ~ T7 is 0.1 second;
therefore, the set time in the timer will be 0 ~ 25.5 seconds.
M1000
RST E
F OR K8
M1000
VRRD K 0E D100E
INC E
NEXT
X10
TMR T0 D100
T0
Y000
X17
TMR T7 D107
T7
Y007
END
3. Operation of FOR ~ NEXT instruction:

a) In the area between FOR ~ NEXT instruction, FOR designating K8 indicates the loop between FOR ~ NEXT
will be executed repeatedly for 8 times before the next instruction is executed.
b) Between FOR ~ NEXT (INC E), E will be 0, 1, 2, …7 plusing 1. Therefore, the 8 VR rotary switch volumes
will be VR0→D100, VR1→D101, VR2→D102…VR7→D107 and be read to designated registers in order.
Remarks:
1. VR refers to Variable Resister.
2. The 2 points of VR rotary switch built in SA/SC/EH/EH2/SV series MPU can be used together with special D and
special M.
Device Function
M1178 Enabling VR0
M1179 Enabling VR1
D1178 VR0 value
D1179 VR1 value
3. If there is no VR extension card inserted in the PLC, setting up the No. of rotary switches as K2 ~ K7 in VRRD
and VRSC instruction in the program will result in errors in grammar check.

Controllers
86 VRSC P Volume Scale ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F VRSC, VRSCP: 5 steps
S * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: No. of VR D: Device for storing the scale of VR
Explanations:
1. Range of S: 0 ~ 7; without function card: 0 ~ 1
3. VRSC instruction is used for reading 2 points (No.0, No.1) of PLC or the VR rotary switch scale (0 ~ 10) in the 6
points of the function cards (No.2 ~ No.7) and storing the data in D. If the position of the VR falls in the middle of
two scales, VRSC will round up the value into an integer of 0 ~ 10.
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, the scale of VR0 (0 ~ 10) will be stored in D10.
X0
VRSC K0 D10
Program Example 2:
1. When the VR is used as DIP switch, they will correspond to scale 0 ~ 10 and only one of M10 ~ M20 will be On.
Use API 41 DECO instruction to decode the scales into M10 ~ M25.
2. When X0 = On, store the scale (0 ~ 10) of VR1 into D1.
3. When X1 = On, use API 41 DECO to decode the scales into M10 ~ M25.
X0
VRSC K1 D1
X1
DECO D1 M10 K4
M10
On when the scale is 0
M11
M20
Remarks:
If the MPU is not inserted with a VR extension card, and the No. of the rotary switches inVRRD or VRSC instruction in
the program are set as K2 ~ K7, errors will occur in the execution of grammar check.

Controllers
87 D ABS P Absolute Value ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ABS, ABSP: 3 steps
D * * * * * * * * DABS, DABSP: 5 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
D: Device of the absolute value
Explanations:
2. This instruction obtains the absolute value of the content in the designated in D.
3. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (ABSP, DABSP).
Program Example:
When X0 = Off→On, obtain the absolute value of the content in D0.
X0
ABS D0

Controllers
88 D PID PID Control Loop ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F PID : 9 steps
S1 * DPID: 17 steps
S2 *
S3 *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Set value (SV) S2: Present value (PV) S3: Parameter D: Output value (MV)
Explanations:
1. In 16-bit instruction, S3 will occupy 20 consecutive devices; in 32-bit instruction, S3 will occupy 21 consecutive
devices.
3. See the Remarks below for the times of using PID instruction allowed in the program.
4. This instruction is specifically for PID control. PID operation will be executed by the scan only when the sampling
time is reached. PID refers to “proportion, integration and differential”. PID control is widely applied to many
machines, pneumatic and electronic equipments.
5. For the 16-bit instruction, the parameters are S3 ~ S3+19; for the 32-bit instruction, the parameters are S3 ~ S3+20.
After all the parameters are set up, PID instruction will start to be executed and the results will be stored in D. D
has to be the data register area without latched function. (If you wish to designate a latched data register area,
place the data register in the latched area at the beginning of the program and clear it as 0.)
Program Example:
1. Complete the parameter setting before executing PID instruction.
2. When X0 = On, the instruction will be executed and the result will be stored in D150. When X0 goes Off, the
instruction will not be executed and the data prior to the instruction will stay intact.
X0
PID D0 D1 D100 D150
Remarks:
1. ES/EX/SS series MPU V5.7 (and above) supports PID instruction. Other versions do not support the instruction.
2. There is no limitation on the times of using this instruction. However, the register No. designated in S3 cannot be
repeated.
3. For the 16-bit instruction, S3 will occupy 20 registers. In the program example above, the area designated in S3 is
D100 ~ D119. Before the execution of PID instruction, you have to transmit the setting value to the designated
register area by MOV instruction, If the designated registers are latched, use MOVP instruction to transmit all
setting value at a time.
4. Settings of S3 in the 16-bit instruction
Device No. Function Setup Range Explanation

If TS is less than 1 program scan time, PID
instruction will be executed for 1 program scan
Sampling time (TS) 1 ~ 2,000
S3: time. If TS= 0, PID instruction will not be enabled.
(unit: 10ms) (unit: 10ms)
The minimum TS has to be longer than the
program scan time.
The magnified error proportional value between
S3 +1: Proportional gain (KP) 0 ~ 30,000 (%)
SV – PV.
The magnified proportional value of every
S3 +2: Integral gain (KI) 0 ~ 30,000 (%) sampling time unit × the accumulated value of
the error.
The magnified proportional value of the varied
S3 +3: Differential gain (KD) -30,000 ~ 30,000 (%)
error in every samping timme unit.
0: automatic control
1: forward control (E = SV - PV)
2: inverse control (E = PV - SV)
Control direction 3: Auto-tuning of parameter exclusively for the temperature control. The
S3 +4: device will automatically become K4 when the auto-tuning is
(DIR)
completed and be filled in with the appropriate parameter KP, KI and
KD (not avaliable in the 32-bit instruction).
4: Exclusively for the adjusted temperature control (not avaliable in the
32-bit instruction).
The range that error E = the error of SV – PV. When S3 +5 = K0, the
S3 +5: value (E) doesn’t 0 ~ 32,767 function will not be enabled, e.g. when S3 +5 is
work set as 5, MV of E between -5 and 5 will be 0.
Ex: if S3 +6 is set as 1,000, the output will be
Upper bound of output 1,000 when MV is bigger than 1,000. S3 +6 has
S3 +6: -32,768 ~ 32,767
value (MV) to be bigger or equal S3 +7; otherwise the upper
bound and lower bound will switch.
Lower bound of output Ex: if S3 +7 is set as -1,000, the output will be
S3 +7: -32,768 ~ 32,767
value (MV) -1,000 when MV is smaller than -1,000.
Ex: if S3 +8 is set as 1,000, the output will be
1,000 when the integral value is bigger than
Upper bound of
S3 +8: -32,768~32,767 1,000 and the integration will stop. S3 +8 has to
integral value
be bigger or equal S3 +9; otherwier the upper
bound and lower bound will switch.
Ex: if S3 +9 is set as -1,000, the output will be
Lower bound of
S3 +9: -32,768 ~ 32,767 -1,000 when the integral value is smaller than
integral value
-1,000 and the integration will stop.
The accumulated integral value is only for
Accumulated integral
S3 +10,11: 32-bit floating point reference. You can still clear or modify it (in
value
32-bit floating point) according to your need.
The previous PV is only for reference. You can
S3 +12: The previous PV -
still modify it according to your need.
S3 +13:
For system use only.
~
S3 +19:
5. When parameter setting exceeds its range, the upper bound and lower bound will become the setting value.
However, if the motion direction (DIR) exceeds the range, it will be set to 0.
6. PID instruction can be used in interruption subroutines, step points and CJ instruction.
7. The maximum error of sampling time TS = - (1 scan time + 1ms) ~ + (1 scan time). When the error affects the
output, please fix the scan time or execute PID instruction in the interruption subroutine of the timer.
8. PV of PID instruction has to be stable before the execution of PID instruction. If you are to extract the input value
of DVP04AD/04DA/06XA/04PT/04TC for PID operation, please be aware of the A/D conversion time of these
modules.
9. For the 32-bit instruction, If S3 designates the parameter setting area of PID instruction as D100 ~ D120, S3
occupies 21 registers. Before the execution of PID instruction, you have to use MOV instrction first to send the
setting value to the register area for setup. If the designated registers are latched one, use MOVP instruction to
send all the setting value at a time.
10. Settings of S3 in the 32-bit instruction
Device No. Function Setup range Explanation
If TS is less than 1 program scan time, PID
instruction will be executed for 1 program
Sampling time (TS) 1 ~ 2,000
S3 : scan time. If TS= 0, PID instruction will not be
enabled. The minimum TS has to be longer
than the program scan time.
The magnified error proportional value
S3 +1: Proportional gain (KP) 0 ~ 30,000 (%)
between SV – PV.
The magnified proportional value of every
S3 +2: Integral gain (KI) 0 ~ 30,000 (%) sampling time unit × the accumulated value
of the error.
The magnified proportional value of the
S3 +3: Differential gain (KD) -30,000 ~ 30,000 (%)
varied error in every samping timme unit.
0: automatic control
S3 +4: Control direction (DIR) 1: forward control (E = SV – PV)
2: inverse control (E = PV – SV)
E = the error of SV – PV. When S3 +5,6 = K0,
The range that 32-bit
the function will not be enabled, e.g. when S3
S3 +5, 6: error value (E) doesn’t 0 ~ 2,147,483,647
+5,6 is set as 5, MV of E between -5 and 5
work
will be 0.
Ex: if S3 +7,8 is set as 1,000, the output will
be 1,000 when MV is bigger than 1,000. S3
Upper bound of 32-bit -2,147,483,648 ~
S3 +7, 8: +7,8 has to be bigger or equal S3 +9,10;
output value (MV) 2,147,483,647
otherwise the upper bound and lower bound
will switch.
Lower bound of 32-bit -2,147,483,648 ~ Ex: if S3 +9,10 is set as -1,000, the output will
S3 +9, 10:
output value (MV) 2,147,483,647 be -1,000 when MV is smaller than -1,000.
Ex: if S3 +11,12 is set as 1,000, the output
will be 1,000 when the integral value is
Upper bound of 32-bit -2,147,483,648 ~ bigger than 1,000 and the integration will
S3 +11, 12:
integral value 2,147,483,647 stop. S3 +11,12 has to be bigger or equal S3
+13,14; otherwier the upper bound and lower
bound will switch.
Ex: if S3 +13,14 is set as -1,000, the output
Lower bound of 32-bit -2,147,483,648 ~ will be -1,000 when the integral value is
S3 +13, 14:
integral value 2,147,483,647 smaller than -1,000 and the integration will
stop.
The accumulated integral value is only for
32-bit accumulated
S3 +15, 16: 32-bit floating point reference. You can still clear or modify it (in
integral value
32-bit floating point) according to your need.
The previous PV is only for reference. You
S3 +17, 18: 32-bit previous PV -
can still modify it according to your need.
S3 +19:
For system use only.
~
S3 +20:
11. The explanation of 32-bit S3 and 16-bit S3 are almost the same. The difference is the capacity of S3+5 ~ S3+20.
PID Equations:
1. The PID operation is conducted according to the speed and the differential PV.
2. The PID operation has three control directions: automatic, foreward and inverse. Forward or inverse are
designated in S3 +4. Other relevant settings of PID operation are set by the registers designated in S3 ~ S3 + 5.
3. Basic PID equation:
MV = K P * E (t ) + K I * E (t ) + K D * PV (t )S
1
S
Control direction PID equation
Forward, automatic E(t) = SV – PV
Inverse E(t) = PV – SV
PV (t )S is the differential value of PV (t ) ; E (t ) 1 is the integral value of E (t ) . When E(t ) is less than 0
S
as the control direction is selected as forward or inverse, E(t ) will be regarded as “0".
The equation above illustrates that this instruction is different from a general PID instruction by the variable use
of the differential value. To avoid the flaw that the transient differential value is too big when a general PID
instruction is executed for the first time, our PID instruction monitors the differentiation status of the PV. When
the variation of PV is too big, this instruction will reduce the output of MV.
4. Symbol explanation:
MV : Output value
K P : Proprotional gain
E (t ) : Error value
PV : Present measured value
SV : Target value
K D : Differential gain
PV (t )S : Differential value of PV(t)

K I : Integral gain
E (t )
1 : Integral value of E(t)
S
5. Temperature Control Equation:

When S3 +4 is K3 and K4, the equation used in diagram 2 (see below) will be changed as:
1 ⎡ 1 ⎛ 1⎞ ⎤
MV = E (t ) + ⎜ E (t ) ⎟ + K D * PV (t )S ⎥
K P ⎢⎣ KI ⎝ S⎠ ⎦
In which the error value is fixed as E(t) = SV – PV

This equation is exclusively designed for temperature control. Therefore, when the sampling time (TS) is set as 4
seconds (K400), the range of output value (MV) will be K0 ~ K4,000 and the cycle time of GPWM instruction
used together has to be set as 4 seconds (K4000) as well.
7 - 11 0 D V P - P L C A P P L I C AT I O N M A N U A L
If you have no idea how to adjust the parameters, you can select K3 (auto-tuning) and after all the parameters
are adjusted (the control direction will be automatically set as K4), you can modify your parameters to better
ones according to the result of the control.
6. Control diagrams:
PID instruction is within the dotted-lined area
1/S KI
+
+ +
KP G(s)
+
KD
Diagram 1:S3 + 4 = K0 ~ K2
In Diagram 1, S is differentiation, referring to “PV – previous PV / sampling time”. 1 / S is integration, referring to

“(previous integral value + error value) × sampling time”. G(S) refers to the device being controlled.
PID operation is within the dotted-lined area
1/S 1/K I
+
+ +
1/K P G(s)
+
KD
Diagram 2: S 3 + 4 = K3 ~ K4
In Diagram 2, 1/KI and 1/KP refer to “divided by KI” and “divided by KP”. Due to that this is exclusively for
temperature control, you have to use PID instruction together with GPWM instruction. See Application 3 for
more details.
7. Notes:
a) S3 + 6 ~ S3 + 13 are only available in SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV series, and ES/EX/SS (v5.7 and above) series
MPU.
D V P - P L C A P P L I C AT I O N M A N U A L 7 - 111
b) PID instruction can only be used once in ES/EX/SS (v5.6 and below) series MPU. There is no limitation on
the times of using PID instruction in ES/EX/SS (v5.7 and above) series and SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV series
MPU.
c) S3 + 3 of ES/EX/SS (v5.7 and below), SA/SX/SC (v1.1 and below) and EH (v1.0 and below) series MPU can
only be the value within 0 ~ 30,000.
d) There are a lot of circumstances where PID instruction can be applied; therefore, please choose the control
functions appropriately. For example, when you select parameter auto-tuning for the temperature (S3 + 4 =
K3), you cannot use it in a motor control environment in case improper control may occur.
e) When you adjust the three main parameters, KP, KI and KD (S3 + 4 = K0 ~ K2), you have to adjust KP first
(according to your experiences) and set KI and KD as 0. When you can roughly handle the control, you then
adjust KI (increasingly) and KD (increasingly) (see example 4 below for how to adjust). KP = 100 refers to
100%, i.e. the gain of the error is 1. KP < 100% will decrease the error and KP > 100% will increase the error.
f) When you select the parameter exclusively for temperature control (S3 + 4 = K3, K4), it is suggested that you
store the parameter in D register in the latched area in case the automatically adjusted parameter will
disappear after the power is cut off. There is no guarantee that the adjusted parameter is suitable for every
control. Therefore, you can modify the adjusted parameter according to your actual need, but it is suggested
that you modify only KI or KD.
g) PID instruction can to work with many parameters; therefore please do not randomly modify the parameters
in case the control cannot be executed normally.
Example 1: Diagram of using PID instruction in position control (S3 + 4 = 0)
MV Controlled
Position instruction PID
(SV) device
Encoder
PV
Example 2: Diagram of using PID instruction with AC motor drive on the control (S3 + 4 = 0)
S+MV AC motor
Speed instruction (S)
drive
Acceleration/deceleration
output (MV)
Speed
Acceleration/deceleration detection
instruction (SV) PID
device (P)
Actual acceleration/
deceleration speed
(PV = S - P)
Example 3: Diagram of using PID instruction in temperature control (S3 + 4 = 1)
Heating (MV)
Temperature instruction (SV) PID Heater
Temperature
detection
Actual temperature device
(PV)
Example 4: How to adjust PID parameters

Assume that the transfer function of the controlled device G(S) in a control system is a first-order function
G (s ) =
b (most models of motors are first-order function), SV = 1, and sampling time (TS) = 10ms, we
s+a
suggest you to follow the steps below for adjusting the parameters.
Step 1: Set KI and KD as 0 and KP as 5, 10, 20 and 40. Record the SV and PV respectively and the results
are as the figure below.
1.5
K P =40 SV=1
K P =20 K P =10
1
K P =5
0.5
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Time (sec)
Step 2: From the figure, we can see that when KP = 40, there will be over-reaction, so we will not select it.
When KP = 20, the PV reaction curve will be close to SV and there will not be over-reaction, but due to its
fast start-up with big transient MV, we will consider to put it aside. When KP = 10, the PV reaction curve will
get close to SV value more smoothly, so we will use it. Finally when KP = 5, we will not consider it due to the
slow reaction.
Step 3: Select KP = 10 and adjust KI from small to big (e.g. 1, 2, 4 to 8). KI should not be bigger than KP.
Adjust KD from small to big (e.g. 0.01, 0.05, 0.1 and 0.2). KD should not exceed 10% of KP. Finally we
obtain the figure of PV and SV below.
D V P - P L C A P P L I C AT I O N M A N U A L 7 - 11 3
1.5
PV=SV
0.5
K P=10,K I =8,K D=0.2
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Time (sec)
Note: This example is only for your reference. Please adjust your parameters to proper ones according to your
actual condition of the control system.
Application Examples:
Application 1 Using PID instruction in the pressure control system (use the diagram of Example 1).
Purpose: Enabling the control system to reach the target pressure.

Explanation: The system requires a gradual control. Therefore, the system will be overloaded or out of control if the
process progresses too fast.
Suggested solution:
Solution 1: Longer sampling time
Solution 2: Using delay instruction. See the figure below.
0rpm
0 0 0V
3000
511 rpm 255 5V
Pressure
Pressure MV Speed AC
instruction SV MV converted
instruction delay PID converted motor
value (D0) D1 D5 to to drive
PV speed voltage D1116
A Voltage
B
wave converted
wave D1110 pressure
to
instruction meter
value
0 0V
511 10V
Instruction Instruction
value value
280 280
250
200 D2: Instruction interval value
150 D3: Instruction interval time
100 Adjusted by the user according to the actual condition
50
0 t t
0
A wave B wave
The example program of the instruction delay:
M1002
MOV K10 D3
M0
TMR T0 D3
T0
RST T0
> D0 D1 MOV K50 D2
< D0 D1 MOV K-50 D2
= D0 D1 MOV K0 D2
ADD D2 D1 D1
CMP D2 K0 M10
M10
> D1 D0 MOV D0 D1
M12
< D1 D0 MOV D0 D1
M0
PID D1 D1116 D10 D5
Application 2 Speed control system and pressure control system work individually (use diagram of Example 2).
Purpose: After the speed control operates in open loop for a period of time, adding into it the pressure control system
(PID instruction) for close loop control.
Explanation: Since the speed and pressure control systems are not interrelated, we have to structure a open loop for
speed control first following by a close loop pressure control. If you fear that the control instruction of the
pressure control system changes too fast, you can consider to add the instruction delay illustrated in
Application 1 into the control. See the control diagram below.
0
M3 M2 = On 255
D40
Speed AC
Speed + D32 converted D1116 motor
instruction D30 to drive
+ voltage
D31
0rpm
3,000rpm
MV converted to
accel/decel value
D0 M0 = On D5 MV
SV PV
Pressure Delay D1 D1110 Pressure
PID
instruction (optional) meter
M1 = On
Part of the example program:
M1002
MOV K1000 D40
M0
MOV D0 D1
M1
MOV K0 D5
M3
MOV D40 D30
M2
ADD D30 D31 D32
> D32 K3000 MOV K3000 D32
< D32 K0 MOV K0 D32
DIV D32 K11 D32
> D32 K255 MOV K255 D32
MOV D32 D1116

M1
PID D1 D1110 D10 D5
Application 3 Using auto-tuning on the parameter for the temperature control.
Purpose: Using auto-tuning to calculate the most suitable parameters for PID temperature control.
Explanation: You may not be familiar with the temperature environment for the first time, so you can use auto-tuning
(S3 + 4 = K3) for an initial adjustment. After this, PID instruction will become exclusively for temperature
control (S3 + 4 = K4). In this example, the control environment is an oven. See the example program
below.
M1002
MOV K4000 D20
MOV K400 D200
MOV K800 D10
TO K0 K2 K2 K1
M1013
F RO M K0 K6 D11 K1
M0
MOV K3 D204
RST M0
M1
PID D10 D11 D200 D0
GPWM D0 D20 Y0
END
The experiment result of auto-tuning:
Auto tuning area PID control area

S3+4 = k3 S3+4 = k4
The experiment result of using the adjusted parameter exclusively for temperature control after auto-tuning:
From the figure above, we can see that the temperature control after auto-tuning is working fine and we use only
approximately 20 minutes for the control. Next, we modify the target temperature from 80°C to 100°C and obtain the
result below.
From the result above, we can see that when the parameter is 100°C, we can still control the temperature without
spending too much time.

Controllers
100 MODRD Read Modbus Data ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MODRD: 7 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Address of communication device S2: Address of data to be read n: Length of read data
Explanations:
1. Range of S1: K0 ~ K254
2. Range of n: K1 ≤ n ≤ K6
5. Flags: See API 80 RS for explanations on M1120 ~ M1131, M1140 ~ M1143
6. MODRD is a drive instruction exclusively for peripheral communication equipment in MODBUS ASCII mode
/RTU mode. The built-in RS-485 communication ports in Delta VFD drives (except for VFD-A series) are all
compatible with MODBUS communication format. MODRD can be used for controlling communication (read
data) of Delta drives.
7. If the address of S2 is illegal to the designed communication device, the device will respond with an error, PLC
will records the error code in D1130 and M1141 will be On.
8. The feedback (returned) data from the peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 ~ D1085. After receiving
the feedback data is completed, PLC will auto-check if all data are correct. If there is an error, M1140 will be On.
9. In ASCII mode, due to that the feedback data are all in ASCII, PLC will convert the feedback data into numerals
and store them in D1050 ~ D1055. D1050 ~ D1055 will be invalid in RTU mode.
10. After M1140 or M1141 turn On, the program will send a correct datum to the peripheral equipment. If the
feedback datum is correct, M1140 and M1141 will be reset.
Program Example 1:
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC motor drives (ASCII Mode, M1143 = Off)

M1002
MOV H87 D1120 Set up communication protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
MOV K100 D1129 Set up communication time-out: 100ms

X1
X0
Set up communication instruction device address 01
MODRD K1 H2101 K6
data address H2101 data length 6 words
The received data are stored in D1070 ~ D1085 in ASCII format.
Process of receiving data
PLC will automatically convert the data into numerals and store
M1127 them in D1050 ~ D1055.
receiving RST M1127 Sending/receiving of data is completed. The flag is reset.
completed
PLC VFD-S, PLC sends: “01 03 2101 0006 D4”

VFD-S PLC , PLC receives: “01 03 0C 0100 1766 0000 0000 0136 0000 3B”
Registers for sent data (sending messages)
Register DATA Explanation
D1089 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 Address of AC motor
D1089 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 drive: ADR (1,0)
D1090 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 Instruction code: CMD
D1090 high ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0 (1,0)
D1091 low ‘2’ 32 H
D1091 high ‘1’ 31 H
Starting data address
D1092 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1092 high ‘1’ 31 H
D1093 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1093 high ‘0’ 30 H
D1094 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1094 high ‘6’ 36 H
D1095 low ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 1 Checksum: LRC CHK
D1095 high ‘4’ 34 H LRC CHK 0 (0,1)
Registers for received data (responding messages)

D1070 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
D1070 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D1071 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D1071 high ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0
D1072 low ‘0’ 30 H
Number of data (counted by byte)
D1072 high ‘C’ 43 H
D1073 low ‘0’ 30 H PLC automatically convert
D1073 high ‘1’ 31 H Content of ASCII codes to numerals
D1074 low ‘0’ 30 H address 2101 H and store the numeral in
D1074 high ‘0’ 30 H D1050 = 0100 H
D1076 high ‘6’ 36 H D1051 = 1766 H
D1078 high ‘0’ 30 H D1052 = 0000 H


D1080 high ‘0’ 30 H D1053 = 0000 H
D1082 high ‘6’ 36 H D1054 = 0136 H
D1084 high ‘0’ 30 H D1055 = 0000 H
D1085 low ‘3’ 33 H LRC CHK 1
D1085 high ‘B’ 42 H LRC CHK 0
Program Example 2:
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC motor drives (RTU Mode, M1143 = On)
M1002
SET M1143 Set up as RTU mode

X0
SET M1122 Set up as sending flag
X0 Set up communication instruction
MODRD K1 H2102 K2 device address 01 data address H2102
data length 2 words
Process of receiving data The received data in hex are stored in D1070 ~ D1085.
M1127
Sending/receiving of data is completed.
receiving RST M1127
completed
The flag is reset.
PLC VFD-S, PLC sends: 01 03 2102 0002 6F F7

VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 03 04 1770 0000 FE 5C
D1091 low 21 H
D1092 low 02 H
D1093 low 00 H
D1094 low 02 H
D1095 low 6F H CRC CHK Low
D1096 low F7 H CRC CHK High


D1072 low 04 H Number of data (counted by bytes)
D1073 low 17 H
D1074 low 70 H
D1075 low 00 H
D1076 low 00 H
D1077 low FE H CRC CHK Low
D1078 low 5C H CRC CHK High
Program Example 3:
1. In the communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC motor drive (ASCII Mode, M1143 = Off), retry when
communication time-out, data receiving error and sending address error occur.
2. When X0=On, PLC will read the data in VFFD-S data adress H2100 of device 01 and stores the data in ASCII
format in D1070 ~ D1085. PLC will automatically convert the data into numerals and stores them in D1050 ~
D1055.
3. M1129 will be On when communication time-out occurs. The program will trigger M1129 and send request to
M1122 for reading the data again.
4. M1140 will be On when data receiving error occurs. The program will trigger M1140 and send request to
5. M1141 will be On when sending address error occurs. The program will trigger M1141 and send request to
M1002
MOV H87 D1120 Set up communication protocol to 9600, 8, E, 1

X0
SET M1122 Set up communication time-out: 100ms
M1129
Communication time-out Retry
M1140
Data receiving error Retry
M1141
sending address error Retry
X0 Set up communication instruction:
MODRD K1 H2100 K6 device address 01, data address H2100
data length 6 words
receiving completed
M1127 The received data are stored in D1070~D1085 in ASCII
handle received data format. PLC will automatically convert the data into
numerals and store them in D1050~D1055.
RST M1127 Sending/receiving of data is completed. The flag is reset.
M1129
RST M1129 Communication time-out. The flag is reset.

Remarks:
1. The activation criteria placed before the three instructions, API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, and API 150
MODRW (Function Code H03), cannot use rising-edge contacts (LDP, ANDP ORP) and falling-edge contacts
(LDF, ANDF, ORF); otherwise, the data stores in the receiving registers will be incorrect.


Controllers
101 MODWR Write Modbus Data ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MODWR: 7 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Address of communication device S2: Address of data to be read n: Data to be written
Explanations:
5. MODWR is a drive instruction exclusively for peripheral communication equipment in MODBUS ASCII
mode/RTU mode. The built-in RS-485 communication ports in Delta VFD drives (except for VFD-A series) are
all compatible with MODBUS communication format. MODRD can be used for controlling communication (write
data) of Delta drives.
6. If the address of S2 is illegal to the designed communication device, the device will respond with an error, PLC
will records the error code in D1130 and M1140 will be On. For example, if 8000H is illegal to VFD-S, M1141
will be On and D1130 = 2. For error codes, see the user manual of VFD-S.
the feedback data is completed, PLC will auto-check if all data are correct. If there is an error, M1140 will be
On.
8. After M1140 or M1141 turn On, the program will send a correct datum to the peripheral equipment. If the
feedback datum is correct, M1140 and M1141 will be reset.
Program Example 1:
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC motor drives (ASCII Mode, M1143 = Off)

M1002

X1
X0
MODWR K1 H0100 H1770 data address H0100 data H1770
The received data are stored in D1070 ~ D1085 in ASCII format.
Process of receiving data PLC will automatically convert the data into numerals and store
M1127 them in D1050 ~ D1055.
receiving
completed
PLC VFD-B, PLC sends: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”

VFD-B PLC, PLC receives: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”
D1089 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 Address of AC motor drive:
D1089 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 ADR (1,0)
D1090 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D1090 high ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0
D1091 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1091 high ‘1’ 31 H
Data address
D1092 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1092 high ‘0’ 30 H
D1093 low ‘1’ 31 H
D1093 high ‘7’ 37 H
Data contents
D1094 low ‘7’ 37 H
D1094 high ‘0’ 30 H
D1095 low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1 Error checksum: LRC CHK
D1095 high ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0 (0,1)
PLC receiving data register (response messages)
D1070 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
D1070 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D1071 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D1071 high ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0
D1072 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1072 high ‘1’ 31 H
Data address
D1073 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1073 high ‘0’ 30 H
D1074 low ‘1’ 31 H
D1074 high ‘7’ 37 H
Data content
D1075 low ‘7’ 37 H
D1075 high ‘0’ 30 H
D1076 low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1
D1076 high ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0
Program Example 2:
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC motor drives (RTU Mode, M1143 = On)

M1002
SET M1143 Set up as RTU mode

X0
SET M1122 Set up as sending flag
X0
MODWR K1 H2000 H12
data address H2000 Write in data H12
Process of receiving data The received data in hex are stored in D1070 ~ D1085.
M1127 Sending/receiving of data is completed.
receiving RST M1127
The flag is reset.
completed
PLC VFD-S, PLC sends: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07

VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
D1091 low 20 H
Data address
D1092 low 00 H
D1093 low 00 H
Data contents
D1094 low 12 H
D1072 low 20 H
Data address
D1073 low 00 H
D1074 low 00 H
Data contents
D1075 low 12 H
Program Example 3:
communication time-out, data receiving error and sending address error occur.
2. When X0 = On, PLC will write H1770(K6000) into VFD-S data adress H0100 of device 01.
M1122 for writing the data again.
4. M1140 will be On when data receiving error occurs. The program will trigger M1140 and send request to M1122
for writing the data again.
M1122 for writing the data again.

M1002

X0
SET M1122 Set up transmission request
M1129
M1140
Data receiving error Retry
M1141
Sending address error Retry

MODWR K1 H0100 H1770
device address 01, data address H0100 data H1770
receiving completed
M1127
handle received data The received data are stored in D1070 ~ D1085 in ASCII format.

M1129
Program Example 4:
communication time-out, data receiving error and sending address error occur. Times of retry = D0 (default = 3).
When communication Retry is successful, the user can return to controlling by triggering criteria.
2. When X0 = On, PLC will write H1770(K6000) into VFD-S data adress H0100 of device 01.
M1122 for writing the data again. Times of Retry = D0 (default = 3)
4. M1140 will be On when data receiving error occurs. The program will trigger M1140 and send request to M1122
for writing the data again. Times of Retry = D0 (default = 3)
M1122 for writing the data again. Times of Retry = D0 (default = 3)

M1002 Set up communication protocol

MOV H87 D1120
to 9600, 8, E, 1
MOV K100 D1129 Set up communication

time-out: 100ms
MOV K3 D0
X0
M1129
LD>= D0 D100 Communication time-out Retry
M1140
Data receive error Retry
M1141
Sending address error Retry

MODWR K1 H0100 H1770 device address 01, data address H0100
M1122 data H1770
INC D100
M1127 Receiving completed
The received data are stored in D1070 ~ D1085 in ASCII
handle received data
format.
RST D100
M1129
M1140
RST M1140
M1141
RST M1141
Remarks:
1. For the registers for flag settings, see explanations in API 80 RS.
2. The activation criteria placed before the two instructions, API 101 MODWR and API 150 MODRW (Function
Code H06, H10), cannot use rising-edge contacts (LDP, ANDP ORP) and falling-edge contacts (LDF, ANDF,
ORF) and have to enable sending request M1122 first.


Controllers
102 FWD Forward Running of VFD-A ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F FWD: 7 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit

Controllers
103 REV Reverse Running of VFD-A ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F REV: 7 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit

Controllers
104 STOP Stop VFD-A ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F STOP: 7 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Address of communication device S2: Rotation frequency of AC motor drive n: Target to be instructed
Explanations:
2. Range of n: K1 or K2
6. FWD/REV/STOP are handy instructions exclusively for Delta VFD-A/H series AC motor drive to perform
forward running/reverse running/stop. Be sure to set up communication time-out (D1129) when executing this
instruction.
7. S2 = operation frequency of AC motor drive. Set frequency in A-series AC motor drive: K0 ~ K4,000 (0.0Hz ~

400.0Hz). Set frequency in H-series: K0 ~ K1,500 (0Hz ~ 1,500Hz).

8. n = instructed target. n=1: AC motor drive at designated address. n=2: all connected AC motor drives.
the feedback data is completed, PLC will auto-check if all data are correct. If there is an error, M1142 will be On.
When n = 2, PLC will not receive any data.
Program Example :
Communication between PLC and VFD-A series AC drives, retry for communication time-out and received data error.
M1002
MOV H0073 D1120 Set up communication protocol to 4800, 8, O, 1

X0
Communication command setting:Device address: 0
FWD K0 K500 K1 Frequency: 500Hz K1: indicated AC motor drive
X0
M1129
M1142
Data receive error Retry
Receiving completed
M1127 The received data are stored in the low bit group of
handle received data D1070 ~ D1080 by ASCI format.
PLC VFD-A, PLC sends: “C ♥ ☺ 0001 0500 ”

VFD-A PLC, PLC sends: “C ♥ ♠ 0001 0500 ”
D1089 low ‘C’ 43 H Start word of instruction
D1090 low ‘♥’ 03 H Checksum
D1091 low ‘☺’ 01 H Instructed target
D1092 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1093 low ‘0’ 30 H
Communication address
D1094 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1095 low ‘1’ 31 H
D1096 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1097 low ‘5’ 35 H
Running instruction
D1098 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1099 low ‘0’ 30 H


D1070 low ‘C’ 43 H Start word of instruction
D1071 low ‘♥’ 03 H Checksum
D1072 low ‘♠’ 06 H Reply authorization (correct: 06H, incorrect: 07 H)
D1073 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1074 low ‘0’ 30 H
Communication address
D1075 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1076 low ‘1’ 31 H
D1077 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1078 low ‘5’ 35 H
Running instruction
D1079 low ‘0’ 30 H
D1080 low ‘0’ 30 H
Remarks:
There is no limitation on the times of using this instruction in the program, but only one instruction is allowed to be
executed at a time.


Controllers
105 RDST Read VFD-A Status ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F RDST: 5 steps
S * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Address of communicatino device n: Target to be instructed
Explanations:
1. Range of S: K0 ~ K31
2. Range of n: K0 ~ K3
6. n: Instructed target (to be read) in AC motor drive
n=0, frequency
n=1, output frequency
n=2, output current
n=3, running instruction
7. Data sent back (feedback) from AC motor drive (11 bytes, see VFD-A user manual) are stored in the low bytes
of D1070 ~ D1080.
”Q, S, B, Uu, Nn, ABCD”
Feedback Explanation Data storage
Q Start word: ’Q’ (51H). D1070 low
S Checksum code: 03H. D0171 low
B Instruction authorization. correct: 06H, incorrect: 07H. D1072 low
U Communication address (address: 00~31). ”Uu” = (“00” ~ ”31”) indicated D1073 low
U in ASCII format. D1074 low
N D1075 low
Instructed target (00 ~ 03).”Nn” = (“00 ~ 03”) indicated in ASCII format.
N D1076 low
A D1077 low
Instructed data. The content of ”ABCD” differs upon the instructed targets
B D1078 low
(00 ~ 03). 00 ~ 03 indicate frequency, current and running mode
C D1079 low
respectively. Please refer to the explanations below for details.
D D1080 low
Nn = “00” Frequency instruction = ABC.D (Hz)
Nn = “01” Output instruction = ABC.D (Hz)
Nn = “02” Output current = ABC.D (A)
PLC will automatically convert the ASCII characters of ”ABCD” into numerals and store the
numeral in D1050. For example, assume ”ABCD” = “0600”, PLC will convert ABCD into K0600
(0258 H) and store it in the special register D1050.

Nn = “03” Running instruction

‘A’ = ‘0’ Stop, ‘5’ JOG (forward)
‘1’ Forward running ‘6’ JOG (reverse)
‘2’ Stop, ‘7’ JOG (reverse)
‘3’ Reverse running ‘8’ Abnormal
‘4’ JOG (forward),
ES series PLCs will convert the ASCII characters of ”A” into a numeral and store the
numeral in D1051. For example, assume ”A” = “3”, PLC will convert A into K3 and
store it in the special register D1051. SA/EH series PLCs will store the numeral in low
bytes of D1051.
‘B’ = b7 b6 b5 b4 Source of running instruction
0 0 0 0 Digital keypad
0 0 0 1 1st Step Speed
0 0 1 0 2nd Step Speed
0 0 1 1 3rd Step Speed
0 1 0 0 4th Step Speed
1 0 0 0 JOG frequency
1 0 0 1 Analog signal frequency instruction
1 0 1 0 RS-485 communication interface
1 0 1 1 Up/Down control
b3 = 0 No DC braking stop 1 DC braking stop
b2 = 0 No DC braking startup 1 DC braking startup
b1 = 0 Forward running 1 Reverse running
b0 = 0 Stop 1 Running
ES series PLCs will store ”B” in special auxiliary relay M1168 (b0) ~ M1175 (b7).
SA/EH series PLCs will store “B” (in hex) in the high bytes of special register D1051.
“CD” = “00” No abnormal record “10” OcA
“01” oc “11” Ocd
“02” ov “12” Ocn
“03” oH “13” GFF
“04” oL “14” Lv
“05” oL1 “15” Lv1
“06” EF “16” cF2
“07” cF1 “17” bb
“08” cF3 “18” oL2
“09” HPF “19”
ES/SA/EH series PLCs will convert the ASCII characters of ”CD” into a numerals and
store the numeral in D1052. For example, assume ”CD” = “16”, PLC will convert CD
into K16 and store it in the special register D1052.
Remarks:
1. The activation criteria placed before the three instructions, API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST and API 150
MODRW (Function Code 03), cannot use rising-edge contacts (LDP, ANDP ORP) and falling-edge contacts


Controllers
106 RSTEF Reset Abnormal VFD-A ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F RSTEF: 5 steps
S * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Address of communication device n: Target to be instructed
Explanations:
1. Range of S: K0 ~ K31
2. Range of n: K1 or K2
5. RSTEF is a handy communication instruction exclusively for Delta VFD-A series AC motor drives and is used
for reset when the AC motor drive operates abnormally.
6. n: instructed target. n=1: AC motor drive at assigned address. n=2: all connected AC motor drives.
7. The feedback (returned) data from the peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 ~ D1089. If n = 2, there will
be no feedback data.
Remarks:
1. The activation criteria placed before the three instructions, API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST and API 150
MODRW (Function Code 03), cannot use rising-edge contacts (LDP, ANDP ORP) and falling-edge contacts


Controllers
107 LRC P Checksum LRC Mode ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F LRC, LRCP: 7 steps
S *
n * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start operation device for ASCII mode checksum n: Number of calculated bits D: Start device for storing the
operation result LRC checksum: See remarks.
Explanations:
3. Flag: M1161 (switching between 8/16 bit modes)
4. n has to be even. If n does not fall within its range, an operation error will occur, the instruction will not be
executed, M1067, M1068 = On and D1067 will record the error code H’0E1A.
5. In 16-bit conversion mode: When M1161 = Off, S divides its hex data area into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits
and performs LRC checksum operation on each bit. The data will be sent to the higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits in
D. n = the number of calculated bits.
6. In 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161 = On, S divides its hex data area into higher 8 bits (invalid data) and
lower 8 bits and performs LRC checksum operation on each bit. The data will be sent to the lower 8 bits in D
and occupy 2 registers. n = the number of calculated bits. (All higher bits in D are “0”.)
Program Example:
When PLC communicates with VFD-S series AC motor drives (In ASCII mode, M1143 = Off), (In 8-bit mode, M1161 =
On), the sent data write in advance the 6 data read starting from H2101 of VFD-S.
M1002

sending request pulse
Write in sent data in advance
pulse
X10
RS D100 K17 D120 K35
receiving completed
Process of receiving data
M1123
Sending/receiving of data is completed.
RST M1123
The flag is reset.

PLC VFD-S, PLC sends: “: 01 03 2101 0006 D4 CR LF ”

D101 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 Address of AC motor
D102 low ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 drive: ADR (1,0)
D103 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 Instruction code: CMD
D104 low ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0 (1,0)
D105 low ‘2’ 32 H
D106 low ‘1’ 31 H
D107 high ‘0’ 30 H
D108 low ‘1’ 31 H
D109 low ‘0’ 30 H
D110 low ‘0’ 30 H
D111 low ‘0’ 30 H
D112 low ‘6’ 36 H
D113 low ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 1 Error checksum: LRC
D114 low ‘4’ 34 H LRC CHK 0 CHK (0,1)
D115 low CR AH
END
D116 low LF DH
The error checksum LRC CHK (0,1) can be calculated by LRC instruction (in 8-bit mode, M1161 = On).
M1000
LRC D101 K12 D113
LRC checksum: 01 H + 03 H + 21 H + 01 H + 00 H + 06 H = 2C H. Obtain 2’s complement, D4H, and store ‘D’(44H) in

the lower 8 bits of D113 and ‘4’(34H) in the lower 8 bits of D114.
Remarks:
1. The format of ASCII mode with a communication datum
STX ‘: ’ Start word = ‘: ’ (3AH)
Address Hi ‘0’ Communication:
Address Lo ‘1’ 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCll codes
Function Hi ‘0’ Function code:
Function Lo ‘3’ 8-bit function consists of 2 ASCll codes
DATA (n-1) ‘2’ Data content:
……. ‘1’ n × 8-bit data consists of 2n ASCll
DATA 0 ‘0’ codes
‘2’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
LRC CHK Hi ‘D’ LRC checksum:
LRC CHK Lo ‘7’ 8-bit checksum consists of 2 ASCll codes
END Hi CR End word:
END Lo LF END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH)
2. LRC checksum: 2’s complement of the summed up value of communication address and data. For example,
01 H + 03 H + 21 H + 02 H + 00 H + 02 H = 29 H. Obtain 2’s complement = D7H.


Controllers
108 CRC P Checksum CRC Mode ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F CRC, CRCP: 7 steps
S *
n * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Start operation device for RTU mode checksum n: Number of calculated bits D: Start device for storing the
operation result CRC checksum: See remarks.
Explanations:
2. Flags: M1161 (switching between 8/16-bit modes)
3. If n does not fall within its range, an operation error will occur, the instruction will not be executed, M1067,
M1068 = On and D1067 will record the error code H’0E1A.
4. In 16-bit conversion mode: When M1161 = Off, S divides its hex data area into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits
and performs CRC checksum operation on each bit. The data will be sent to the higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits in
D. n = the number of calculated bits.
5. In 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161 = On, S divides its hex data area into higher 8 bits (invalid data) and
lower 8 bits and performs CRC checksum operation on each bit. The data will be sent to the lower 8 bits in D
and occupy 2 registers. n = the number of calculated bits. (All higher 8 bits in D are “0”.)
Program Example:
When PLC communicates with VFD-S series AC motor drives (In RTU mode, M1143 = On), (In 16-bit mode, M1161 =
On), the sent data write in advance H12 into H2000 of VFD-S.

M1002
Set up communication protocol
MOV H87 D1120
to 9600, 8, E, 1
Set up communication
MOV K100 D1129
time-out: 100ms
SET M1143 RTU Mode
SET M1161 8-bit Mode

transmission
request
Write transmitting data in advance
pulse
X10
RS D100 K8 D120 K8
receiving completed
Process received data
M1123
RST M1123 Receiving completed and flag reset
PLC VFD-S, PLC sends: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07


D102 low 20 H
Data address
D103 low 00 H
D104 low 00 H
Data content
D105 low 12 H
D106 low 02 H CRC CHK 0
D107 low 07 H CRC CHK 1
The error checksum CRC CHK (0,1) can be calculated by CRC instruction (in 8-bit mode, M1161 = On).
M1000
CRC D100 K6 D106
CRC checksum: 02 H is stored in the lower 8 bits of D106 and 07 H in the lower 8 bits of D107,
Remarks:
1. The format of RTU mode with a communication datum
START Time interval
Address Communication address: 8-bit binary
Function Function code: 8-bit binary
DATA (n-1)
Data content:
…….
n × 8-bit data
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low CRC checksum:
CRC CHK High 16-bit CRC checksum consists of 2 8-bit binaries
END Time interval
2. CRC checksum starts from Address and ends at Data content.

The operation of CRC checksum:

Step 1: Make the 16-bit register (CRC register) = FFFFH
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte message instruction and the low-bit 16-bit CRC register. Store the
result in CRC register.
Step 3: Shift the CRC register one bit to the right and fill 0 in the higher bit.
Step 4: Check the value that shifts to the right. If it is 0, store the new value from Step 3 into the CRC register,
otherwise, Exclusive OR A001H and the CRC register, and store the result in the CRC register.
Step 5: Repeat Step 3 ~ 4 and finish calculating the 8 bits.
Step 6: Repeat Steps 2 ~ 5 for obtaining the next 8-bit message instruction until all the message instructions
are calculated. In the end, the obtained CRC register value is the CRC checksum. Be aware that
CRC checksum should be placed in the checksum of the message instruction.


Controllers
109 SWRD P Read Digital Switch ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SWRD, SWRDP: 3 steps
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
D: Device for storing the read value
Explanations:
2. Flags: M1104 ~ M1111 (status of digital switch)
3. This instruction stores the value read from digital switch function card into D.
4. The read value is stored in the low byte in D. Every switch has a corresponding bit.
5. When there is no digital function card inserted, the error message C400 (hex) will appear in grammar check.
Program Example:
1. There are l 8 DIP switches on the digital switch function card. After the switches are read by SWRD instruction,
the status of each switch will correspond to M0 ~ M7.
M1000
SWRD K2M0
M0
Y0
M1
MOV K2M0 D0
M2
CNT C0 K10
M3
RST C0
M4
TMR T0 K100
2. The status of M0 ~ M7 can be executed by each contact instruction.

3. The execution of END instruction indicates that the process of input is completed. REF (I/O refresh) instruction
will be invalid.
4. When SWRD instruction uses the data in digital switch function card, it can read minimum 4 bits (K1Y*, K1M*
or K1S*).
Remarks:
When digital switch function card is inserted, the status of the 8 DIP switches will correspond to M1104 ~ M1111.


Controllers
110 D ECMP P Floating Point Compare ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DECMP, DECMPP: 13 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Binary floating point comparison value 1 S2: Binary floating point comparison value 2 D: Comparison
result
Explanations:
1. D occupies 3 consecutive devices.
3. The binary floating point values S1 and S2 are compared with each other. The comparison result (>, =, <) is
stored in D.
4. If S1 or S2 is an designated constant K or H, the instruction will convert the constant into a binary floating point
value before the comparison.
Program Example:
1. Designated device M10 and M10 ~ M12 are automatically occupied.
2. When X0 = On. DECMP instruction will be executed and one of M10 ~ M12 will be On. When X0 = Off, DECMP
instruction will not be executed and M10 ~ M12 will remain their status before X0 = Off.
3. To obtain results ≧, ≦, ≠, serial-parallel M10 ~ M12.
4. Use RST or ZRST instruction to clear the result.
X0
DECMP D0 D100 M10
M10
On when (D1,D0)>(D101,D100)
M11
On when (D1,D0)=(D101,D100)
M12
On when (D1,D0)<(D101,D100)
Remarks:
For floating point operations, see “5.3 Handling of Numeric Values”.


Controllers
111 D EZCP P Floating Point Zone Compare ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DEZCP, DEZCPP: 17 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
S * * *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Lower bound of binary floating point S2: Upper bound of binary floating point S: Binary floating point
comparison result D: Comparison result
Explanations:
1. D occupied 3 consecutive devices.
2. S1 ≤ S2. See the specifications of each model for their range of use.
3. S is compared with S1 and S2 and the result (>, =, <) is stored in D.
4. If S1 or S2 is andesignated constant K or H, the instruction will convert the constant into a binary floating point
value before the comparison.
5. When S1 > S2, S1 will be used as upper/lower bound for the comparison.
Program Example:
1. Designated device M0 and M0 ~ M2 are automatically occupied.
2. When X0 = On. DEZCP instruction will be executed and one of M0 ~ M2 will be On. When X0 = Off, EZCP
instruction will not be executed and M0 ~ M2 will remain their status before X0 = Off.
3. Use RST or ZRST instruction to clear the result.
X0
DEZCP D0 D10 D20 M0
M0
On when (D1,D0) > (D21, D20)
M1
On when (D1,D0) < (D21, D20) < (D11, D10)
M2
On when (D21, D20) > (D11, D10)
Remarks:


Controllers
112 D MOVR P Move Floating Point Data ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DMOVR, DMOVRP: 9 steps
S
D * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S：Source floating point data D：Destination device
Explanations:
1. S can only be in floating point (FX.XX).
3. This instruction is able to enter floating point values directly in S.
4. When the instruction is executed, the content in S is moved directly into D. When the instruction is not executed,
the content in D will not be modified.
Program Example:
1. User DMOVR instruction to move 32-bit floating point data.
2. When X0 = Off, the content in (D11、D10) remains unchanged. When X0 = On, the present value
F1.20000004768372 will be moved to data registers (D11, D10).
X0
DMOVR F1.20000004768372 D10
Remarks:
This instruction only supports ES V6.1, SA/SX_V1.1, SV_V1.2, EH_V1.2, EH2/SV_V1.0 and above versions.


Controllers
116 D RAD P Angle Radian ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DRAD, DRADP: 9 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source (angle) D: Result (radian)
Explanations:
3. Radian = degree × (π/180)
4. If the absolute value of the result ＞ maximum floating point available, the carry flag M1022 = On.
5. If the absolute value of the result ＜ minimum floating point available, the borrow flag M1021 = On.
6. If the result = 0, the zero flag M1020 = On.
Program Example:
When X0 = On, designate the degree of binary floating point (D1, D0). Convert the angle into radian and store the
result in binary floating point in (D11, D10).
X0
DRAD D0 D10
D1 D0 Angle
D 11 D 10 Radian ( degree X π / 180)

Remarks:


Controllers
117 D DEG P Radian Angle ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DDEG, DDEGP: 9 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source (radian) D: Result (angle)
Explanations:
3. Degree = radian × (180/π)
Program Example:
When X0 = On, designate the angle of binary floating point (D1, D0). Convert the radian into angle and store the
result in binary floating point in (D11, D10).
X0
DDEG D0 D10
D1 D0 Radian
D 11 D 10 Angle (radian X 180/π )

Remarks:


Controllers
118 D EBCD P Float to Scientific Conversion ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DEBCD, DEBCDP: 9 steps
S *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source D: Result
Explanations:
3. This instruction converts binary floating point value in the register designated by S into decimal floating point
value and stores it in the register designated by D.
4. PLC conducts floating point operation in binary format. DEBCD instruction is exclusively for converting floating
points from binary to decimal.
Program Example:
When X0 = On, the binary floating points in D1 and D0 will be converted into decimal floating points and stored in D3
and D2.
X0
DEBCD D0 D2
Binary 32 bits for real number, 8 bits for exponent

Floating Point D1 D0 1 bit for symbol bit
Exponent Real number

Exponent
Decimal Real number [D3]
Floating Point D3 D2 [D2] * 10
Remarks:


Controllers
119 D EBIN P Scientific to Float Conversion ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DEBIN, DEBINP: 9 steps
S *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source D: Result
Explanations:
3. This instruction converts decimal floating point value in the register designated by S into binary floating point
value and stores it in the register designated by D.
4. DEBIN instruction is exclusively for converting floating points from decimal to binary.
5. Range of decimal floating point real numbers: -9.999 ~ +9,999. Range of exponants: -41 ~ +35. Range of PLC
decimal floating points: ±1,175 × 10-41 ~ ±3,402 × 10+35.
Program Example 1:
When X1 = On, the decimal floating points in D1 and D0 will be converted into binary floating points and stored in D3
and D2.
X1
DEBIN D0 D2
Exponent Real number

Real number
Decim al Exponent [D0]
Floating P oint D1 D0 [D1] * 10
Binary 23 bits for real number, 8 bits for exponent

Floating P oint D3 D2 1 bit for symbol bit
Program Example 2:
1. Use FLT instruction (API 149) to convert BIN integer into binary floating point before performing floating point
operation. The value to be converted must be BIN integer and use DEBIN instruction to convert the floating
point into a binary one.
2. When X0 = On, move K3,140 to D0 and K-3 to D1 to generate decimal floating point (3.14 = 3140 × 10-3).
X0
MOVP K3140 D0 K3140 D0 [D1]
-3
3140 X 10
MOVP K-3 D1 K-3 D1 [D0]
(D1, D0) (D3, D2)

DEBIN D0 D2 -3
3140 X 10 Binary floating point

Remarks:


Controllers
120 D EADD P Floating Point Addition ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DEADD, DEADDP: 13 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Summand S2: Addend D: Sum
Explanations:
3. S1 + S2 = D. The floating point value in the register designated by S1 and S2 are added up and the result is
stored in the register designated by D. The addition is conducted in binary floating point system.
value before the operation.
5. S1 and S2 can designate the same register. In this case, if the “continuous execution” instruction is in use,
during the period when the criteria contact in On, the register will be added once in every scan by pulse
execution instruction DEADDP.
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, binary floating point (D1, D0) + binary floating point (D3, D2) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
X0
DEADD D0 D2 D10
Program Example 2:
When X2 = On, binary floating point (D11, D10) + K1234 (automatically converted into binary floating point) and the
result is stored in (D21, D20).
X2
DEADD D10 K1234 D20
Remarks:


Controllers
121 D ESUB P Floating Point Subtraction ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DESUB, DESUBP: 13 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Minuend S2: Subtrahend D: Remainder
Explanations:
3. S1 − S2 = D. The floating point value in the register designated by S2 is subtracted from the floating point value
in the register assigned by S1 and the result is stored in the register designated by D. The subtraction is
conducted in binary floating point system.
during the period when the criteria contact in On, the register will be subtracted once in every scan by pulse
execution instruction DESUBP.
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, binary floating point (D1, D0) － binary floating point (D3, D2) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
X0
DESUB D0 D2 D10
Program Example 2:
When X2 = On, K1234 (automatically converted into binary floating point) － binary floating point (D1, D0) and the
X2
DESUB K1234 D0 D10
Remarks:


Controllers
122 D EMUL P Floating Point Multiplication ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DEMUL, DEMULP: 13 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Multiplicand S2: Multiplicator D: Product
Explanations:
3. S1 × S2 = D. The floating point value in the register assigned by S1 is multiplied with the floating point value in
the register designated by S2 and the result is stored in the register designated by D. The multiplication is
conducted in binary floating point system.
during the period when the criteria contact in On, the register will be multiplied once in every scan by pulse
execution instruction DEMULP.
Program Example 1:
When X1 = On, binary floating point (D1, D0) × binary floating point (D11, D10) and the result is stored in (D21, D20).
X1
DEMUL D0 D10 D20
Program Example 2:
When X2 = On, K1234 (automatically converted into binary floating point) × binary floating point (D1, D0) and the
X2
DEMUL K1234 D0 D10
Remarks:


Controllers
123 D EDIV P Floating Point Division ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DEDIV, DEDIVP: 13 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Dividend S2: Divisor D: Quotient and remainder
Explanations:
3. S1 ÷ S2 = D. The floating point value in the register designated by S1 is divided by the floating point value in the
register assigned by S2 and the result is stored in the register designated by D. The division is conducted in
binary floating point system.
5. If S2 = 0, operation error will occur, the instruction will not be executed, M1067, M1068 = On and D1067 will
recorded the error code H’0E19.
Program Example 1:
When X1 = On, binary floating point (D1, D0) ÷ binary floating point (D11, D10) and the quotient is stored in (D21,
D20).
X1
DEDIV D0 D10 D20
Program Example 2:
When X2 = On, binary floating point (D1, D0) ÷ K1234 (automatically converted into binary floating point) and the
X2
DEDIV D0 K1234 D10
Remarks:


Controllers
124 D EXP P Exponent of Binary Floating Point ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DEXP, DEXPP: 9 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Device for operation source D: Device for operation result
Explanations:
3. e = 2.71828 as the base and S as exponent for EXP operation: EXP［D +1, D］=［S +1, S］
4. Both positive and negative values are valid for S. When designating D registers, the data should be 32-bit and
the operation should be performed in floating point system. Therefore, S should be converted into a floating
point value.
5. The content in D = eS; e = 2.71828, S = designated source data
Program Example:
1. When M0 = On, convert (D1, D0) into binary floating point and store it in register (D11, D10).
2. When M1= On, use (D11, D10) as the exponent for EXP operation and store the binary floating point result in
register (D21, D20).
3. When M2 = On, convert the binary floating point (D21, D20) into decimal floating point (D30 × 10[D31]) and store
it in register (D31, D30).
M0
RST M1081
DFLT D0 D10
M1
DEXP D10 D20
M2
DEBCD D20 D30
Remarks:


Controllers
125 D LN P Natural Logarithm of Binary Floating Point ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DLN, DLNP: 9 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Device for operation source D: Device for operation result
Explanations:
3. This instruction performs natural logarithm “LN” operation by S: LN［S + 1, S］=［D + 1, D］
4. Only positive values are valid for S. When designating D registers, the data should be 32-bit and the operation
should be performed in floating point system. Therefore, S should be converted into a floating point value.
5. eD = S .The content in D = lnS; S = designated source data.
Program Example:
1. When M0 = On, convert (D1, D0) into binary floating point and store it in register (D11, D10).
2. When M1= On, use register (D11, D10) as the real number for LN operation and store the binary floating point
result in register (D21, D20).
M0
RST M1081
DFLT D0 D10
M1
DLN D10 D20
M2
DEBCD D20 D30
Remarks:


Controllers
126 D LOG P Logarithm of Binary Floating Point ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DLOG, DLOGP: 13 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Device for base S2: Device for operation source D: Device for operation result
Explanations:
3. This instruction performs “log” operation of the content in S1 and S2 and stores the result in D.
4. Only positives are valid for the content in S1 and S2. When designating D registers, the data should be 32-bit
and the operation should be performed in floating point system. Therefore, S1 and S2 should be converted into
floating point values.
5. S1D = S2, D = ? LogS1S2 = D
Example: Assume S1 = 5, S2 = 125, D = log5125 = ?
S1D = S2 5D = 125 D = log5125 = 3
Program Example:
1. When M0 = On, convert (D1, D0) and (D3, D2) into binary floating points and store them in the 32-bit registers
(D11, D10) and (D13, D12).
2. When M1= On, perform log operation on the binary floting points in 32-bit registers (D11, D10) and (D13, D12)
and store the result in the 32-bit register (D21, D20).
M0
RST M1081
DFLT D0 D10
DFLT D2 D12
M1
DLOG D10 D12 D20
M2
DEBCD D20 D30
Remarks:



Controllers
127 D ESQR P Floating Point Square Root ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DESQR, DESQRP: 9 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source device D: Operation result
Explanations:
1. Range of S: ≥ 0
3. Flags: M1020 (zero flag); M1067 (operation error)
4. This instruction performs a square root operation on the content in the register designated by S and stores the
result in the register designated by D. The square root operation is performed in floating point system.
5. If S is an designated constant K or H, the instruction will convert the constant into a binary floating point value
before the operation.
6. If the result of the operation = 0, the zero flag M1020 = On.
7. S can only be a positive value. Performing any square root operation on a negative value will result in an
“operation error” and this instruction will not be executed. M1067 and M1068 will be On and D1067 will record
the error code H’0E1B.
Program Example 1:
When M0 = On, calculate the square root of the binary floating point (D1, D0) and store the result in register (D11,
D10).
X0
DESQR D0 D10
(D1, D0) (D11 , D10)

binary floating point binary floating point
Program Example 2:
When M2 = On, calculate the square root of K1,234 (automatically converted into binary floating point) and store the
result in register (D11, D10).
X2
DESQR K1234 D10
Remarks:


Controllers
128 D POW P Floating Point Power Operation ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DPOW, DPOWP: 13 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Device for base. S2: Device for exponent. D: Device for operation result
Explanations:
2. This instruction performs power multiplication of binary floating point S1 and S2 and stores the result in D.
D = POW［S1 + 1, S1］^［S2 + 1, S2］
3. Only positives are valid for the content in S1. Both positives and negatives are valid for the content in S2. When
designating D registers, the data should be 32-bit and the operation should be performed in floating point
system. Therefore, S1 and S2 should be converted into floating point values.
Example: When S1S2 = D, D = ?
Assume S1 = 5, S2 = 3, D = 53 =125
Program Example:
1. When M0 = On, convert (D1, D0) and (D3, D2) into binary floating points and store them in the 32-bit registers
(D11, D10) and (D13, D12).
2. When M1= On, perform POW operation on the binary floting points in 32-bit registers (D11, D10) and (D13,
D12) and store the result in the 32-bit register (D21, D20).
M0
RST M1081
DFLT D0 D10
DFLT D2 D12
M1
DPOW D10 D12 D20
M2
DEBCD D20 D30
Remarks:



Controllers
129 D INT P Float to Integer ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F INT, INTP: 5 steps
S * DINT, DINTP: 9 steps
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source device D: Converted result
Explanations:
1. S occupies 2 consecutive devices. See the specifications of each model for their range of use.
3. The binary floating point value of the register designated by S is converted to BIN integer and stored in the
register designated by D. The decimal of BIN integer is left out.
4. This instruction is the inverse operation of API 49 FLT instruction.
5. If the converstion result = 0, the zero flag M1020 = On
If there is any decimal left out, the borrow flag M1021 = On.
If the result exceeds the range listed below, the carry flag M1022 = On.
16-bit instruction: -32,768 ~ 32,767
32-bit instruction: -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, the binary floating point (D1, D0) will be converted into BIN integer and the result will be stored
in (D10). The decimal of BIN integer will be left out.
2. When X1 = On, the binary floating point (D21, D20) will be converted into BIN integer and the result will be
stored in (D31, D30). The decimal of BIN integer will be left out.
X0
INT D0 D10
X1
DINT D20 D30
Remarks:


Controllers
130 D SIN P Sine ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DSIN, DSINP: 9 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source value D: SIN result
Explanations:
1. 0° ≤ S < 360°. See the specifications of each model for their range of use.
2. Flags: M1018 (angle or radian); M1020 (zero flag)
3. S can be an angle or radian, decided by M1018.
4. When M1018 = Off, the program will be in radian mode and the RAD value = angle ×π/180
5. When M1018 = On, the program will be in angle mode and the range of angle should be “0° ≤ angle < 360°”
6. If the result = On, M1020 = On.
7. The SIN value obtained by S is calculated and stored in the register designated by D. The figure below offers
the relation between radian and the result.
R S: Radian
1 R: Result (SIN value)
S
-2 - 32 -2 -2 0
2
3
2
2
-1
Program Example 1:
When M1018 = Off, the program is in radian mode. When X0 = On, use the RAD value of binary floating point (D1, D0)
and obtain its SIN value. The binary floating point result will be stored in (D11, D10).
M1002
RST M1018
X0
DSIN D0 D10
RAD value (angle x / 180)

D1 D0
D11 D10 SIN value

Program Example 2:
When M1018 = Off, the program is in radian mode. Input terminals X0 and X1 select the angle. The angles are
converted into RAD value for calculating the SIN value.

X0
MOVP K30 D10 (K30 D10)
X1
MOVP K60 D10 (K60 D10)
M1000
FLT D10 D14 (D10 D15, D14) binary floating point
( /180) (D21, D20)

DEDIV K31415926 K1800000000 D20
binary binary
floating point floating point
DEMUL D14 D20 D40 (D15, D14) angle x /180
(D41, D40) RAD binary floating point
DSIN D40 D50 (D41 , D40) RAD (D51, D50) SIN

Program Example 3:
When M1018 = On, the program is in angle mode. When X0 = On, use the angle of (D1, D0) to obtain SIN value and
store the binary floating point result in (D11, D10). (0° ≤ angle < 360°)
M1002
SET M1018
X0
DSIN D0 D10
D1 D0 angle value
SIN value
D 11 D 10 (binary floating point)
Remarks:


Controllers
131 D COS P Cosine ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DCOS, DCOSP: 9 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source value D: COS result
Explanations:
7. The COS value obtained by S is calculated and stored in the register designated by D. The figure below offers the
relation between radian and the result.
R S: Radian
R: Result (COS value)
1
S
-2 - 32 -2 -2 0
2
3
2
2
-1
8. Switch between radian and angle by M1018: When M1018 = Off, S will be a RAD value; when M1018 = On, S
will be an angle (0° ~ 360°).
Program Example 1:
and obtain its COS value. The binary floating point result will be stored in (D11, D10).
M1002
RST M1018
X0
DCOS D0 D10
D1 D0 RAD value (angle x /180)

COS value
D11 D10 binary floating point
Program Example 2:
When M1018 = On, the program is in angle mode. When X0 = On, use the angle of (D1, D0) to obtain COS value and

M1002
SET M1018
X0
DCOS D0 D10
D1 D0 angle value
COS value
D11 D 10 (binary floating point)
Remarks:


Controllers
132 D TAN P Tangent ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DTAN, DTANP: 9 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source value D: TAN result
Explanations:
7. The TAN value obtained by S is calculated and stored in the register designated by D. The figure below offers the
relation between radian and the result.
R S: Radian
R: Result (TAN value)
-2 2
2
- S
-2 0 3
- 32 -1 1
2
Program Example 1:
and obtain its TAN value. The binary floating point result will be stored in (D11, D10).
M1002
RST M1018
X0
DTAN D0 D10
D1 D0 RAD value (angle x /180)

D11 D10 TAN value

Program Example 2:
When M1018 = On, the program is in angle mode. When X0 = On, use the angle of (D1, D0) to obtain TAN value and

M1002
SET M1018
X0
DTAN D0 D10
D1 D0 angle value
TAN value
D 11 D 10 (binary floating point)
Remarks:


Controllers
133 D ASIN P Arc Sine ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DASIN, DASINP: 9 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source value (binary floating point) D: ASIN result
Explanations:
3. ASIN value=sin–1. The figure below offers the relation between the entered sin value and the result.
R S: Entered data (sine value)
R: ASIN value (radian)
2
S
-1,0 0 1,0
-2
4. The decimal floating point of the SIN value designated by S should be within -1.0 ~ +1.0. If the value falls without
the range, M1067 and M1068 will be On without performing any action.
5. If the result = 0, M1020 = On.
Program Example:
When X0 = On, obtain the ASIN value of binary floating point (D1, D0) and store the binary floating point result in (D11,
D10).
X0
DASIN D0 D10
D11 D10 ASIN value

Remarks:


Controllers
134 D ACOS P Arc Cosine ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DACOS, DACOSP: 9 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source value (binary floating point) D: ACOS result
Explanations:
3. ACOS value=cos–1. The figure below offers the relation between the entered cos value and the result.
R S: Entered data (cosine value)
R: ACOS value (radian)
S
-1,0 0 1,0
4. The decimal floating point of the COS value designated by S should be within -1.0 ~ +1.0. If the value falls
without the range, M1067 and M1068 will be On without performing any action.
5. If the result = 0, M1020 = On.
Program Example:
When X0 = On, obtain the ACOS value of binary floating point (D1, D0) and store the binary floating point result in
(D11, D10).
X0
DACOS D0 D10
D11 D10 ACOS value

Remarks:


Controllers
135 D ATAN P Arc Tangent ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DATAN, DATANP: 9 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source value (binary floating point) D: ATAN value
Explanations:
3. ATAN value=tan–1. The figure below offers the relation between the entered tan value and the result.
R
S: Entered data (tangent value)
R: ATAN value (radian)
2
S
0
-2
4. If the result =0, M1020 = On.
Program Example:
When X0 = On, obtain the ATAN value of binary floating point (D1, D0) and store the binary floating point result in
(D11, D10).
X0
DATAN D0 D10
D11 D10 ATAN value

Remarks:


Controllers
136 D SINH P Hyperbolic Sine ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
Type Bit Devices Word devices Program Steps

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DSINH, DSINHP: 9 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source value (binary floating point) D: SINH value
Explanations:
3. SINH value=(es-e-s)/2. The result is stored in D.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, obtain the SINH value of binary floating point (D1, D0) and store the binary floating point result in
(D11, D10).
X0
DSINH D0 D10
D11 D10 SINH value

Remarks:


Controllers
137 D COSH P Hyperbolic Cosine ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DCOSH, DCOSHP: 9 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source value (binary floating point) D: COSH value
Explanations:
3. COSH value=(es+e-s)/2. The result is stored in D.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, obtain the COSH value of binary floating point (D1, D0) and store the binary floating point result in
(D11, D10).
X0
DCOSH D0 D10
D11 D10 COSH value

Remarks:


Controllers
138 D TANH P Hyperbolic Tangent ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DTANH, DTANHP: 9 steps
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source value (binary floating point) D: TANH result
Explanations:
3. TANH value=(es-e-s)/(es+e-s) . The result is stored in D.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, obtain the TANH value of binary floating point (D1, D0) and store the binary floating point result in
(D11, D10).
X0
DTANH D0 D10
D11 D10 TANH value

Remarks:


Controllers
143 DELAY Delay Instruction ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DELAY, DELAYP: 3 steps
S * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: delay time (unit: 0.1ms)
Explanations:
1. Range of S: K1 ~ K1,000. See the specifications of each model for their range of use.
2. After DELAY instruction is executed, the program after DELAY in every scan period will execute delay outputs
according to the delay time designated by the user.
Program Example:
When X0 goes from Off to On and generates an external interruption, the interruption subroutine will execute DELAY
for 2ms before executing the next step, X1 = On and Y0 = On.
EI
Main Program
FEND
M1000
I001 DELAY K20
X1
Y0
REF Y0 K8
IRET
END
Interrupt input X0
Input X1
Output Y0
T=2ms
Remarks:
1. User can define the delay time based on their needs.
2. The delay time may increase due do the influences from communication, high-speed counters and high-speed
pulse output instructions.
3. The delay time of designated external output (transistor or relay) will increase due to the delay on the transistor

or relay itself. See 2.3 for more information.


Controllers
144 GPWM General PWM Output ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F GPWM: 7 steps
S1 *
S2 *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Width of output pulse S2: Pulse output cycle D: Pulse output device
Explanations:
1. S2 occupies 3 consecutive devices.
2. S1 ≤ S2. See the specifications of each model for their range of use.
3. Range of S1: t = 0 ~ 32,767ms.
4. Range of S2: t = 1 ~ 32,767ms.
5. S2 +1 and S2 +2 are parameters for the system. Do not occupy them.
6. Pulse output devices D: Y, M, S.
7. When being executed, GPWM instruction designates S1 and S2 and that pulses output will be from device D.
8. When S1 ≤ 0, there will be no pulse output. When S1 ≥ S2, the pulse output device will keep being On.
9. S1 and S2 can be modified when GPWM instruction is being executed.
Program Example:
When X0 = On, D0 = K1,000, D2 = K2,000, and Y10 will output the pulse illustrated below. When X0 = Off, Y10 output
will be Off.
t T
X0
GPWM D0 D2 Y10
t=1000ms
Output Y10
T=2000ms
Explanations:
1. This instruction counts by the scan cycle; therefore the maximum offset will be one PLC scan cycle. S1, S2 and
(S2 - S1) should > PLC scan cycle; otherwise, errors will occur during GPWM outputs.
2. Please note that placing this instruction in a subroutine or interruption will cause inaccurate GPWM outputs.


Controllers
145 FTC Fuzzy Temperature Control ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F FTC: 9 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
S3 *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Set value (SV) S2: Present value (PV) S3: Parameter (sampling time) D: Output value (MV)
Explanations:
1. Range of S1 : 1 ~ 5000 (shown as 0.1°C ~ 500°C). Unit: 0.1°. If (S3 +1) is set as K0, the range will be 0.1°C ~
500°C.
2. Range of S2 : 1 ~ 5000 (shown as 0.1°C ~ 500°C). Unit: 0.1°. If (S3 +1) is set as bit0 = 0, the range will be 0.1°C
~ 500°C. Therefore, when the user obtain an A/D value from the temperature sensor, the value has to be
converted into a value between 1 ~ 5,000 by four arithmetic operation instructions.
3. If S3 < K1, the instruction will not be executed. If S3 > K200, S3 will adopt K200. S3 will occupy 7 consecutive
devices.
5. Settings of parameter S3 +1: bit0 = 0 ->°C; bit1 = 0 ->°F; bit1 = 0 -> no filter function; bit1 = 1 -> with filter
function; bit2 ~ bit5 -> 4 kinds of heating environments; bit6 ~ bit15 -> reserved. See remarks for more
information.
6. D is the value between 0 ~ sampling time × 100. When using this instruction, the user has to adopt other
instructions according to the types of the heater. For example, FTC can be used with GPWM for output pulse
control. “Sampling time × 100” is the cycle of GPWM pulse output; MV is the width of GPWM pulse. See
program example 1.
7. There is no limit on the times of using FTC instruction, but Do not repeatedly use a designated operand in case
an error may occur..
Program Example:
1. Set up the parameter before executing FTC instruction.
2. When X0 = On, the instruction will be executed and and result will be stored in D150. When X0 = Off, the
instruction will not be executed and the previous data remain unchanged.
X0
FTC D0 D1 D100 D150

Remarks:
1. Setting of S3:
Device No. Function Range Explanation
If TS is less than a scan time, PID

instruction will be executed for a
Sampling time (TS) 1 ~ 200
scan time. If TS= 0, PID instruction
will not be enabled. The minimum TS
must be greater than a scan time.
b0 =0 means oC When the value exceeds the upper
o
b0 =1 means F bound, use upper bound.
b1=0 means
When without filter function, PV =
without fileter
currently measured value. When with
b0: temperature unit function
filter function, PV = (currently
b1: filter function b1=1 means with
measured value + previous PV)/2
+1 b2 ~ b5: heating filter function
environnment b2=1 Slow heating environment
b6 ~ b15: reserved
b3=1 General heating environment
b4=1 Fast heating environment
b5=1 High-speed heating environment
+2
Parameters for system use only. Do not use them.
~
+6
2. Control Diagram:
FTC
+ e Fuzzy
SV MV
Controller
PV
Temperature
Sensor
3. Notes and suggestion:

It is recommended that the sampling time be set to 2 times more than the sampling time of the temperature
sensor for better temperature control.
bit2 ~ bit5 of S3+1 are for the control speed. If the user does not set up the parameter, FTC will automatically
activate “general heating environment”. When the user finds that the control is too slow to reach SV, select “slow

heating environment” to enhance the speed to reach SV. On the contrary, when the user finds that the control is
too fast or with too many fluctuations, select “fast heating environment” to slow down the control speed.
When bit2 ~ bit5 of S3+1 are all set as 1 or more than 1 environments are designated, FTC instruction will check
from bit2 to bit 5 in order and enable the function that has been set as 1. The parameter can be modified during
the control.
4. Example 1: control diagram

FTC
SV + e Fuzzy MV
GPWM Program Y0
D10 Controller D22
PV D11
Temperature
PT Module
Sensor
Output D22 (MV) of FTC instruction is the input D22 of GPWM instruction, as the duty cycle of ajustable pulses.
D30 is the fixed cycle time of pulses. See below for the timing diagram of Y0 output.
D22
Y0
D30
Assume parameter settings: D10 = K1,500 (target temperature), D12 = K60 (sampling time: 6 secs.), D13 = K8
(bit3=1), D30 = K6,000 (=D12*100)
The example control program is indicated as:
M1002
MOV K1500 D10
TO K0 K2 K2 K1
FROM K0 K6 D11 K1
MOV K60 D12
MOV K8 D13
MOV K6000 D30
SET M1
M1
FTC D10 D11 D12 D22
GPWM D22 D30 Y0
M1013
FROM K0 K6 D11 K1
END

Experiment in an oven which can be heated up to 250°C. See below for the records of target and present
temperatures. As shown in the diagram below, we can see that after 48 minutes, the temperature is able to
reach the target temperature with ± 1oC inaccuracy and exceed approx. 10°C of the target temperature.
Example 2: Due to that the temperature once exceeds the target temperature, we modify the heating
environment into “fast heating environment” (D13 = K16). The results are shown in the diagram below.
From the diagram below, we see that though the temperature no longer exceeds the target temperature, it still
needs to take more than 1 hour and 15 minutes to reach the target temperature with ± 1oC inaccuracy. It seems
that we have chosen the right environment, but the sampling time is too long, resulting in the extension of
heating time.

Example 3: To speed up the speed to reach the target temperature, we correct the sampling time as 4 seconds
(D12 = K40, D30 = K4,000). The results are shown in the diagram below.
From the diagram below, we see that the overall control time has been shortened as 37 minutes. Therefore, we
find out that modifying the sampling time can speed up the time for reaching the target temperature.
Example 4: To see if we can reach the target temperature faster, we modify the sampling time frim example 3
into 2 seconds (D12 = K20, D30 = K2,000). The results are shown in the diagram below.
From the diagram below, we see that the sampling time that is too short will cause the control system to become
too sensitive and lead to up and down fluctuations.


Controllers
146 CVM Valve Control ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F CVM: 7 steps
S1 *
S2 * * *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Target time of valve (absolute position) S2: Time from fully-closed to fully-open of valve (destination) D:
Output device
Explanations:
1. S1 occupies 3 consecutive registers when in use. S1 + 0 are for the user to store the designated value; S1 + 1 (the
current position of the valve) and S1 + 2 are for storing the parameters recorded in the instruction and please DO
NOT use and alter these two registers.
2. D occupies 2 consecutive output devices when in use. D + 0 is the “open” contact and D + 1 is the “close” contact.
3. This instruction only supports EH2/SV and does not support EH.
4. The unit of time: 0.1 second. When the scan time of the program exceeds 0.1 second, DO NOT use this
instruction to adjust the position of the valve.
5. Frequency of the output device: 10Hz.
6. When the time of S1 + 0 ＞ the fully-opened time set in S2, D + 0 will keep being On and D + 1 being Off. When
the time of S1 + 0 ＜ 0, D + 0 will keep being Off and D + 1 being On.
7. When the instruction is enabled, the instruction will start to control the valve from “0” time position. Therefore, if
the user cannot be sure whether the valve is at “0” before executing the instruction, please designate S1 + 0 as
less than 0 and execute the instruction for S2 (time) before sending in the correct target control time.
Program Example 1:
1. The control valve
Fully-closed Fully-open
Y1 Y0
2. Definitions of the control valve:

a) When Y0 and Y1 = Off: No valve action

b) When Y0 = On and Y1 = Off: Valve “open”

c) When Y0 = Off and Y1 = On: Valve “closed”
d) When Y0 and Y1 = On: The action is prohibited.
3. Timing diagram and program of the control:
5
M0
Y0 4sec
1sec
Y1 2sec 2sec
1 2 3 4
D0=k40 D0=k20 D0=k30 D0=k10
M0
CVM D0 K50 Y0
4. Control phases:
1) Phase 1: When M0 = On, D0 = K40 refers to the valve shall be open (Y0 = On, Y1 = Off) till the position of
4 seconds.
2) Phase 2: Change the position of the valve and D0 = K20. Due to that the previous position was at 4
seconds, the valve shall be closed (Y0 = Off, Y1 = On) for 2 seconds, moving the valve to the position of 2
seconds.
seconds, the valve shall be open (Y0 = On, Y1 = Off) for 1 second, moving the valve to the position of 3
seconds.
second.
5) Phase 5: Switch off X0 and no actions at the valve (Y0 = Off, Y1 = Off).
Program Example 2:
1. Timing diagram and program of the control:
M0
T0
Y0 4sec
Y1 5sec 2sec
1 2 3 4
D0=1 D0=k40 D0=k10

M0
TMR T0 K50
T0
MOV k-1 D0
CVM D0 K50 Y0
2. Control phases:
1) Phase 1: When M0 = On, due to that we are not sure about there the valve is, set D0 = K-1 to deliberately
close the valve (Y0 = Off, Y1 = On) for 5 seconds and make sure the valve is at the position of 0 second
before moving on to the next step.
2) Phase 2: When T0 = On, allow D0 = K40 to start is action. Open the valve (Y0 = On, Y1 = Off) for 4
seconds, moving the valve to the position of 4 seconds.
second.
4) Phase 4: Switch off M0 and the valve will no longer move (Y0 = Off, Y1 = Off).


Controllers
147 D SWAP P Byte Swap ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SWAP, SWAPP: 3 steps
S * * * * * * * * DSWAP, DSWAPP: 5 steps
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Device for swapping 8 high/low byte.
Explanations:
3. As 16-bit instruction: the contents in the 8 high bytes and 8 low bytes are swapped.
4. As 32-bit instruction: the 8 high bytes and 8 low bytes in the two registers swap with each other respectively.
5. This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (SWAPP, DSWAPP).
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, the high 8 bytes and low 8 bytes in D0 will swap with each other.
X0
SWAPP D0
D0
High Byte Low Byte
Program Example 2:
When X0 = On, the high 8 bytes and low 8 bytes in D11 will swap with each other and the high 8 bytes and low 8
bytes in D10 will swap with each other.
X0
DSWAPP D10
D11 D10
High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte


Controllers
148 D MEMR P Read File Register ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MEMR, MEMRP: 7 steps
m * * * DMEMR, DMEMRP: 13 steps
D *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
m: Address in the file register to be read D: Device for storing the read data (starting from the designated D)
n: Number of data read at a time
Explanations:
1. Range of m: K0 ~ K1,599 (SA/SX/SC); K0 ~ K9,999 (EH/EH2/SV)
2. Range of D: D2000 ~ D4999 (SA/SX/SC); D2000 ~ D9999 (EH/EH2/SV)
3. Range of n: For 16-bit instruction K1 ~ K1,600 (SA/SX/SC), K1 ~ K8,000 (EH/EH2/SV); For 32-bit instruction
K1 ~ K800 (SA/SX/SC), K1 ~ K4,000 (EH/EH2/SV)
5. Flag: M1101. See explanations below.
6. SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV uses this instruction to read the data in file registers and store them into data registers.
7. SA/SX/SC offers 1,600 16-bit file registers.
8. m and n of SA/SX/SC do not suppot E and F index register modification.
9. EH/EH2/SV offers 10,000 16-bit file registers.
10. If m, D and n fall without their range, operation error will occur. M1067, M1068 = On and D1067 will record the
error code H’0E1A.
Program Example 1:
1. The 16-bit instruction MEMR reads 100 data at address 10 in the file register and store the read data in register
D starting from D2000.
2. When X0 = On, the instruction will be executed. When X0 = Off, the instruction will not be executed and the
previously read data will remain unchanged.
X0
MEMR K10 D2000 K100
Program Example 2:
1. The 32-bit instruction DMEMR reads 100 data at address 20 in the file register and store the read data in
register D starting from D3000.
previously read data will remain unchanged.
X0
DMEMR K20 D3000 K100


Controllers
149 D MEMW P Write File Register ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MEMW, MEMWP: 7 steps
S * DMEMW, DMEMWP: 13 steps
m * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Device for storing the written data (starting from the designated D) m: Address in the file register to be written
n: Number of data to be written at a time
Explanations:
1. Range of S: D2000 ~ D4999 (SA/SX/SC); D2000 ~ D9999 (EH/EH2/SV)
2. Range of m: K0 ~ K1,599 (SA/SX/SC); K0 ~ K9,999 (EH/EH2/SV)
3. Range of n: For 16-bit instruction K1 ~ K1,600 (SA/SX/SC), K1 ~ K8,000 (EH/EH2/SV); For 32-bit instruction K1
~ K800 (SA/SX/SC), K1 ~ K4,000 (EH/EH2/SV)
5. Flag: M1101. See explanations below.
6. SA/SX/SC/EH/EH2/SV uses this instruction to read the data in data registers and write them into file registers.
7. SA/SX/SC offers 1,600 16-bit file registers.
8. m and n of SA/SX/SC do not suppot E and F index register modification.
9. EH/EH2/SV offers 10,000 16-bit file registers.
10. If S, m and n fall without their range, operation error will occur. M1067, M1068 = On and D1067 will record the
error code H’0E1A.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, the 32-bit instruction DMEMW writes 100 32-bit data starting from D2001 and D2000 into
address 0 ~ 199 in the file register.
previously data written in will remain unchanged.
X0
DMEMW D2000 K0 K100
File Register:
1. EH/EH2/SV: When the PLC is powered, it will decide whether to automatically send the data in the file register
to the designated data register by M1101 (whether to enable the function of file register), D1101 (start address
in file register K0 ~ K9,999), D1102 (number of data to be read in file register K1 ~ k8,000), and D1103 (device
for storing read data, starting from designated D, K2,000 ~ K9,999).
2. In EH/EH2/SV, the reading of data from file register to data register D will not be executed if D1101 < 0, D1101

> K9,999, D1103 < K2,000 or D1103 > K9,999.

3. SA/SX/SC: When the PLC is powered, it will decide whether to automatically send the data in the file register to
the designated data register by M1101 (whether to enable the function of file register), D1101 (start address in
file register K0 ~ K1,599), D1102 (number of data to be read in file register K1 ~ k1,600), and D1103 (device for
storing read data, starting from designated D, K2,000 ~ K4,999).
4. In SA/SX/SC, the reading of data from file register to data register D will not be executed if D1101 < 0, D1101 >
K1,599, D1103 < K2,000 or D1103 > K4,999.
5. When the reading of data from file register to data register D starts, PLC will stop the reading if the address of
file register or data register exceed their range.
6. In PLC program, only API 148 MEMR and API 149 MEMW can be used to read or write the file register. See
2.8.3 for more information on file registers.
7. File registers do not have actual addresses in it. Reading and writing of file registers can only be done through
API 148 MEMR, API 149 MEMW or peripheral devices HPP and WPLSoft.
8. If the address in the file register to be read exceeds its range, the read value will be 0.
9. Special relays of file register and other relevant special registers:
Flag Function
M1101 Whether to enable the function of file register; latched; default = off
Special D Function
Start address in file register. SA/SX/SC: K0 ~ K1,599; EH/EH2/SV:

D1101
K0 ~ K9,999; latched; default = 0
Number of data to be read in file register. SA/SX/SC: K1 ~ K1,600;

D1102
EH/EH2/SV: K1 ~ K8,000; latched; default = 0
Device for storing read data, starting from designated D. SA/SX/SC:

D1103 K2,000 ~ K4,999; EH/EH2/SV: K2,000 ~ K9,999; latched; default =
2,000

MEMO


Controllers
150 MODRW Read/Write MODBUS Data ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MODRW: 11 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
S3 * * *
S *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Address of communication device S2: Function code S3: Device address of data to be read/written
S: Register for storing read/written data (source or destination) n: Length of read/written data
Explanations:
1. The content of S2 shall only be: K3(H3), K6(H6), K16(H10).
2. ES/EX/SS V.4.9 (and above) support the continuous execution instruction (MODRW). Other versions do not
support this instruction.
4. Flags: M1120 ~ M1131, M1140 ~ M1143. See remarks for more details.
6. S2: Funcation code. For example, H03 is for AC motor drive or DVP-PLC to read many data; H06 is for AC
motor drive or DVP-PLC to write a single data; H10 is for AC motor drive or DVP-PLC to write many data. Only
these function codes are available currently; other function codes are still not executable. See program
examples for more information.
7. S3: Device address of data to be read/written. The device address inside the communication device. If the
address is illegal to a designated communication device, the communication device will respond with an error
message and PLC will store the error code in D1130 and M1141 = On. For example, if 8000H is illegal to
VFD-S, M1141 will be On and D1130 = 2. See user manual of VFD-S for error codes.
8. S: Register for storing read/written data. The user sets up a register and stores the data to be written in the
register in advance. The register can be register for storing the read data.
9. n: Length of read/written data. For ES/SA, when M1143 = Off (in ASCII mode), the range of length: K1 ~ K8
(word); when M1143 = On (in RTU mode), the range of length: K1 ~ K16 (word). For EH/EH2/SV, the range of
length: K1 ~ K16 (word).
time.
Program Example 1:
1. Function code K3(H3): For reading many data in register
When PLC is connected to VFD-S AC motor drive: M1143 = Off, in ASCII mode
When PLC is connected to VFD-S AC motor drive: M1143 = On, in RTU mode

2. When in ASCII mode, the received data will be stored in the designated registers starting from D0 in ASCII
format and PLC will automatically convert the data into hex value and store them in special registers D1296 ~
D1311. When the conversion into hex value starts, M1131 will be On and turn Off when the conversion is
completed.
3. If necessary, the user can move the hex values stored in D1296 ~ D1131 to other general registers by using
MOV, DMOV or BMOV instruction. Other instructions of ES/EX/SS do not function on the data in D1296 ~
D1311.
4. When in RTU mode, the received data will be stored in the designated registers starting from D0 in hex format.
5. When In ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the data to be sent in D1256 ~ D1295. If necessary, the
user can move the data to other general registers by using MOV, DMOV or BMOV instruction. Other
instructions of ES/EX/SS do not function on the data in D1256 ~ D1295.
6. The data sent back from AC motor drive are stored in the registers designated by the user. After the
transmission is completed, PLC will auto-check if the received data are incorrect. M1140 will be On if there is
an error.
7. If the device address is illegal to a designated communication device, the communication device will respond
with an error message and PLC will store the error code in D1130 and M1141 = On. For example, if 8000H is
illegal to VFD-S, M1141 will be On and D1130 = 2. See user manual of VFD-S for error codes.
8. After M1140 = On or M1141 = On, PLC will send another correct datum to AC motor drive. If the data sent back
from AC motor drive is correct, M1140 and M1141 will be reset.
M1002
MOV H87 D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
Communication
MOV K100 D1129 time-out 100ms
X10
M1143 RTU mode
X0
X0
MODRW K1 K3 H2100 D0 K6
Address of Function Data address Register Data length
communi- code K3: H2100 for storing (word)
cation read the data
device K1 many data
M1127
ASCII mode: The received data will be stored in the d esignated registers starting
from D0 in ASCII format and PLC will automatically convert the data into hex va lue
and store them in special registers D129 6 ~ D1311.
RTU mode: The received data will be stored in the designated registers starting
from D0 in hex format.
R ST M1127 Sending/receiving of data is completed. The flag is reset.
9. ASCII Mode: When PLC is connected to VFD-S AC motor drive.

PLC Ö VFD-S, PLC sends: “01 03 2100 0006 D5”
VFD-S Ö PLC, PLC receives: “01 03 0C 0100 1766 0000 0000 0136 0000 3B”


D1256 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
Address of AC motor drive: ADR (1,0)
D1256 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D1257 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D1257 High ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0
D1258 Low ‘2’ 32 H
D1258 High ‘1’ 31 H
Starting Data Address
D1259 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1259 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1260 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1260 High ‘0’ 30 H
Number of Data (counted by words)
D1261 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1261 High ‘6’ 36 H
D1262 Low ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 1
D1262 High ‘5’ 35 H LRC CHK 0
Registers for received data D0 (responding messages)

D0 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
D0 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D1 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D1 High ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0
D2 Low ‘0’ 30 H
Number of Data (counted by byte)
D2 High ‘C’ 43 H
D3 Low ‘0’ 30 H
Content of
D3 High ‘1’ 31 H PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to numerals and
address
D4 Low ‘0’ 30 H store the numeral in D1296 = H0100
2100H
D4 High ‘0’ 30 H
D5 Low ‘1’ 31 H
Content of
address
2101H
D6 High ‘6’ 36 H
D7 Low ‘0’ 30 H
Content of
address
2102H
D8 High ‘0’ 30 H
D9 Low ‘0’ 30 H
Content of
address
2103H
D10 High ‘0’ 30 H
D11 Low ‘0’ 30 H
Content of
address
2104H
D12 High ‘6’ 36 H
D13 Low ‘0’ 30 H
Content of
address
2105H
D14 High ‘0’ 30 H
D15 Low ‘3’ 33 H LRC CHK 1
D15 High ‘B’ 42 H LRC CHK 0

10. RTU Mode: When PLC is connected to VFD-S AC motor drive

PLC Ö VFD-S, PLC sends: “01 03 2100 0006 CF F4”
VFD-S Ö PLC, PLC receives: “01 03 0C 0000 0503 0BB8 0BB8 0000 012D 8E C5”

D1256 Low 01 H Address
D1257 Low 03 H Function
D1258 Low 21 H
Starting Data Address
D1259 Low 00 H
D1260 Low 00 H
Number of Data (counted by words)
D1261 Low 06 H
D1262 Low CF H CRC CHK Low
D1263 Low F4 H CRC CHK High
Registers for received data D0 (responding messages)

D0 Low 01 H Address
D2 Low 0C H Number of Data (byte)
D3 Low 00 H Content of PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to numerals and
D4 Low 00 H address 2100H store the numeral in D1296 = H0000
D5 Low 05 H Content of PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to numerals
D6 Low 03 H address 2101H and store the numeral in D1297 = H0503
D7 Low 0B H Content of PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to numerals
D8 Low B8 H address 2102H and store the numeral in D1298 = H0BB8
D9 Low 0B H Content of PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to numerals
D10 Low B8 H address 2103H and store the numeral in D1299 = H0BB8
D12 Low 00 H address 2104H and store the numeral in D1300 = H0000
D14 Low 2D H address 2105H and store the numeral in D1301 = H012D
D15 Low 8E H CRC CHK Low
D16 Low C5 H CRC CHK High
Program Example 2:
1. Function code K6(H6): For writing a word data to register
2. When in ASCII mode, the user stores the data to be written in the designated register D50 in hex format. The
data sent back from AC motor drive are stored in D1070 ~ D1076.
3. When in RTU mode, the user stores the data to be written in the designated register D50 in hex format. The

5. After receiving the data sent back from AC motor drive is completed, PLC will auto-check if the received data
are incorrect. M1140 will be On if there is an error.
M1002
MOV H87 D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
Communication
X10
M1143
X0
X0
cation write 1 the data
device K1 word datum
M1127
ASCII mode: the received data will be stored in special registers D1070 ~ D1076 in ASCII format.
RTU mode: the received data will be stored in special registers D1 070 ~ D1077 in hex format.
RST M1127 Sending/receiving of data is completed. Th e flag is reset.

PLC Ö VFD-S, PLC sends: “01 06 0100 1770 71”
VFD-S Ö PLC, PLC receives: “01 06 0100 1770 71”

D1256 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
D1256 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D1257 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D1257 High ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0
D1258 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1258 High ‘1’ 31 H
Data Address
D1259 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1259 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1260 Low ‘1’ 31 H
D1260 High ‘7’ 37 H
Data content The content of register D50 (H1770 = K6,000)
D1261 Low ‘7’ 37 H
D1261 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1262 Low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1
LRC CHK (0,1) is error check


D1070 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
D1070 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D1071 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1
D1071 High ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0
D1072 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1072 High ‘1’ 31 H
Data Address
D1073 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1073 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1074 Low ‘1’ 31 H
D1074 High ‘7’ 37 H
Data content
D1075 Low ‘7’ 37 H
D1075 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1076 Low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1
9. RTU Mode: When PLC is connected to VFD-S AC motor drive

PLC Ö VFD-S, PLC sends: “01 06 2000 0012 02 07”
VFD-S Ö PLC, PLC receives: “01 06 2000 0012 02 07”
Registers for sent data (sending message)

D1258 Low 20 H
Data Address
D1259 Low 00 H
D1260 Low 00 H
Data content The content of register D50 (H12)
D1261 Low 12 H
D1262 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low
D1263 Low 07 H CRC CHK High
Registers for received data (responding message)

D1072 Low 20 H
Data Address
D1073 Low 00 H
D1074 Low 00 H
Data content
D1075 Low 12 H
D1076 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low
Program Example 3:
1. Function code K16(H10): For writing many word data into register.
2. When in ASCII mode, the user stores the data to be written in the designated register D50 in hex format. The

3. When in RTU mode, the user stores the data to be written in the designated register D50 in hex format. The
5. After receiving the data sent back from AC motor drive is completed, PLC will auto-check if the received data
are incorrect. M1140 will be On if there is an error.
M1002
MOV H 87 D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
Communication
X10
M1143
X0
X0
cation write many the data
device K1 word data
M1127
ASCII mode : The received data are stored in special registers D1070 ~ D1078 in ASCII format.
RTU mode : The received data are stored in sp ecial registers D1070~1078 in hex format.
RST M1127 Sending/receiving of data is comp leted. The flag is reset.

PLC Ö VFD-S, PLC sends: “01 10 2000 0002 04 0012 1770 30”
VFD-S Ö PLC, PLC receives: “01 10 2000 0002 CD”

D1256 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
D1256 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D1257 Low ‘1’ 31 H CMD 1
D1257 High ‘0’ 30 H CMD 0
D1258 Low ‘2’ 32 H
D1258 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data Address
D1259 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1259 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1260 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1260 High ‘0’ 30 H
Number of Registers
D1261 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1261 High ‘2’ 32 H


D1262 Low ‘0’ 30 H
Byte Count
D1262 High ‘4’ 34 H
D1263 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1263 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data contents 1 The content of register D50 (H12)
D1264 Low ‘1’ 31 H
D1264 High ‘2’ 32 H
D1265 Low ‘1’ 31 H
D1265 High ‘7’ 37 H
Data contents 2 The content of register D51 (H1770 = K6,000)
D1266 Low ‘7’ 37 H
D1266 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1267 Low ‘3’ 33 H LRC CHK 1

D1070 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1
D1070 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
D1071 Low ‘1’ 31 H CMD 1
D1071 High ‘0’ 30 H CMD 0
D1072 Low ‘2’ 32 H
D1072 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data Address
D1073 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1073 High ‘0’ 30 H
D1074 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1074 High ‘0’ 30 H
Number of Registers
D1075 Low ‘0’ 30 H
D1075 High ‘2’ 32 H
D1076 Low ‘C’ 43 H LRC CHK 1
D1076 High ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 0
9. RTU Mode: When PLC is connected to VFD-S AC motor drives
PLC Ö VFD-S, PLC sends: “01 10 2000 0002 04 0012 1770 C4 7F”
VFD-S Ö PLC, PLC receives: “01 10 2000 0002 4A 08”
Registers for send data (sending messages)

D1258 Low 20 H
Data Address
D1259 Low 00 H
D1260 Low 00 H
Number of Registers
D1261 Low 02 H
D1262 Low 04 H Byte Count
D1263 Low 00 H
Data content 1 The content of register D50 (H12)
D1264 Low 12 H
D1265 Low 17 H
Data content 2 The content of register D51 (H1770 = K6,000)
D1266 Low 70 H
D1267 Low C4 H CRC CHK Low
D1268 Low 7F H CRC CHK High


D1072 Low 20 H
Data Address
D1073 Low 00 H
D1074 Low 00 H
Number of Registers
D1075 Low 02 H
D1076 Low 4A H CRC CHK Low
Remarks:
1. The activation condition placed before MODRD, RDST and MODRW instructions cannot use rising-edge or
falling-edge contacts; otherwise the data stored in the registers for received data will encounter errors.
2. Flags and special registers for MODRW instruction in RS-485 communication. (For details, see API 80 RS).
Flags Function
For retaining communication setups. After the setup is made, changes in D1120 will be
M1120
invalid.
M1121 When Off, RS-485 is sending data.
M1122 Sending request
M1123 Receiving is completed
M1124 Waiting for receiving data
M1125 Disable receiving status
M1126 Selecting STX/ETX system
M1127 Sending/receiving data through MODRD / RDST / MODRW instructions is completed.
M1128 Sending data…/receiving data…
M1129 Receiving data time-out
M1130 User/system defined STX/ETX
M1131 On when MODRD / MODWR / MODRW is converting data to hex
M1140 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data receiving error
M1141 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW parameter error
M1142 VFD-A handy instruction data receiving error
ASCII/RTU mode selection (used with MODRD/MODWR/MODRW) (Off = ASCII mode;
M1143
On = RTU mode)
When the built-in RS-485 communication instruction is executed and sends out data, the
D1070 ~ D1085 receiving end will respond with a message and the message will be stored in D1070 ~
D1085. The user can check the registers for the messages.
D1120 RS-485 communication protocol
D1121 PLC communication address (saving PLC communication address; latched)
D1122 Remaining words of the sent data
D1123 Remaining words of the received data
D1124 Start text definition (STX)
D1125 Definition of end text 1 (ETX1)
D1126 Definition of end text 2 (ETX2)
D1129 Abnormal communication time-out. Unit: ms
D1130 Records of error codes sent back from MODBUS
When the built-in RS-485 communication instruction MODRW is executed, the sent out
D1256 ~ D1295 data will be stored in D1256 ~ D1295. The user can check whether the instruction is
correct by the contents in the registers.
PLC will automatically convert the ASCII data stored in the register designated by the user
D1296 ~ D1311
into hex format.


Controllers
151 PWD Detection of Input Pulse Width ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F PWD: 5 steps
S *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source device D: Destination device for storing the detected result
Explanations:
1. Range of S: X10 ~ X17
2. Range of D: D0 ~ D999, occupying 2 consecutive devices. Can only be used once in the program.
3. PWD instruction is for detecting the time span of output signals from X10 ~ X17; the valid frequency range is 1
~1KHz. When M1169 = On, the instruction will detect the time span of the continuous rising edge and falling
edge of the input signals (time unit: 100us). When M1169 = On, the instruction will detect the time span of 2
continuous rising edges of the input signals (time unit: 1us). It cannot designate the same X10 ~ X17 as does
DCNT and ZRN instructions.
4. D occupies two continuous devices. The longest detectable time is 21,474.83647 seconds, about 357.9139
minutes or 5.9652 hours.
time.
Program Example:
When X0 = On, record the time span of X10 = On and store it in D1 and D0.
X0
PWD X10 D0


Controllers
Start of the Measurement of Execution Time
152 RTMU ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
of I Interruption
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F RTMU: 5 steps
D * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
D: Device for storing the measuring time (unit: 1us) n: Measurement time base. Parameter range: K10 ~ K500
(time unit: 1us)
Explanations:
1. Range of D: K0 ~ K9
3. The designated special D registers (D1156 ~ D1165) can measure up to 10 interruption subroutines. For
example, when D = K5, the designated D register will be D1161.
4. When RTMU is executed, if the D and n entered by the user are legal, interruption of the timer will be enabled
and the counting starts and the special D designated by D is cleared as 0. When RTMD is executed,
interruption of the timer is disabled and the calculated time will be assigned to special D designated by RTMD.
5. With API 153 RTMD, RTMU can measure the execution time of “I” interruption service subroutine, which can
be reference for dealing with the high-speed response when the user is at the initial stage of developing the
program.

Controllers
End of the Measurement of the Execution
153 RTMD ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
Time of I Interruption
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F RTMD: 3 steps
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
D: Device to store the measuring time (unit: 1us).
Explanations:
1. Range of D: K0 ~ K9. The No. of D has to be the same as that designated by D in API 152 RTMU; otherwise the
result of the measurement may be unexpectable.
Program Example:
When X0 goes from Off to On, the program will enter I001 interruption subroutine. RTMU will activate an 8-bit timer
(unit: 10us) and RTMD (when D = K0) will shut down the timer and store the time in the timer in special D registers
(D1156 ~ D1165, designated by K0 ~ K9).

FEND
M1000
I 001 RTMU K0 K10
Both K0 should be the same

M1000
RTMD K0
IRET
M1000
I 101 RTMU K1 K10
Both K1 should be the same

M1000
RTMD K1
IRET
END
Remarks:
1. We suggest you remove this instruction after you finish developing your PLC program.
2. Due to the lower priority of the interruption enabled by RTMU, when RTMU is enabled, other high-speed pulse
input counting or high-speed pulse output may result in failure to trigger the timer.
3. If you activate RTMU but do not activate RTMD before the end of the interruption, the interruption will not be
shut down.
4. RTMU instruction activates 1 timer interruption in PLC. Therefore, if many RTMU or RTMD are executed at the
same time, confusion in the timer may occur. Please be aware of the situation.


Controllers
154 RAND P Random Number ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F RAND, RANDP: 7 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Lower bound of the random number S2: Upper bound of the random number D: The random number
produced
Explanations:
1. S1≦S2; K0 ≦ S1 , S2 ≦K32,767
3. Entering S1 > S2 will result in operation error. The instruction will not be executed at this time, M1067, M1068 =
On and D1067 records the error code 0E1A (hex).
Program Example:
When X10 = On, RAND will produce the random number between the lower bound D0 and upper bound D10 and
store the result in D20.
X10
RAND D0 D10 D20


Controllers
Read the Absolute Position from a Servo
155 D ABSR ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
Motor
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DABSR: 13 steps
S * * * *
D1 * * *
D2 * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Input signal from Servo (occupies 3 consecutive devices) D1: Control signal for controlling Servo (occupies 3
consecutive devices) D2: Absolute position data (32-bit) read from Servo
Explanations:
1. Operand S and D1 of SA series MPU do not support E, F index register modification.
3. This instruction can only be used once in the program.
4. Flag: see remarks for more details.
5. This instruction reads the absolute position (ABS) of MITSUBISHI MR-J2 servo drive (with absolute position
check function).
6. S will occupy 3 consecutive devices, S, S +1, and S +2. S and S +1 are connected to the absolute position (bit
0, bit 1) on the servo for data transmitting. S +2 is connected to Servo for transmitting data ready flag. See the
wiring example below for more details.
7. D1 will occupy 3 consecutive devices, D1, D1 + 1, D1 + 2. D1 is connected to SERVO On (SON) of Servo. D1+1 is
connected to ABS transmisstion mode of Servo and D1+2 is connected to ABS request signal. See the wiring
example below for more details.
PLC SERVO AMP

DVP32EH00T MR-J2-A
CN1B
+24V VDD 3
S/S
ABS(bit 0)
X0 D01 4
ABS(bit 1)
X1 ZSP 19
transmission data is ready
X2 TLC 6
24G SG 10
SERVO ON
Y4 SON 5
ABS transmission mode
Y5 ABSM 8
ABS request
Y6 ABSR 9
C4
8. D2 will occupy 2 consecutive devices D2 and D2 + 1. D2 is the lower 16 bits and D2 + 1 is the higher 16 bits. The
absolute position data should be written into the present value registers (D1337, D1336) of CH0 pulse (Y0, Y1)
or the present value registers (D1339, D1338) of CH1 pulse (Y2, Y3) in EH series MPU; therefore, we suggest
you designate the two corresponding registers. If you designate other devices as the registers, you still have to

transmit the data to D1337 and D1336 of CH0 or D1339 and D1338 of CH1. In addition, the absolute position
data should be written into the present value registers (D1348, D1349) of CH0 pulse (Y10) or the present value
registers (D1350, D1351) of CH1 pulse (Y11) in SC series MPU; therefore, we suggest you designate the two
corresponding registers. If you designate other devices as the registers, you still have to transmit the data to
D1348 and D1349 of CH0 or D1350 and D1351 of CH1.
9. When DABSR instruction starts to read, after finishing reading the absolute position of SERVO, flag M1029 will
be On. The user has to reset the flag.
10. When driving the DABSR command, please specify normally open contact. If the drive contact of DABSR
command turns Off when DABSR command read starts, the execution of absolute current value read will be
interrupted and result in incorrect data. Please be careful and notice that.
Program Example:
1. When X7 = On, the 32-bit absolute position data read from Servo will be stored in the present value registers
(D1337, D1336) of CH0 pulse in EH MPU. At the same time, the timer T10 is enabled and starts to count for 5
seconds. If the reading of the absolute position is not completed after 5 seconds, M10 will be On, indicating that
the reading of absolute position encounters abnormality.
2. When enabling the connection to the system, please synchronize the power input of DVP-PLC EH/EH2/SV and
SERVO AMP or activate the power of SERVO AMP earlier than DVP-PLC.
X7
DABS X0 Y4 D1336
M11
TMR T0 K50 Time-out : 5 sec.
ABS read completed
T0 ABS absolute position

M10 data read is abnormal
Read overtime
M1029
ABS absolute position
SET M11 data read completed
execution completed
flag
Remarks:
1. If the instruction is interrupted when PLC is still reading the absolute position of SERVO, an ALARM message
(ALE5) will occur in SERVO.
2. Timing chart of DABSR instruction reading absolute position:
a) When DABSR instruction starts to execute, it will drive SERBVO On (SON) and ABS transmittion mode for
output.
b) By “transmission is ready” and “ABS request” signals, you can confirm the transmission and reciept of both
sides as well as processing the transmission of the 32-bit present position data plus the 6-bit check data.
c) The data are transmitted by ABS (bit0, bit1).

SERVO ON SON
ABS data
transmission mode ABSM
Transmission data
is ready TLC AMP output
ABS request ABSR Controller output
ABS(bit 1) ZSP AMP output
ABS(bit 0)
D01 AMP output
32-bit present value position data

+(plus) 6-bit check data
3. This instruction is applicable to the Servo motor equipped with absolute positioning function, e.g. Mitsubishi
MR-J2-A Servo drive.
4. Select one of the following methods for the initial reading of present absolute position.
a) Complete zero point return by using reset signal function to execute API 156 ZRN instruction.
b) After using JOG or manual operation to adjust the zero point position, input a reset signal in SERVO AMP.
See the figure of external switch below for whether to use DVP-PLC for output. For the wiring of DVP-PLC
and Mitsubishi MR-H2-□A, see remarks of API 159 DRVA instruction.
Ex: Mitsubishi MR-J2- A
CR 8
reset
SG 10
5. Flags explanation:
M1010： (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) When M1010 is On, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3) will output pulses
while END instruction is being executed. When the output starts, M1010 will automatically turn Off.
M1029： (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) When the first group CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output or the execution of
other relevant instructions are completed, M1029 will turn On.
M1030： (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) When the second group CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output is completed,
M1030 will turn on.
M1102： (For SC series MPU) When the first group CH0 (Y10) pulse output is completed, M1102 will turn On.
M1103： (For SC series MPU) When the second group CH1 (Y11) pulse output is completed, M1103 will turn
On.
M1258： (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) When M1258 is On, CH0 (Y0, Y1) will output reverse pulses.
M1259： (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) When M1259 is On, CH1 (Y2, Y3) will output reverse pulses.
M1305： (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) PLSV, DPLSV, DRVI, DDRVI, DRVA, DDRVA instructions for CH0
(Y1, Y2) reverse running.

M1306： (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) PLSV, DPLSV, DRVI, DDRVI, DRVA, DDRVA instructions for CH1
(Y2, Y3) reverse running.
M1334： (For EH series MPU) When M1334 = On, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output will pause.
(For EH2/SV series MPU) When M1334 = On, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output will stop.
(For SC series MPU) When M1334 = On, the DDRVI and DDRVA execution criteria will stop and CH0
(Y10) pulse output will stop immediately without deceleration.
M1335： (For EH series MPU) When M1335 = On, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output will pause.
(For EH2/SV series MPU) When M1335 = On, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output will stop.
(For SC series MPU) When M1335 = On, DDRVI and DDRVA execution criteria will stop and CH1
(Y11) pulse output will stop immediately without deceleration.
M1520： (For EH2/SV series MPU) When M1520 = On, CH2 (Y4, Y5) pulse output will stop.
M1521： (For EH2/SV series MPU) When M1521 = On, CH3 (Y6, Y7) pulse output will stop.
M1336： (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output indication flag
M1337： (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output indication flag
M1346： (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) ZRN instruction for “enabling CLEAR output signal” flag
6. Special registers:
D1337, D1336： 1. (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) Registers for the first group (Y0, Y1) output pulse present
value of position control instructions (API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API
159 DRVA). The present value increases or decreases according to the corresponding
rotation direction. D1337 is for high word; D1336 is for low word.
2. (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) Registers for storing the current number of output pulses of
the first group (Y0, Y1) output of pulse output instructions (API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR).
D1337 is for high word; D1336 is for low word.
D1338, D1339： 1. (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) Registers for the second group (Y2, Y3) output pulse
present value of position control instructions (API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI,
API 159 DRVA). The present value increases or decreases according to the
corresponding rotation direction. D1339 is for high word; D1338 is for low word.
2. (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) Registers for storing the current number of output pulses of
the second group (Y2, Y3) output of pulse output instructions (API 57 PLSY, API 59
PLSR). D1339 is for high word; D1338 is for low word.
D1340 (D1352)： For setting up the frequencies of the first acceleration segment and the last deceleration
segment when the position control instructions (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159
DRVA) are executing CH0 (CH1) outputs.
Range of setting:
For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, the speed has to be higher than 10Hz. Frequency lower than
10Hz or higher than maximum output frequency will be output by 10Hz. The default setting
in EH/EH2/SV series MPU is 200Hz. For SC series MPU, the speed has to be 100 ~
100KHz. Frequency lower than 100Hz will be output by 100Hz and frequency higher than

100KHz will be output by 100KHz. The default setting in SC series MPU is 100Hz.
Note: During the control of the stepping motor, please consider the resonance and the
limitation on the start frequency when you set up the speed.
D1341, D1342： (For EH/EH2/SV series MPU) For setting up the maximum speed when the position control
instructions (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are being executed. D1342 is for
high word; D1341 is for low word.
Range of setting: 200KHz fixed.
D1343 (D1353)： For setting up the time of the first acceleration segment and the last deceleration segment
when the position control instructions (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are
executing CH0 (CH1) outputs.
Range of setting:
For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, the acceleration/deceleration time has to be longer than 10ms.
The time shorter than 10ms or longer than 10,000ms will be output by 10ms. The default
setting in EH/EH2/SV series MPU is 100ms. For SC series MPU, the time has to be 50 ~
20,000ms. The time shorter than 50ms will be regarded as 50ms.
Note: During the control of the stepping motor, please consider the resonance and the
limitation on the start frequency when you set up the speed.
D1348, D1349： (For SC series MPU) Registers for the first group (Y0, Y1) output pulse present value of
position control instructions (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA). The present
value increases or decreases according to the corresponding rotation direction. D1349 is for
D1350, D1351： (For SC series MPU) Registers for the second group (Y11) output pulse present value of
position control instructions (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA). The present
value increases or decreases according to the corresponding rotation direction. D1351 is for


Controllers
156 D ZRN Zero Return ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F ZRN: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DZRN: 17 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
S3 * * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Zero return speed S2: Creep speed S3: Near p oint signal (DOG) D: Pulse output device (please use
transistor output module)
Explanations:
1. When S1 and S2 are used in device F, only 16-bit instruction is applicable.
2. S1 and S2 of SC series MPU only support device K, H and D. S3 of SC series MPU only supports device X10
and X11.
3. Flag: see remarks of API 155 ABSR and API 158 DDRVI for more details.
4. S1 is the starting speed of zero return operation. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, the 16-bit instruction can
designate the range of the speed, which is 10 ~ 32,767Hz and the range designated by the 32-bit instruction is
10 ~ 200,000Hz. If the designated speed is slower than 10Hz, the zero return will operate at 10Hz and when
the designated speed is faster than 200KHz, the zero return will operate at 200KHz. For SC series MPU, the
32-bit instruction can designate the range of speed , which is 100 ~ 100,000Hz. If the designated speed is
slower than 100Hz, the zero return will operate at 100Hz, and when the designated speed is faster than
100KHz, the zero return will operate at 100KHz.
5. S2 is the designated low speed after the near point signal (DOG) is On. EH/EH2/SV series MPU can designate
the range of S2, which is 10 ~ 32,767Hz and SC series MPU can designate the range 100 ~ 100,000Hz.
6. S3 is the designated near point signal (DOG) input (input from A contact). In EH/EH2/SV series MPU, if devices
other than the external output device (X10 ~ X17), e.g. X, Y, M, S are designated, they will be affected by the
scan period, resulting in dispersion of the zero point. In addition, please note that the MPU cannot designate
the same input points X10 ~ X17 as those designated by DCNT and PWD instructions. SC series MPU can
only designate X10 and X11 and cannot designate the same input points as those designated by DCNT
instruction.
7. EH series MPU has two groups of A/B phase pulse output, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3); EH2/SV series
MPU has four groups of A/B phase pulse output, CH0 (Y0, Y1), CH1 (Y2, Y3), CH2 (Y4, Y5) and CH3 (Y6, Y7).
See remarks for the setup methods.
8. Zero return output device in different models
Model SC MPU EH MPU EH2/SV MPU
Zero return output Y10, Y11 Y0, Y2 Y0, Y2, Y4, Y6
9. When executing API 158 DRVI (releative positioning) or API 159 DRVA (absolute positioning), PLC will
automatically store the increasing or decreasing forward/reverse pulses in the present value registers. For

EH/EH2/SV series MPU, Y0: D1337, D1336; Y2: D1339, D1338, Y4: D1376, D1375; Y6: D1378, D1377. For
SC series MPU, Y10: D1348, D1349; Y11: D1350, D1351. In this way, you can keep track of the position of the
machine at any time. However, due to that the data will be lost when the power of the PLC is switched off, you
have to enter the zero point position of the machine when executing zero return for the first time.
Program Example:
When M10= On, Y0 output pulses start to operate zero return at the frequency of 20KHz. When the zero return meets
DOG X15 = On, Y0 output pulses will start to operate by creep speed 1KHz until X15 is Off.
M10
ZRN K20000 K1000 X15 Y0
Remarks:
1. Timing chart of the reset signal output for EH/EH2/SV series MPU. (SC series MPU does not support this
function.)
a) When the reset signal flag M1346 = On, after zero return is completed, the PLC can send the reset signal to
the servo drive and the signal will last for approximately 20ms. After 20ms, the reset signal will return to Off
again.
b) Output devices for reset signals of EH series MPU:
CH0 (Y0, Y1) reset output device (Y4)
c) Output devices for reset signals of EH2/SV series MPU:
Zero return speed

Program interrupt
Scan in circle Creep speed
On
DOG ON
Output near point signal (DOG)
Off
Reset signal
Reset signal Y4 or Y5
Inside 1 ms Greater than 20ms
On
M1336, M1337
Off
Pulse output monitor
Note: The designated devices, X, Y, M, and S, other than the external input devices X10 ~ X17 will be affected
by the scan period, 2 times of the scan period at worst.
2. The zero return operation:
a) When ZRN instruction is executed, the frequency of the first acceleration segment of CH0 (CH1) in
EH/EH2/SV series MPU is set by D1340 (D1352). In SC series MPU, CH0 (CH1) will set creep speed as the

start frequency. The acceleration time of EH/EH2/SV/SC series MPU is set by D1343 (D1353). S1 will start to
move when the acceleration reaches the zero return speed.
b) When the DOG signal goes from Off to On, the zero return speed will decelerate to S2 by the time set in
D1343 (D1353).
c) When the DOG signal goes from On to Off and the pulse output stops, 0 will be written in the present value
registers (D1337, D1336) of CH0 pulses, D1339 and D1338 of CH1 pulses, D1375 and D1376 of CH2 pulses,
and D1377 and D1378 of CH3 pulses in EH/EH2/SV series MPU; 0 will also be written in D1348 and D1349
of Y10 (CH0) pulses or D1350 and D1351 of Y11 (CH1) pulses in SC series MPU.
d) When the DOG signal goes from On to Off and the reset signal flag M1346 = On, Y4 (CH0) or Y5 (CH1) in EH
series MPU will output a reset signal; Y10 (CH0), Y11 (CH1) , Y12 (CH2) and Y13 (CH3) in EH2/SV series
MPU will output a reset signal.
e) For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, when the pulse output is completed and M1029, M1030, M1036 and M1037 are
enabled, indication flag M1336 sent by CH0 pulses, M1337 by CH1, M1522 by CH2 and M1523 by CH3 will
be Off. For SC series MPU, when the pulse output is completed, M1102 and M1103 will be enabled.
f) Due to that ZRN (DZRN) instruction cannot locate the position of DOG, the zero return can only be done
towards a single direction. In the zero return operation of EH/EH2/SV series MPU, D1337 and D1336
(present value registers) of CH0 pulses or D1339 and D1338 of CH1 pulses are decreasing. In the zero return
operation of SC series MPU, D1348 and D1349 of CH0 pulses or D1350 and D1351 of CH1 pulses are also
decreasing.
Frequency
S 3 near point signal =On
Target
frequency
(S 1)
End frequency (S 2)
Start
frequency
(S 2)
time
Enabling
the S3
instruction accel/decel. time near point signal =Off
D1343
acceleration deceleration
g) ZRN (DZRN) instruction is applicable to servo motor with absolute positioning function, e.g. Mitsubishi
MR-J2-A servo drive. Even when the power is switched off, the current position can still be recorded. In
addition, the current position of servo drive can be read by API 155 DABSR of EH/EH2/SV/SV series MPU;
therefore only one zero return operation is required and no zero return has to be done after the power is
switched off.
h) When the drive contact of ZRN instruction is On, CH0 (CH1) will read the acceleration/deceleration time set in
D1343 (D1353) and accelerate to the zero return speed, waiting for the DOG and decelerate to creep speed.
When the DOG is Off, the pulse output will stop immediately.

i) For SC series MPU, many ZRN instructions can be compiled in the program but only one instruction can be
executed when the PLC program is being executed. For example, provided there is already an instruction
enabling Y10 output, other instructions enabling also Y10 output will not be executed. The principle of the
instruction execution is “first come, first executed”.
j) For SC series MPU, when you designate Y10 as the output device, you can choose either X10 or X11 for
DOG input in the “acceleration to deceleration” segment. In other words, when designating Y11 as the output
device, you can also choose either X10 or X11 for DOG input.
k) For SC series MPU, due to that this instruction does not compare between the number of output pulses, the
DOG input (from Off to On) will therefore become the trigger of acceleration converting to deceleration. The
“On” time of DOG has to be longer than 10us; otherwise the signal may be regarded as useless interference.
l) For SC series MPU, when the execution of the instrucion enters the deceleration segment and the output
frequency reaches creep speed (end frequency), the output will stop when DOG goes from On to Off.
m) For SC series MPU, the current accumulated number of pulses of Y10 is stored in D1348 and D1349 and that
of Y11 is stored in D1350 and D1351. Then the program operates from STOP to RUN or from RUN to STOP,
the contents will not be cleared to 0.
n) For SC series MPU, M1102 = On indicates the end of Y10 pulse output; M1103 = On indicates the end of Y11
pulse output.
o) For SC series MPU, after the instruction is executed, all parameters cannot be modified unless the execution
of the instruction stops.
p) For SC series MPU, when the execution of the stops, all outputs will stop immediately no matter what type of
the output it is.


Controllers
157 D PLSV Adjustable Speed Pulse Output ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F PLSV: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DPLSV: 13 steps
D1 *
D2 * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Pulse output frequency D1: Pulse output device (please use transistor output module) D2: Output device for
the signal of rotation direction
Explanations:
1. See remarks for the setting range of S, D1 and D2.
2. Flag: see remarks of API 155 ABSR and API 158 DDRVI for more details.
3. S is the designated pulse output frequency. The 16-bit instruction can designate its range 0 ~ +32,767Hz, 0 ~
-32,768Hz. The ranges designated by 32-bit instruction are 0 ~ +200,000Hz and 0 ~ -200,000Hz. “+/-” signs
indicate forward/backward directions. During the pulse output, the frequency can be changed, but not the
frequencies of different directions.
4. D1 is the pulse output device. EH series MPU can designate Y0 and Y2 and EH2/SV series MPU can designate
Y0, Y2, Y4 and Y6.
5. The operation of D2 corresponds to the “+” or “-“ of S. When S is “+”, D2 will be On; when S is “-“, D2 will be Off.
6. PLSV instruction does not have settings for acceleration and deceleration. Please use API 67 RAMP for the
acceleration and deceleration of pulse output frequency.
7. During the pulse output executed by PLSV instruction, the drive contact turning Off will result in the immediate
stop of the output without going through a deceleration.
8. When the absolute value of the input frequency during the execution of DPLSV is bigger than 200KHz, the
output will operate at 200KHz.
9. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, D1222, D1223, D1383 and D1384 are the time differences sent between the
direction setup signal and pulse output points of CH0, CH1, CH2 and CH3.
10. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, M1305, M1306, M1532 and M1533 are the flags of the direction signals of CH0,
CH1, CH2 and CH3. When S is “+”, the output will operate towards a forward direction and the flag will go Off.
When S is “-“, the output will operate towards a backward direction and the flag will go On.
Program Example:
When M10 = On, Y0 will output pulses at 20KHz. Y5 = On indicates forward pulses.
M10
PLSV K20000 Y0 Y5


Controllers
158 D DRVI Drive to Increment ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DRVI: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DDRVI: 17 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D1 *
D2 * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Number of output pulses (relative designation) S2: Pulse output frequency D1: Pulse output device (please
use transistor output module) D2: Output device for the signal of rotation direction
Explanations:
1. See remarks for the setting range of S1, S2, D1 and D2.
2. S1 and S2 of SC series MPU only support device K, H and D.
3. Flag: see remarks for more details.
4. S1 is the number of output pulses (relative designation). For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, the 16-bit instruction can
designate the range -32,768 ~ +32,767. The range designated by 32-bit instruction is -2,147,483,648 ~
+2,147,483,647. For SC series MPU, the 32-bit instruction can designate the range -2,147,483,648 ~
+2,147,483,647. “+/-” signs indicate forward/backward directions.
5. S2 is the designated pulse output frequency. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, the 16-bit instruction can designate
its range 10 ~ 32,767Hz. The range designated by 32-bit instruction is 10 ~ 200,000Hz. For SC series MPU,
the 32-bit instruction can designate the range 100 ~ 100,000Hz.
6. EH series MPU has two groups of A/B phase pulse output, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3). EH2/SV series
7. Pulse output device D1 in different models
Pulse output end Y10, Y11 Y0, Y2 Y0, Y2, Y4, Y6
8. The operation of D2 corresponds to the “+” or “-“ of S1. When S1 is “+”, D2 will be On; when S1 is “-“, D2 will be
Off. D2 will not be Off immediately after the pulse output is over; it will be Off only when the drive contact of the
instruction turns Off.
9. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, S1 is
- The 32-bit data stored in the present value registers D1337 (high word) and D1336 (low word) of CH0 (Y0,
Y1).
Y3).
Y5).

Y6).
- When in backward direction, the content in the present value register will decrease.
10. For SC series MPU, S1 is the 32-bit data stored in the present value registers D1348 (low word) and D1349
(high word) of CH0 (Y10) or the 32-bit data stored in the present value registers D1350 (low word) and D1351
(high word) of CH1 (Y11). When in backward direction, the content in the present value register will decrease.
When the program goes from STOP to RUN or from RUN to STOP, the content in the present value register
will remain unchanged.
11. When DRVI instruction is executing pulse output, you cannot change the content of all operands. The changes
will be valid next time when DRVI instruction is enabled.
12. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, when the drive contact of DRVI instruction is Off, even the indication flag M1336
sent by CH0 pulses, M1337 sent by CH1 pulses, M1522 sent by CH2 pulses and M1523 sent by CH3 pulses
are “On”, DRVI instruction will not be driven again.
13. When the absolute value of the input frequency of DDRVI insturction in EH/EH2/SV series MPU is larger than
200KHz, the output will be operated at 200KHz. When the absolute value of the input frequency is smaller
than 10Hz, the output will be operated at 10Hz.
14. D1343 (D1353) is for setting up the time of the first acceleartion segment and last deceleration segment of
CH0 (CH1). The acceleration and deceleration time of EH/EH2/SV series MPU shall not be shorter than 10ms.
The output will be operated for 10ms if the time is shorter than 10ms or longer than 10,000ms (default setting
= 100ms). The time range for SC series MPU is 50 ~ 20,000ms. The output will be operated for 20,000ms or
50ms if the time set is longer than 20,000ms or shorter than 50ms.
15. D1340 (D1352) is for setting up the start/end frequency of Y10 (Y11). If S2 is less than or equals start/end
frequency, the pulse output frequency will be executed by the start/end frequency.
16. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, M1305 (M1306) is the direction signal of CH0 (CH1). When S1 is a positive
number, the output will be operated in a forward direction and M1305 (M1306) will be Off. When S1 is a
negative number, the output will be operated in a backward direction and M1305 (M1306) will be On.
Program Example:
When M10= On, Y0 will output 20,000 pulses (relative designation) at 2KHz. Y5 = On indicates the pulses are
executed in forward direction.
M10
DRVI K20000 K2000 Y0 Y5
Remarks:
1. Explanations on EH/EH2/SV series MPU:
a) Relative position control: Designating the traveling distance starting from the current position by “+/ -“ signs;
also known as a relative driving method.

+3,000
F0 the first acceleration The last deceleration

segm ent segm ent
0 (D1340) M in: 10Hz
Current
position
-3,000
b) Settings of relative positioning and the acceleration/deceleration speed:
Acceleration
sampling time Default: 200,000Hz
Max. speed
(D1342, D1341)
Acceleration
slope
Output pulse
frequency
First acceleration Last deceleration
segment (D1340) segment (D1340)
Min: 10Hz Min: 10Hz
Accel/Decel time Accel/Decel time
Default:100ms Default: 100ms

Current
(D1343) (D1343) Output pulse
position
numbers
2. Explanations on SC series MPU:

a) Relative position control: Designating the traveling distance starting from the current position by “+/ -“ signs;
also known as a relative driving method.
+3,000

segment segment
Y10 (D1340)
0 Y11 (D1352) Min: 10Hz
Current
position
-3,000
b) Settings of relative positioning and the acceleration/deceleration speed: D1343 (D1353) is for settings of the
time of the first acceleration segment and last deceleration segment of Y10 (Y11). D1340 (D1352) is for
settings of start/end frequency of Y10 (Y11).
Acceleration
sampling time output pulse frequency
Acceleration
slope
The first acceleration The last deceleration

segment segment
Y10 (D1340) Y10 (D1340)
Y11 (D1352) Y11 (D1352)
Min: 100Hz Min: 100Hz
accel/decel time accel/decel time
Current Default: 200ms Default: 200ms

Y10 (D1343) Y10 (D1343) Output pulse
position numbers
Y11 (D1353) Y11 (D1353)

c) Many DRVI instructions can be compiled synchronously in the program, but only one instruction can be
activated whenever the PLC executes the program. For example, if Y10 output has already been activated by
an instruction, other instructions that are also used to activate Y10 output will not be excecuted. Therefore,
the principle of the instruction activation sequence is “first activated, first executed”.
d) When Y10 is activated by DDRVI instruction, the output function of Y10 will be disabled until DDRVI is OFF.
The same rule applies to Y11.
e) Once the instruction is activated, all other parameters cannot be modified until the instruction is disabled.
f) When the instruction is disabled but the output has not yet completed:
M1334 = On indicates that Y10 will stop output immediately.
M1334 = Off indicates that Y10 will decelerate according to the deceleration time till it reaches end frequency
and stop the pulse output.
M1335 corresponds to Y11 output and applies the same rule.
3. Flags for SC series MPU:
M1102： M1102 = On after Y10 pulse output is completed.
M1103： M1103 = On after Y11 pulse outout is completed.
M1334： Y10 pulse output stops immediately without deceleration when the pulse output instruction is
disabled.
M1335： Y11 pulse output stops immediately without deceleration when the pulse output instruction is
disabled.
4. Special registers for SC series MPU:
D1348： Low word of the current number of Y10 output pulses.
D1349： High word of the current number of Y10 output pulses.
D1350： Low word of the current number of Y11 output pulses.
D1351： High word of the current number of Y11 output pulses..
D1340： Settings of the first start frequency and the last end frequency of Y10 output pulses.
D1352： Settings of the first start frequency and the last end frequency of Y11 output pulses.
D1343： Settings of the acceleration/deceleration time of Y10 output pulses.
D1353： Settings of the acceleration/deceleration time of Y11 output pulses.
5. Flags for EH/EH2/SV series MPU:
M1010： For EH/EH2/SV, when M1010 = On, CH0, CH1, CH2 and CH3 will output pulses when END
instruction is being executed. M1010 will be Off automatically when the output starts.
M1029： For EH/EH2/SV, M1029 = On after CH0 pulse output is completed.
M1030： For EH/EH2/SV, M1030 = On after CH1 pulse output is completed.
M1036： For EH2/SV, M1036 = On after CH2 pulse output is completed.
M1037： For EH2/SV, M1037 = On after CH3 pulse output is completed.
M1305： For EH/EH2/SV, direction signal of CH0.
M1306： For EH/EH2/SV, direction signal of CH1.

M1334： For EH, CH0 pulse output pauses.
For EH2/SV, CH0 pulse output stops.

M1335： For EH, CH1 pulse output pauses.

For EH2/SV, CH1 pulse output stops.
M1336： For EH/EH2/SV, “CH0 sends out pulses” indication.
M1337： For EH/EH2/SV, “CH1 sends out pulses” indication.
M1520： For EH2/SV, CH2 pulse output stops.
M1521： For EH2/SV, CH3 pulse output stops.
M1522： For EH2/SV, “CH2 sends out pulses” indication.
M1523： For EH2/SV, “CH3 sends out pulses” indication.
M1534： For EH2/SV, designated deceleration time of CH0 (should be used with D1348).
M1532： For EH2/SV, direction signal of CH2.
M1533： For EH2/SV, direction signal of CH3.
6. Special registers for EH/EH2/SV series MPU:
D1220： For EH/EH2/SV, phase setting of CH0 (Y0, Y1): D1220 determines the phase by the last two
bits; other bits are invalid.
1. K0: Y0 output
4. K3: Y1 output
D1221： For EH/EH2/SV, phase setting of CH1 (Y2, Y3): D1221 determines the phase by the last two
bits; other bits are invalid.
1. K0: Y2 output
4. K3: Y3 output
D1222： For EH/EH2/SV, the time difference between the direction signal and pulse output sent by
CH0.
D1223： For EH/EH2/SV, the time difference between the direction signal and pulse output sent by
CH1.
D1229： For EH2/SV, phase setting of CH2 (Y4, Y5): D1229 determines the phase by the last two bits;
1. K0: Y4 output
4. K3: Y5 output
D1230： For EH2/SV, phase setting of CH3 (Y6, Y7): D1230 determines the phase by the last two bits;
1. K0: Y6 output
4. K3: Y7 output

D1336： For EH/EH2/SV, low word of the current number of output pulses from CH0.
D1337： For EH/EH2/SV, high word of the current number of output pulses from CH0.
D1338： For EH/EH2/SV, low word of the current number of output pulses from CH1.
D1339： For EH/EH2/SV, high word of the current number of output pulses from CH1.
D1340： For EH/EH2/SV, settings of the first start frequency and the last end frequency of CH0.
D1343： For EH/EH2/SV, settings of acceleration/deceleration time for CH0 pulse output.
D1352： For EH/EH2/SV, settings of the first start frequency and the last end frequency of CH1.
D1353： For EH/EH2/SV, settings of acceleration/deceleration time for CH1 pulse output.
D1375： For EH2/SV, low word of the current number of output pulses from CH2.
D1376： For EH2/SV, high word of the current number of output pulses from CH2.
D1377： For EH2/SV, low word of the current number of output pulses from CH3.
D1378： For EH2/SV, high word of the current number of output pulses from CH3.
D1379： For EH2/SV, settings of the first start frequency and the last end frequency of CH2.
D1380： For EH2/SV, settings of the first start frequency and the last end frequency of CH3.
D1348： For EH2/SV, deceleration time for CH0 pulse output when M1534 = On.
D1381： For EH2/SV, settings of acceleration/deceleration time for CH2 pulse output.
D1382： For EH2/SV, settings of acceleration/deceleration time for CH3 pulse output.
D1383： For EH2/SV, the time difference between the direction signal and pulse output sent by CH2.
D1384： For EH2/SV, the time difference between the direction signal and pulse output sent by CH3.


Controllers
159 D DRVA Drive to Absolute ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DRVA: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DDRVA: 17 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
D1 *
D2 * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Number of output pulses (absolute designation) S2: Pulse output frequency D1: Pulse output device
(please use transistor output module) D2: Output device for the signal of rotation direction
Explanations:
1. See remarks for the setting range of S1, S2, D1 and D2.
2. S1 and S2 of SC series MPU only support device K, H and D.
3. Flag: see remarks of API 158 DRVI for more details.
4. S1 is the number of output pulses (absolute designation). For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, the 16-bit instruction
can designate the range -32,768 ~ +32,767. The range designated by 32-bit instruction is -2,147,483,648 ~
+2,147,483,647. For SC series MPU, the 32-bit instruction can designate the range -2,147,483,648 ~
+2,147,483,647. “+/-” signs indicate forward/backward directions.
5. S2 is the designated pulse output frequency. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, the 16-bit instruction can designate
its range 10 ~ 32,767Hz. The range designated by 32-bit instruction is 10 ~ 200,000Hz. For SC series MPU,
the 32-bit instruction can designate the range 100 ~ 100,000Hz.
6. EH series MPU has two groups of A/B phase pulse output, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3). EH2/SV series
7. Pulse output device D1 in different models
Pulse output end Y10, Y11 Y0, Y2 Y0, Y2, Y4, Y6
8. When S1 is larger than the current relative position, D2 will be Off; when S1 is smaller than the current relative
position, D2 will be On. D2 will not be Off immediately after the pulse output is over; it will be Off only when the
drive contact of the instruction turns Off.
9. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, S1 is
Y1).
Y3).
Y5).

Y6).
When in backward direction, the content in the present value register will decrease.
10. For SC series MPU, S1 is the 32-bit data stored in the present value registers D1348 (low word) and D1349
(high word) of CH0 (Y10) or the 32-bit data stored in the present value registers D1350 (low word) and D1351
(high word) of CH1 (Y11). When in backward direction, the content in the present value register will decrease.
When the program goes from STOP to RUN or from RUN to STOP, the content in the present value register
will remain unchanged.
11. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, when DRVA instruction is executing pulse output, you cannot change the content
of all operands. The changes will be valid next time when DRVA instruction is enabled.
12. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, when the drive contact of DRVA instruction is Off, the pulse output will decelerate
to stop and M1029 and M1030 will be enabled. For SC series MPU, the pulse output will decelerate to stop and
M1102 and M1103 will be enabled.
13. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, when the drive contact of DRVA instruction is Off, even the indication flag M1336
sent by CH0 pulses or M1337 sent by CH1 pulses are “On”, DRVA instruction will not be driven again.
14. When the absolute value of the input frequency of DRVA and DDRVA insturctions in EH/EH2/SV series MPU is
larger than 200KHz, the output will be operated at 200KHz. When the absolute value of the input frequency is
smaller than 10Hz, the output will be operated at 10Hz.
15. D1343 (D1353) is for setting up the time of the first acceleartion segment and last deceleration segment of
CH0 (CH1). The acceleration and deceleration time of EH/EH2/SV series MPU shall not be shorter than 10ms.
The output will be operated for 10ms if the time is shorter than 10ms or for 100ms (default) if the time is longer
than 10,000ms. The time range for SC series MPU is 50 ~ 20,000ms. The output will be operated for 20,000ms
or 50ms if the time set is longer than 20,000ms or shorter than 50ms.
16. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, M1305 (M1306) is the direction signal of CH0 (CH1). When S1 is a positive
number, the output will be operated in a forward direction and M1305 (M1306) will be Off. When S1 is a
negative number, the output will be operated in a backward direction and M1305 (M1306) will be On.
17. D1340 (D1352) is for setting up the start/end frequency of Y10 (Y11). If S2 is less than or equals start/end
frequency, the pulse output frequency will be executed by the start/end frequency.
Program Example:
When M10= On, Y0 will output 20,000 pulses (absolute designation) at 2KHz. Y5 = On indicates the pulses are
executed in forward direction.
M10
DRVA K20000 K2000 Y0 Y5
Remarks:
1. Explanations on EH/EH2/SV series MPU:
a) Absolute position control: Designating the traveling distance starting from the zero point (0); also known as a
absolute driving method.

+3,000
F0 the first acceleration segment

The last deceleration segment
0 (D1340) Min: 10Hz Target position
Zero point
b) Settings of absolute positioning and the acceleration/deceleration speed:
Acceleration
sampling time Default: 200,000Hz
Max. speed
(D1342, D1341)
Acceleration slope
Output pulse frequency
First acceleration Last deceleration

segment (D1340) segment (D1340)
Min: 10Hz Min: 10Hz
T Accel/Decel time Accel/Decel time
Default: 100ms Default: 100ms Output pulse

Current (D1343) (D1343) numbers
position
2. Explanations on SC series MPU:

a) Absolute position control: Designating the traveling distance starting from the zero point (0); also known as a
absolute driving method.
+3,000

segment segment
Y10 (D1340)
0 Y11 (D1352) Min: 10Hz
Zero
point
-3,000
b) Settings of absolute positioning and the acceleration/deceleration speed: D1343 (D1353) is for settings of
the time of the first acceleration segment and last deceleration segment of Y10 (Y11). D1340 (D1352) is for
settings of start/end frequency of Y10 (Y11).
Acceleration
sampling time Output pulse
frequency
Acceleration
slope
First acceleration segment Last deceleration segment

Y10 (D1340) Y10 (D1340)
Y11 (D1352) Min: 100Hz Y11 (D1352)
Min: 100Hz
accel/decel time accel/decel time
Current Default: 200ms Default: 200ms Output pulse

position Y10 (D1343) Y10 (D1343) numbers
Y11 (D1353) Y11 (D1353)

c) Many DRVA instructions can be compiled synchronously in the program, but only one instruction can be
activated whenever the PLC executes the program. For example, if Y10 output has already been activated
by an instruction, other instructions that are also used to activate Y10 output will not be excecuted.
Therefore, the principle of the instruction activation sequence is “first activated, first executed”.
d) When Y10 is activated by DDRVA instruction, the output function of Y10 will be disabled until DDRVAis OFF.
The same rule applies to Y11.
e) Once the instruction is activated, all other parameters cannot be modified until the instruction is disabled.
f) When the instruction is disabled but the output has not yet completed:
M1334 = On indicates that Y10 will stop output immediately.
M1334 = Off indicates that Y10 will decelerate according to the deceleration time till it reaches end frequency
and stop the pulse output.
M1335 corresponds to Y11 output and applies the same rule.
3. See remarks of DDRVI instruction for more details on the flags.

4. Wiring of DVP-EH series and Delta ASDA servo drive:
Delta Servo Drive

EH MPU
ASDA series
Servo Motor
R U
L DI 1: Servo start
220VAC S V
220VAC
Single phase T DI 5: Servo reset W
N DI 6: Forward limit
+24V DI 7: Reverse limit CN1
S/S DI 8: Emergency stop 7 DO1+ SRDY
24G DO_COM CN1 24V 6 DO1-
X0 Start VDD 17 5 DO2+ ZSPD
X1 Zero return COM+ 11 4 DO2-
X2 JOG(+) DI 1 9 3 DO3+ HOME
X3 JOG(-) DI 5 33 2 DO3-
X4 Stop DI 6 32 1 DO4+ TPOS
X5 Error reset DI 7 31 26 DO4-
X6 Forward limit DI 8 30 28 DO5+ ALARM
X7 Reverse limit COM- 45 27 DO5- DO_COM
X10 SRDY CN1

CN2 Encoder
X11 ZSPD Differential OZ 50
X12 TPOS signal /OZ 24
Error
X13 ALARM Z-phase signal counter
X14 (zero point signal)
Clear pulse
Y4 DI 2 10
Electric
C2 COM- 45 gear
DC24V
VDD
VDD 17
PU-HI 35 Approx.
Pulse output
Y0 PLS 41
C0 COM- 47
Y1 SIGN 37
C1 Forward/backward direction
Max. input pulse
frequency: 200kPPS
DVP32EH00T
Note:
(a) The parameter setting of Delta ASDA servo drive:

P1-01: position mode

P1-00: pulse input type as Pulse+DIR.
(b) The forward/reverse limit switch should be connected to SERVO AMP.
(c) The “clear pulse” signal will clear the current number of pulses left inside the servo.
5. Wiring of DVP-SC series and Delta ASDA servo drive:
Delta Servo Drive

SC MPU + 16SP
ASDA series
3-phase power
Servo motor
R U
24V DI 1: Servo start
220VAC S V
24VDC
T DI 5: Servo reset W
0V Forward limit
Reverse limit CN1
S/S DI 8: Emergency stop 7 DO1+ SRDY
24VDC
DO_COM CN1 24V 6 DO1-
X0 Start VDD 17 5 DO2+ ZSPD
X1 Zero return COM+ 11 4 DO2-
X2 JOG(+) DI 1 9 3 DO3+ HOME
X3 JOG(-) DI 5 33 2 DO3-
X4 Start DI 6 32 1 DO4+ TPOS
X5 Error reset DI 7 31 26 DO4-
X20 Forward limit DI 8 30 28 DO5+ ALARM
X21 Reverse limit COM- 45 27 DO5- DO_COM
X22 SRDY CN1

CN2 Encoder
X23 ZSPD Differential OZ 50
X24 TPOS signal /OZ 24
Error
X25 ALARM Z-phase signal counter
X26 (zero point signal)
DI 2 10
Electric
COM- 45 gear
DC24V
VDD 17
PU-HI 35
Pulse output
Y10 PLS 41
C2 COM- 47
Y0 SIGN 37
C0 Forward/backward direction
Max. input pulse
frequency: 100kPPS
DVP12SC11T+DVP16SP11T
Note:
(a) The parameter setting of Delta ASDA servo drive:

P1-01: position mode
P1-00: pulse input type as Pulse+DIR.

6. Wiring of DVP-EH series PLC and a Mitsubishi MR-J2-□A Servo drive:

EH MPU Mitsubishi servo drive
3-phase power
MR-J2 series
Servo motor
R U
L
220VAC S V
Single phase T W
N
+24V CN1B 24V
S/S VDD 3
24G COM 13
ABS bit 0
X0 D01 4
ABS bit 1
X1 ZSP 19
ABS transmission
X2 TLC 6
X3 ALM 18
X4 Stop RES 14
X5 Left limit LSP 16
X6 Right limit LSN 17
X7 Zero return EMG 15
TL 9
X10 JOG(+) SON 5
CN2 Encoder
X11 JOG(-) SG 10
Forward
X12 positioning ABSR 9 Error
X13 Reverse counter
ABSM 8
positioning
X14 DOG
X15 CN1A Electric

Positioning completed gear
X16 INP 18
Preparation completed
X17 RD 19 200KPPS
Z-phase signal (zero point)
OP 14
Read ABS ready
Y6 LG 1
Enter ABS mode
Y7
C4 SG 20
Clear pulse
Y4 CR 8
C2 SG 20
Pulse output
Y0 PP 3
C0 SG 10
Forward/backward direction
Y1 NP 2
C1 SG 10
DVP32EH00T
Note:
(a) When detecting an absolute position by using DABSR instruction, the parameter setting of a Mitsubishi
MR-J2-□A servo drive that connects to Delta EH series PLC:
P0: position mode.
P1: using absolute value.
P21: pulse input type as Pulse+DIR.
(c) When using OP (Z-phase signal) in servo and given that the Z-phase signal is a high-frequency one when
the motor is running at high speed, the valid detection can only be possible when the signal is within the
range detectable by PLC. When using OP (Z phase signal) of the servo, if Z phase signal is a high
frequency signal during high-speed motor operation, the high frequency signal shall be within the available
range that can be detected by PLC.
7. Cautions when designing a position control program:

a) There is no limitation on the times of using the position control instructions, API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV,
API 158 DRVI, and API 159 DRVA. However, the user still have to note that:

i. Do not drive the position control instructions which use the same output CH0(Y0, Y1) or CH1(Y2, Y3)
simultaneously. Otherwise, they will be treated as repeated outputs and cannot function normally.
ii. It is recommended that you use the step ladder instruction (STL) to design the position control program
(see the example below).
b) How to use the position control instructions (API 156 ABSR, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, and API 159
DRVA) and pulse output instructions (API 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM and API 59 PLSR) at the same time.
The position control instruction and pulse output instruction share the 32 bits of the present value register
(D1337 high word; D1336 low word) of CH0 (Y0, Y1) or the present value register of CH1 (Y2, Y3), which will
make the operation complicated. Therefore, it is recommanded that you replace the pulse output instruction
with position control instruction.
c) Explanations on the (Y0, Y1) pulses from CH0 and (Y2, Y3) pulses from CH1.
Voltage range: DC5V ~ DC24V
Current range: 10mA ~ 100mA
Output pulse frequency: Y0, Y2 at 200KHz; Y1, Y3 at 10KHz.
8. Settings of pulse output signals in the operation of position control for EH/EH2/SV series MPU:
a) Pulse + DIR (recommended)
Pulse
DIR
b) CW/CCW (limited frequency at 10KHz)

CW
CCW
c) A/B-phase output (limited frequency at 10KHz)
A
B
9. Follow the above output settings of PLC for the pulse input parameters of SERVO AMP or stepping motor.
10. For EH/EH2/SV series MPU, when Y0 output adopts many high-speed pulse output instructions (PLSY, PWM,
PLSR) and position control instructions (ZRN, PLSV, DRVI, DRVA) in a program and these instructions are
executed synchronously in the same scan period, PLC will execute the instruction with the fewest step
numbers.
Programming example for forward/reverse operation:
For the wiring, see the wiring drawing of DVP-EH series and Mitsubishi MR-J2-□A servo drive
One operation mode performs positioning by absolute position:
500,000
Output pulse frequency 500Hz
100 200,000Hz
Zero point
500Hz
Acceleration/
Deceleration time
200ms

11. Programming example of using step ladder instruction (STL):

X4
M1334 Y0 pulse output pauses
Stop
M1000
With clear signal output
M1346 Valid zero return
M1002
1 Settings of accel/decel time
MOV K200 D1343
200ms--D1343
SET S0
SET Y5 SERVO On control
※1. If the accel./decel. time (D1343) of CH1 can be default setting, (100ms) this program step can be ignored.
S0 X7
S RS T M1 0 Reset zero point return completed flag
Zero
return
RS T M1 2 Reset forward positioning completed flag
RS T M1 3 Reset backward positioning completed flag
S ET S 20 Drive zero return (S20)
X10
JOG (+)
2
S ET S 21 Drive JOG(+) (S21 )
X11
JOG (-)
2
S ET S 22 Drive JOG(-) (S22)
X12 M10
Forward Zero
Positioning return
completed
flag
S ET S 23 Drive forward positioning (S23)
X13 M10
Backward Zero
Positioning return
completed
flag
S ET S 24 Drive backward positioning (S24)
※2. The max. traveling distance of a JOG operation equals to the max. number of output pulses
(-2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647) of API 158 DDRVI instruction. Please re-execute JOG of the traveling
distance exceeds the range.

S2 0
Zero return instruction
S DZRN K5 0000 K5 000 X1 4 Y0 operates in the (-) direction.
Zero
return Zero return Creep DOG Pulse output
speed speed device
M102 9 M0
SE T M10 Reset zero point return completed flag
Execution
completed
M133 6 M0
S0 Zero point return is completed
Y0 output being executed
M100 0
M0 Time-out: 1 scan period
S2 1 X2 Use re la tive po siti on in g i nstr ucti o n to

S DDRVI K9 99999 K3 0000 Y0 Y1 e xecu te a JOG op er ati on (wh en Y1 = On )
i n th e ( +) di re ctio n .
JOG (+) JOG (+)
Number of Output pulse Pulse output Output point for
output puls es frequency device revers e s ignals
(in + di rection)
M133 6 M1
S0 JOG (+) operation is completed
M100 0
S2 2 X3 Use re la tive po siti on in g i nstr ucti o n to

S e xecu te a JOG op er ati on (wh en Y1 = On )
DDRVI K-99 9999 K3 0000 Y0 Y1
i n th e ( -) di re ctio n.
JOG (-) JOG (-) Number of Output pulse Pulse output O utput point for
output puls es frequency device revers e s ignals
(in - direction)
M133 6 M2
S0 JOG (-) operation is completed
M100 0
S2 3 Use ab sol ute po siti on in g i nstr ucti on to

S DDRVA K5 00000 K1 00000 Y0 Y1 tr ave l to ab sol ute po siti on 50 0,0 00
Forw ard ( Y1 = O n) .
positioning Absolute Output pulse Pulse output O utp ut p oi nt fo r
position frequency device r eve rse sig na ls
M102 9 M3
SE T M12 Forward positioning completed flag

Execution
completed
M133 6 M3
S0 Forward positioning is completed
Y0 output being executed.
M100 0
S2 4
S Usi ng ab sol ute po siti on in g i nstr ucti on to
DDRVA K1 00 K1 00000 Y0 Y1
tr ave l to ab sol ute po siti on 10 0 ( Y1 = On ).
Backw ard
positioning Absolute Output pulse Pulse output O utp ut p oi nt fo r
position frequency device r eve rse sig na ls
M102 9 M4
SE T M13 Backward positioning completed flag

Execution
completed
M133 6 M3
S0 Backward positioning is completed
M100 0
RET
END


Controllers
160 TCMP P Time Compare ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F TCMP, TCMPP: 11 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
S3 * * * * * * * * * * *
S * * *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: “Hour” for comparison S2: “Minute” for comparison S3: “Second” for comparison S: Current time of
RTC D: Comparison result
Explanations:
1. Range of S1: K0 ~ K23; range of S2 and S3: K0 ~ K59
2. S will occupy 3 consecutive devices; D will occupy 3 consecutive points.
4. S1, S2 and S3 are compared with the present values of “hour”, “minute” and “second” starting from S. The
comparison result is stored in D.
5. S is the “hour” of the current time (K0 ~ K23) in RTC; S + 1 is the “minute” (K0 ~ K59) and S + 2 is the “second”
(K0 ~ K59).
6. S is read by TRD instruction and the comparison is started by TCMP instruction. If S exceeds the range, the
program will regard this as an operation error and the instruction will not be executed, M1067 and M1068 = On
and D1067 will record the error code 0E1A (hex).
Program Example:
1. When X10= On, the instruction will compare the current time in RTC (D20 ~ D22) with the set value 12:20:45
and display the result in M10 ~ M12. When X10 goes from On to Off, the instruction will not be executed, but
the On/Off stauts prior to M10 ~ M12 will remain.
2. Connect M10 ~ M12 in series or in parallel to obtain the result of ≧, ≦, and ≠.
X10
TCMP K12 K20 K45 D20 M10
M10
ON when 12:20:45 >
M11
ON when 12:20:45 =
M12
ON when 12:20:45 <


Controllers
161 TZCP P Time Zone Compare ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F TZCP, TZCPP: 9 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
S * * *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Lower bound of the time for comparison S2: Upper bound of the time for comparison S: Current time of
RTC D: Comparison result
Explanations:
1. S1, S2, and S will occupy 3 consecutive devices.
2. The content in S1 must be less than the content in S2.
5. S is compared with S1 and S2. The comparsion result is stored in D.
6. S1 , S1 +1, S1 +2: The “hour”, “minute” and “second” of the lower bound of the time for comparison.
7. S2, S2 +1, S2 +2: The “hour”, “minute” and “second”ond” of the upper bound of the time for comparison.
8. S , S +1, S +2: The “hour”, “minute” and “second” of the current time of RTC.
9. D0 designated by S is read by TRD instruction and the comparison is started by TZCP instruction. If S1, S2, and
S exceed their ranges, the program will regard this as an operation error and the instruction will not be
executed, M1067 and M1068 = On and D1067 will record the error code 0E1A (hex).
10. When S < S1 and S < S2, D will be On. When S > S1 and S > S2, D + 2 will be On. In other occasions, D + 1
will be On.
Program Example:
When X10= On, TZCP instruction will be executed and one of M10 ~ M12 will be On. When X10 = Off, TZCP
instruction will not be executed and the status of M10 ~ M12 prior to X10 = Off will remain unchanged.
X10
TZCP D0 D20 D10 M10
M10
ON when
M11
ON when
M12
ON when


Controllers
162 TADD P Time Addition ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F TADD, TADDP: 7 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Time summand S2: Time addend D: Time sum
Explanations:
1. S1, S2, and D will occupy 3 consecutive devices.
3. Flags: M1020 (zero flag); M1022 (carry flag)
4. S1 + S2 = D. The hour, minute, and second of the RTC designated in S1 plus the hour, minute, and second
designated in S2. The result is stored in the hour, minute, and second of the register designated in D.
5. If S1 and S2 exceed their ranges, the program will regard this as an operation error and the instruction will not
be executed. M1067 and M1068 will be On and D1067 record the error code 0E1A (hex).
6. If the sum is larger than 24 hours, the carry flag M1022 will be On and the value in D will be the result of “sum
minuses 24 hours”.
7. If the sum equals 0 (00:00:00), the zero flag M1020 will be On.
Program Example:
1. When X10= On, TADD instruction will be executed and the hour, minute and second in RTC designated in D0
~ D2 will plus the hour, minute and second in RTC designated in D10 ~ D12. The sum is stored in the hour,
minute and second of the register designated in D20 ~ D22.
X10
TADD D0 D10 D20
8 6 14
10 40 50
20 6 26
08:10:20 06:40:06 14:50:26
2. If the sum is larger than 24 hours, M1022 will be On.
X10
TADD D0 D10 D20
18 11 6
40 30 10
30 8 38
18:40:30 11:30:08 06:10:38


Controllers
163 TSUB P Time Subtraction ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F TSUB, TSUBP: 7 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Time minuend S2: Time subtrahend D: Time remainder
Explanations:
1. S1, S2, and D will occupy 3 consecutive devices.
3. Flags: M1020 (zero flag); M1021 (borrow flag)
4. S1 − S2 = D. The hour, minute, and second of the RTC designated in S1 minus the hour, minute, and second
designated in S2. The result is stored in the hour, minute, and second of the register designated in D.
5. If S1 and S2 exceed their ranges, the program will regard this as an operation error and the instruction will not
be executed. M1067 and M1068 will be On and D1067 record the error code 0E1A (hex).
6. If the remainder is a negative value, the borrow flag M1021 will be On. The value in D will be the result of “the
negative value pluses 24 hours”.
7. If the remainder equals 0 (00:00:00), the zero flag M1020 will be On.
Program Example:
1. When X10= On, TADD instruction will be executed and the hour, minute and second in RTC designated in D0
~ D2 will minus the hour, minute and second in RTC designated in D10 ~ D12. The remainder is stored in the
hour, minute and second of the register designated in D20 ~ D22.
X10
TSUB D0 D10 D20
20 14 5
20 30 49
5 8 57
20:20:05 14:30:08 05:49:57
2. If the subtraction result is a negative value, M1021 will be On.
X10
TSUB D0 D10 D20
5 19 10
20 11 9
30 15 15
05:20:30 19:11:15 10:09:15


Controllers
166 TRD P Time Read ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F TRD, TRDP: 3 steps
D * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
D: The device for storing the current time read in RTC
Explanations:
3. Flags: M1016, M1017, M1076. See remarks for more details.
4. The built-in RTC in EH/EH2/SV/SA/SX/SC series MPU offers 7 data (year, week, month, day, hour, minute,
second) stored in D1319 ~ D1313. TRD instruction is for program designers to read the current data in RTC
and store the data to the 7 registers designated.
5. D1319 only reads the 2-digit year in A.D. If you wish D1319 to read the 4-digit year, see remarks for more
information.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, the instruction will read the current time in RTC to the designated registers D0 ~ D6.
2. The content of D1318: 1 = Monday; 2 = Tuesday … 7 = Sunday.
X0
TRD
Special D Item Content General D Item

D1319 Year (A.D.) 00~99 D0 Year (A.D.)
Day Day
D1318 1~7 D1
(Mon ~ Sun) (Mon ~ Sun)
D1317 Month 1~12 D2 Month
D1316 Day 1~31 D3 Date
D1315 Hour 0~23 D4 Hour
D1314 Minute 0~59 D5 Minute
D1313 Second 0~59 D6 Second

Remarks:
1. Flags and special registers for the built-in RTC in EH/EH2/SV/SA/SX/SC series MPU.
Device Name Function
Displaying year in When Off, D1319 will display 2-digit year in A.D.
M1016
A.D. in RTC When On, D1319 will display “2-digit year in A.D + 2,000”.
±30 seconds Correction takes place when M1017 goes from Off to On (reset to 0 when in
M1017
correction 0 ~ 29 second; minute pluses 1 and second resets to 0 in 30 ~ 59 second)
On when the set value exceeds the range. (only available when the power
M1076 Malfunction of RTC
is being switched on).
D1313 Second 0 ~ 59
D1314 Minue 0 ~ 59
D1315 Hour 0 ~ 23
D1316 Day 1 ~ 31
D1317 Month 1 ~ 12
D1318 Week 1~7
D1319 Year 0 ~ 99 (2-digit year in A.D.)
2. How to correct RTC:
There are 2 ways to correct the built-in RTC.
a) By a specific instruction. (See API 167 TWR instruction)
b) By peripheral devices, WPLSoft, the ladder diagram editing software.
3. How to display 4-digit year in A.D.:
a) Normally, the year is only displayed in 2 digits (e.g. 2003 displayed as 03). If you wish the year to be
displayed in 4 digits, please key in the following program at the start of the program.
M1002
SET M1016 display 4-digit year in A.D.
b) The original 2-digit year will be switched to a 4-digit year, i.e. the 2-digit year will pluses 2,000.
c) If you wish to write in new time in the 4-digit year display mode, you can only write in a 2-digit year (0 ~ 99,
indicating year 2000 ~ 2099). For example, 00=year 2000, 50=year 2050 and 99=year 2099.


Controllers
167 TWR P Time Write ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F TWR, TWRP: 3 steps
S * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Device for storing the new time to be written into RTC
Explanations:
1. S will occupy 7 consecutive devices.
3. Flags: M1016, M1017, M1076. See remarks of API 166 TRD for more details.
4. To make adjustment on the RTC built in EH/EH2/SV/SA/SX/SC series MPU, use this instruction to write the
correct time into the RTC.
5. When this instruction is executed, the new set time will be written in the RTC built in PLC immediately.
Therefore, please be noted that the new set time has to match the current time then when the instruction is
executed.
6. If S exceeds its range, the program will regard it as an operation error and the instruction will not be executed.
M1067 and M1068 will be On and D1067 will record the error code 0E1A (hex).
Program Example 1:
When X0= On, write the correct current time into the RTC.
X0
TWRP
General D Item Content Special D Item
D20 Year (A.D.) 00~99 D1319 Year (A.D.)

Day Day
D21 1~7 D1318
Real Time Clock
(Mon ~ Sun) (Mon ~ Sun)

New set time
D22 Month 1~12 D1317 Month

D23 Date 1~31 D1316 Date
D24 Hour 0~23 D1315 Hour
D25 Minute 0~59 D1314 Minute
D26 Second 0~59 D1313 Second
Program Example 2:
1. Set the current time in the RTC as 15:27:30, Tuesday, August 19, 2003.
2. D0 ~ D6 indicate the new set time in the RTC.
3. X10 = On for changing the current time in the RTC and make the changed value the new set value.

4. Whenever X11 = On, RTC will perform a ±30 second correction. The correction is performed according to the
rules: When the second hand of RTC locates at 1 ~ 29, the second will be automatically reset to “0” and the
minute hand will remain at its location. When the second hand locates at 30 ~ 59, the second will be
automatically reset to “0” and the minute hand will increase by 1 minute.
X10
MOV K03 D0 Year (2003)
MOV K2 D1 Day (Tuesday)
MOV K8 D2 Month (August)
MOV K19 D3 Date
MOV K15 D4 Hour
MOV K27 D5 Minute
MOV K30 D6 Second
TWR D0 Write the set time into RTC

X11
M1017 30 seconds correction


Controllers
169 D HOUR Hour Meter ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F HOUR: 7 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DHOUR: 13 steps
D1 *
D2 * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Period of time when D2 is On (in hour) D1: Current value being measured (in hour) D2: Output device
Explanations:
2. D1 will occupy 2 consecutive points. D1 + 1 uses 16-bit register in 16-bit or 32-bit instruction.
4. HOUR instruction can be used 4 times of SA/SX/SC.
5. Range of S: K1 ~ K32,767 (unit: hour); range of D1: K0 ~ K32,767 (unit: hour). D1 + 1 refers to the current time
that is less than an hour (range: K0 ~K3,599; unit: second).
6. This instruction times the time and when the time reaches the set time (in hour), D2 will be On. This function
allows the user to time the operation of the machine or conduct maintenance works.
7. After D2 is On, the timer will resume the timing.
8. In the 16-bit instruction, when the current time measured reaches the maximum 32,767 hours/3,599 seconds,
the timing will stop. To restart the timing, D1 and D1 + 1 have to be reset to “0”.
9. In the 32-bit instruction, when the current time measured reaches the maximum 2,147,483,647 hours/3,599
seconds, the timing will stop. To restart the timing, D1 ~ D1 + 2 have to be reset to “0”.
10. There is no limitations on the times of using this instruction in the program for EH series MPU; however, only 4
instructions can be executed at the same time.
Program Example 1:
In 16-bit instruction, when X0 = On, Y10 will be On and the timing will start. When the timing reaches 100 hours, Y0
will be On and D0 will record the current time measured (in hour) and D1 will record the current time that is less than
an hour (0 ~ 3,599; unit: second).
X0
Y10
Y10
HOUR K100 D0 Y0

Program Example 2:
In 32-bit instruction, when X0 = On, Y10 will be On and the timing will start. When the timing reaches 40,000 hours,
Y0 will be On. D1 and D0 will record the current time measured (in hour) and D2 will record the current time that is
less than an hour (0 ~ 3,599; unit: second).
X0
Y10
Y10
DHOUR K40000 D0 Y0


Controllers
170 D GRY P BIN Æ Gray Code ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F GRY, GRYP: 5 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DGRY, DGRYP: 9 steps
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source device for BIN value D: Device for storing Gray code
Explanations:
3. This instruction converts the BIN value in the device designated in S into Gray code and stores the value in D.
4. See the ranges of S as indicated below. If S exceeds the ranges, the program will regard it as an operation
error and the instruction will not be executed. M1067 and M1068 will be On and D1067 will record the error
code 0E1A (hex).
In 16-bit instruction: 0 ~ 32,767
In 32-bit instruction: 0 ~ 2,147,483,647
Program Example:
When X0 = On, the instruction will convert constant K6,513 into Gray code and store the result in K4Y20.
X0
GRY K6513 K4Y20
b15 b0
K6513=H1971 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
Y37 Y20
GRAY6513 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
K4Y20


Controllers
171 D GBIN P Gray Code Æ BIN ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F GBIN, GBINP: 5 steps
S * * * * * * * * * * * DGBIN, DGBINP: 9 steps
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Source device for Gray code D: Device for storing BIN value
Explanations:
3. This instruction converts the Gray code in the device designated in S into BIN value and stores the value in D.
4. This instruction converts the content (in Gray code) in the absolute position encoder connected at the PLC
input terminal into BIN value and store the result in the designated register.
5. See the ranges of S as indicated below. If S exceeds the ranges, the program will regard it as an operation
error and the instruction will not be executed. M1067 and M1068 will be On and D1067 will record the error
code 0E1A (hex).
In 16-bit instruction: 0 ~ 32,767
In 32-bit instruction: 0 ~ 2,147,483,647
Program Example:
When X20 = On, the Gray code in the absolute position encoder connected at X0 ~ X17 will be converted into BIN
value and stored in D10.
X20
GBIN K4X0 D10
X17 K4X0 X0
GRAY6513 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
b15 b0
H1971=K6513 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1


Controllers
172 D ADDR P Floating Point Addition ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DADDR, DADDRP: 13 steps
S1 *
S2 *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Floating point summand S2: Floating point addend D: Sum
Explanations:
1. S1 and S2 can be floating point values (FX.XX).
3. Flags: M1020 (zero flag), M1021 (borrow flag), M1022 (carry flag)
4. In DADDR instruction, floating point values (e.g. F1.2) can be entered directly into S1 and S2 or stored in register
D for operation. When the instruction is being executed, operand D will store the operation result.
5. When S1 and S2 stores the floating point values in register D, their functions are the same as API 120 EADD.
6. S1 and S2 can designate the same register. In this case, if the “continuous execution” type instruction is in use and
during the On period of the drive contact, the register will be added once in every scan by a “pulse execution” type
instruction (DADDRP).
7. If the absolute value of the operation result is larger than the maximum floating point displayable, the carry flag
M1022 will be On.
8. If the absolute value of the operation result is smaller than the minimum floating point displayable, the borrow flag
M1021 will be On.
9. If the operation result is “0”, the zero flag M1020 will be On.
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, the floating point F1.20000004768372 will plus F2.20000004768372 and the result
F3.40000009536743 will be stored in the data registers (D10, D11).
X0
DADDR F1.20000004768372 F2.20000004768372 D10
Program Example 2:
When X0 = On, the floating point value (D1, D0) + floating point value (D3, D2) and the result will be stored in the
registers designated in (D11, D10).
X0
DADDR D0 D2 D10

Remarks:
The functions of this instruction are in V6.6 of ES/EX/SS series, V1.6 of SA/SX series and V1.4 of SC series.
DADDR instruction supports EH2/SV series, but not EH series.


Controllers
173 D SUBR P Floating Point Subtraction ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DSUBR, DSUBRP: 13 steps
S1 *
S2 *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Floating point minuend S2: Floating point subtrahend D: Remainder
Explanations:
4. In DSUBR instruction, floating point values (e.g. F1.2) can be entered directly into S1 and S2 or stored in register
5. When S1 and S2 stores the floating point values in register D, their functions are the same as API 121 ESUB.
during the On period of the drive contact, the register will be subtracted once in every scan by a “pulse execution”
type instruction (DSUBRP).
M1022 will be On.
M1021 will be On.
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, the floating point F1.20000004768372 will minus F2.20000004768372 and the result F-1 will be
stored in the data registers (D10, D11).
X0
DSUBR F1.20000004768372 F2.20000004768372 D10
Program Example 2:
When X0 = On, the floating point value (D1, D0) – floating point value (D3, D2) and the result will be stored in the
X0
DSUBR D0 D2 D10

Remarks:


Controllers
174 D MULR P Floating Point Multiplication ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DMULR, DMULRP: 13 steps
S1 *
S2 *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Floating point multiplicand S2: Floating point multiplicator D: Product
Explanations:
4. In DMULR instruction, floating point values (e.g. F1.2) can be entered directly into S1 and S2 or stored in register
5. When S1 and S2 stores the floating point values in register D, their functions are the same as API 122 EMUL.
during the On period of the drive contact, the register will be multiplied once in every scan by a “pulse execution”
type instruction (DMULRP).
M1022 will be On.
M1021 will be On.
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, the floating point F1.20000004768372 will multiply F2.20000004768372 and the result
X0
DMULR F1.20000004768372 F2.20000004768372 D10
Program Example 2:
When X1 = On, the floating point value (D1, D0) × floating point value (D11, D10) and the result will be stored in the
X1
D0 D10 D20

Remarks:
The functions of this instruction are in V6.6 of ES/EX/SS series, V1.6 of SA/SX series and V1.4 of SC series. DADDR
instruction supports EH2/SV series, but not EH series.


Controllers
175 D DIVR P Floating Point Division ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DDIVR, DDIVRP: 13 steps
S1 *
S2 *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Floating point dividend S2: Floating point divisor D: Quotient
Explanations:
1. S1 and S2 can be floating point values.
4. In DDIVR instruction, floating point values (e.g. F1.2) can be entered directly into S1 and S2 or stored in register D
for operation. When the instruction is being executed, operand D will store the operation result.
5. When S1 and S2 stores the floating point values in register D, their functions are the same as API 123 EDIV.
6. If S2 is “0”, the program will regard it as an operation error and the instruction will not be executed. M1067 and
M1068 will be On and D1067 will record the error code H’0E19.
M1022 will be On.
M1021 will be On.
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, the floating point F1.20000004768372 will be divided by F2.20000004768372 and the result
X0
DDIVR F1.20000004768372 F2.20000004768372 D10
Program Example 2:
When X1 = On, the floating point value (D1, D0) ÷ floating point value (D11, D10) and the quotient will be stored in the
X1
DDIVR D0 D10 D20

Remarks:


Controllers
180 MAND P Matrix ‘AND’ Operation ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MAND, MANDP: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Matrix source device 1 S2: Matrix source device 2 D: Operation result n: Array length
Explanations:
2. S1, and S2 designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS; D designates KnYm KnM and KnS
3. SA/SX/SC can designate n = 4. EH/EH2/SV can designate n ≦ 4.
5. The two matrix sources S1 and S2 perform matrix ‘AND’ operation according to the array length n. The result is
stored in D.
6. Operation rule of matix ‘AND’ : The result will be 1 if both two bits are 1; otherwise the result will be 0.
Program Example:
When X0 = On, the 3 arrays of 16-bit registers D0 ~ D2 and the 3 arrays of 16-bit registers D10 ~ D12 will perform a
matrix ‘AND’ operation. The result will be stored in the 3 arrays of 16-bitd registers D20 ~ D22.
X0
MAND D0 D10 D20 K3
b15 b0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
Before MAND
execution
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
After 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
execution
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Remarks:
1. Explanations on the matrix instruction:
a) A matix consists of more than 1 consecutive 16-bit registers. The number of registers in the matrix is the

length of the array (n). A matrix contains 16 × n bits (points) and there is only 1 bit (point) offered for an
operand at a time.
b) The matrix instruction gathers a series of 16 × n bits (b0 ~ b16n-1) and designates a single point for operation.
The point will not be seen as a value.
c) The matrix instruction processes the moving, copying, comparing and searching of one-to-many or
many-to-many matrix status, which is a very handy and important application instruction.
d) The matrix operation will need a 16-bit register to designate a point among the 16n points in the matrix for the
operation. The register is the Pointer (Pr) of the matrix, designated by the user in the instruction. The vaild
range of Pr is 0 ~ 16n -1, corresponding to b0 ~ b16n-1 in the matrix.
e) There are left displacement, right displacement and rotation in a matrix operation. The bit number decreases
from left to right (see the figure below).
Left Width: 16 bits Right
D0 b15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 b0
D1 b31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 b16
Length: n
D2 b47 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 b32
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Dn-1 b16n-1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
f) The matrix width (C) is fixed at 16 bits.

g) Pr: matrix pointer. E.g. if Pr is 15, the designated point will be b15.
h) Array length (R) is n: n = 1 ~ 256.

Example: The matrix is composed of D0, n = 3; D0 = HAAAA, D1 = H5555, D2 = HAAFF
R0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 D0
R1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 D1
R2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D2
Example: The matrix is composed of K2X0, n = 3; K2X0 = H37, K2X10 = H68, K2X20 = H45
R0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 X0~X7
R1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 X10~X17
R2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 X20~X27
Fill “0” into the blank in R0(C15-C8), R1(C15-C8), and R2(C15-C8).


Controllers
181 MOR P Matrix ‘OR’ Operation ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MOR, MORP: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Matrix source device 1 S2: Matrix source device 2. D: Operation result n: Array length
Explanations:
5. The two matrix sources S1 and S2 perform matrix ‘OR’ operation according to the array length n. The result is
stored in D.
6. Operation rule of matrix ‘OR’: The result will be 1 if either of the two bits is 1. The result is 0 only when both two
bits are 0.
Program Example:
matrix ‘OR’ operation. The result will be stored in the 3 arrays of 16-bit registers D20 ~ D22.
X0
MOR D0 D10 D20 K3
b15 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before MOR
Execution
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After
Execution 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1


Controllers
182 MXOR P Matrix ‘XOR’ Operation ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MXOR, MXORP: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
5. The two matrix sources S1 and S2 perform matrix ‘XOR’ operation according to the array length n. The result is
stored in D.
6. Operation rule of matrix ‘XOR’: The result will be 1 if the two bits are different. The result will be 0 if the two bits
are the same.
Program Example:
matrix ‘XOR’ operation. The result will be stored in the 3 arrays of 16-bit registers D20 ~ D22.
X0
MXOR D0 D10 D20 K3
b15 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before MXOR
MOR
Execution
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After
Execution 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1


Controllers
183 MXNR P Matrix ‘XNR’ Operation ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MXNR, MXNRP: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
5. The two matrix sources S1 and S2 perform matrix ‘XNR’ operation according to the array length n. The result is
stored in D.
6. Operation rule of matrix ‘XNR’: The result will be 1 if the two bits are the same. The result will be 0 if the two bits
are different.
Program Example:
matrix ‘XNR’ operation. The result will be stored in the 3 arrays of 16-bit registers D20 ~ D22.
X0
MXNR D0 D10 D20 K3
b15 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before
MXNR
Execution
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Execution
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1


Controllers
184 MINV P Matrix Inverse Operation ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MINV, MINVP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Matrix source device D: Operation result n: Array length
Explanations:
2. S designates KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS; D designates KnY, KnM and KnS.
5. S performs an inverse matrix operation according to the array length n. The result is stored in D.
Program Example:
When X0 = On, the 3 arrays of 16-bit registers D0 ~ D2 perform a matrix inverse operation. The result will be stored in
the 3 arrays of 16-bit registers D20 ~ D22.
X0
MINV D0 D20 K3
b15 b0
Before 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Execution 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
MINV
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
After
Execution 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0


Controllers
185 MCMP P Matrix Compare ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MCMP, MCMPP: 9 steps
S1 * * * * * * *
S2 * * * * * * *
n * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Matrix source device 1 S2: Matrix source device 2 n: Array length
D: Pointer (Pr), for storing the value of target location
Explanations:
2. S1, and S2 designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS; D designates KnY, KnM and KnS.
6. This instruction compares every bit in S1 with every bit in S2 starting from location D and finds out the location
of different bits. The location will be stored in D.
7. The matrix comparison flag (M1088) decides to compare between equivalent values (M1088 = 1) or different
values (M1088 = 0). When the comparison is completed, it will stop immediately and the matrix bit search flag
will turn “On” (M1091 = 1). When the comparison progresses to the last bit, the matrix search end flag (M1089)
will turn “On” and the No. where the comparison is completed is stored in D. The comparison will start from the
0th bit in the next scan period and the matrix search start flag will turn “On” (M1090 = 1). When D exceeds the
range, the pointer error flag will turn “On” (M1092 = 1).
8. The matrix operation will need a 16-bit register to designate a point among the 16n points in the matrix for the
operation. The register is the Pointer (Pr) of the matrix, designated by the user in the instruction. The vaild
range of Pr is 0 ~ 16n -1, corresponding to b0 ~ b16n-1 in the matrix. Please avoid changing the Pr value
during the operation in case the comparing and searching will not ne correct. If the Pr value exceeds its range,
M1092 will be On and the instruction will not be executed.
9. When M1089 and M1091 take place at the same time, both flags will be “1” at the same time.
Program Example:
1. When X0 goes from Off to On, the matrix search start falg M1090 = 0. The searching will start from the bit
marked with “*” (current Pr value +1) for bits of different status (M1088 = 0).
2. Set the Pr value D20 = 2. When X0 goes from Off to On for 4 times, we can obtain the 4 execution results n, o,
p, q.
n D20 = 5, M1091 = 1, M1089 = 0.
o D20 = 45, M1091 = 1, M1089 = 0.

p D20 = 47, M1091 = 0, M1089 = 1.

q D20 = 1, M1091 = 1, M1089 = 0.
X0
MCMPP D0 D10 K3 D20
2
b0 D20
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 pointer
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b47
MCMP
b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b47
Remarks:
Flags explanations:
Flags Function
Matrix comparison flag. Comparing between equivalent values (M1088 = 1) or different
M1088
values (M1088 = 0).
M1089 Matrix search end flag. When the comparison reaches the last bit, M1089 = 1.
M1090 Matrix search start flag. Comparing from bit 0 (M1090 = 1).
Matrix bit search flag. When the comparison is completed, the comparison will stop
M1091
immediately (M1091=1).
M1092 Matrix pointer error flag. When the pointer Pr exceeds its range, M1092 = 1.


Controllers
186 MBRD P Read Matrix Bit ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MBRD, MBRDP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * *
n * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Matrix source device n: Array length D: Pointer (Pr), for storing the value of target location
Explanations:
6. When this instruction is executed, it first determines if the matrix pointer clear flag (M1094) is “On”. If it is “On”,
pointer D is cleared as 0. The instruction then reads the On/Off status from the 0th bit of S to the matrix
rotation/displacement/output carry flag (M1095). Whenever finishing reading 1 bit, the instruction determines
whether the matrix pointer increasing flag (M1093) is “On”. If it is “On”, the value of pointer D will plus 1. When
the reading is processed to the last bit, the matrix search end flag (M1089) will turn “On” and pointer D record
the No. of read bits.
7. The Pointer (Pr) of the matrix is designated by the user in the instruction. The vaild range of Pr is 0 ~ 16n -1,
corresponding to b0 ~ b16n-1 in the matrix. If the Pr value exceeds its range, M1092 will be On and the instruction
will not be executed.
Program Example:
1. When X0 goes from Off to On, M1094 will be set to “0” and M1093 to “1”. Therefore, the Pr will plus 1 after
every reading.
2. Set the Pr value D20 = 45. When X0 goes from Off to On for 3 times, we can obtain the 3 execution results n,
o, p.
n D20 = 46, M1095 = 0, M1089 = 0.
o D20 = 47, M1095 = 1, M1089 = 0.
p D20 = 47, M1095 = 1, M1089 = 1.
X0
MBRDP D0 K3 D20

b0
S 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b 47
45 Pointer
D20
Remarks:
Flag explanations:
Flags Function
M1093 Matrix pointer increasing flag. Adding 1 to the current value of the Pr.
M1094 Matrix pointer clear flag. Clearing the current value of the Pr to 0.
M1095 Matrix rotation/displacement/output carry flag.


Controllers
187 MBWR P Write Matrix Bit ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MBWR, MBWRP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * *
n * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Matrix source device n: Array length D: Pointer (Pr), for storing the value of target location
Explanations:
6. When this instruction is executed, if first determines if the matrix pointer clear flag (M1094) is “On”, If it is “On”,
pointer D is cleared as 0. The instruction then writes the value in the matrix displacement/input complement
flag (M1096) into the location starting from the 0th bit of S. Whenever finishing writing 1 bit, the instruction
determines whether the matrix pointer increasing flag (M1093) is “On”. If it is “On”, the value of pointer D will
plus 1. When the writing is processed to the last bit, the matrix search end flag (M1089) will turn “On” and
pointer D records the No. of written bits. If D exceeds its range, M1092 will be On.
7. The Pointer (Pr) of the matrix is designated by the user in the instruction. The vaild range of Pr is 0 ~ 16n -1,
corresponding to b0 ~ b16n-1 in the matrix. If the Pr value exceeds its range, M1092 will be On and the instruction
will not be executed.
Program Example:
1. When X0 goes from Off to On, M1094 will be set to “0” and M1093 to “1”. Therefore, the Pr will plus 1 after
every writing.
2. Set the Pr value D20 = 45 and M1096 = 1. When X0 goes from Off to On for 1 time, we can obtain the execution
results: D20 = 45, M1096 = 1, M1089 = 0.
X0
MBWRP D0 K3 D20

b0
Before 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
Execution 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b47 M1096
1 (Matrix displacement/input complement flag)
45 D20 pointer
After 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
Execution
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b47
45 D20 pointer
Remarks:
Flag explanations:
Flags Function
M1093 Matrix pointer increasing flag. Adding 1 to the current value of the Pr.
M1094 Matrix pointer clear flag. Clearing the current value of the Pr to 0.
M1096 Matrix displacement/input complement flag.


Controllers
188 MBS P Matrix Bit Displacement ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MBS, MBSP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
6. This instruction performs left-right displacement on the matrix bits in S according to array length n. M1097
determines the left (M1097 = 0) or right (M1097 = 1) displacement of matrix bits. The empty bits derived from
every displacement of 1 bit (when left displacement: b0; when right displacement: b16n-1) is filled by the status of
the complement flag (M1096). The spare bits (when left displacement: b16n-1; when right displacement: b0) are
sent to the carry flag (M1095). The result is stored in D.
7. The pulse execution instruction MBSP is generally adopted.
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, M1097 = Off, indicating a left matrix displacement is performed. Set M1096 = 0 and the 16-bit
registers D0 ~ D2 will perform a left matrix displacement and the result will be stored in the matrix of the 16-bit
registers D20 ~ D22. The carry flag M1095 will be “1”.
X0
RST M1097
MBSP D0 D20 K3
0 M1096
Complement
b 15 b0 flag
Before
execution
S 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
M1095 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Carry flag
MBS
M1097=0 D 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
After the execution of
left matrix displacement 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
M1095 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Carry flag

Program Example 2:
When X1 = On, M1097 = On, indicating a right matrix displacement is performed. Set M1096 = 1 and the 16-bit
registers D0 ~ D2 will perform a right matrix displacement and the result will be stored in the matrix of the 16-bit
registers D20 ~ D22. The carry flag M1095 will be “0”.
X1
M1097
MBSP D0 D20 K3
b15 b0
Before
execution
S 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 M1095
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Carry flag
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 M1096 MBS
Complement
flage
M1097=1 D 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 M1095
After the execution of 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Carry flag
right matrix displacement
1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Explanations:
Flag explanations:
Flags Function
M1096 Matrix displacement/input complement flag.
M1097 Matrix rotation/displacement direction flag.


Controllers
189 MBR P Matrix Bit Rotation ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MBR, MBRP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * *
D * * * * * *
n * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
6. This instruction performs left-right rotation on the matrix bits in S according to array length n. M1097
determines the left (M1097 = 0) or right (M1097 = 1) rotation of matrix bits. The empty bits derived from every
rotation of 1 bit (when left rotation: b0; when right rotation: b16n-1) is filled by rotation bits (when left rotation:
b16n-1; when right rotation: b0). The result is stored in D. Rotation bits not only fill the empty bits but also send
the status of bits to the carry flag M1095.
7. The pulse execution instruction MBRP is generally adopted.
Program Example 1:
When X0 = On, M1097 = Off, indicating a left matrix rotation is performed. The 16-bit registers D0 ~ D2 will perform a
left matrix rotation and the result will be stored in the matrix of the 16-bit registers D20 ~ D22. The carry flag M1095
will be “1”.
X0
RST M1097
MBRP D0 D20 K3
b15 b0
Before 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Execution 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
M1095 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
MBR
M1097=0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
After left rotation
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
M1095 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Program Example 2:
When X1 = On, M1097 = On, indicating a right matrix rotation is performed. The 16-bit registers D0 ~ D2 will perform
a right matrix rotation and the result will be stored in the matrix of the 16-bit registers D20 ~ D22. The carry flag
M1095 will be “0”.
X1
M1097
MBRP D0 D20 K3
b15 b0
Before 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 M1095
Execution
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
MBR
M1097=0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 M1095
After right 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
rotation 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Remarks:
Flag explanations:
Flags Function
M1097 Matrix rotation/displacement direction flag.


Controllers
190 MBC P Matrix Bit Status Counting ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F MBC, MBCP: 7 steps
S * * * * * * *
n * * *
D * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Matrix source device n: Array length D: Counting result
Explanations:
6. This instruction counts the number of bits which are “1” or “0” in S by array length n. The result is stored in D.
7. The instruction counts the number of bits which are “1” when M1098 = 1 and counts the number of bits which
are “0” when M1098 = 0. When the operation result is “0”, M1099 = 1.
Program Example:
When X10 = On, in the matrix of D0 ~ D2, when M1098 = 1, the instruction counts the total number of bits which are
“1” and store the number in D10. When M1098 = 0, the instruction counts the total number of bits which are “0” and
store the number in D10.
X10
MBC D0 K3 D10
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
12 M1098=0
36 M1098=1
Remarks:
Flag explanations:
Flags Function
M1098 Counting the number of bits which are “1” or “0”
M1099 On when the counting result is “0”.


Controllers
191 D PPMR 2-Axis Relative Point to Point Motion ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DPPMR: 17 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Number of output pulses of X axis S2: Number of output pulses of Y axis S: Max. point to point output
frequency D: Pulse output device
Explanations:
1. Flags: M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335. See remarks for more details.
2. This instruction only supports EH2/SV series MPU, not EH series. In terms of pulse output methods, this
instructin only supports “pulse + direction” mode.
3. S1 and S2 are the designated (relative designation) number of output pulses in X axis (Y0 or Y4) and Y axis (Y2
or Y6). The range of the number is -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647 (+/- represents the forward/backward
direction). When in forward direction, the pulse present value registers CH0 (D1337 high word, D1336 low word),
CH1 (D1339 high word, D1338 low word), CH2 (D1376 high word, D1375 low word) and CH3 (D1378 high word,
D1377 low word) will increase. When in backward direction, the present value will decrease.
4. D can designate Y0 and Y4.
When Y0 is designated:
Y0 refers to 1st group X-axis pulse output device.
Y1 refers to 1st group X-axis direction signal.
Y2 refers to 1st group Y-axis pulse output device.
Y3 refers to 1st group Y-axis direction signal.
Y4 refers to 2nd group X-axis pulse output device.
Y5 refers to 2nd group X-axis direction signal.
Y6 refers to 2nd group Y-axis pulse output device.
Y7 refers to 2nd group Y-axis direction signal.
When direction signal outputs, Off will not occur immediately after the pulse output is over. Direction signal will
turn Off when the drive contact is Off.
5. D1340 (D1379) refers to the settings of the start/end frequencies of the 1st/2nd 2-axis motion. D1343 (D1381)
refers to the time of the first acceleration segment and last deceleration segment of the 1st/2nd 2-axis motion.
The time shall be longer than 10ms. If the time is shorter than 10ms or longer than 10,000ms, the output will be
operated at 10ms. Default setting = 100ms.
6. If the maximum output frequency setting is less than 10Hz, the output will be operated at 10Hz. If the setting is
more than 200KHz, the output will be operated at 200KHz.

7. When the 2-axis synchronous motion instruction is enabled, the start frequency and acceleration/deceleration
time in Y axis will be same as the settings in X axis.
8. The number of output pulses for the 2-axis motion shall not be less than 59; otherwise the line drawn will not be
straight enough.
9. There is no limitation on the number of times using the instruction. However, assume CH1 or CH2 output is in
use, the 1st group X/Y axis will not be able to output. If CH3 or CH4 output is in use, the 2nd group X/Y axis will
not be able to output.
Program Example:
1. Draw a rhombus as the figure below.
(0, 0)
X
(-2700 0,-27 000) (270 00,-27 000)
(0, -5 5000)
2. Steps:
a) Set the four coordinates (0,0), (-27000, -27000), (0, -55000), (27000, -27000) (as the figure above). Calculate the
relative coordinates of the four points and obtain (-27000, -27000), (27000, -28000), (27000, 27000), and (-27000,
27000). Place them in the 32-bit (D200, D202), (D204, D206), (D208, D210), (D212, D214).
b) Write program codes as follows.
c) PLC RUN. Set M0 as On and start the 2-axis line drawing.
= D0 K1 DPPMR D202 K100000 Y0
= D0 K2 DPPMR D206 K100000 Y0
DPPMR D210 K100000 Y0
= D0 K4 DPPMR D214 K100000 Y0
M0
M1029
K1 D0
M0 M1029
D0
END
3. Motion explanation:
When PLC RUN and M0 = On, PLC will start the first point-to-point motion by 100KHz. D0 will plus 1 whenever a
point-to-point motion is completed and the second point-to-point motion will start to execute automatically. The
same motion will keep executing until the fourth point-to-point motion is completed.

Remarks:
1. Flag explanations:
M1029： On when the 1st group 2-axis pulse output is completed.
M1036： On when the 2nd group 2-axis pulse output is completed.
M1334： On when the 1st group 2-axis pulse output is forbidden.
M1336： 1st group 2-axis pulse output indication flag
M1520： On when the 2nd group 2-axis pulse output is forbidden.
M1522： 2nd group 2-axis pulse output indication flag
2. Special register explanations:
D1336, D1337 : Pulse present value register for Y0 output of the 1st group X-axis motion. The present value
increases or decreases following the rotation direction. (D1337 high word; D1336 low word)
D1338, D1339 : Pulse present value register for Y2 output of the 1st group Y-axis motion. The present value
D1340 : Frequency settings of the first acceleration and last deceleration segment for the Y0 output
of the 1st group X-axis motion and Y2 of the Y-axis motion for API 191 DPPMR and API 192
DPPMA.
D1343 : Time settings of the first acceleration and last deceleration segment for the Y0 output of the
1st group X-axis motion and Y2 of the Y-axis motion for API 191 DPPMR and API 192
DPPMA.
D1375, D1376 : Pulse present value register for Y4 output of the 2nd group X-axis motion. The present value
D1377, D1378 : Pulse present value register for Y6 output of the 2nd group Y-axis motion. The present value
D1379 : Frequency settings of the first acceleration and last deceleration segment for the Y4 output
of the 2nd group X-axis motion and Y6 of the Y-axis motion for API 191 DPPMR and API 192
DPPMA.
D1381 : Time settings of the first acceleration and last deceleration segment for the Y4 output of the
2nd group X-axis motion and Y6 of the Y-axis motion for API 191 DPPMR and API 192
DPPMA.


Controllers
192 D PPMA 2-Axis Absolute Point to Point Motion ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DPPMA: 17 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
S * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Number of output pulses of X axis S2: Number of output pulses of Y axis S: Max. point to point output
frequency D: Pulse output device
Explanations:
1. Flags: M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335. See remarks of API 191 DPPMR for more details.
3. S1 and S2 are the designated (absolute designation) number of output pulses in X axis (Y0 or Y4) and Y axis (Y2
or Y6). The range of the number is -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647 (+/- represents the forward/backward
5. D1340 (D1379) refers to the settings of the start/end frequencies of the 1st/2nd 2-axis motion. D1343 (D1381)
refers to the time of the first acceleration segment and last deceleration segment of the 1st/2nd 2-axis motion. The
time shall be longer than 10ms. If the time is shorter than 10ms or longer than 10,000ms, the output will be
operated at 10ms. Default setting = 100ms.
6. If the maximum output frequency setting is less than 10Hz, the output will be operated at 10Hz. If the setting is
more than 200KHz, the output will be operated at 200KHz.

7. When the 2-axis synchronous motion instruction is enabled, the start frequency and acceleration/deceleration
time in Y axis will be same as the settings in X axis.
8. The number of output pulses for the 2-axis motion shall not be the values within 1 ~ 59; otherwise the line drawn
will not be straight enough.
9. There is no limitation on the number of times using the instruction. However, assume CH1 or CH2 output is in use,
the 1st group X/Y axis will not be able to output. If CH3 or CH4 output is in use, the 2nd group X/Y axis will not be
able to output.
Program Example:
1. Draw a rhombus as the figure below.
(0, 0)
X
(-2700 0,-27 000) (270 00,-27 000)
(0, -5 5000)
2. Steps:
a) Set the four coordinates (0,0), (-27000, -27000), (0, -55000), (27000, -27000) (as the figure above). Place them in
the 32-bit (D200, D202), (D204, D206), (D208, D210), (D212, D214).
b) Write program codes as follows.
c) PLC RUN. Set M0 as On and start the 2-axis line drawing.
= D0 K1 DPPMA D202 K100000 Y0
= D0 K2 DPPMA D206 K100000 Y0
DPPMA D210 K100000 Y0
= D0 K4 DPPMA D214 K100000 Y0
M0
M1029
D1336 D1339
K1 D0
M0 M1029
D0
END
When PLC RUN and M0 = On, PLC will start the first point-to-point motion by 100KHz. D0 will plus 1 whenever a
point-to-point motion is completed and the second point-to-point motion will start to execute automatically. The
same motion will keep executing until the fourth point-to-point motion is completed.


Controllers
2-Axis Relative Position Arc
193 D CIMR ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
Interpolation
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DCIMR: 17 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
S *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Number of output pulses of X axis S2: Number of output pulses of Y axis S: Parameter setting D: Pulse
output device
Explanations:
3. S1 and S2 are the designated (relative designation) number of output pulses in X axis (Y0 or Y4) and Y axis (Y2 or
Y6). The range of the number is -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647 (+/- represents the forward/backward
4. The lower 16 bits of S (settings of direction and resolution): K0 refers to clockwise 10-segment (average
resolution) output; K2 refers to clockwise 20-segment (higher resolution) output and a 90° arc can be drawn (see
figure 1 and 2). K1 refers to counterclockwise 10-segment (average resolution) output; K3 refers to
counterclockwise 20-segment (higher resolution) output and a 90° arc can be drawn (see figure 3 and 4).
5. The higher 16 bits of S (settings of motion time): K1 refers to 0.1 second. The setting range for average resolution
is K1 ~ K100 (0.1 sec. ~ 10 secs.), for higher resolution is K2 ~ K200 (0.2 sec. ~ 20 secs.) This instruction is
restricted by the maximum pulse output frequency; therefore when the set time goes faster than the actual output
time, the set time will be automatically modified.
Y Y
(S1, S 2) (S 1, S2)
10 se gment s
20 se gment s
X X
(0, 0) (0, 0)
10 se gment s 20 se gment s
F igur e 1 F igur e 2

Y Y
(S 1, S 2) (S 1, S 2)
20 se gment s
10 se gment s
X X
(0, 0) (0, 0)

7. Draw four 90° arcs.
8. When the direction signal is On, the direction is positive. When the direction signal is Off, the direction is negative.
When S is set as K0, K2, the arcs will be clockwise (see figure 5). When S is set as K1, K3, the arcs will be
counterclockwise (see figure 6).
Y Y
Qu adrant II Qu adrant I Qu adrant I
Qu adrant II
X X
Qu adrant II I Qu adrant IV
Qu adrant IV Qu adrant II I
9. When the 2-axis motion is being executed in 10 segments (of average resolution), the operation time of the
instruction when the instruction is first enabled is approximately 5ms. The number of output pulses cannot be less
than 100 and more than 1,000,000; otherwise, the instruction cannot be enabled.
10. When the 2-axis motion is being executed in 20 segments (of high resolution), the operation time of the
instruction when the instruction is first enabled is approximately 10ms. The number of output pulses cannot be
less than 1,000 and more than 10,000,000; otherwise, the instruction cannot be enabled.

11. If you wish the number of pulses in 10-segment or 20-segment motion to be off the range, you may adjust the
gear ratio of the servo for obtaining your desired number.
12. Every time when the instruction is executed, only one 90° arc can be drawn. It is not necessary that the arc has to
be a precise arc, i.e. the numbers of output pulses in X and Y axes can be different.
13. There are no settings of start frequency and acceleration/deceleration time.
able to output.
15. The settings of direction and resolution in the lower 16 bits of S can only be K0 ~ K3.
16. The settings of motion time in the high 16 bits of S can be slower than the the fastest suggested time but shall not
be faster than the fastest suggested time.
17. The fastest suggested time for the arc interpolation:
Segments Max. target position (pulse) Fastest suggested set time (unit:100ms)
100 ~ 10,000 1
Average 10,001 ~ 19,999 2

resolution : :
Less than 1,000,000 Less than 100
1,000 ~ 20,000 2
Higher 20,000 ~ 29,999 3

resolution : :
Program Example 1:
1. Draw an ellipse as the figure below.
( 16 00 ,22 00 )
X
( 0,0 ) ( 32 00 ,0)
(1 6 00 ,-2 20 0)
2. Steps:
a) Set the four coordinates (0,0), (1600, 2200), (3200, 0), (1600, -2200) (as the figure above). Calculate the relative
coordinates of the four points and obtain (1600, 2200), (1600, -2200), (-1600, -2200), and (-1600, 2200). Place
them in the 32-bit (D200, D202), (D204, D206), (D208, D210), (D212, D214).
b) Select “draw clockwise arc” and “average resolution” (S = K0).
c) Write program codes as follows.
d) PLC RUN. Set M0 as On and start the drawing of the ellipse.

= D0 K1 DCIMR D202 K0 Y0
DCIMR D210 K0 Y0
M0
M1029
K1 D0
M0 M1029
D0
END
When PLC RUN and M0 = On, PLC will start the drawing of the first segment of the arc. D0 will plus 1 whenever a
segment of arc is completed and the second segment of the arc will start to execute automatically. The same
motion will keep executing until the fourth segment of arc is completed.
Program Example 2:
1. Draw a tilted ellipse as the figure below.
(2 60 00 ,2 60 00 )
(3 40 00 ,1 80 00 )
X
(0 ,0)
(8 00 0,- 80 00 )
2. Steps:
a) Find the max. and min. coordinates on X and Y axes (0,0), (26000,26000), (34000,18000), (8000,-8000) (as the
figure above). Calculate the relative coordinates of the four points and obtain (26000,26000)、(8000,-8000)、
(-26000,-26000), (-8000,8000). Place them respectively in the 32-bit (D200,D202), (D204,D206), (D208,D210)
and (D212,D214).
c) Select DCIMR instruction for drawing arc and write program codes as follows.

DCIMR D210 K0 Y0
M0
M1029
K1 D0
M0 M1029
D0
END


Controllers
2-Axis Absolute Position Arc
194 D CIMA ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
Interpolation
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DCIMA: 17 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
S *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Number of output pulses of X axis S2: Number of output pulses of Y axis S: Parameter setting D: Pulse
output device
Explanations:
3. S1 and S2 are the designated (absolute designation) number of output pulses in X axis (Y0 or Y4) and Y axis (Y2
or Y6). The range of the number is -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647. When S1 and S2 are larger than pulse
present value registers CH0 (D1337 high word, D1336 low word), CH1 (D1339 high word, D1338 low word), CH2
(D1376 high word, D1375 low word), and CH3 (D1378 high word, D1377 low word), the output direction will be
positive and direction signals Y1, Y3, Y5, Y7 will be On. When S1 and S2 are less than pulse present value
registers, the output direction will be negative and direction signals Y1, Y3, Y5, Y7 will be Off.
4. The lower 16 bits of S (settings of direction and resolution): K0 refers to clockwise 10-segment (average
resolution) output; K2 refers to clockwise 20-segment (higher resolution) output and a 90° arc can be drawn (see
figure 1 and 2). K1 refers to counterclockwise 10-segment (average resolution) output; K3 refers to
counterclockwise 20-segment (higher resolution) output and a 90° arc can be drawn (see figure 3 and 4).
5. The higher 16 bits of S (settings of motion time): K0 refers to 0.1 second. The setting range for average resolution
is K1 ~ K100 (0.1 sec. ~ 10 secs.), for higher resolution is K2 ~ K200 (0.2 sec. ~ 20 secs.) This instruction is
restricted by the maximum pulse output frequency; therefore when the set time goes faster than the actual output
time, the set time will be automatically modified.
Y Y
(S 1, S 2) (S 1, S 2)
10 se gment s
20 se gment s
X X
(0, 0) (0, 0)

Y Y
(S 1, S 2) (S 1, S 2)
20 se gment s
10 se gment s
X X
(0, 0) (0, 0)

7. Draw four 90° arcs.
8. When the direction signal is On, the direction is positive. When the direction signal is Off, the direction is negative.
When S is set as K0, K2, the arcs will be clockwise (see figure 5). When S is set as K1, K3, the arcs will be
counterclockwise (see figure 6).
Y Y
Qu adrant II Qu adrant I Qu adrant I
Qu adrant II
X X
Qu adrant II I Qu adrant IV
Qu adrant IV Qu adrant II I
9. When the 2-axis motion is being executed in 10 segments (of average resolution), the operation time of the
instruction when the instruction is first enabled is approximately 5ms. The number of output pulses cannot be less
than 100 and more than 1,000,000; otherwise, the instruction cannot be enabled.
10. When the 2-axis motion is being executed in 20 segments (of high resolution), the operation time of the
instruction when the instruction is first enabled is approximately 10ms. The number of output pulses cannot be
less than 1,000 and more than 10,000,000; otherwise, the instruction cannot be enabled.

11. If you wish the number of pulses in 10-segment or 20-segment motion to be off the range, you may adjust the
gear ratio of the servo for obtaining your desired number.
12. Every time when the instruction is executed, only one 90° arc can be drawn. It is not necessary that the arc has to
be a precise arc, i.e. the numbers of output pulses in X and Y axes can be different.
13. There are no settings of start frequency and acceleration/deceleration time.
able to output.
15. The settings of direction and resolution in the lower 16 bits of S can only be K0 ~ K3.
16. The settings of motion time in the high 16 bits of S can be slower than the the fastest suggested time but shall not
be faster than the fastest suggested time.
17. The fastest suggested time for the arc interpolation:
Segments Max. target position (pulse) Fastest suggested set time (unit:100ms)
100 ~ 10,000 1
Average 10,001 ~ 19,999 2

resolution : :
1,000 ~ 20,000 2
Higher 20,000 ~ 29,999 3

resolution : :
Program Example 1:
1. Draw an ellipse as the figure below.
( 16 00 0,2 20 00 )
X
( 0,0 ) ( 32 00 0,0 )
(1 6 00 0,- 22 00 0)
2. Steps:
a) Set the four coordinates (0,0), (16000, 22000), (32000, 0), (16000, -22000) (as the figure above). Place them in
the 32-bit (D200, D202), (D204, D206), (D208, D210), (D212, D214).
c) Select DCIMA instruction for drawing arc and write program codes as follows.

= D0 K1 DCIMA D202 K0 Y0
DCIMA D210 K0 Y0
M0
M1029
D1336 D1339
K1 D0
M0 M1029
D0
END
3. Motion explanation: ：
Program Example 2:
1. Draw a tilted ellipse as the figure below.
(2 60 00 ,2 60 00 )
(3 40 00 ,1 80 00 )
X
(0 ,0)
(8 00 0,- 80 00 )
2. Steps:
a) Find the max. and min. coordinates on X and Y axes (0,0), (26000,26000), (34000,18000), (8000,-8000) (as the
figure above). Place them respectively in the 32-bit (D200,D202), (D204,D206), (D208,D210) and (D212,D214).
c) Select DCIMA instruction for drawing arc and write program codes as follows.

DCIMA D210 K0 Y0
M0
M1029
D1336 D1339
K1 D0
M0 M1029
D0
END


Controllers
195 D PTPO Single-Axis Pulse Output by Table ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DPTPO: 13 steps
S1 *
S2 *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Source start device S2: Number of segments D: Pulse output device
Explanations:
2. This instruction only supports EH2/SV series MPU, not EH series.
3. According to the value of S2 + 0, every segment consecutively occupy four register D. (S1 + 0) refers to output
frequency. (S1 + 2) refers to the number of output pulses.
4. When the output frequency of S1 is less than 1, PLC will automatically modify it as 1. When the value is larger
than 200,000KHz, PLC will automatically modify it as 200,000KHz.
5. S2 + 0: number of segments (range: 1 ~ 60). S2 + 1: number of segments being executed. Whenever the program
scans to this instruction, the instruction will automatically update the segment No. that is currently being
executed.
6. D can only designate output devices Y0, Y2, Y4 and Y6 and can only perform pulse output control. For the pin for
direction control, the user has to compile other programs to control.
7. This instruction does not offer acceleration and deceleration functions. Therefore, when the instruction is disabled,
the output pulses will stop immediately.
8. In every program scan, each channel can only be executed by one instruction. However, there is no limitation on
the number of times using this instruction.
9. When the instruction is being executed, the user is not allowed to update the frequency or number of the
segments. Changes made will not be able to make changes in the actual output.
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On, the output will be operated according to the set frequency and number of pulses in every
segment.
2. Format of the table:
S2 = D300, number of segments S1 = D0, frequency (S1 + 0) S1 = D0, number of output pulses
(D300 = K60) (S1 + 2)
K1 (1st segment) D1, D0 D3, D2
nd
K2 (2 segment) D5, D4 D7, D6
: : :
: : :
K60 (60th segment) D237, D236 D239, D238

3. Monitor the segment No. that is currently being executed in register D301.
X0
D0 D300
END
4. The pulse output curve:
Frequency (Hz)
(D237,D236)
....
(D239,D238)
(D5,D4)
....
(D7,D6)
(D1,D0)
(D3,D2)
Time (S)
t1 t2 t .... t 60
Remarks:
M1029： On when CH0 (Y0) pulse output is completed.
M1334： When On, CH0 (Y0) pulse output will be forbidden.
M1336： CH0 (Y0) pulse output indication flag
D1336, D1337： Pulse present value register of CH0 (Y0) (D1337 high word, D1336 low word)


Controllers
196 HST P High Speed Timer ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F HST, HSTP: 3 steps
S * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S: Condition to stop the startup of high speed timer
Explanations:
1. Range of S: S = K0 (H0), K1 (H1).
2. Flag: M1015
3. When S = 1, the high speed timer will be enabled and M1015 = On. The high speed timer starts to time and
record the present value in D1015 (min. unit: 100us).
4. Timing range of D1015: K0 ~ K32,767. When the timing reaches K32,767, the next timing will restart from 0.
5. When S = 0, the high speed timer will be disabled and M1015 = Off. D1015 will stop the timing immediately.
6. When S is neither 1 nor 0, HST instruction will not be executed.
Program Example :
1. When X10 = On, M1015 will be On. The high speed timer will start to time and record the present value in
D1015.
2. When X10 = Off, M1015 will be Off. The high speed timer will be shut down.
X10
HST K1
X10
HST K0
Remarks:
M1015: high speed timer start-up flag
D1015: high speed timer
2. EH/EH2/SV series MPU do not use this instruction and use special M and special D directly for the timer.
a) Special M and special D are only applicable when PLC RUN.
b) When M1015 = On and PLC scans to END instruction, the high speed timer D1015 will be enabled. The
minimum timing unit of D1015: 100us.
c) Timing range of D1015: K0 ~ K32,767. When the timing reaches K32,767, the next timing will restart from
K0.
d) When M1015 = Off, D1015 will stop the timing when encountering END or HST instruction.
3. SA/SX/SC series MPU do not use this instruction and use special M and special D directly for the timer.
a) Special M and special D are applicable when PLC RUN or STOP.

b) When M1015 = On, the high speed timer D1015 will be enabled. The minimum timing unit of D1015:
100us.
c) Timing range of D1015: K0 ~ K32,767. When the timing reaches K32,767, the next timing will restart from
K0.
d) When M1015 = Off, D1015 will stop the timing immediately.


Controllers
197 D CLLM Close Loop Position Control ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F DCLLM: 17 steps
S1 * *
S2 * * *
S3 * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Feedback source device S2: Target number of feedbacks S3: Target frequency of output
D: Pulse output device
Explanations:
2. This instruction only supports EH2/SV series MPU, not EH series.
3. The corresponding interruption of S1:
Source device X0 X1 X2 X3 C241 ~ C254
Corresponding outout Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6 Y0 Y2 Y4 Y6
Interruption No. I00 I10 I20 I30 I010 I020 I030 I040
= 1: rising-edige trigger; = 0: falling-edge trigger
a) When S1 designates X as the input points and the pulse output reaches the set target number of feedbacks
in S2, the output will continue to operate by the frequency of the last segment until the interruption of X input
points occurs.
b) When S1 designates a high speed counter and the pulse output reaches the set target number of feedbacks
in S2, the output will continue to operate by the frequency of the last segment until the feedback pulses
reaches the target number.
c) S1 can be a high speed counter C or an external interruption X. If S1 is C, DCNT instruction should be first
executed to enable the high-speed counting function and EI and I0x0 interruption service program to enable
the high-speed interruption. If S1 is X, EI instruction and I0x0 interruption service program should be
executed to enable the external interruption function.
4. The range of S2: -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647 (+/- represents the forward/backward direction). When in
forward direction, the pulse present value registers CH0 (D1337 high word, D1336 low word), CH1 (D1339 high
word, D1338 low word), CH2 (D1376 high word, D1375 low word) and CH3 (D1378 high word, D1377 low word)
will increase. When in backward direction, the present value will decrease.
5. If S3 is lower than 10Hz, the output will operate at 10Hz; if S3 is higher than 200KHz, the output will operate at
200KHz.
6. D can only designate Y0, Y2, Y4 and Y6 and the direction signals repectively are Y1, Y3, Y5 and Y7. When
there is a direction signal output, the direction signal will not be Off immediately after the pulse output is
completed. The direction signal will be Off only when the drive contact is Off.

7. D1340, D1352, D1379 and D1380 are the settings of start/end frequencies of CH0 ~ CH3. The minimun
frequency is 10Hz and default is 200Hz.
8. D1343, D1353, D1381 and D1382 are the settings of the time of the first segment and the last deceleration
segment of CH0 ~ CH3. The acceleration/deceleration time cannot be shorter than 10ms. The outptu will be
operated in 10ms if the time set is shorter than 10ms or longer than 10,000ms. The dafault setting is 100ms.
9. D1198, D1199, D1478 and D1479 are the output/input ratio of the close loop control in CH0 ~ CH3. K1 refers to
1 output pulse out of the 100 target feedback input pulses; K200 refers to 200 output pulses out of the 100
target feedback input pulses. D1198, D1199, D1478 and D1479 are the numerators of the ratio (range: K1 ~
K10,000) and the denominator is fixed as K100 (the user does not have to enter a denominator).
10. M1305, M1306, M1532 and M1533 are the direction signal flags for CH0 ~ CH3. When S2 is a positive value,
the output will be in forward direction and the flag will be Off. When S2 is a negative value, the output will be in
backward direction and the flag will be On.
Close Loop Explanations:

1. Function: Immediately stop the high-speed pulse output according to the number of feedback pulses or external
interruption signals.
2. The execution:
Frequency
C high speed counting = target number of feedbacks

Target frequency or
occurrence of external interruption
Start/end frequency
Time
Number
Acceleration High speed time Deceleration time

time Idling time
Number of output pulses =

target number of feedbacks x percentage value/100
3. How to adjust the time for the completion of the positioning:

a) The time for the completion of the positioning refers to the time for “acceleration + high speed +
deceleration + idling” (see the figure above). For example, you can increase or decrease the entire number
of output pulses by making adjustment on the percentage value and further increase or decrease the time
required for the positioning.
b) Among the four segments of time, only the idling time cannot be adjusted directly by the user. However, you
can determine if the execution result is good or bad by the length of the idling time. In theory, a bit of idling
left is the best result for a positioning.
c) Owing to the close loop operation, the length of idling time will not be the same in every execution.
Therefore, when the content in the special D for displaying the actial number of output pulses is smaller or
larger than the calculated number of output pulses (taget number of feedbacks x percentage value/100),
you can improve the situation by adjusting the percentage value, acceleration/decelartion time or target
frequency.

Program Example:
1. Assume we adopt X0 as the external interruption, together with I001 (rising-edge trigger) interruption program;
target number of feedbacks = 50,000; target frequency = 10KHz; Y0, Y1 (CH0) as output pulses; start/end
frequency (D1340) = 200Hz; acceleration time (D1343) = 300ms; deceleration time (D1348) = 600ms;
percentage value (D1198) = 100; current number of output pulses (D1336, D1337) = 0.
2. Write the program codes as follows:
M1002
MOV K100 D1198
MOV K300 D1343
MOV K600 D1348
SET M1534
DMOV K0 D1336
RST C251
EI
M0
DCNT C251 K100000
DCLLM X0 K50000 K100000 Y0
FEND
M1000
INC D0
I 010
IRET
END
3. Assume the first execution result as:
Frequency
X0 Off --> On
100KHz Y0 stops output
D1340 Time
Number
D1343 D1348
Estimated number of output pulses: 50,000
Actual number of output pulses (D1336, D1337) = K49,200
4. Observe the result of the first execution:

a) The actual output number 49,200 – estimated output number 50,000 = -800 (a negative value). A negative
value indicates that the entire execution finishes earlier and has not completed yet.
b) Try to shorten the acceleration time (D1343) into 250ms and deceleration time (D1348) into 550ms.

5. Obtain the result of the second execution:
Frequency
X0 Off --> On
D1340 Time
Number
D1343 D1348
6. Observe the result of the second execution:

a) The actual output number 50,020 – estimated output number 50,000 = 20
b) 20 x (1/200Hz) = 100ms (idling time)
c) 100ms is an appropriate value. Therefore, set the acceleration time as 250ms and deceleration time as
550ms to complete the design.
Program Example 2:
1. Assume the feedback of the encoder is an A/B phase input and we adopt C251 timing (we suggust you clear it
to 0 before the execution); target number of feedbacks = 50,000; target output frequency = 100KHz; Y0, Y1
(CH0) as output pulses; start/end frequency (D1340) = 200Hz; acceleration time (D1343) = 300ms; deceleration
time (D1348) = 600ms; precentage value (D1198) = 100; current number of output pulses (D1336, D1337) = 0.
2. Write the program codes as follows:
M1002
MOV K100 D1198
MOV K300 D1343
MOV K600 D1348
SET M1534
DMOV K0 D1336
RST C251
EI
M0
DCNT C251 K100000
DCLLM C251 K50000 K100000 Y0
FEND
M1000
I 010 INC D0
IRET
END

3. Assume the first execution result as:
Frequency
C251 =K50000
D1340 Time
Number
D1343 D1348 3s
4. Observe the result of the first execution:

b) 600 x (1/200Hz) = 3s (idling time)
c) 3 seconds are too long. Therefore, increase the percentage value (D1198) to K101.
5. Obatin the result of the second execution:
Frequency
C251 =K50000
D1340 Time
Number
D1343 D1348 300ms

6. Observe the result of the second execution:

b) 60 x (1/200Hz) = 300ms (idling time)
c) 300ms is an appropriate value. Therefore, set the percentage value (D1198) as K101 to complete the
design.
Remarks:
M1010： When On, CH0, CH1, CH2 and CH3 will output pulses when encountering END instruction. Off
when the output starts.
M1029： On when CH0 pulse output is completed.
M1334： When On, CH0 pulse output will be forbidden.


M1336： CH0 pulse output indication flag
M1305： CH0 direction signal flag
M1534： Deceleration time of CH0 setup flag (must used with D1348)
D1198： Close loop output/input ratio of CH0 (default: K100)
D1220： Phase setting of CH0 (Y0, Y1): determined by the last 2 digits of D1220; other digits are invalid.
1. K0: Y0 output
2. K1: Y0, Y1 AB-phase output; A ahead of B
3. K2: Y0, Y1 AB-phase output; B ahead of A
1. K0: Y2 output
1. K0: Y4 output
1. K0: Y6 output
D1222： Time difference between the direction signal and pulse output of CH0

D1336： Low word of the current number of output pulses of CH0

D1337： High word of the current number of output pulses of CH0
D1340： Start/end frequency settings of CH0 (default: K200)
D1348： Deceleration time of CH0 pulse output when M1534 = On (default: K100)
D1343： Acceleration/deceleration time of CH0 pulse output (default: K100)

MEMO


Controllers
202 SCAL P Proportional Value Calculation ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV

OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SCAL, SCALP: 9 steps
S1 * * *
S2 * * *
S3 * * *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Source value S2: Slope S3: Offset D: Destination device
Explanations:
1. Range of S1, S2, S3: -32,768 ~ 32,767
2. Unit of S2: 0.001
4. Operation equation in the instruction: D = (S1 × S2) ÷ 1000 + S3.
Users have to obtain S2 and S3 (decimals are rounded up into 16-bit integers) by using the slope and offset
equations below.
Slope equation: S2 = [(max. destination value – min. destination value) ÷ (max. source value – min. source value)]
× 1,000
Offset equation: S3 = min. destination value – min. source value × S2 ÷ 1,000
The output curve is shown as the figure:
Destination value
Max. Destination value
Source value
Min. 1 Max.
source value source value
Min. destination value
Program Example 1:
1. Assume S1 = 500, S2 = 168, S3 = -4. When X0 = On, SCAL instruction will be executed and obtain the proportional
value at D0.
2. Equation: D0 = (500 × 168) ÷ 1,000 + (-4) = 80
X0
SCAL K500 K168 K-4 D0

Destination value
D
Slope=168
Offset=-4
Source value
0 1=500
Program Example 2:
1. Assume S1 = 500, S2 = -168, S3 = 534. When X10 = On, SCAL instruction will be executed and obtain the
proportional value at D10.
2. Equation: D0 = (500 × -168) ÷ 1,000 + 534 = 450
X10
SCAL K500 K-168 K534 D10
Destination value
D
Slope=-168
Offset=534
Source value
0 S 1=500
Remarks:
1. This instruction is applicable for known slope and offset. If slope and offset are unknown, use SCLP instruction for
the calculation.
2. S2 has to be within the range -32,768 ~ 32,767. If S2 falls without the range, use SCLP instruction for the
calculation.
3. When using the slope equation, please be aware that the max. source value must > min. source value, but it is
not necessary that max. destination value > min. destination value.
4. If the value of D > 32,767, D = 32,767; if the value of D < -32,768, D = -32,768.
5. Only ES_V6.2, SA/SX_V1.6, SC_V1.4, EH2/SV_V1.0 and versions above support this instruction. EH series
MPU does not support this instruction.

Mnemonic Operands Function

Controllers
Parameter Proportional Value
203 D SCLP P ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
Calculation
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F SCLP, SCLPP: 7 steps
S1 * * * DSCLP, DSCLPP: 13 steps
S2 *
D *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Source value S2: Parameter D: Destination device
Explanations:
1. See the specifications of each model for the range of operands.
2. Flags: M1162 (decimal integer or binary floating point); M1162 = On -> Binary floating point
3. Settings of S2 for 16-bit instruction:
S2 occupies 4 consecutive devices in 16-bit instruction.
Device No. Parameter Range
S2 Maximum source value -32,768 ~ 32,767
S2 + 1 Minimum source value -32,768 ~ 32,767
S2 + 2 Maximum destination value -32,768 ~ 32,767
S2 + 3 Minimum destination value -32,768 ~ 32,767
4. Settings of S2 for 32-bit instruction:

S2 occupies 8 consecutive devices in 32-bit instruction.
Range
Device No. Parameter
Integer Floating point
S2, S2 + 1 Maximum source value
S2 + 2, 3 Minimum source value -2,147,483,648 ~ Range of 32-bit
S2 + 4, 5 Maximum destination value 2,147,483,647 floating point
S2 + 6, 7 Minimum destination value
5. Operation equation in the instruction: D = [(S1 – min. source value) × (max. destination value – min. destination
value)] ÷ (max. source value – min. source value) + min. destination value
6. The operational relation between source value and destination value is as stated below:
y = kx + b
y= Destination value (D)
k= Slope = (max. destination value – min. destination value) ÷ (max. source value – min. source value)
x= Source value (S1)
b= Offset = Min. destination value – Min. source value × slope
Bring all the parameters into equation y = kx + b and obtain the equation in the instruction:
y = kx + b = D = k S1 + b = slope ×S1 + offset = slope ×S1 + min. destination value – min. source value × slope

= slope × (S1 – min. source value) + min. destination value = (S1 – min. source value) × (max. destination
value – min. destination value) ÷ (max. source value – min. source value) + min. destination value
7. If S1 > max. source value, S1 = max. source value
If S1 < min. source value, S1 = min. source value
When all the input values and parameters are set, the output curve is shown as the figure:
Destination value
Max. Destination value
Source value
Min. 1 Max.
source value source value
Min. destination value
Program Example 1:
1. Assume S1 = 500, max. source value D0 = 3,000, min. source value D1 = 200, max. destination value D2 = 500,
and min. destination value D3 = 30. When X0 = On, SCLP instruction will be executed and obtain the proportional
value at D10.
2. Equation: D10 = [(500 – 200) × (500 – 30)] ÷ (3,000 – 200) + 30 = 80.35. Round off the result into an integer D10
= 80.
X0
MOV K3000 D0
MOV K200 D1
MOV K500 D2
MOV K30 D3
X0
SCLP K500 D0 D10
Destination value
=500
=30
S1=500
Source value
0

Program Example 2:
1. Assume S1 = 500, max. source value D0 = 3,000, min. source value D1 = 200, max. destination value D2 = 30,
and min. destination value D3 = 500. When X0 = On, SCLP instruction will be executed and obtain the
proportional value at D10.
2. Equation: D10 = [(500 – 200) × (30 – 500)] ÷ (3,000 – 200) + 500 = 449.64. Round off the result into an integer
D10 = 450.
X0
MOV K3000 D0
MOV K200 D1
MOV K30 D2
MOV K500 D3
X0
SCLP K500 D0 D10
Destination value
=500
D
=30
S1=500
Source value
0
Program Example 3:
1. Assume the source of S1 D100 = F500, max. source value D0 = F3000, min. source value D2 = F200, max.
destination value D4 = F500, and min. destination value D6 = F30. When X0 = On, set up M1162, adopt floating
point operation and execute DSCLP instruction. The proportional value will be obtained at D10.
2. Equation: D10 = [(F500 – F200) × (F500 – F30)] ÷ (F3000 – F200) + F30 = F80.35. Round off the result into an
integer D10 = F80.
X0
SET M1162
DMOVR F500 D100
DMOVR F3000 D0
DMOVR F200 D2
DMOVR F500 D4
DMOVR F30 D6
X0
DSCLP D100 D0 D10

Destination value
=F500
=F30
S1=F500
Source value
0
Remarks:
1. Range of S1 for 16-bit instruction: max. source value ≥ S1 ≥ min. source value; -32,768 ~ 32,767. If the value falls
without the bounds, the bound value will be used for calculation.
2. Range of integer S1 for 32-bit instruction: max. source value ≥ S1 ≥ min. source value; -2,147,483,648 ~
2,147,483,647. If the value falls without the bounds, the bound value will be used for calculation.
3. Range of floating point S1 for 32-bit instruction: max. source value ≥ S1 ≥ min. source value; following the range of
32-bit floating point. If the value falls without the bounds, the bound value will be used for calculation.
4. Please be aware that the max. source value must > min. source value, but it is not necessary that max.
destination value > min. destination value.
5. Only ES_V6.2, SA/SX_V1.6, SC_V1.4, EH2/SV_V1.0 and versions above support this instruction. EH series
MPU does not support this instruction.


Controllers
215~
D LD# Contact Logical Operation LD# ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
217
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F LD#: 5 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DLD#: 9 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
S1: Data source device 1 S2: Data source device 2
Explanations:
2. This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. If the result is not “0”, the continuity of the instruction is
enabled. If the result is “0”, the continuity of the instruction is disabled.
3. LD# (#: &, |, ^) instruction is used for direct connection with BUS.
16 -bit 32 -bit Continuity No-continuity
API No.
instruction instruction condition condition
215 LD& DLD& S1 & S2≠0 S1 & S2=0
216 LD| DLD| S1 | S2≠0 S1 | S2=0
217 LD^ DLD^ S1 ^ S2≠0 S1 ^ S2=0
4. &: Logical “AND” operation

5. |: Logical “OR” operation
6. ^: Logical “XOR” operation
7. When 32-bit counters (C200 ~ C255) are used in this instruction for comparison, make sure to adopt 32-bit
instruction (DLD#). If 16-bit instructions (LD#) is adopted, a “program error” will occur and the ERROR
indicator on the MPU panel will flash.
Program Example:
1. When the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 ≠ 0, Y10 = On.
2. When the result of logical OR operation of D200 and D300 ≠ 0 and X1 = On, Y11 = On will be retained.
3. When the result of logical XOR operation of C201 and C200 ≠ 0 or M3 = On, M50 = On.
LD & C0 C10 Y10

X1
LD I D200 D300 SET Y011
DLD ^ C201 C200 M50

M3


Controllers
218~
D AND# Contact Logical Operation AND# ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
220
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F AND#: 5 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DAND#: 9 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
3. AND# (#: &, |, ^) is an operation instruction used on series contacts.
API No.
218 AND& DAND& S1 & S2≠0 S1 & S2=0
219 AND| DAND| S1 | S2≠0 S1 | S2=0
220 AND^ DAND^ S1 ^ S2≠0 S1 ^ S2=0

instruction (DAND#). If 16-bit instructions (AND#) is adopted, a “program error” will occur and the ERROR
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On and the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 ≠ 0, Y10 = On.
2. When X1 = Off and the result of logical OR operation of D10 and D0 ≠ 0 and X1 = On, Y11 = On will be retained.
3. When X2 = On and the result of logical XOR operation of 32-bit register D200 (D201) and 32-bit register D100
(D101) ≠ 0 or M3 = On, M50 = On.
X0
AND & C0 C10 Y10
X1
AND I D10 D0 SET Y11
X2
DAND ^ D200 D100 M50
M3


Controllers
221~
D OR# Contact Logical operation OR# ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
223
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F OR#: 5 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DOR#: 9 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
3. OR# (#: &, |, ^) is an operation instruction used on parallel contacts.
API No.
221 OR& DOR& S1 & S2≠0 S1 & S2=0
222 OR| DOR| S1 | S2≠0 S1 | S2=0
223 OR^ DOR^ S1 ^ S2≠0 S1 ^ S2=0

instruction (DOR#). If 16-bit instructions (OR#) is adopted, a “program error” will occur and the ERROR
Program Example:
1. When X1 = On and the result of logical AND operation of C0 and C10 ≠ 0, Y10 = On.
2. M60 will be On when X2 = On and M30 = On, or the result of logical OR operation of 32-bit register D10 (D11)
and 32-bit register D20 (D21) ≠ 0, or the result of logical XOR operation of 32-bit register D200 (D201) and
32-bit counter C235 ≠ 0.
X1
Y0
OR & C0 C10
X2 M30
M60
DOR I D10 D20
DOR ^ D100 D200


Controllers
224~
D LD※ LoaD Compare ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
230
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F LD※: 5 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DLD※: 9 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
2. This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API224 (LD=) for example, if the result is “=”, the
continuity of the instruction is enabled. If the result is “≠”, the continuity of the instruction is disabled.
3. LD※ (※: =, >, <, <>, ≤, ≥) instruction is used for direct connection with BUS.
API No.
224 LD＝ DLD＝ S1＝S2 S1≠S2
225 LD＞ DLD＞ S1＞S2 S1≦S2
226 LD＜ DLD＜ S1＜S2 S1≧S2
228 LD＜＞ DLD＜＞ S1≠S2 S1＝S2
229 LD＜＝ DLD＜＝ S1≦S2 S1＞S2
230 LD＞＝ DLD＞＝ S1≧S2 S1＜S2
instruction (DLD※). If 16-bit instructions (LD※) is adopted, a “program error” will occur and the ERROR
Program Example:
1. When the content in C10 = K200, Y10 = On.
2. When the content in D200 > K-30 and X1 = On, Y11= On will be retained.
3. When the content in C200 < K678,493 or M3 = On, M50 = On.
LD= K200 C10 Y10
X1
LD> D200 K-30 SET Y11
DLD> K678493 C200 M50
M3


Controllers
232~
D AND※ AND Compare ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
238
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F AND※: 5 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DAND※: 9 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
2. This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API232 (AND=) for example, if the result is “=”, the
3. AND※ (※: =, >, <, <>, ≤, ≥) is a comparison instruction is used on series contacts.
16 –bit 32 –bit Continuity No-continuity
API No.
232 AND＝ DAND＝ S1＝S2 S1≠S2
233 AND＞ DAND＞ S1＞S2 S1≦S2
234 AND＜ DAND＜ S1＜S2 S1≧S2
236 AND＜＞ DAND＜＞ S1≠S2 S1＝S2
237 AND＜＝ DAND＜＝ S1≦S2 S1＞S2
238 AND＞＝ DAND＞＝ S1≧S2 S1＜S2
instruction (DAND※). If 16-bit instructions (AND※) is adopted, a “program error” will occur and the ERROR
Program Example:
1. When X0 = On and the content in C10 = K200, Y10 = On.
2. When X1 = Off and the content in D0 ≠ K-10, Y11= On will be retained.
3. When X2 = On and the content in 32-bit register D0 (D11) < 678,493 or M3 = On, M50 = On.
X0
AND= K200 C10 Y10
X1
AND<> K-10 D0 SET Y11
X2
DAND> K678493 D10 M50
M3


Controllers
240~
D OR※ OR Compare ES/EX/SS SA/SX/SC EH/SV
246
OP X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F OR*: 5 steps
S1 * * * * * * * * * * * DOR*: 9 steps
S2 * * * * * * * * * * *
PULSE 16-bit 32-bit
Operands:
Explanations:
2. This instruction compares the content in S1 and S2. Take API240 (OR=) for example, if the result is “=”, the
3. OR※ (※: =, >, <, <>, ≤, ≥) is an comparison instruction used on parallel contacts.
API No.
240 OR＝ DOR＝ S1＝S2 S1≠S2
241 OR＞ DOR＞ S1＞S2 S1≦S2
242 OR＜ DOR＜ S1＜S2 S1≧S2
244 OR＜＞ DOR＜＞ S1≠S2 S1＝S2
245 OR＜＝ DOR＜＝ S1≦S2 S1＞S2
246 OR＞＝ DOR＞＝ S1≧S2 S1＜S2
instruction (DOR※). If 16-bit instructions (OR※) is adopted, a “program error” will occur and the ERROR
Program Example:
1. When X1 = On and the present value of C10 = K200, Y0 = On.
2. M60 will be On when X2 = On, M30 = On and the content in 32-bit register D100 (D101) ≥ K100,000.
X1
Y0
OR= K200 C10
X2 M30
M60
DOR> D100 K100000

=

DVP-PLC Application Manual 【Programming】 Table of Contents

Uploaded by

DVP-PLC Application Manual 【Programming】 Table of Contents

Uploaded by

PLC

1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram ........................................................ 1-1

1.3 Edition Explanation of Ladder Diagram ............................................................. 1-3

1.4 How to Edit Ladder Diagram ............................................................................. 1-8

1.6 Simplified Ladder Diagram ............................................................................... 1-15

1.7 Basic Program Designing Examples .................................................................. 1-17

Chapter 2 Functions of Devices in DVP-PLC

2.2 Values, Constants [K] / [H] ............................................................................... 2-6

2.4 Numbering and Functions of Auxiliary Relays [M] .............................................. 2-11

2.5 Numbering and Functions of Step Relays [S] ..................................................... 2-11

2.6 Numbering and Functions of Timers [T] ............................................................. 2-12

2.7 Numbering and Functions of Counters [C] ......................................................... 2-14

2.8.1 Data register [D] ........................................................................................ 2-28

2.8.2 Index Register [E], [F] ................................................................................ 2-29

2.8.3 Functions and Features of File Registers .................................................... 2-30

2.11 Functions of Special Auxiliary Relays and Special Registers............................. 2-69

2.12 Error Codes ................................................................................................... 2-125

Chapter 3 Basic Instructions

3.2 Explanations on Basic Instructions ................................................................... 3-3

4.2 Sequential Function Chart (SFC) ...................................................................... 4-2

4.3 How does a Step Ladder Instruction Work? ....................................................... 4-3

4.5 Types of Sequences ......................................................................................... 4-9

4.6 IST Instruction ................................................................................................. 4-17

Chapter 5 Categories & Use of Application Instructions

5.2 Composition of Application Instruction .............................................................. 5-6

5.3 Handling of Numeric Values.............................................................................. 5-11

5.4 E, F Index Register Modification ....................................................................... 5-14

5.5 Instruction Index .............................................................................................. 5-16

Chapter 6 Application Instructions API 00-49

● （ API10～ 19） Transmission Comparison ....................................................... 6-18

● （ API20～ 29） Four Arithmetic Operation ....................................................... 6-32

● （ API30～ 39） Rotation & Displacement......................................................... 6-46

● （ API40～ 49） Data Processing ..................................................................... 6-57

Chapter 7 Application Instructions API 50-99

● （ API60～ 69） Handy Instructions.................................................................. 7-39

● （ API70～ 79） Display of External Settings .................................................... 7-59

● （ API80～ 88） Serial I/O ............................................................................... 7-80

Chapter 8 Application Instructions API 100-149

● （ API110～ 119） Floating Point Operation ...................................................... 8-23

● （ API120～ 129） Floating Point Operation ..................................................... 8-31

● （ API130～ 139） Floating Point Operatio ....................................................... 8-43

● （ API140～ 149） Others ................................................................................ 8-55

Chapter 9 Application Instructions API 150-199

● （ API155～ 159） Position Control .................................................................. 9-14

● （ API170～ 171） Gray Code Conversion ........................................................ 9-49

● （ API172～ 175） Floating Point Operation ..................................................... 9-51

● （ API180～ 190） Matrix................................................................................. 9-59

● （ API191～ 199） Positioning Instruction ........................................................ 9-76

Chapter 10 Application Instructions API 215-246

● （ API215～ 223） Contact Type Logic Operation Instruction. ............................ 10-7

● （ API224～ 246） Contact Type Compare Instruction ....................................... 10-10

Foreword: Background and Functions of PLC

1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram

DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-1

1-2 DVP-PLC Application Manual

Read input status from outside

Send the result to the output point

Error detected in the third row

1.3 How to Edit Ladder Diagram

DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-3

1-4 DVP-PLC Application Manual

DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-5

& Device indication: K0 ~ K9,999, numbered in decimal form.

The structure of a ladder diagram:

Structure Explanation Instruction Devices Used

Normally open, contact A LD X, Y, M, S, T, C

Normally closed, contact B LDI X, Y, M, S, T, C

Normally closed in parallel

Rising-edge trigger switch LDP X, Y, M, S, T, C

Falling-edge trigger switch LDF X, Y, M, S, T, C

Falling-edge trigger in parallel

Block in series connection ANB -

Block in parallel connection ORB -

1-6 DVP-PLC Application Manual

Structure Explanation Instruction Devices Used

Coil driven output instruction OUT Y, M, S

Correct the circuit of reverse flow

Start, Stop and Latched

Frequently Used Control Circuit